Claas Nectis SM

00 11 302 370 06.
2006 - GB
A1 A2 A3
B1 B2 B3
C1 C2 C3
D11 D12 D13
D21
E1 E2 E3 E4
F1 F2
G1 G2 G3
H1 H2
TOOLS
Symbols
Lubricate Torque (daN.m)
Grease Clearance
Glue/seal Preload
Fixing and sealing products

te
cti
Lo
Corresponding reference Application
Designation Designation N°
Threaded assembly subject to vibration.

Frenetanch 241 – 242 – 243 – 542 60 05 009 352 (50 ml)
Medium threadlocker.
Threaded assembly subject to impacts.
Frenbloc 270 – 271 – 273 60 05 009 351 (50 ml)
Strong threadlocker.
Scelbloc 648 – 675 60 05 009 353 (50 ml) Bearing, bushing, insert assembly.
Rectijoint
518 60 05 020 129 (65 ml) Gasket face (dry housing).
Unijoint
Formajoint
510 60 05 009 355 (50 ml) Metal-on-metal gasket face (wet housing).
Masterjoint
Racoretanch
577 60 05 004 897 (50 ml) Sealed threaded couplings.
Tubetanch
Distorted metal-on-metal gasket face
— 5 910 00 11 321 450 (50 ml)
(temperature up to 200 °C).
Hydraulic lines
Suction lines. High-pressure lines.
Priming lines. Low-pressure/control lines.
Lubrication system.
Return lines.
Static oil under pressure.
Standardised torques
Hardware
Standardised torque (daN.m)
Diameter (mm) Hardware class
4,6 6,8 8,8 10,9 12,9
3 0,05 0,08 0,12 0,17 0,2

4 0,12 0,19 0,29 0,4 0,4
5 0,21 0,38 0,56 0,8 0,8
6 0,36 0,66 0,95 1,4 1,4
7 0,77 1,09 1,45 2,14 2,21
8 0,88 1,7 2,4 3,3 3,5
10 1,75 3,5 4,8 6,7 7,1
12 3 6 8,4 11,5 12,1
14 5 9,5 13,2 17,5 19,3
16 7,8 14,5 18,5 28 29,5
18 10,5 21 25,5 37,5 40,5
20 15 30 39,5 56 57
22 20,5 40 54 73,5 76,5
24 26 50 67 92 100
30 50 92 130 195 220
33 75 124 166 244 252
36 80 160 230 335 350
Hydraulic couplings
Standardised torques (daN.m)
External diameter Internal diameter
JIC coupling type
(mm) (mm)
Minimum Maximum
9,53 8,4 3/8 - 24 2,5 3,5

11,11 9,71 7/16 - 20 4 5
12,7 11,12 1/2 - 20 4 5
14,29 12,7 9/16 - 18 5,5 6,5
19,05 17,33 3/4 - 16 6 8
22,23 20,26 7/8 - 14 6 8
26,99 24,7 1"1/16 - 12 8 10
30,16 27,87 1"3/16 - 12 12 15
TOOLS
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

TOOLING PER CHAPTER
A 00 11 315 000 D E
60 05 005 736
00 11 301 120 60 05 006 153 00 11 313 970 60 05 005 718
00 11 308 870 60 05 006 744 00 11 314 010 60 05 005 726
00 11 308 860 60 05 705 076 00 11 314 020 60 05 005 736
00 11 308 880 00 11 314 030 60 05 705 076
00 11 308 890 00 11 314 040 60 05 006 549
00 11 308 900 00 11 314 050 77 01 388 793
00 11 308 920 C 00 11 314 060
00 11 310 950 00 11 314 070
60 05 005 521 00 11 314 950 00 11 314 090 G1
60 05 005 551 00 11 315 020 00 11 314 100
60 05 005 560 00 11 315 030 00 11 314 110 60 05 006 744
60 05 005 566 00 11 315 040 00 11 314 120 60 05 020 187
60 05 006 744 00 11 315 050 00 11 314 130
60 05 721 169 00 11 315 060 00 11 314 140
77 01 388 111 00 11 315 070 00 11 314 150 H
77 01 388 169 00 11 315 080 00 11 314 160
77 01 388 204 00 11 315 090 00 11 314 170 00 11 310 850
00 11 315 100 00 11 314 190 60 05 006 744
00 11 315 110 00 11 314 200 60 05 006 913
00 11 315 120 00 11 314 210 77 01 388 907
B
00 11 315 130 00 11 314 220 77 01 388 913
00 11 314 940 00 11 320 230 00 11 314 230
00 11 314 950 60 05 001 948 00 11 314 240
00 11 314 960 60 05 005 739 00 11 314 250
00 11 314 970 60 05 006 744
00 11 314 980 60 05 705 076
2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tools
00 11 301 120 00 11 308 860
Cylinder compression tester. Front bearing seal extractor.
00 11 308 870 00 11 308 880
Tool for removing rear bearing seal. Tool for fitting front bearing seal.
00 11 308 890 00 11 308 900
Rear bearing bush seal fitting tool. Tool for fitting/removing camshaft bushes.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB 3

Tools
00 11 308 920 00 11 310 950
Top dead centre checking tool. Injection pump hub extractor.
00 11 313 970 00 11 314 010
Bearing cup insertion tool. Bush insertion tool.
00 11 314 020 00 11 314 030
Dummy differential bearing for bevel gear clearance. Bevel gear clearance measurement tool.
4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tools
00 11 314 040 00 11 314 050
Bush insertion tool. Seal insertion tool.
00 11 314 060 00 11 314 070
Seal insertion tool. Wrench for conical pinion nut.
00 11 314 090 00 11 314 100
Key for turning bevel gear. Insertion tool for bearing cone.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB 5

Tools
00 11 314 110 00 11 314 120
Insertion tool for bearing cone. Bush insertion tool.
00 11 314 130 00 11 314 140
Seal insertion tool. Bearing cup insertion tool.
00 11 314 150 00 11 314 160
Bush insertion tool. Seal insertion tool.
6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tools
00 11 314 170 00 11 314 190
Bush insertion tool. Insertion tool for cartridge seal.
00 11 314 200 00 11 314 210
00 11 314 220 00 11 314 230
Seal insertion tool. Seal insertion tool.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB 7

Tools
00 11 314 240 00 11 314 250
00 11 314 940 00 11 314 950
Clutch centring tool (release lever adjustment). Road clutch centring and compression tool.
00 11 314 960 00 11 314 970
Clutchless reverser compression washer. Seal insertion sleeve.
8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tools
00 11 314 980 00 11 315 000
Insertion shaft. Tool for installing mechanical thrust bearing seal carrier.
00 11 315 020 00 11 315 030
Tool for fitting input pinion bearing cups. Input pinion simulation tool.
00 11 315 040 00 11 315 050
Tool to measure bevel gear clearance. Differential bush insertion tool.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB 9

Tools
00 11 315 060 00 11 315 070
Insertion tool for PTO bearing seal. Insertion tool for reinforced housing outer seal.
00 11 315 080 00 11 315 090
Insertion tool for reinforced housing inner seal. Insertion tool for reinforced housing outer bearing cup.
00 11 315 100 00 11 315 110
Insertion tool for reinforced housing inner bearing cup. Insertion tool for non-reinforced housing outer seal.
10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tools
00 11 315 120 00 11 315 130
Insertion tool for non-reinforced housing inner seal. Insertion tool for narrow housing outer bearing cup.
00 11 320 230 60 05 001 948
Installation tool for handbrake mechanism. Brake valve.
60 05 005 521 60 05 005 551
Pressure checking kit: Fuel supply circuit and supercharge supply

Injector extractor.
(pressure gauge from 0 to 2 000 mbars).
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB 11

Tools
60 05 005 560 60 05 005 566
Injector pump adjustment tool. Camshaft bush fitting tool.
60 05 005 718 60 05 005 726
Hydraulic coupling. Column seal fitting tool.
60 05 005 736 60 05 005 739
Hydraulics test set. Pressure tap fitting.
12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tools
60 05 006 153 60 05 006 549
Compression tool. Bush and seal fitting tool.
60 05 006 744 60 05 006 913
Multimeter. Lifting kit.
60 05 020 187 60 05 705 076
Suction cups with 2 x 5 metre straps. Pressure gauge kit.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB 13

Tools
60 05 721 169 77 01 388 111
Compression tester. Piston ring clamp(Ø 55 to 110) with Allen key.
77 01 388 169 77 01 388 204
Flywheel turning tool. Engine oil pressure test kit (0 to 10 bar).
77 01 388 793 77 01 388 907
Linkage valve adjustment tool. Compensation bar.
14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tools
77 01 388 913
Lifting kit.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB 15

Notes
16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

A1
TEST PROCEDURE
INJECTOR INSTRUCTION SHEETS
A2
INJECTION FEED
A3
IVECO ENGINE
Chapter A
Nectis 207 00 11 302 370 – 12.2005 publication

CONTENTS
A1 – TEST PROCEDURE – INJECTOR INSTRUCTION SHEETS
TEST PROCEDURE
LIST OF CHECKS ...........................................................................................................................................................A1.2
MEASUREMENT AND CHECKING POINTS

CHECKING OPERATIONS .............................................................................................................................................A1.7
RECORD OF TEST RESULTS .......................................................................................................................................A1.7
INJECTOR INSTRUCTION SHEETS..............................................................................................................................A1.9
A2 – INJECTION FEED
IDENTIFICATION
IDENTIFICATION OF INJECTOR PUMPS .....................................................................................................................A2.2
TORQUE SETTINGS
TORQUE SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................................................A2.3
DESCRIPTION
INJECTOR PUMP ...........................................................................................................................................................A2.7
FUEL PUMP ....................................................................................................................................................................A2.8
LINE FILTER ...................................................................................................................................................................A2.8
FUEL FILTER ..................................................................................................................................................................A2.9
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS......................................................................................................................................A2.10
CHECKS/ADJUSTMENTS
ACCELERATOR CONTROL ADJUSTMENT ................................................................................................................A2.15
INJECTOR PUMP .........................................................................................................................................................A2.16
INJECTOR.....................................................................................................................................................................A2.18
SUPPLY PRESSURE....................................................................................................................................................A2.19
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

REMOVAL/REFITTING
FUEL FILTER ................................................................................................................................................................A2.20
INJECTION SYSTEM ....................................................................................................................................................A2.20
INJECTOR PUMP .........................................................................................................................................................A2.21
INJECTORS ..................................................................................................................................................................A2.28
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTIC SHEETS .................................................................................................................................................A2.29
A3 – IVECO ENGINE
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION .............................................................................................................................................A3.3
3 CYLINDER ENGINES ..................................................................................................................................................A3.4
4 CYLINDER ENGINES ..................................................................................................................................................A3.6
LUBRICATION
OPERATION....................................................................................................................................................................A3.8
COOLING
OPERATION..................................................................................................................................................................A3.10
TURBOCHARGER
OPERATION..................................................................................................................................................................A2.12
DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS - BUILD CLEARANCES.........................................................................................................................A3.13
VALVES.........................................................................................................................................................................A3.19
TORQUE SETTINGS
FRONT CHASSIS / ENGINE LINK................................................................................................................................A3.21
ENGINE/TRANSMISSION LINK....................................................................................................................................A3.21
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

CHECKS/ADJUSTMENTS
COMPRESSION............................................................................................................................................................A3.25
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE .............................................................................................................................................A3.25
TURBOCHARGER PRESSURE ...................................................................................................................................A3.26
VALVES.........................................................................................................................................................................A3.27
BELT AND TENSIONER ...............................................................................................................................................A3.31
CYLINDER HEAD..........................................................................................................................................................A3.31
ENGINE BLOCK............................................................................................................................................................A3.32
CONNECTING RODS ...................................................................................................................................................A3.35
CRANKSHAFT ..............................................................................................................................................................A3.37
CAMSHAFT ...................................................................................................................................................................A3.38
VISCOUS FAN COUPLING...........................................................................................................................................A3.39
REMOVAL/REFITTING
PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS......................................................................................................................................A3.40
ENGINE/FRONT DRIVE TRAIN (SPLITTING)..............................................................................................................A3.41
ENGINE/GEARBOX (SPLITTING) ................................................................................................................................A3.43
ENGINE REPLACEMENT .............................................................................................................................................A3.44
CYLINDER HEAD..........................................................................................................................................................A3.45
PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS..........................................................................................................................A3.53
FLYWHEEL ...................................................................................................................................................................A3.61
CRANKSHAFT ..............................................................................................................................................................A3.63
FRONT BEARING OIL SEAL ........................................................................................................................................A3.67
REAR BEARING SEAL .................................................................................................................................................A3.68
CAMSHAFT, BALANCE SHAFTS AND AUXILIARY DRIVE GEARS ...........................................................................A3.69
OIL COOLER.................................................................................................................................................................A3.76
OIL PUMP......................................................................................................................................................................A3.77
THERMOSTAT ..............................................................................................................................................................A3.78
WATER PUMP ..............................................................................................................................................................A3.78
TURBOCHARGER ........................................................................................................................................................A3.79
DIAGNOSTICS
"ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TOO LOW" SHEET ............................................................................................................A3.80
"ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TOO HIGH" SHEET ...........................................................................................................A3.81
"EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION" SHEET ................................................................................................................A3.82
"COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH" SHEET .......................................................................................................A3.83
COOLANT IN THE OIL OR VICE VERSA.....................................................................................................................A3.84
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

A1
TEST PROCEDURE
INJECTOR INSTRUCTION SHEETS
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test procedure
List of checks
The purpose of this procedure is to check a number of points before and after dynamometer testing.
N.B.: Failure to carry out these tests may lead to an incorrect power reading.
Always check the following points before starting a PTO power test.
Reminder: Wait until the running-in period has elapsed (minimum 100 hours) before testing an engine on the dynamometer.
This period is necessary to ensure that measurements are carried out under suitable conditions.
1. Visual checks
Make sure that the supply and return lines are correctly
fitted (not trapped or kinked on installation, etc.).
2. Engine oil level A

Check the fluid level with dipstick (A):
I Normal operating level.
II Top up as soon as possible.
III Top up before restarting the engine. l
ll
lll
103vfn07 Fig. 1
3. Hydraulic /transmission oil level

Check the fluid level with dipstick (B): B
I Normal operating level.
II Top up as soon as possible.
III Top up before restarting the engine.
A level above the normal operating level affects engine
power and increases temperature. Example: Overfilling FULL
will significantly affect performance during high speed

road operation. l
ll
ADD
lll
344vfm00 Fig. 2
A1.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test procedure
4. Battery
Check the voltage with the engine stopped (between 12 and 13 V). Alternator-generated power consumption can reach
1,5 kW.
5. Radiators/coolers
Check that all radiators/coolers are clean.
6. Fuel filters
Change the filters. Fit the pressure gauge. Unit reference:
60 05 005 521. See "measurement and check points" 20
sheet.
For installation details refer to chapter "A2" "Checks/
adjustments" (Fig. 4).
Nomenclature
19 Fuel filter.
20 Fuel line.
22 Fuel pump. 19
22
160vfm17 Fig. 3
160vfm18 Fig. 4
7. Air filter
Check condition and replace if necessary.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A1.3

Test procedure
8. Turbocharger pressure
Fit the pressure gauge as shown in Figure 5 for a
turbocharger without mixture limiter.
For turbochargers with mixture limiter, use the set-up
shown in Figure 6.
Nomenclature
1 Supercharger pressure pipe.
2 Hollow screw n° 60 05 745 646.
3 banjo connector n° 60 05 016 258.
4 Tube (internal diameter 5 mm).
5 Clamps.
6 Pressure gauge connection.
P Tapping point.
Unit reference: 60 05 005 521.

See "measurement and check points" sheet.
103vfm13 Fig. 5
N.B.: Pressure measured with engine at full power.
1 2 P
3
103vfm16 Fig. 6
A1.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test procedure
9. Fit the dynamometer

Before starting the test, ensure that:
– The rig is correctly adjusted and calibrated.
– The CV joint is aligned, attached and protected.
– The tractor is chocked.
Position the tractor in an open area.
002msm01 Fig. 7
10. Transmission
To limit transmission power drain, ensure that the following selectors are in the neutral position.
• Version with mechanical doubler and reverser:
– Mechanical reverser in neutral
– Gear selector in neutral
– Range selector in neutral
– Meachanical doubler in neutral.
• Version with hydraulic doubler and reverser (direction change under load):
– Clutchless reverser in neutral
– Gear selector in neutral
– Range selector in neutral.
11. Air conditioning/Ventilation

Ensure that the air conditioning and ventilation are switched off.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A1.5

Test procedure
12. Hydraulics
Ensure that no hydraulic service is operating; failure to do so could invalidate the results of the PTO power output test.
13. Check the maximum no-load rpm

Nectis 217/227/237: 2 475 ± 50
Nectis 247/257/267: 2 480 ± 50
14. Checking the adjustment of the injector pump

See chapter "A1".
15. Engage the PTO in the position shown on the injector instruction sheet
16. Accelerate the engine to maximum rpm for 1 min
17. Measure the power (see injector instruction sheet)
18. After measurement, check temperatures
Engine: 90°C.
Transmission: 60-65°C (measure the temperature via the gauge recess using thermocouple probe n° 60 05 006 708).
Ambiant temperature: 25°C.
19. Leave the engine running at between 1 500 and 1 600 rpm for 3 to 5 minutes, then idle before
switching off
If the results do not match the manufacturer's data following these operations, a flowmeter will need to be installed and the
values compared to the injection sheets.
A1.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Measurement and checking points
This sheet may be copied and should be completed for each operation on the tractor. If it has to be returned to the
manufacturer's after sales department; the following must be included:
Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Serial n°: ................................................................................................................................................................................
Engine serial n°: .....................................................................................................................................................................
Total operating hours: ............................................................................................................................................................
Date of operation: ..................................................................................................................................................................
Transmission type: .................................................................................................................................................................
Checking operations
Concerns operations 2, 3, 4, 6, 7.
Checking operation Check

Oil level
Air filter
Engine
Fuel filter
Battery (V)
Transmission Oil level
Record of test results

Start of test End of test Reference values
Outside temperature 25°C

Transmission temperature 60 °C to 65 °C
Engine temperature > 87°C
Fuel temperature
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A1.7

Engine speed 900 1 000 1 100 1 200 1 300 1 400 1 500 1 600 1 800 2 000 2 100 2 200 2 300
Measurement
Power (kW)
Measurement of torque (Nm)
(power take-off)
Measurement of hourly consumption
(l/h)
Measurement of boost pressure
(bar)
Measurement of minimum no-load fuel
supply pressure at filter outlet (bar)
Boost pressure (bar)
1,7 to 1,8
Nectis 227
Boost pressure (bar)
1,8
Nectis 237/257/267
Minimum no-load fuel supply pressure
0,25 to 0,5
at filter outlet (bar)
A1.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

FUEL INJECTION DATA SHEET
NECTIS 217 – B 9511-12/B 9611-12
Iveco F4CE0304B*D engine FUEL SUPPLY LINE DATA
Nominal speed 2300 rpm
1 Main fuel tank: 68 litres 5 Bosch rotary injection pump
VE 3/12 F 1150 L 1035.
2 Filter: 300 microns
Mechanical adjustment all ratios.
3 Mechanical supply pumps. Automatic advance.
4 Fuel filter: 5 microns 6 Bosch injectors DSLA 145 PV
Set pressure on injector:
266 ± 6 bar.
STATIC SETTING: 1,15 mm

See chapter A2 “Checking the timing of the injector pump”.
1
5
2
4
TEST CONDITIONS
– Refer to inspection procedure.
● Max. curve.
● Min. curve.
NOTE
Description of the tractor measured:
– 2-pump hydraulic system;
– mechanical doubler;
Supply system – mechanical reverser.
Suction
Supply system
Supply pump pressure
Discharge line
Return line
160vfm15
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A1.9

ENGINE TESTS AT PTO
NECTIS 217 – B 9511-12/B 9611-12
Position 540 eco rpm
kW POWER bhp
35 48
REFERENCE VALUES - Power Take-off position 540 ECO rpm

30 41
Engine rpm 10 0 0 12 0 0 14 0 0 16 0 0 18 0 0 2000 2200 2300
SP EED
25 34
P TO rpm 328 393 459 524 590 655 721 753
kW 17 .8 2 3 .4 2 7 .4 2 9 .0 3 0 .0 3 0 .7 2 9 .9 2 9 .5
20 27
P O WE R * M inim um
bhp 24.2 31.8 37.3 39.4 40.8 41.7 40.7 40.1
15 20
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm T O R Q UE **
M inim um N.m 5 19 568 571 528 485 446 397 375
(po wer take-o ff o utput)
N.m TORQUE
650
M inim um l/h 6 .0 7 .6 8 .6 9 .4 10 .1 10 .8 11.2 11.4
C O N S UM P T IO N P E R
600 H O UR
M a xim um l/h 6 .2 7 .9 8 .8 9 .8 10 .4 11.1 11.6 11.8
550
g/kW.h 292 275 267 279 285 296 3 10 3 19
500 S P E C IF IC
M a xim um
C O N S UM P T IO N ***
g/bhp.h 215 202 196 205 210 218 228 235
450
400
350 ENGINE TESTS AT POWER TAKE-OFF

1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
P o wer Take-o ff (to tal reductio n)
l/h CONSUMPTION PER HOUR Engine TRA NSM ISSION
13 P o sitio n 540 P o sitio n 540 ECO P o sitio n 1000 P o sitio n 1000 ECO
F 4 C E 0 3 0 4 B *D T 506 3 .5 9 3 .0 5 1.9 6
11
Idle No minal M ax no lo ad
SP EED S
P o wer
9 (rpm) Engine P o wer take-o ff Engine Engine P o wer take-o ff
take-o ff
540 600 Æ 700 16 7 Æ 19 5 2300 641 2425 Æ 2525 676 Æ 704

7
P o wer take-
540 EC O 600 Æ 700 19 7 Æ 229 2300 754 2425 Æ 2525 795 Æ 827
o ff po sitio n 10 0 0 600 Æ 700 306 Æ 357 2300 117 2 2425 Æ 2525 12 3 6 Æ 12 8 7
5 10 0 0 E C O
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
g/kW.h SPECIFIC CONSUMPTION g/bhp.h
350 257 To rque at P o wer take-o ff o utlet (N.m)
* P o wer (W) = to rque (N.m) x speed (rad/s) ** Equivalent engine to rque (N.m) =
P o wer take-o ff reductio n
340 250
330 242 Ho urly co nsumptio n (l/h) x 1000 000 1bhp = 0.7355 kW

Injecto r flo w (mm³/sho t) =
320 235 Number o f engine cylinders x engine speed(rpm) x 30 1rpm = 0.1047 rad/s
1kW = 1.3596 bhp
310 228 1rad/s = 9.5510 rpm
*** Specific co nsumptio n Ho urly co nsumptio n (l/h) x diesel fuel density
300 220 Diesel fuel density = 850 mg/cm³
(g/kW.h o r g/bhp,h) = P o wer (kW o r bhp) at 15 °C
290 213
280 206 maximum to rque – no minal speed to rque
To rque feedback (%) = x 100
270 198 no minal speed to rque
260 191
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
A1.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

NECTIS 227 – B 9521-22/B 9621-22/B 9721-22
Iveco F4CE0354C*D engine FUEL SUPPLY LINE DATA
VE 3/12 F 1150 L 1016.
4 Fuel filter: 5 microns 6 Bosch injectors DSLA 145 P
266 ± 6 bar.
STATIC SETTING: 1 mm
1
5
2
4
TEST CONDITIONS
● Max. curve.
● Min. curve.
NOTE
– 1-pump hydraulic system ;
Suction
Supply system
Discharge line
Return line
160vfm15
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A1.11

ENGINE TESTS AT PTO
NECTIS 227 – B 9521-22/B 9621-22/B 9721-22
Position 540 rpm
kW POWER bhp
50 68
45 61 REFERENCE VALUES - Power Take-off position 540 rpm

40 54 Engine rpm 10 0 0 12 0 0 14 0 0 16 0 0 18 0 0 2000 2200 2300
SP EED
35 47
P TO rpm 279 334 390 446 502 557 6 13 641
30 41
kW 2 1.5 2 8 .5 3 6 .0 3 8 .4 3 9 .5 4 0 .8 4 0 .5 4 0 .5
25 34 P O WE R * M inim um
bhp 29.2 38.7 48.9 52.2 53.7 55.5 55.1 55.1
20 27
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm T O R Q UE **
M inim um N.m 736 8 14 883 822 750 700 631 603
N.m TORQUE
1000
M inim um l/h 6 .7 8 .6 10 .2 11.1 11.9 12 .8 13 .4 13 .7
950 C O N S UM P T IO N P E R
H O UR
900
M a xim um l/h 6 .9 8 .9 10 .5 11.6 12 .4 13 .2 13 .9 14 .4
850
800 g/kW.h 267 252 235 243 250 256 264 269
S P E C IF IC
750 M a xim um
g/bhp.h 196 185 173 179 184 188 194 198
700
650
600

1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
F 4 C E 0 3 5 4 C *D T 506 3 .5 9 3 .0 5 1.9 6
13
SP EED S
11
P o wer
(rpm) Engine P o wer take-o ff Engine Engine P o wer take-o ff
take-o ff
9
540 600 Æ 700 16 7 Æ 19 5 2300 641 2425 Æ 2525 676 Æ 704
7 P o wer take-
540 EC O 600 Æ 700 19 7 Æ 229 2300 754 2425 Æ 2525 795 Æ 827
5 10 0 0 E C O
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
290 214
Ho urly co nsumptio n (l/h) x 1000 000 1bhp = 0.7355 kW
280 206 Injecto r flo w (mm³/sho t) =
Number o f engine cylinders x engine speed(rpm) x 30 1rpm = 0.1047 rad/s
1kW = 1.3596 bhp
270 199
1rad/s = 9.5510 rpm
Diesel fuel density = 850 mg/cm³
260 191
250 184
maximum to rque – no minal speed to rque
240 176 To rque feedback (%) = x 100
no minal speed to rque
230 169
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
A1.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

NECTIS 237 – B 9531-32/B 9631-32
Iveco F4CE0354A*D engine FUEL SUPPLY LINE DATA
VE 3/12 F 1150 947-1.
266 ± 6 bar.
1
5
2
4
TEST CONDITIONS
● Max. curve.
● Min. curve.
NOTE
Suction
Supply system
Discharge line
Return line
160vfm15
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A1.13

ENGINE TESTS AT PTO
NECTIS 237 – B 9531-32/B 9631-32
kW POWER bhp
55 75
50 68 REFERENCE VALUES - Power Take-off position 540 ECO rpm

45 61 Engine rpm 10 0 0 12 0 0 14 0 0 16 0 0 18 0 0 2000 2200 2300
SP EED
40 54 P TO rpm 328 393 459 524 590 655 721 753
35 48
kW 2 6 .4 3 2 .8 4 0 .6 4 3 .2 4 4 .8 4 6 .2 4 5 .4 4 5 .0
30 41
bhp 35.9 44.6 55.2 58.7 60.9 62.8 61.7 61.2
25 34
T O R Q UE **
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm M inim um N.m 766 797 843 788 727 672 601 571
N.m TORQUE
1000
M inim um l/h 8 .1 10 .3 12 .2 13 .2 14 .1 15 .2 15 .8 16 .0
H O UR
900 M a xim um l/h 8 .3 10 .7 13 .4 14 .2 15 .3 16 .1 16 .8 16 .9
850
800 g/kW.h 259 259 254 255 261 270 282 288
S P E C IF IC
M a xim um
750 C O N S UM P T IO N ***
g/bhp.h 190 190 187 188 192 199 207 212
700
650
600

1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
F 4 C E 0 3 5 4 A *D T 506 3 .5 9 3 .0 5 1.9 6
15 Idle No minal M ax no lo ad
SP EED S
P o wer
take-o ff
10 540 600 Æ 700 16 7 Æ 19 5 2300 641 2425 Æ 2525 676 Æ 704
P o wer take-
540 EC O 600 Æ 700 19 7 Æ 229 2300 754 2425 Æ 2525 795 Æ 827
5 10 0 0 E C O
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
300 221
1kW = 1.3596 bhp
280 206
1rad/s = 9.5510 rpm
270 199 (g/kW.h o r g/bhp,h) = at 15 °C
P o wer (kW o r bhp)
260 192
240 177
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
A1.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

NECTIS 247 – B 9771-72
VE 4/12 F 1150 L 955-3.
4 Fuel filter: 5 microns 6 Bosch injectors DSLA 145 PV
266 ± 6 bar.
STATIC SETTING: 1,15 mm

1
5
2
4
TEST CONDITIONS
● Max. curve.
● Min. curve.
NOTE
Suction
Supply system
Discharge line
Return line
160vfm16
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A1.15

ENGINE TESTS AT PTO
NECTIS 247 – B 9771-72
Position 540 rpm
kW POWER bhp
55 75
50 68 REFERENCE VALUES - Power Take-off position 540 rpm

45 61 Engine rpm 10 0 0 12 0 0 14 0 0 16 0 0 18 0 0 2000 2200 2300
SP EED
40 54 P TO rpm 279 334 390 446 502 557 6 13 641
35 48
kW 2 7 .6 3 5 .2 4 0 .7 4 4 .5 4 6 .5 4 8 .1 4 7 .9 4 7 .7
30 41
bhp 37.5 47.9 55.3 60.5 63.2 65.4 65.1 64.9
25 34
T O R Q UE **
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm M inim um N.m 944 10 0 5 994 954 886 825 746 7 10
N.m TORQUE
1100
M inim um l/h 8 .7 11.0 12 .2 13 .7 14 .6 15 .7 16 .6 17 .0
H O UR
1000 M a xim um l/h 8 .9 11.4 13 .1 14 .5 15 .3 16 .3 17 .3 17 .5
950
g/kW.h 266 257 261 267 263 273 284 290
900 S P E C IF IC
M a xim um
850 g/bhp.h 196 189 192 196 193 201 209 213
800
750

1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
F 4 C E 0 4 0 4 A *D T 506 3 .5 9 3 .0 5 1.9 6
17
SP EED S
P o wer
take-o ff
11 540 600 Æ 700 16 7 Æ 19 5 2300 641 2425 Æ 2525 676 Æ 704
P o wer take-
540 EC O 600 Æ 700 19 7 Æ 229 2300 754 2425 Æ 2525 795 Æ 827
9 o ff po sitio n 10 0 0 600 Æ 700 306 Æ 357 2300 117 2 2425 Æ 2525 12 3 6 Æ 12 8 7
7 10 0 0 E C O
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
300 220
1kW = 1.3596 bhp
1rad/s = 9.5510 rpm
280 206 *** Specific co nsumptio n Ho urly co nsumptio n (l/h) x diesel fuel density
270 199

260 191 To rque feedback (%) = x 100
no minal speed to rque
250 184
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
A1.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

NECTIS 257 – B 9681-82/B 9781-82
Iveco F4CE0454C*D engine FUEL SUPPLY LINE DATA
VE 4/12 F 1150 L 1000.
266 ± 6 bar.
1
5
2
4
TEST CONDITIONS
● Max. curve.
● Min. curve.
NOTE
Supply system – mechanical reverser ;
Suction – air conditioning.
Supply system
Discharge line
Return line
160vfm16
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A1.17

ENGINE TESTS AT PTO
NECTIS 257 – B 9681-82/B 9781-82
kW POWER bhp
60 82
55 75 REFERENCE VALUES - Power Take-off position 540 ECO rpm

50 68 Engine rpm 10 0 0 12 0 0 14 0 0 16 0 0 18 0 0 2000 2200 2300
SP EED
45 61 P TO rpm 328 393 459 524 590 655 721 753
40 55
kW 3 2 .5 4 0 .2 4 5 .7 4 9 .5 5 1.4 5 1.7 5 1.1 4 9 .7
35 48
bhp 44.2 54.7 62.1 67.3 69.9 70.3 69.5 67.6
30 41
T O R Q UE **
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm M inim um N.m 946 977 949 904 833 754 678 629
N.m TORQUE
1100
M inim um l/h 9 .5 11.5 13 .2 14 .0 15 .1 15 .9 17 .0 17 .5
1000 H O UR
M a xim um l/h 9 .5 11.9 14 .3 14 .9 16 .0 16 .9 17 .9 18 .3
950
900
g/kW.h 248 241 254 247 247 258 276 286
850 S P E C IF IC
M a xim um
800 g/bhp.h 182 177 187 182 182 190 203 210
750
700
650
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
F 4 C E 0 4 5 4 C *D T 506 3 .5 9 3 .0 5 1.9 6
17
SP EED S
15
P o wer
take-o ff
13
540 600 Æ 700 16 7 Æ 19 5 2300 641 2425 Æ 2525 676 Æ 704
11 P o wer take-
540 EC O 600 Æ 700 19 7 Æ 229 2300 754 2425 Æ 2525 795 Æ 827
9 10 0 0 E C O
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
310 228
300 220 Ho urly co nsumptio n (l/h) x 1000 000 1bhp = 0.7355 kW

1kW = 1.3596 bhp
280 206 1rad/s = 9.5510 rpm
270 198
260 191
250 184 maximum to rque – no minal speed to rque
230 169
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
A1.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

NECTIS 267 – B 9691-92/B 9791-92
VE 4/12 F 1150 L 957.
266 ± 6 bar.
1
5
2
4
TEST CONDITIONS
● Max. curve.
● Min. curve.
NOTE
Suction
Supply system
Discharge line
Return line
160vfm16
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A1.19

ENGINE TESTS AT PTO
NECTIS 267 – B 9691-92/B 9791-92
kW POWER bhp
65 88
60 81
REFERENCE VALUES - Power Take-off position 540 ECO rpm
55 75
Engine rpm 10 0 0 12 0 0 14 0 0 16 0 0 18 0 0 2000 2200 2300
50 68 SP EED
P TO rpm 328 393 459 524 590 655 721 753
45 61
40 54 kW 3 4 .6 4 3 .2 4 8 .7 5 3 .3 5 5 .7 5 7 .0 5 6 .4 5 6 .9
35 48
bhp 47.0 58.7 66.2 72.5 75.7 77.5 76.7 77.4
30 41
T O R Q UE **
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm M inim um N.m 10 0 7 10 4 7 10 13 971 901 830 748 720
N.m TORQUE
1150
M inim um l/h 10 .1 12 .5 14 .6 15 .6 16 .8 17 .9 18 .8 19 .6
H O UR
1050 M a xim um l/h 10 .4 13 .0 15 .4 16 .4 17 .5 18 .5 19 .4 2 0 .2
1000
950 g/kW.h 250 240 254 248 249 259 273 281
S P E C IF IC
M a xim um
900 C O N S UM P T IO N ***
g/bhp.h 184 177 187 182 183 190 201 207
850
800
750

1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
F 4 C E 0 4 5 4 A *D T 506 3 .5 9 3 .0 5 1.9 6
19
SP EED S
P o wer
take-o ff
13 540 600 Æ 700 16 7 Æ 19 5 2300 641 2425 Æ 2525 676 Æ 704
P o wer take-
540 EC O 600 Æ 700 19 7 Æ 229 2300 754 2425 Æ 2525 795 Æ 827
11 o ff po sitio n 10 0 0 600 Æ 700 306 Æ 357 2300 117 2 2425 Æ 2525 12 3 6 Æ 12 8 7
9 10 0 0 E C O
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
290 214
1kW = 1.3596 bhp
270 199
1rad/s = 9.5510 rpm
260 191 (g/kW.h o r g/bhp,h) = at 15 °C
P o wer (kW o r bhp)
250 184
230 169
1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 rpm
A1.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

A2
INJECTION FEED
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Identification
Identification of injector pumps
227 VE
217 VE 237 VE 267 VL
Tractor 227 VL 247 F 257 VL
217 VL 237 VL 267 F
227 F
Engine F4CE0304B*D F4CE0354C*D F4CE0354A*D F4CE0404A*D F4CE0454C*D F4CE0454A*D

Air intake Atmospheric Turbo-charged Atmospheric Turbo-charged
Injection Direct
Number of cylinders 3 4
Injector pump Bosch
Model VE 3/12 F VE 4/12 F
Type L 1035 L 1016 L 947 L 955 L 1000 L 957
Injection sequence 1–3–2 1–3–4–2
Injector Bosch
Type of injector DSLA145PV DSLA145P DSLA145PV DSLA145P
Reference on injectors 043213371 0432133780 043213371 0432133780
Injector calibration
266 ± 6
pressure (bar)
160vfm00 Fig. 1
A2.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Torque settings
Torque settings
1 ± 0,2 daN.m ± 0,3 1 : 1,75 ± 0,25 daN.m

2,5 daN.m ± 0,25
2 : 8,75 daN.m
± 0,5
4,5 daN.m
± 0,5
2,5 daN.m
6 ± 0,5 daN.m
2,5 ± 0,5 daN.m 1 : 1,25 ± 0,25 daN.m

± 0,25
± 0,5 2 : 5,25 daN.m
4,5 daN.m
160vfm03 Fig. 2
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.3

Description
Fuel injector system with mechanical rotary pump

General – Fuel pump.
The fuel supply system consists of: – Fuel filter.
– Fuel tank. – Rotary injector pump.
– Fuel supply and tank return lines. – Injector supply lines.
– Fuel pre-filter. – Injectors.
1
18 8 12 9 11 10
13
14
15
16
17
3 4 5 6
161vfm00 Fig. 3
A2.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Nomenclature
1 Injector supply lines. 7 Pump shaft locking screw. 14 Connector for turbo pressure line in inlet
2 Injector. 8 Maximum speed adjustment screw. manifold.
3 Cylinder n° 1 outlet. 9 Accelerator pedal. 15 Mixture limiter vent.

4 Engine shutdown solenoid valve. 10 Fuel supply. 16 Leakage return line.
5 Injector pump. 11 Lever position adjustment screw. 17 Full load flow control screw.
6 Cold start advance correction device 12 Idle adjustment screw. 18 Injector fuel return line.
(electrovalve). 13 Mixture limiter (according to model).
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.5

Description
20
21
19
22
5
161vfm05 Fig. 4
Nomenclature
5 Injector pump. 21 Line between fuel filter and injector pump.

19 Fuel filter. 22 Fuel pump.
20 Line between feed pump and filter.
Operating principle pressure as a function of increases of engine rpm. The

fuel then arrives at the valve that regulates the pressure
Fuel is drawn from the fuel tank by the camshaft-driven
within the injector pump. The distributor piston later raises
fuel pump located on the engine block . The fuel then
this pressure and sends the fuel to the injectors via the
passes through the filter (19) to the transfer pump suction
outlet connector. Excess fuel is recovered and returned to
chamber inlet. The transfer pump (vane type) is located
the tank.
inside the injector pump and its role is to raise fuel
A2.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Injector pump E = Pump size.

4 = 4 cylinder engines (3 = 3 cylinder engines).
The pinion of the rotary injector pump is driven by the 12 = Diameter of distributor piston (in mm).
camshaft pinion.
F = Mechanical regulator.
Identification plate 1 150 = Pump rpm.
The identification plate is located on the pump body. L = Direction of rotation.
Typical identification: VE4/12F1150L955. 955 = Pump model variant.
V = Rotary distributor piston.
23
37
24
36
25
26
27
35
34
28
29
30
31
32 33
161vfm04 Fig. 5
Nomenclature (injector pump longitudinal section)
23 Membrane. 28 Transfer pump. 33 Return connector.

24 Adjustment collar. 29 Drive shaft. 34 Hydraulic head.
25 Pushrod. 30 Cam plate. 35 Control platen.
26 Operating lever. 31 Advance mechanism. 36 Floating shaft.
27 Speed regulator. 32 Distributor piston. 37 Return spring.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.7

Description
Fuel pump
The role of the pump is to deliver the fuel from the tank to 40
the injector pump inlet. It is located on the engine block
and is driven from the camshaft. 39
Nomenclature
IN
22 Pump.
38 Fuel outlet (towards the filter).
39 Operating lever.
OUT
40 Fuel inlet (from the tank).
41 Camshaft.
38
161vfm03 Fig. 6
22
39
41
161vfm02 Fig. 7
Line filter
Filters: 300 microns.
Refer to chapter "L" of the operator's manual for
instructions on changing the line filter (57).
57
160vfm04 Fig. 8
A2.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Fuel filter
The filter is located near the injector/supply pump and its
role is to collect impurities and to separate any water 42
present in the fuel. At the base of the filter cartridge a
water drain screw or a water detector is provided.
Filters: 5 microns.
Nomenclature
19 Fuel filter.
42 Fuel filter bracket.
43 Water drain screw. 19
44 Water detector.
43
161vfm01 Fig. 9
42
19
44
161vfm06 Fig. 10
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.9

Description
Electrical components
47 48 5
46
51
19
50
44
53
161vfm07 Fig. 11
Nomenclature
4 Engine shutdown solenoid valve. 46 Engine temperature sensor. 50 Cold-start resistance.

5 Injector pump. 47 Starter. 51 Alternator.
6 Solenoid valve for cold start advance 48 Water temperature sensor for the cold 53 Oil pressure transducer.
mechanism. start advance mechanism.
19 Fuel filter.
44 Water detector.
A2.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Engine temperature sensor

The engine temperature sensor is mounted on the
cylinder head, close to the thermostat housing, and
records coolant temperature. C
Characteristics:
System voltage: .............................................. 6 V to 12 V
Resistances:
at 80 °C........................................ 0,304 to 0,342 K.ohms
B A
at 20 °C........................................ 2,262 to 2,760 K.ohms
at –10 °C.................................... 8,244 to 10,661 K.ohms
46
A B
C
161vfm09 Fig. 12
Water temperature sensor for the cold start
advance mechanism
This sensor is fitted to the cylinder head on the left side of
the engine.
Characteristics
System voltage: 12 V.
Operating threshold
– 63 ± 3°C
48
Contacts open with increasing temperature.
– 53 ± 3°C
Closure of contacts with decreasing temperature.
161vfm10 Fig. 13
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.11

Description
Solenoid valves on the injector pump

Nomenclature
4 Engine shutdown solenoid valve.
6 Solenoid valve for cold start advance mechanism.
161vfm12 Fig. 14
Water detector
A water detector (44) is fitted to the base of the fuel filter. D
For further information see chapter "Instrument panel,
Characteristics".
C
A 12 V
C A 44
161vfm13 Fig. 15
Oil pressure sensor

This sensor (53) is fitted to the block on the left side of the
engine.
Characteristics
Operating threshold
– Contact closes.
b
With decreasing pressure: 0,6 bar.
– Contact opens.
With rising pressure: 0,9 bar. 0,9
0,6
161vfm14 Fig. 16
A2.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Preheating element
This is an electric element (50) located in the inlet
manifold that is used to heat the air during pre-heating
operations. The element is supplied from a remote
controlled switch usually located near the engine. 50
Characteristics
Maximum possible air flow: 2 cm³/min (at a pressure of
138 kPa).
161vfm17 Fig. 17
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.13

Description
Pre-heating controller
Description
F = Fuse.
R = Preheating element.
T = Relay.
GHC = Pre-heating controller.
+0 30
F 4 F
30 15 7 6 GH
50 5
NTC 10 GHC T
31 8
N31 FB
1 3
1,2 W R
161vfm18 Fig. 18
Electrical diagram (output)
Pin N° Description
1 Output to "cold start" warning light.
2 Not used.
3 "feedback" signal input from the pre-heating element (FB).
4 Engine start signal input (D).
5 Start signal input (50).
6 Output to remote switch supplying preheating element (GH).
7 Supply positive (15).
8 Supply negative (31).

9 Not used.
10 Analogue temperature signal input (NTC).
This controller uses the remote switch to control the

element as a function of engine coolant temperature.
Characteristics
Operating voltage: 7 V to 12 V.
Operating temperature: – 40 °C to 85 °C.
Maximum current in line "GH": 0,3 A.
A2.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checks/Adjustments
Accelerator control adjustment
105 102
106 101
B
105
106
101
102
104
100
103
104
100
152vfm00 Fig. 19
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.15

Checks/Adjustments
– Attach the control cable to the accelerator lever on the – Adjust the manual control cable (105) then tighten the
injector pump (100). nuts (106).
– Connect the control cable to the accelerator pedal – Correct adjustment should enable the engine throttle
(101). control (104) to return to the mechanical stop (103)
– Check in the cab that the manual control lever is set to when the lever or the pedal is at its minimum setting and
minimum "A" (Fig. 19). enable an extension of the accelerator cable spring on
the pump when the manual lever or the pedal is at its
– Adjust the cable at the pedal end to achieve a light
maximum setting.
tension then tighten the nuts (102). Ensure that the pump
lever is tight against the idle speed adjustment
screw (103).
Injector pump
Internal setting
The pump must be removed and cylinder n° 1 must be at
TDC on the compression stroke (refer to chapter
"Removal/refitting", "Injector pump").
– Remove the central screw (101) on the distributor
head.
– Align the keyway slot in the shaft with the outlet for
cylinder n° 1 item (B) for the 4 cylinder pump (5b) and
item (A) for the 3 cylinder pump (5a).
– Mount the pump shaft in a soft-faced vice.
– Attach tool (89) reference n° 60 05 005 560 with the
dial gauge (88) placing the shaft in contact with the head
of the distributor piston.
– Install the dial gauge at mid travel.
– Turn the pump so that the shaft turns clockwise until 88 89
the needle stops moving.
160vfm13 Fig. 20
– Set the dial gauge to zero.
– Turn the pump so that the shaft turns anti-clockwise
until the dial gauge reads 1 for turbo-charged engines
and 1,15 for normally aspirated engines.
101
86
B
5a
101 A
86
5b
160vfm14 Fig. 21
A2.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checks/Adjustments
– Lock the shaft by tightening screw (86) then refit the – Check the pump installation (refer to paragraph
pump (refer to chapter "Removal/refitting", "Injector "Checking the timing of the injector pump").
pump").
Checking the timing of the injector pump

N° 1 cylinder must be at TDC on the compression stroke
(refer to chapter "Removal/refitting", "Injector pump").
The pump must be attached to the engine block with the
pump shaft free and the operating lever attachment nut
tightened.
– Remove the central screw on the distributor head.
– Attach tool (89) reference n° 60 05 005 560 with the
dial gauge (88) placing the shaft in contact with the head
of the distributor piston (Fig. 22).
– Install the dial gauge at mid travel.
– Turn the engine flywheel against the normal operating
direction until the dial gauge needle stops moving.
– Set the dial gauge to zero. 89
– Turn the engine flywheel in the normal operating 88
direction to return to TDC (replace the flywheel locking
pin). The dial gauge should show a reading of 1 for 160vfm07 Fig. 22
turbo-charged engines and 1,15 for normally aspirated

engines.
– If these values are not obtained, slacken the 3 pump
attachment nuts and rotate it clockwise or anti-clockwise
to obtain the desired reading.
– Re-tighten the 3 pump attachment nuts.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.17

Checks/Adjustments
Injector
Instructions for the removal of the injectors will be found in
the chapter "Removal/refitting of injectors".
Check the injector's pressure setting (see chapter
"identification" for pressure values).
Note: It is recommended to aim for the maximum
value in the adjustment because after operating for
some time the pressure drops slightly before
stabilising. Repeat the adjustment in order to obtain a
reliable result.
Note: The injector nozzle must never be pointing
towards the person performing the adjustment. The
jet escaping from a port can pierce clothing and skin,
and cause serious infections. The jet should be
recovered in a transparent container.
160vfm05 Fig. 23
A2.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checks/Adjustments
Supply pressure
98 5 98 100b
– Create a test installation as shown in figure n° 22 to
check the fuel supply pressure.
– Connect the ends of the lines (100a) to the filter
19
outlet (19), (100b), to the injector pump inlet (5), (100c) 97
and to the reference pressure gauge n° 60 05 005 521.
– Start the engine.
– Check the pressure (refer to chapter A1
"measurement and test points" for pressure values).
101
– If the pressure is low, check the supply system (filter,
strainer, hoses) and re-test. 100a
Nomenclature
5 Injector pump.
100c
19 Fuel filter. 99
97 Pressure gauge.
160vfm08 Fig. 24
98 2 elbow connectors reference n° 00 11 306 150.
99 6 hose clamps.
100 Fuel pipe (internal diameter 9,5 mm).
101 "T" piece reference n° 77 00 067 854.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.19

Removal/refitting
Fuel filter
21 42
Removal of the fuel filter bracket
– Place a container under the fuel filter and unscrew the
condensation drain covers under the filter. Drain out all
the fuel present. 20
– Unscrew fully the valve and remove the fuel filter (19).
– Disconnect the fuel lines (20), (21) from the feed pump
to the filter bracket and from the latter to the injector 19
pump.
– Remove the fuel filter bracket (42).
To disconnect the fuel lines (20), (21) (Fig. 25), press
down on the fastener (54) as shown in figure (B). After
disconncting the lines, withdraw the fastener (54) to its
locked position (Fig. A).
Refitting the fuel filter 161vfm19 Fig. 25
Proceed in reverse order to the removal operations.

N.B.: Before refitting the fuel filter (19), it must be A B
refilled with fuel to facilitate the bleeding of the fuel
feed system. 54
54
161vfm20 Fig. 26
Injection system
Injection system bleeding
Refer to the user manual.
A2.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Injector pump
Finding top dead centre (TDC)
– Remove the starter motor.
– Fit the flywheel rotation tool (90) reference
n° 77 01 388 169 (Fig. 27).
90
91
160vfm09 Fig. 27
1st method (Fig. 27)

– Turn the flywheel carefully in the normal rotational
sense to take up the play in the gear train.
– Turn the flywheel until the 8mm pin ø8 (91) engages in
the socket on the flywheel provided for this purpose.
– Check that cylinder n° 1 is at TDC on the compression
stroke, in other words the inlet and exhaust valves are
both fully closed and not partially lifted.
2nd method (Fig. 28)

– Remove the first injector, fit tool n° 00 11 308 920 (81)
with a dial gauge (82) and remove the rocker cover (83). 82
– Use the flywheel rotation tool (90) n° 77 01 388 169 to
turn the crankshaft until n° 1 cylinder is at TDC.
TDC on the compression stroke for n° 1 cylinder is
obtained when the dial gauge needle is at its maximum 83
value and the inlet and exhaust valves are both closed
and not partially lifted.
81
161vfm34 Fig. 28
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.21

Removal/refitting
Removal of injector pump on 3-cylinder

engines 18 55
– Disconnect the elecrical harness (58) from the engine
shut down and cold start solenoid valves.
– Release the clamp from the fuel scavenge pipe (18)
return to the injector pump. 6
– Release the clamp from the fuel supply (10) and
scavenge (59) pipes.
10
– Remove the turbo pressure line (55).
– Remove the roll bar (depending on equipment fit).
– Remove the feed pump and if necessary the oil 58
pressure sensor.
59
160vfm06 Fig. 29
A2.22 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
62 1a
61
18a
63
2a
5a
A
60
64
161vfm25 Fig. 30
Nomenclature
1a Injection pipes. 61 Attachment screw for small rear bracket 64 Attachment screw for the small bracket
2a Injector. (on the inlet manifold plate). near the injector pump.
5a Injector pump. 62 Bracket attachment screw. A Cylinder n° 1 outlet.
18a Fuel return line to the injector pump. 63 Attachment screw for small front
bracket (on the inlet manifold plate).
60 Injector pump outlet connector.
– Unscrew the injector connectors (60).

– Unscrew the screws that retain the tube attachment
brackets (63), (64), (61), (62) then remove the tubes (1a).
– Fit blanks to the ends of the tubes.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.23

Removal/refitting
– Unscrew screw (86), remove the "L"-shaped

spacer (87) and screw down screw (86) to retain the
pump's internal setting. 87
– Keep the "L"-shaped spacer with the pump body.
86
161vfm37 Fig. 31
– Remove the 3 nuts (71a), (71b), (71c) that attach the

injector pump (5) to the block (74) and free it from its
housing (the pinion remains inside the distributor casing).
71a 71c
74
71b
161vfm38 Fig. 32
– Remove the nut (80).

– Extract the spacer (76) using extractor reference
n° 00 11 310 950, if it is planned to adjust the pump. 75
80
76
160vfm10 Fig. 33
A2.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Removal of injector pump on 4-cylinder engines
67 66
70 1b
18b
68
5b
B
69 2b 65
161vfm26 Fig. 34
Nomenclature
1b Injection pipes. 66 Attachment screw for small rear bracket 69 Attachment screw for the small bracket
2b Injector. (on the inlet manifold plate). near the injector pump.
5b Injector pump. 67 Bracket attachment screw. 70 Bracket attachment screw.

18b Fuel return line to the injector pump. 68 Attachment screw for small front B Cylinder n° 1 outlet.
bracket (on the inlet manifold plate).
65 Injector pump outlet connector.
Removal procedure of the injector pump for the 4 cylinder

engine is identical to that for the 3 cylinder engine,
differing only in the injection pipes.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.25

Removal/refitting
Injection pump installation

For pumps that have not been calibrated, refer to chapter
"Checks/adjustments, internal setting". 5 71
– Fit the spacer (76) to the pump shaft without tightening
nut (80) (Fig. 35).
– Fit the injector pump (5) to its mounting on the
block (74) then tighten the 3 nuts (71) to the
recommended torque.
74
161vfm31 Fig. 35
After disconnecting the fuel lines from the feed pump,

unscrew the attachment screws (84) and remove the
pump (22) from the block (74).
22
84
74
161vfm35 Fig. 36
– Check, looking through the feed pump housing, that the

cam shaft (41) is synchronised (TDC) on the
compression stroke by observing the notches (85) on the
shaft.
If the notches are not visible, remove the flywheel locking
pin and turn the engine through 360° until the notches can 41
be seen. Replace the locking pin.
– Refit the feed pump and its pipes.
85
161vfm36 Fig. 37
A2.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
– Remove the timing-gear housing cover and tighten to

the recommended torque value the attachment nut (90)
for the pump drive pinion (75) spacer (76). 75 76 90
161vfm29 Fig. 38
– Partially unscrew the pump shaft locking screw (86)

and insert the spacer (87).
– Tighten screw (86) to lock the spacer (87): This
anables the feed pump shaft to turn freely.
– Remove the engine flywheel locking pin.
– Rotate the engine flywheel through 2 turns.
– Remove the flywheel rotating tool and refit the starter
motor in its housing.
– Check correct installation of the injector pump (refer to 87 86
chapter "Checks/adjustments, injector pump".
160vfm01 Fig. 39
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.27

Removal/refitting
Injectors
Removal
– Disconnect the return pipes (93) and the fuel pipes (94)
from the injectors and remove the seals.
– Remove the injector brackets.
94
– Extract the injectors from the cylinder head using tool
n° 60 05 005 551 (95).
93
160vfm11 Fig. 40
95
160vfm12 Fig. 41
Refitting
Fit the injectors after replacing the seal (96) and tighten to
the recommended torque.
N.B.: When installing injectors, check that the ball in
the injector is opposite the housing in the cylinder
head.
96
161vfm30 Fig. 42
A2.28 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Diagnostics
Diagnostic Sheets
N.B.: Before carrying out a diagnosis, ensure that there is an adquate quantity of good quality fuel.
Recommended tests or
Problem reported Possible cause Notes
actions
The engine will not start. Battery discharged or damaged. Check and recharge the battery.
If necessary replace the battery.
Battery terminal connectors Clean, inspect and tighten the

loose or corroded. battery terminal connectors.
Replace the cable terminals and
the nuts if they are excessively
corroded.
Incorrect timing of the injector Check and adjust the timing of Contact an approved Bosch
pump. the injector pump. agent.
Contamination or water in the Detach the pipes and clean Always purge the feed lines.
fuel tank. using compressed air.
Remove and clean the injector
pump.
Remove the water from the fuel
tank and refill.
Insufficient fuel. Refill the tank.

No supply. Re-tighten or replace the supply
or transfer pump.
Air bubbles in the fuel lines or Check the pipes to identify the
the injector pump. source of the air. Check the feed
pump. Eliminate air from inside
the injector pump by slackening
the plug provided for the
purpose and operating the feed
pump manually.
Defective starter. Repair or replace the starter.
The engine fails to start at low Blocage of feed pipes by Replace the fuel with one that is
temperatures. paraffin crystals resulting from compatible with low
the use of incorrect fuel. temperatures.
Replace the fuel filters.
Cold start automatic advance Send the feed pump for Contact an approved Bosch
mechanism operating servicing or replace it. agent.
incorrectly.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.29

Diagnostics
actions
The engine stops. Minimum rpm too low. Adjust using the adjustment
screw.
Irregular output from the injector Adjust the fuel flow. Contact an approved Bosch
pump. agent.
Contamination or water in the Detach the pipes and clean Always purge the feed lines.
fuel lines. using compressed air. Remove
and clean the injector pump.
Remove the water from the fuel
tank and refill.
Fuel filter blocked. If required, remove and replace

the fuel filter.
Air in the feed and injector Check the pipes for damage or
pipes. loose connectors.
Replace worn components,
succesively eliminating air from
the pipes and bleed the injector
pump and fuel filter by
slackening the special plugs and
operating the feed pump
manually.
Broken injector pump controls. Replace the injector pump.
Excessive play between Adjust the clearance by

camshaft lobes and cam replacing the adjustment shims.
followers.
Valves burnt, corroded or Replace the valves, recut or

damaged. replace the valve seat inserts in
the cylinder head.
A2.30 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Diagnostics
actions
The engine overheats. Defective water pump. Check surface conditions and if
necessary replace the pump
(with a new gasket).
Faulty thermostat. Replace the thermostat.
Scale formation in the water Clean thoroughly. Follow

ways in the block and cylinder standard instructions for the
head. type of descaler used.
Water pump drive belt slack. Check and adjust belt tension.
Insufficient coolant level. Top up the coolant.
Incorrect engine timing. Check timing and carry out

accurate timing procedure.
Injection pump out of Correct pump outlet on test bed Contact an approved Bosch
adjustment (over fueling or to adjust injection output to the agent.
defect). stated value.
Air filter blocked. Clean the air filter and replace if
necessary.
The engine lacks power and Incorrect timing of the injector Check the timing and adjust the
operates erratically. pump. pump to the correct value.
Defective automatic advance Check operation on the injector Contact an approved Bosch
mechanism. pump test rig If the values agent.
obtained do not accord with the
recommended ones, replace the
spring in the advance
mechanism.
Defective cold start automatic Adjust or replace the injector

advance device. pump.
Excessive piston wear. Overhaul the engine and
replace worn components.
Incorrect adjustment of the Check and accurately reset the Contact an approved Bosch
speed regulator. regulator. agent.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.31

Diagnostics
actions
The engine lacks power and Partial blockage in nozzles or Clean the small atomisation
operates erratically. injector malfunction. nozzles and fully overhaul the
injectors.
Contamination or water in the Carry out an in-depth clean and Always bleed the supply
feed and injection system. refill with fuel. system.
Incorrect clearance between the Check clearance and reset

cams and the cam followers. accurately.
Faulty turbocharger. Replace the complete unit.
Air filter blocked. Clean or replace the air filter.
Defective mixture limiter device. Check that the membrane is not

punctured and that the spring is
set correctly (check on test rig).
Check that there is sufficient air
pressure inside the inlet
manifold in relation to the engine
rpm at full load.
Control linkages between Adjust the linkages to ensure

accelerator pedal and regulator that the control lever can reach
lever out of adjustment. the maximum flow position.
The engine makes unusual Defective injector operation. Replace the injectors.
noises.
Blocked fuel pipes. Remove the pipes, clean and
replace any that are very
distorted.
Injector pump incorrectly set. Adjust the position of the pump Contact an approved Bosch
to ensure that injection occurs at agent.
the correct advance angle.
A2.32 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Diagnostics
actions
The engine makes unusual Crankshaft noise caused by Repair the crankshaft bearings
noises. excessive play in one or more and fit under-size bearing shells.
main or connecting rod bearings Replace the thrust bearings.
or high levels of end float.
Crankshaft out of balance. Check crankshaft alignment.
Flywheel attachment bolts Replace the loose bolts and

loose. tighten all bolts to the
recommended torque.
Connecting rods misaligned. Replace the connecting rods.
Noise from piston gudgeon pins Replace the gudgeon pin and/or
resulting from excessive play in the piston and small end
the piston housing or the small bearing.
end bearing bush. Replace the bushes.
Bushes free to move in small
end housing.
Noisy valve gear. Adjust clearance between cams

and cam followers and check for
broken springs; also check for
excessive play between the
valve stems and guides, cam
followers and their housings.
The engine emits abnormal Excessive maximum pump Remove the pump and adjust Contact an approved Bosch
amounts of smoke. output. flow rate in accordance with the agent.
Black or dark grey smoke. settings table.
Engine cold start advance Adjust or replace the injector Contact an approved Bosch
mechanism incorrectly set or pump. agent.
inoperative.
The injector pump is excessively Correct the setting, check the

retarded (or the advance mechanism.
mechanism is defective).
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A2.33

Diagnostics
actions
The engine emits abnormal The injector pump is incorrectly Correct the adjustment.
amounts of smoke. adjusted.
Black or dark grey smoke.
The injector nozzle holes (or Replace the injectors with a new
some of them) are partially or set or clean and recondition the
completely blocked. current items using appropriate
tools.
Air filter blocked or damaged. Clean the filter element.

Replace if necessary
Loss of engine compression due Overhaul the engine, or

to damaged or worn piston repair/replace only the defective
rings, worn or poorly adjusted components.
valves: .
Incorrect injectors, or of mixed Replace the injectors.

types or incorrectly adjusted.
Injector pipes of incorrect Check the state of the pipe

internal diameter, ends of pipes extremities or connectors, and
crushed resulting from frequent replace the pipes if necessary.
blockages.
Smoke is blue, blue-grey, or Injection excessively retarded. Adjust the pump. Contact an approved Bosch
grey tending towards white. agent.
Cold start automatic advance Adjust the injector pump or
mechanism defective. replace the cold start
mechanism.
Defective injectors. Replace the injectors.

Oil escaping past the piston Overhaul the engine.
rings that may be seized or
worn, or because of wear in the
cylinder walls.
Engine oil escaping down the Overhaul the cylinder head.

inlet valve guides because of
wear in the guides or the valve
stems.
Engine too cold (faulty Replace the thermostat.

thermostat).
A2.34 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

A3
IVECO ENGINE
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

General specification
103vfm00 Fig. 1
"NEF" engines are 3 or 4 cylinder diesel units with N.B.: The data, characteristics and outputs are only
2 valves per cylinder, and may be atmospheric or valid if the installer observes the relevant Iveco
turbo-charged. They are equipped with mechanical rotary installation recommendations. Any equipment fitted
injection pumps. by the installer must also always respect the torque
and power outputs and rpm figures for which the
engine was designed.
A3.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Engine identification
Identification plate
The plate is located on the right side of the engine sump
and contains the following information. Example of engine 1
identification (Fig. 2). 2
1. F4CE0354A*D600 3
4
5
F4 Engine family.
C Variant.
E Engine.
Engine type (2/4 stroke) and cylinder configuration (0
O 6 7
= 4 stroke, vertical).
3 Number of cylinders.
Induction/injection type (0 = atmospheric
103vfm01 Fig. 2
5 direct-injection engine, 5 = turbo-charged direct
injection engine).
4 Application (4 = agricultural, earth moving).
A Engine power level and torque index.
D Exhaust emissions level.
600 Variant.
2. Certification family.
3. Engine serial number.
4 and 5. Exhaust emissions certification number.
6. Power certification number.
7. Smoke certification number.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.3

3 cylinder engines
CE0304 Atmospheric F4CE0354 Turbo-charged
Type
B*D6.. A*D6.. C*D6..
Compression ratio 17,5: 1
Maximum power *
Maximum torque *
Rated speed (rpm) *
Tick-over speed *
Maximum no-load engine rpm *
• Lubrication
Supplied by a lobe pump, via a pressure limiting valve and oil filter
Oil pressure, hot engine:
bar – At minimum rpm (bar). 1,2

– At maximum rpm (bar). 3,8
• Cooling Liquid
Water pump drive: Belt driven
Thermostat:
– Starts opening at (°C). 81 ± 2
• Capacity (litres)
Lubricant* *
– Engine sump
* Refer to the user manual.
A3.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

CE0304 Atmospheric F4CE0354 Turbo-charged
Type
B*D6.. A*D6.. C*D6..
Number of cylinders 3
Ω
Bore (mm) 104
Stroke (mm) 132
Overall capacity (cm³) 3 364

+ + + ... =
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.5

4 cylinder engines
F4CE0404 F4CE0454
Atmospheric Turbo-charged
Type
A*D6.. A*D6.. C*D6..
Compression ratio 17,5: 1
Maximum power *
Maximum torque *
Rated speed *
Tick-over speed *
Maximum no-load engine rpm *
• Lubrication
Supplied by a lobe pump, via a pressure limiting valve and oil filter
Oil pressure, hot engine:
bar – At minimum rpm (bar). 1,2

– At maximum rpm (bar). 3,8
• Cooling Liquid
Water pump drive: Belt driven
Thermostat:
– Starts opening at (°C). 81 ± 2
• Capacity (litres)
Lubricant* *
– Engine sump
* Refer to the user manual.
A3.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

F4CE0404 F4CE0454
Type
A*D6.. A*D6.. C*D6..
Number of cylinders 4
Ω
Bore (mm) 104
Stroke (mm) 132
Overall capacity (cm³) 4 485

+ + + ... =
The data, characteristics and outputs are only valid if Any equipment fitted by the installer must also
the installer observes the relevant Iveco installation always respect the torque and power outputs and rpm
recommendations. figures for which the engine was designed.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.7

Lubrication
Operation
The pressurised lubrication system uses a lobe oil pump crankcase to the crankshaft, the camshaft and the
located at the front of the block, driven by the splined ring cylinder head (oil cooler, turbocharger).
attached to the crankshaft cone. Oil is pumped from the
Oil system layout (3-cylinder engine)
177
178
179
180
181
221vfm00 Fig. 3
Nomenclature
177 Turbocharger oil return line. 179 Oil cooler element. Oil pressure feed.
178 Oil filter. 180 Oil cooler. Oil gravity return route.
181 Oil pump.
A3.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Lubrication
Oil system layout (4-cylinder engine)
182
183
184
185
186
221vfm01 Fig. 4
Nomenclature
182 Turbocharger oil return line. 184 Oil cooler element. Oil pressure feed.
183 Oil filter. 185 Oil cooler. Oil gravity return route.
186 Oil pump.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.9

Cooling
Operation
The pressurised closed circuit engine cooling system has – An oil cooler to cool the lubricant oil
the following components: – A centrifugal-type water pump located at the front of the
• Expansion tank. engine block.
• Radiator, to dissipate the heat extracted from the – A thermostat that controls the circulation of the coolant
engine by the coolant fluid. fluid.
• Visco-static cooling fan to increase the radiator's heat
dissipation capability, that also forms part of the engine's
specific build.
Cooling (3-cylinder engine)
251vfm05 Fig. 5
Nomenclature
A Radiator inlet. Coolant leaving the thermostat. Coolant entering the water pump.
B Radiator outlet. Coolant recirculating within the engine.
A3.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Cooling
Cooling system (4-cylinder engine)
251vfm06 Fig. 6
Nomenclature
A Radiator inlet. Coolant leaving the thermostat. Coolant entering the water pump.
B Radiator outlet. Coolant recirculating within the engine.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.11

Turbocharger
Operation
Turbo-charged version of the engine
209 210
209 210
167vfm00 Fig. 7
Nomenclature
4 Exhaust. 210 Turbocharger. A 3 cylinder version.

209 Air filter. B 4 cylinder version.
The air intake system consists of an air filter and an

exhaust-driven compressor (turbocharger).
Air from the compressor outlet is fed directly to the inlet
manifold.
A3.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

DIMENSIONS
Dimensions - build clearances
Type Atmospheric Turbo-charged
Engine block and components of the crank drive mechanism (mm)

Cylinder
ø1
Cylinder liner diameter 1

104,000 – 104,024
(machined)
X
Piston
Supplied replacement
pistons:
ø1
X Measured dimension (X) 52,4 55,9
External diameter (ø 1) 103,755 – 103,773 103,730 – 103,748
ø2 Gudgeon pin bore (ø 2) 38,010 – 38,016 38,010 – 38,016
Piston - Cylinder liner
0,227 – 0,269 0,252 – 0,294
clearance
Piston diameter (ø 1)
Ø1 + 0,4
(repair size)
X
Piston overtravel height (X) 0,28 – 0,52
ø3 Gudgeon pins (ø 3) 37,994 – 38,000
Gudgeon pin clearance in

0,010 – 0,022
piston
Piston ring grooves
X1
X1* 2,600 – 2,620 2,705 – 2,735*
X2 X2 2,550 – 2,570 2,440 – 2,460
X3 X3 4,030 – 4,050 4,030 – 4,050
Rings
S1
S1 2,470 – 2,500 2,560 – 2,605
S2 S2 2,478 – 2,490 2,350 – 2,380
S3 S3 3,970 – 3,990 3,970 – 3,990
Ring clearance - groove
1 0,100 – 0,150 0,100 – 0,175
2 0,060 – 0,092 0,060 – 0,110
3 0,040 – 0,080 0,040 – 0,080
Rings + 0,4
* Measure across the 101 mm diameter.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.13

DIMENSIONS
Engine block and crank assembly (mm)

Piston ring gap in cylinder
X1 liner:
X2
X1 0,25 – 0,55 0,30 – 0,40
X3 X2 0,30 – 0,55 0,60 – 0,80
X3 0,30 – 0,55 0,30 – 0,55
Connecting rod
Bush housing in small end (ø
40,987 – 41,013
ø1 1)
Big-end bearing shell housing

72,987 – 73,013
(ø 2)
ø2
Small end bush dimensions

ø4
External (ø 4) 40,987 – 41,013
Internal (ø 3) 38,019 – 38,033
ø3
Replacement big-end bearing

S 1,955 – 1,968
shells supplied (S)
Gudgeon pin clearance - bush 0,019 – 0,039
Big-end bearing shells

0,250 – 0,500
(repair size)
Crankshaft
Main journals (ø 1) 82,990 – 83,010
ø1 ø2
Big-end journals (ø 2) 68,987 – 69,013
A3.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

DIMENSIONS
Engine block and crank assembly (mm)

Crankshaft main bearing
S1 S2 2,456 – 2,464
shells (S1)
Big-end bearing shells (S2) 1,955 – 1,968
Engine block
Main bearing
ø3
N° 1 - 4 (ø 3) 87,982 – 88,008
N° 2 - 3 (ø 3) 87,977 – 88,013
Set of bearing shells - main

bearing
N° 1 - 4 0,064 – 0,095
N° 2 - 3 0,059 – 0,100
Set of big-end bearing shells 0,033 – 0,041
Main bearing shells (repair
size)
+ 0,250 ; + 0,500
Big-end bearing shells (repair
size)
Main bearing with thrust

37,475 – 37,550
shoulder (X1)
X1
Main bearing with thrust

31,730 – 32,280
shoulder (X2)
X2
X3 Thrust bearing shells (X3) 37,28 – 37,38
Crankshaft thrust bearing end

0,095 – 0,270
float
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.15

DIMENSIONS
Cylinder head - valvegear (mm)

Valve
Valve guide housings in

See detail under "valves"
cylinder head
Valves: See detail under "valves"
Clearance between valve

0,039 – 0,079
stem and valve guide
Valve head recess below
cylinder head face
Intake (X)
0,336 – 1,072
X Exhaust (X)
0,104 – 0,840
A3.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

DIMENSIONS

Valve spring height
Spring unloaded: H 63,50
Spring under a load of:
H H1 32,9 daN (H1) 49,02
H2
64,1 daN (H2) 38,20
Injector
Injector protrusion (X) Not adjustable
Camshaft
Camshaft bearing housings:
– Rear bearing diameter C
(3-cylinder engine).
59,222 – 59,248
– Rear bearing diameter C
and front bearing diameter A
Camshaft bearing housings:
– 2 intermediate bearings
diameter B and front bearing
diameter A
øA øB øC 54,089 – 54,139
– 3 intermediate bearings
diameter B
Camshaft bearings:
ø
ø 53,995 – 54,045
ø Bearing internal diameter (ø) 54,083 – 54,147
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.17

DIMENSIONS

Clearance between bearings
0,038 – 0,152
and camshaft
Clearance between bearings
0,044 – 0,144
and engine block
Effective valve lift:
H Exhaust (H) 11,02
Intake (H) 10,74
Cam followers
ø1
Cam follower housing in
16,000 – 16,030
block (ø 1)
Cam follower external

14 32 50 diameter:
ø2 Ø2 15,929 – 15,959
ø3
ø2 Ø3 15,965 – 15,980
Clearance between cam

0,020 – 0,065
follower and housing
Rockers
ø1
Rocker shaft (ø 1) 18,963 – 18,975
Rockers (ø 2) 19,000 – 19,026
ø2
Clearance between rockers
0,025 – 0,063
and rocker shaft
X Adjusting the valve rockers
Inlet valves x (mm) 0,25 ± 0,05
Exhaust valves x (mm) 0,50 ± 0,05
A3.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

DIMENSIONS
Valves
Inlet and exhaust valve dimensions (in mm).
7,960 7,960
Nomenclature 7,980 7,980
1 Exhaust valve.
2 Intake valve.
44,75 59,75
45,25 60,25
42,13 45,13
41,87 44,87
1 2
131vfm00 Fig. 8
Valve guide/seat dimensions

8,019
Nomenclature 8,039
3 Intake.
4 Exhaust.
3 4
131vfm09 Fig. 9
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.19

DIMENSIONS
Valve seat housing dimensions
3,460
50,5˚ 50,5˚ 3,470
3,200
49,5˚ 49,5˚
ø 43,663
1,980 ø 43,637 ø 47,013 1,810
1,580 ø 46,987 1,550
ø 44,400
ø 50,000
10,400 ø 47,000 10,600˚
10,000 3 10,200˚
4
131vfm11 Fig. 10
Dimensions (mm) of valve seat inserts
43,739 47,089
43,713 47,063
45,5˚ 60,5˚
44,5˚ 59,5˚
6,516 6,804
6,440 6,728
ø 39,500 ø 42,500
4 3
131vfm12 Fig. 11
Nomenclature
3 Intake.
4 Exhaust.
A3.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Torque settings
Front chassis / engine link

A. 39 daN.m (4 M20 nuts).
Engine/transmission link
B. 8 daN.m + Frenetanch (242)
(4 screws HM12x125-65).
C. Locating pin.
D. 8 daN.m + Frenetanch (242)
(8 screws HM12x175-50).
A A
103vfm02 Fig. 12
B B
D D
C C
D D
103vfm03 Fig. 13
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.21

A3.22
101vfm00
7
10 6
29 16
26
32
13
33
25
1
5
11 17
12 24 4 23
22 14 18
19
30
15
20
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

31 9
Torque settings
27
21
34
2
8
28
3
35
Fig. 14
Torque settings
See Figure 14.
3 cylinders 4 cylinders
Ref Attachment – Phase
Torque in daN.m
1 M8 x 1,25 x 10 1,5 ± 0,3
M8 x 1,25 x 50
2 2,4 ± 0,4
M8 x 1,25 x 35
M10 x 1,50 x 40/50 5 ± 0,5

3
M10 x 1,50 x 70/100 7 ± 0,5
4 (M8 x 1,25 x 20) x 2

2,4 ± 0,4
5 M8 x 1,25
M12 x 1,75 x 70 (2 phases) 5 ± 0,5 + 90°
6 M12 x 1,75 x 140 (3 phases) 4 ± 0,5 + 90° + 90°
M12 x 1,75 x 180 (3 phases) 7 ± 0,5 + 90° + 90°
7 M8 x 1,25
8 M8 x 1,25 x 25
9 M8 x 1,25 x 100 2,4 ± 0,4
10 M8 x 1,25 x 40
11 (M8 x 1,25 x 50) x 4
12 (M10 x 1,50 x 35) x 4

4,5 ± 0,5
13 (M10 x 1,50 x 25) x 2
(M12 x 1,15 x 75) x 6
14 First phase 5 ± 0,5
Second phase 90° ± 5°
(M12 x 1,75 x 100) x 2

8,0 ± 1,0
(M12 x 1,75 x 78) x 14
15
(M16 x 1,50 x 80) x 3
20 ± 2
(M16 x 1,50 x 100) x 2
(M12 x 1,25 x 31) x 8
16 First phase 3,0 ± 0,5

17 Nut (rocker adjuster screw) 0,5 ± 0,1
18 M10 x 4 Nut 4,3 ± 0,6
19 Hydraulic coupling (M12 x 1,5) 3,5 ± 0,5
20 M8 x 3 Nut 2,4 ± 0,4
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.23

Torque settings
3 cylinders 4 cylinders
Ref Attachment – Phase
Torque in daN.m
M10 x 1,5 x 40
21 4,5 ± 0,5
M10 x 1,5 x 130
22 (M10 x 1,50 x 35) x 3 4,3 ± 0,5
M12 Screw
First phase 5 ± 0,6

23
Second phase 8 ± 0,62
Third phase 90° ± 5°
24 M8 Screw 2,4 ± 0,4
25 (M8 x 1,25 x 35) x 6 3,6 ± 0,4
M11 Screw
26 First phase 6 ± 0,5
27 M8 x 1,25 x 25 2,4 ± 0,4
28 (M10 x 1,50) x 8 3,2 ± 0,3
29 (M8 x 1,25 x 65) x 3

2,4 ± 0,4
30 (M8 x 1,25 x 35) x 12
31 (M10 x 1,5 x 50) x 3 4,8 ± 0,5
32 Engine temperature sensor 2,5 ± 0,5
33 Temperature sensor 3 ± 0,2

34 Oil pressure sensor 3,5 ± 0,2
35 Drain plug 5 ± 0,5
A3.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checks/adjustments
Compression
232 235 230 234
N.B.: before starting the test, make sure that the
battery is fully charged and that the injector area is
perfectly clean.
– Start the engine and let it idle for 10 to 15 minutes to
achieve an oil temperature of 40 °C.
– Remove the injectors.
– Fit the dummy injector n° 00 11 301 120 (230) with
compression tester n° 60 05 721 169 (231) in place of
the injector from n° 1 cylinder (fan end).
– Disconect the engine shut down solenoid valve from
the injector pump. 236
– Connect the compression tester leads to the terminal 231
on the starter solenoid (232) with the red clip (233) to the 233
battery or the starter. 237
– Turn the engine on the starter by pressing button (234) 103vfm12 Fig. 15
until the needle fully stabilises.

– Move ring (235) to depressurise the unit until the
needle returns to zero.
– Advance the record sheet (236) by pressing
button (237) on the side of the unit.
– Repeat the test on the remaining cylinders.
The compression should be between 18 and 22 bar.
Engine oil pressure

Remove the oil pressure sensor and fit pressure gauge
n° 77 01 388 204 (9) to the block in its place (Fig. 16).
Before checking the pressure, warm up the engine.
Engine oil pressure should be between 0,7 and 3,5 bar. 9
103vfm06 Fig. 16
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.25

Checks/adjustments
Turbocharger pressure
See chapter "A1".
Pressure test point for the turbocharger without mixture
limiter (Fig. 17).
103vfm13 Fig. 17
Pressure test point for the turbocharger with mixture

limiter.
103vfm14 Fig. 18
A3.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checks/adjustments
Valves
Valve clearance
13
Condition: Engine cold.
11
– Turn the flywheel in the normal rotational sense until 12
piston n° 1 (radiator end) is at top dead centre (TDC). To
determine TDC position, see chapter A2 :
"Remove/Refit". "Injector Pump".
– Adjust clearance between rocker arms and valve
stems. The setting is:
– Inlet valves: 0,25 ± 0,05 mm.
– Exhaust valves: 0,50 ± 0,05 mm.
131vfm04 Fig. 19
N.B.: To reduce the time taken to adjust the

tappet/valve clearance, proceed as follows: Position
cylinder n° 1 at the top of the compression stroke and
adjust the valves marked with an asterisk in the
following table.
• 3-cylinder engine
Cylinder N° 1 2 3
Intake * * —
Exhaust * — *
N.B.: Rotate the crankshaft 360° and adjust the valves

marked with an asterisk in the table.
Cylinder N° 1 2 3
Intake — — *
Exhaust — * —
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.27

Checks/adjustments
• 4-cylinder engine Valve lift (Engine cold)

N.B.: Measuring valve lift enables any wear in the cam
Cylinder N° 1 2 3 4 to be detected.
Intake * * — — 1. Rotate the engine and position the valves as described
Exhaust * — * —
the the "valve clearance" paragraph.
2. Reduce valve clearance to zero.
Note: Turn the crankshaft through 360° and adjust the 3. Place a dial gauge on the valve spring cup or on the
valves marked with an asterisk in the table. valve cap and then set to "0".
4. Turn the engine until the dial gauge reaches a
Cylinder N° 1 2 3 4 maximum value showing that the valve is fully open.
Check the values against the specifications at the
Intake — — * *
beginning of this chapter.
Exhaust — * — * 5. Measure valve lift as explained, then reset the tappet
clearance.
6. If the specification figures are not met, remove the
camshaft and check its condition.
A3.28 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checks/adjustments
Dimensional check
Checking and repairing the valves
– Remove all carbon deposits using the recommended
wire brush.
– Check that there are no signs of seizure, cracking or
burning on the valves.
131vfm06 Fig. 20
Using a micrometer gauge (14) measure the valve stem

diameter (15). Refer to the chapter "Dimensional
specifications".
15
14
131vfm07 Fig. 21
Clearance between stem and guide and

valve centering
These checks are carried out using a dial gauge (18) with
magnetic stand positioned as shown. The play should be
between 0,052 and 0,092 mm. Turn the valve (15) and
check that the play does not exceed 0,03 mm. 18
15
131vfm08 Fig. 22
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.29

Checks/adjustments
Valve guides
8,019
Measure the internal diameter of the valve guides; this
8,039
should correspond to the figure given in the diagram .
Nomenclature
3 Exhaust.
4 Intake.
3 4
131vfm09 Fig. 23
Valve seats
Check the valve seats. If there is light scoring or burning,
have the seats surfaced by a qualified mechanic to the
dimensions given in the chapter "Dimensional
specifications".
After surfacing, use a dial gauge (19) to check that the 19
valve recess (15) is within the prescribed limits. Refer to
the chapter "Dimensional specifications".
N.B.: Where valve seats cannot be resurfaced, they 15
can be replaced by new valve seat inserts.
131vfm13 Fig. 24
A3.30 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checks/adjustments
Valve springs
Before installation, check valve spring flexibility by
measuring spring height as a function of load. Refer to the
chapter "Dimensional specifications".
Height (mm) Under a load of (N)
H (free) 63,50 Zero load
H1 49,02 P1 329
H2 38,20 P2 641
Belt and tensioner

131vfm14 Fig. 25
Cylinder head
Cylinder head face
Distortion measured across the entire face of the cylinder
D
head must not exceed 0,10 mm.
0,4 C
The nominal depth (A) of the cylinder head is 0,025/Ø 25,4
95 ± 0,25 mm. When resurfacing, do not exceed a
reduction (B) of 0,13 mm.
N.B.: After machining, check valve recess and if A
necessary grind down the valve seats to achieve the
B
required recess. Refer to the chapter "Dimensional
specifications".
0,2 TOTAL C
0,01/Ø 50
Water tightness of cylinder head
To check the water tightness of the cylinder head, block
the orifices and, using a pump, pressurise the head to 2 to
3 bar using water at 90 °C. 132vfm00 Fig. 26
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.31

Checks/adjustments
Engine block
Cylinders
– Clean the engine block.
– Check the block carefully for cracks.
– Check the condition of the core plugs and replace if
there is any sign of a leak or oxidation.
– Check the cylinder surfaces; there should be no sign of
seizure, scratches, ovalisation, taper or excessive wear.
– Check the internal diameter of the cylinders (Fig. 27).
This check should enable the detection of any ovalisation,
taper or wear.
– Measurements must be carried out for each cylinder at
3 different heights and in 2 planes perpendicular to each
other (one parallel to the engines longitudinal axis (A)
and the other perpendicular (B)). These measurements
112vfm00 Fig. 27
detect defects such as ovalisation, taper and wear.
Boring and honing of the bores must be carried out to
match the diameters of the replacement pistons supplied,
increased by 0,5 mm over their nominal dimension plus
the specified piston clearance.
Note: If boring out is undertaken, all cylinders must
1˚
be bored to the same oversize (0,4 - 0,8 mm).
B
2˚
A
3˚
112vfm01 Fig. 28
A3.32 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checks/adjustments
Crankshaft main bearings

Check the bearing shell housings as follows:
– Fit the bearing caps to the mounts without the
crankshaft. 33
– Tighten the bearing cap screws to the recommended
torque.
– Check that the housing diameters are as specified.
If the dimension is greater, replace the block.
Check of the top face of the engine block

Check the top face of the block (cylinder head interface) 16
for any distortion. If distortion is found, re-surface the top
face with a suitable grinding machine. Flatness errors
must not exceed 0,075 mm.
Piston
Measure piston diameter (33) using a micrometer (16) to 121vfm00 Fig. 29
determine piston clearance. Refer to the chapter
"Dimensional specifications".
13
N.B.: The diameter must be measured 12 mm from the
base of the piston skirt.
The clearance between the piston and the cylinder bore
can also be measured using feeler gauges (13) as shown
in the diagram.
Gudgeon pin
Measure the diameter of the gudgeon pin (34) using a
micrometer (14).
121vfm01 Fig. 30
34
14
121vfm04 Fig. 31
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.33

Checks/adjustments
Ring
– Check the thickness of the piston rings (35) using a
micrometer (14).
14
35
121vfm06 Fig. 32
– Check the clearance between the top rings (35)

(atmospheric engines only) and the middle and lower
rings and the corresponding piston grooves (33) using 13
feeler gauges (13).
33
35
121vfm07 Fig. 33
Clearance between the top piston groove

and the tapered ring (turbo-charged engine)
Because the first piston ring is trapezoidal in shape, the
clearance between the groove and the ring must be
33
measured as follows: Raise the piston (33) above the
block until about half the ring (36) extends above the 37
bore (37). In this position, using a feeler gauge, check the
clearance (X) between the ring and the groove. The
X
clearance must be the stated value. Refer to the chapter

"Dimensional specifications".
36
121vfm09 Fig. 34
A3.34 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checks/adjustments
Using feeler gauges (13), measure the gap between the

ends of the rings (35) when inserted into the cylinder (37).
Refer to the chapter "Dimensional specifications".
37 35 13
121vfm08 Fig. 35
Piston protrusion height

When the rebuild of the piston/connecting rod assembly is
complete, check using a dial gauge (19) the distance that
the piston (33) protrudes above the upper face of the
block when at TDC. To determine TDC position, see 19
chapter A2 : "Remove/Refit". "Injector Pump". This value 33
must be between 0,28 and 0,52 mm.
122vfm05 Fig. 36
Connecting rods
Bushes
Check that the connecting rod small end bush is not loose
and that there is no evidence of seizure or scoring.
Replace if damage found.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.35

Checks/adjustments
Have the connecting rod (38) checked as follows by a

qualified engineer using a rig (39) as shown in Fig. 37:
– Mount the rod (38) on the spindle of the tool (39) and
lock it using the screw (40).
– Place the spindle (41) on the "V" and rest the rod (38)
on the stop bar (42).
Check for twist in the rod (Fig. 38) 38

– Check for twist in the rod (38) by comparing
2 points (A) and (B) on the gudgeon pin (34) against the 42
horizontal plane of the rod axis.
41 39
– Position the dial gauge (19) stand (43) so that the
gauge has a preload of ~ 0,5 mm on the gudgeon 40
pin (34) at point (A) and then zero the dial gauge (19).
– Move the spindle (41) with the connecting rod (38) and
measure any difference on the opposite side (B) of the
gudgeon pin (34). The difference between (A) and (B)
122vfm02 Fig. 37
must not exceed 0,08 mm.
Check for bending of the rod (Fig. 39)

– Check for bending of the connecting rod (38) by
comparing 2 points (C) and (D) on the gudgeon pin (34) 43
in the vertical plane of the rod axis. 19
– Position the dial gauge (20) vertical stand (44) so that
the gauge contacts the gudgeon pin (34) at point (C). B
A
– Rock the connecting rod forwards and backwards to
identify the highest point of the gudgeon pin and then 34
zero the dial gauge (19). 38
– Move the spindle with the connecting rod (38) and
repeat the check of the highest point on the opposite
side (D) of the gudgeon pin (34). The difference between 41
points (C) and (D) must not exceed 0,08 mm.
122vfm03 Fig. 38
20 44
D
C
34
38
41
122vfm04 Fig. 39
A3.36 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checks/adjustments
Crankshaft
Measuring main journals and crank pins
If there any signs of seizure, scoring or excesssive
ovalisation on the main journals and crank pins they 14
require regrinding. Before regrinding, measure the 126
crankshaft journals (126) using a micrometer (14). 45
Regrind undersizes are 0,250 - 0,500 mm.
Main journals and crank pins must always be reground in
the same position.
After regrinding the main journals and crank pins, this
must be indicated by special marking on the side of
crankshaft web n° 1 (fan end).
For reground crank pins, the letter "M".
For reground main journals, the letter "B".
For reground main and crank pin journals, the
123vfm00 Fig. 40
letters "MB".
Check of crankshaft end float

Crankshaft end float is measured by placing a dial 137
gauge (18) with magnetic stand on the engine block and
placing the shaft on the end of the crankshaft (126); end
float should be between 0,068 and 0,410 mm (Fig. 41).
If the end float is greater than this, replace the bearing
shells in the last but one main bearing cap (137) that
includes a thrust bearing and repeat the measurement of
free play between crankshaft bearings and bearing cap
shells.
126 18
123vfm23 Fig. 41
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.37

Checks/adjustments
Camshaft
Cam lift and bearing alignment
– Place the shaft between centres and, using a dial 14
gauge, check that alignment error does not exceed 46
0,04 mm. If it does, replace the shaft. Refer to the
chapter "Dimensional specifications".
– Check the diameters of the camshaft bearings (46)
using the micrometer (14) on 2 axes perpendicular to one
another.
126vfm02 Fig. 42
Bushes
The camshaft bearings (47) must be pressed into their
respective housings. The internal surfaces must be free
from any signs of scoring or wear.
Using an internal micrometer (17), measure the internal
diameter of the front and rear bearings (47) and the
intermediate camshaft bearings (48). Measurements
must be made along 2 axes perpendicular to one another.
17
48
47
126vfm03 Fig. 43
A3.38 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checks/adjustments
Viscous fan coupling

Nomenclature
X Temperature in degrees Celsius (°C).
Y
Y Speed in rpm
A Temperature decreasing.
2 700
B Temperature rising.
2 400
Preliminary checks A
– Coolant level in the chamber and cleanliness of all the
radiators (water, oil and air). B
– Belt condition.
– Operation of the thermostat(s). 700 < Y < 1 400
– Operation of the temperature probe.
57 65
X
Checking the viscous fan coupling
– Put the tractor on a rolling road at full power for at least 103vfm07 Fig. 44
30 minutes.
– Check the fan rpm using an electronic tachometer and
compare with the values in (Fig. 46).
A speed of 2 700 rpm is a minimum value. If slip exceeds
35 %, consider changing the viscous coupling.
N.B.: The values shown in Figure 44 are indicative
only.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.39

Removal/refitting
Preliminary operations
1. Apply the handbrake.
2. Put the gear lever in neutral.
3. Disconnect the battery. 4 3
4. Remove the two side covers and the one-piece cover.
5. Remove the protective casing over the transmission
shaft.
6. Disconnect and remove the transmission shaft.
7. Chock the rear wheels.
8. Prevent the front axle from tilting by using chocks
(depending on equipment fit).
8 6 5 2 1 7
101vfm01 Fig. 45
A3.40 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Engine/front drive train (splitting)

– Carry out the preliminary operations (see paragraph
"Preliminary operations").
– Disconnect the electrical harnesses and label them.
51
– Disconnect the supply pipes to the steering
actuator (50).
– Disconnect the fuel system lines (51).
– Disconnect the coolant system hoses (52) and drain
the system.
– Disconnect the air intake ducts (53) and (54).
– Disconnect the transmission oil cooler lines (55).
– Remove the engine cover bracket (220).
Further details will be found in the chapters corresponding
50
to the component concerned.
– Place the decoupling trolley under the engine and the 451vfm00 Fig. 46
front drive train.
N.B.: Adjust the various stops on the decoupler 220 54
trolley to achieve a proper separation of the front axle
and to facilitate the rejoining of the assembly.
– Remove the screws (A) from the chassis.
– Separate the front axle.
53
52
55
451vfm01 Fig. 47
A A
103vfm02 Fig. 48
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.41

Removal/refitting
Engine reinstallation details

X
Chassis alignment
– Connect the chassis (66) to the engine without fitting
the upper nuts (67).
66 67
88
– Tighten the attachment screws (68) to the
recommended torque.
– Measure dimension "X" using feeler gauges.
– Fit the two upper nuts after alignment and tighten to the
recommended torque.
68
112vfm20 Fig. 49
A3.42 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Engine/gearbox (splitting)
56 221 57
– Carry out the preliminary operations (see paragraph 62
– Move aside the brake fluid reservoir (57).
– Disconnect the heater tubes (58). 64
– Disconnect the supply lines to the steering unit (59).
50
– Disconnect the supply pipes to the steering 222
actuator (50). 63
61
– Disconnect the brake lines (60).
– Disconnect the transmission oil cooler lines. 59
223 60
– Remove the hydraulic pump lines (222) (depending on
equipment fit).
– Disconnect the transmission oil suction pipe (223).
58
– Disconnect the accelerator cable (61).
– Unplug the electrical harnesses (62). 103vfm04 Fig. 50
– Move aside the air conditioning compressor (221)

leaving the pipes (56) connected.
Depending on equipment fit, it may be necessary to drain
the refrigerant fluid in order to disconnect the compressor
lines.
– Remove the tool box.
– Remove the mounting screws for the pressure outlets
from the auxiliary spool valves (depending on equipment
fit).
– Remove the left hand instrument panel trim (63), the
left hand door kick plate and the floor carpets, in order to
be able to remove the access panel (Fig. 51).
Further details will be found in the chapters corresponding
to the component concerned.
– Place the decoupling trolley under the transmission and
the engine (Fig. 52).
N.B.: Adjust the various stops on the decoupler 103vfm05 Fig. 51
trolley to achieve a proper separation of the front axle

and to facilitate the rejoining of the assembly.
103vfm08 Fig. 52
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.43

Removal/refitting
For safety reasons, place stands under

the cab.
– Unscrew the two screws HM12 x 125-65 (B1) under the

access panel (Fig. 53).
– Unscrew the two screws HM12 x 125-65 (B2) and the
8 screws HM12 x 175-50 (D); remove the gasket (64) if
required (Fig. 50). B1 B2
D D
Engine replacement C C
– Carry out the preliminary operations (see paragraph

– Separate the engine from the front drive train (see D D
paragraph "Engine/front drive train (separation)").
– Separate the engine from the gearbox (refer to chapter 103vfm15 Fig. 53
"Engine/gearbox (separation)"), after attaching the lifting

brackets (65) at the front to the fan mount and at the rear
to the bracket for the one-piece engine cover.
– Attach chains or slings appropriate to the engine weight
to the lifting brackets (65).
For safety reasons, use a load spreader

and slings appropriate to the engine
weight: Minimum 400 kg.
65
– Remove those engine components that will be
transferred to the new engine.
103vfm10 Fig. 54
103vfm11 Fig. 55
A3.44 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Cylinder head
220 221 53
Removing the cylinder head
– Remove the exhaust silencer and its collar (224).
– Remove the turbocharger (210) (depending on 210
equipment fit).
– Remove the heating pipes (58) then drain the coolant.
– Remove the mounts for the one-piece engine
cover (220). 52
– Disconnect the air (53) and water (52) hoses. 224
– Remove the air conditioning compressor (221) with its
bracket and drive belt (depending on equipment fit).
– Remove the fan bracket screws and the drive belt.
– Remove the fuel filter bracket screws.
– Remove the injector pipes and the injectors. 58
For further information, refer to the corresponding 130vfm17 Fig. 56
chapters for the relevant component.

– Slacken the attachment screws (69) and raise the
rocker covers (70). Remove the gaskets.
N.B.: The centre cover includes the crankcase oil vent
valve (blow-by). Always change all seals and gaskets
whenever the unit is dismantled.
69 70
130vfm00 Fig. 57
– Remove the intake and exhaust manifolds: Undo the

screws (72) that attach the intake manifold plate to the
cylinder head; on the exhaust manifold side, unscrew the 71
attachment screws (71) (remove the gaskets).
72
130vfm01 Fig. 58
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.45

Removal/refitting
Removal of the rocker covers:

– Undo the two attachment screws (73) and remove the
complete rocker mount.
73
– Remove the push rods.
– Remove the water temperature sensor (74).
74
130vfm02 Fig. 59
Removing the cylinder head:
– Remove the head screws (75a).
– Remove the cylinder head (77a) using an appropriate
hoist.
– Remove the gasket (78a). 75a
77a
78a
130vfm03 Fig. 60
Removing the cylinder head:
– Remove the screws (75b).
– Remove the cylinder head (77b) using an appropriate
hoist.
– Remove the gasket (78b). 75b
77b
78b
130vfm04 Fig. 61
A3.46 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Removing the valves

The inlet (2) and exhaust valves (1) are of different
diameters.
N.B.: Before removing the valves from the cylinder
head, number them so that they can replaced in the 2 1
original locations on reassembly.
A = Inlet side.
131vfm15 Fig. 62
Valves are removed using tool n° 99360268 (101) to exert

pressure on the valve collar (102) so that, by compressing
the springs (103), it is posssible to remove the
collets (104). Then remove the collar (102) and the 101 104
springs (103).
102
– Repeat the operation for all the valves.
– Turn the cylinder head over and remove the 103
valves (15).
15
108
131vfm16 Fig. 63
– Remove the oil seals (105) and (106) from the

corresponding valve guides.
106
105
131vfm17 Fig. 64
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.47

Removal/refitting
Reinstalling the valves

– Oil the valve stems (15) and then insert them into the
guides in the order noted during dismantling.
– Fit the oil seals (105) and (106) to the valve guides. 15
105 106
131vfm20 Fig. 65
– Fit the protective cap (108), the spring (103) and the
top collar (102). Using tool (101) compress the
spring (103) and attach the components to the valve (15)
using the cotters (104). 101 104
102
103
15
108
131vfm16 Fig. 66
Refitting the cylinder head

– Before refitting the cylinder head, carry out the head
checks (see chapter "Checks/adjustments").
N.B.: Check that the mating surface is clean. Do not 78
oil the gasket. It is recommended that the gasket be
kept in its packaging until just before installation on
the head. The gasket must be installed so that the
stamped inscription is uppermost as shown in the
diagram.
– Position the gasket (78) on the face of the block.
130vfm05 Fig. 67
A3.48 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
– Lower the cylinder head (77) onto the gasket (78) and
tighten the head screws (75).
75
77
78
130vfm18 Fig. 68
Before reusing the head screws, take 2 measurements of

their diameter as shown in the diagram, recording
diameters "D1" and "D2":
– If D1 – D2 < 0,1 mm the screw can be re-used.
– If D1 – D2 > 0,1 mm the screw must be replaced.
– Position the gasket on the block and insert the head
screws as shown in the diagram.
D2 D1
3-cylinder engine
Follow the sequence for tightening down the head
screws (Fig. 70).
First stage of tightening down using torque wrench:
– M12 x 1,75 x 70 Screw: 5 ± 0,5 daN.m (items (2), (7),
(10)).
(5), (6), (11), (12), (13), (14)).
– M12 x 1,75 x 180 Screw: 7 ± 0,5 daN.m (items (1), (8), 130vfm07 Fig. 69
(9)).
Second phase: Tighten each screw a further 90°.
Third phase: Tighten the 140 and 180 mm screws, and
only these, a further 90°.
A = Fan end.
8 1 9
A
12 4 5 13
11 3 6 14
7 2 10
130vfm19 Fig. 70
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.49

Removal/refitting
4-cylinder engine
Follow the sequence for tightening down the head
screws (Fig. 71).
First stage of tightening down using torque wrench:
(11), (14)).
(7), (8), (9), (10), (15), (16), (17), (18)).
(12), (13)).
Second phase: Tighten each screw a further 90°.
Third phase: Tighten the 140 and 180 mm screws, and
only these, a further 90°.
A = Fan end.
130vfm08 Fig. 71
Refitting the rocker shaft

Check the components of the rocker shaft.
Check the mating surfaces between the brackets and the
shaft: There must be no signs of damage or excessive
wear; otherwise the component must be replaced. Refer
to the chapter "Dimensional specifications".
Nomenclature
83 Circlip. 85
84 Spacer. 84
85 Rockers. 83
86 Bracket.
83
84
85
86
130vfm09 Fig. 72
A3.50 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
– Check the push rods; they must be free from distortion

or evidence of seizure or wear; otherwise they must be
replaced. The push rods are identical and therefore
interchangeable.
130vfm12 Fig. 73
Before fitting the push rods and the rocker shaft, check the
attachment screws to see if they are reusable (see
paragraph "Refitting the cylinder head").
– Adjust the valve clearances as explained in "Checks
and Adjustments". 88
– Tighten nut (88) to the recommended torque, after
adjusting screw (87). Refer to the chapter "Torque
settings".
87
130vfm11 Fig. 74
– Install the rocker covers (70) with the corresponding

gaskets.
– Insert the gaskets and tighten the screws (69) to the
recommended torque. Refer to the chapter "Torque
settings".
N.B.: Always use new gaskets. Check the threads of
the attachment screws; there must be no sign of wear
or accumulations of dirt. The sealing lugs must be
free from obvious distortion. Otherwise, replace with 69 70
new components.
130vfm00 Fig. 75
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.51

Removal/refitting
– Fit the exhaust manifold (89) using new gaskets (90).
89
90
130vfm13 Fig. 76
– Apply an appropriate thickess of Loctite 5910 to the

surface and tighten the screws (91) to the recommended
torque.
91
130vfm16 Fig. 77
– Apply an appropriate thickness of Loctite 5910 to the

surface of the inlet manifold plate (92) and tighten
screws (93) to the recommended torque.
– If the duct (94) has been dismantled from the inlet 92
manifold plate (92), refit it with a new gasket (95).
– Tighten the screws (96) to the recommended torque 93 96
((97) and (98) for versions with reheater).
94
95
98
97
130vfm14 Fig. 78
A3.52 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Pistons and connecting rods

– Remove the big-end bearing cap (6) by withdrawing the
screws (42).
– Remove the piston from the top of the block.
N.B.: Keep the bearing shells in their respective
housings. Following dismantling, bearing shells 42
must be refitted in the original locations.
6
122vfm06 Fig. 79
Dismantling of the connecting rod/piston

assembly
33
Nomenclature
33 Piston. 35
34 Pin. 110
35 Rings. 34
109 Connecting rod. 110
110 Circlips.
111 Screws.
112 Bearing shells.
113 Bush. 109 111
N.B.: Replacement pistons are available in steps of
0,5 mm oversize. 113
112
122vfm07 Fig. 80
Removal of the piston rings (35) from the piston (33) using
a ring spreader (114).
114
35
33
122vfm08 Fig. 81
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.53

Removal/refitting
Refitting the connecting rod/piston

assembly
The top of the piston carries the following information:
115. Part number and project modification number.
116. Arrow showing the sense of installation in the
cylinder; this must be directed towards the front of the
115
block.
117. Date of manufacture (only on pistons for 116
turbo-charged engines).
117
118. Marking showing testing of groove insert number 1a.
118
122vfm10 Fig. 82
During installation check carefully that the oil drillings in

the bush and the small end coincide. Use a reamer to
obtain the desired bush diameter. 116
– Oil the gudgeon pin (34) and its housing using engine
oil.
– Connect the piston (33) to the rod (109) using the
gudgeon pin (34) that must be inserted using light finger
pressure, and should not fall out under the force of
gravity.
When fixing the rod to the piston, make sure that due 33
account is taken of the direction of the arrow (116) and of
the numbers inscribed on the rod (109) (Fig. 87).
34 109
122vfm11 Fig. 83
– Insert the circlips (110) to hold the gudgeon pin (34).
34
110
122vfm09 Fig. 84
A3.54 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Fitting piston rings

Use a ring spreader (114) when installing the piston 114
rings (35) in the piston (33). The piston rings must be
fitted with the marking "top" uppermost; also position the
ring gaps so that they are offset one to another by 120°.
N.B.: Replacement rings are supplied with the
following dimensions: 35
– Standard, marked with yellow paint.
– Oversize by between 0,4 - 0,8 mm marked with 33
yellow/green paint.
122vfm08 Fig. 85
Fit the bearing shells (112) simultaneously in the rod and

the bearing cap.
N.B.: The bearing shells must not be modified.
112
122vfm13 Fig. 86
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.55

Removal/refitting
Markings on the connecting rods
6a
5
6b
122vfm01 Fig. 87
Nomenclature (5) Nomenclature (6b)
Connecting rod body Big-end bearing cap
Rod number Weight Rod number
0001 V 0001
È W È
9999 X 9999
Example: 1 152 W. Example: 1 152.
Nomenclature (6a)
Big-end bearing cap
Year Day
D = 2001 001
E = 2002
F = 2003 È
G = 2004
H = 2005 366
Example: H 097.
A3.56 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Each connecting rod is marked – On the body of the rod a letter indicates the weight
– On the body and the bearing cap a figure indicates the range:
pairing and the cylinder in which the rod is installed. SV, 1600 to 1640 g (marked in yellow).
If replacement is needed, mark the new rod with the same SW, 1641 to 1680 g (marked in green).
number as that being replaced. SX, 1681 to 1720 g (marked in blue).
– On the body and the cap the figures indicate the rod Replacement connecting rods are supplied as "Wet" class
number and the date of manufacture along with a marked in green. No removal of material is allowed.
coloured mark.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.57

Removal/refitting
Installing the connecting rod/piston

assembly in the cylinders
Thoroughly oil the piston, including the rings and the
cylinder bores. Using a piston ring clamp (119)
n° 77 01 388 111, insert the rod/piston (33) assembly into
the bore checking that the number on each each rod
corresponds to the relevant cylinder number (Fig. 87).
Position the rod/piston assembly in the cylinder so that the
arrow (116) is pointing forwards (Fig. 83). 33
119
122vfm14 Fig. 88
The arrow stamped on the piston crown is turned towards

the front end of the engine or the slit in the piston skirt
corresponds to the position of the oil nozzles.
116
122vfm15 Fig. 89
Checking big-end bearing clearance

Carry out the following operations to check the clearance: 120 121
– Thoroughly clean the components and remove all trace
of oil.
– Place some calibrated wire (121) on the crankshaft
journal (120).
– Fit the bearing caps (6) and the bearing shells (112).
112
122vfm16 Fig. 90
A3.58 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
– Tighten down the oiled screws (111) using a torque

wrench (122) to the recommended torque
(6 ± 0,5 daN.m). 122
111
122vfm17 Fig. 91
– Turn the screws (111) a further 60°.
111
122vfm18 Fig. 92
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.59

Removal/refitting
Dismantle the bearing cap and check clearance by

comparing the thickness of the calibrated wire (121) with
the scale on the envelope (123) that contained the wire. 121 123
If the clearance differs from the recommended figure,
replace the bearing shells and repeat the check.
Once the recommended clearance has been obtained, oil
the big-end bearing shells and install them; tighten the
bearing cap screws as described.
N.B.: Before final installation of the bearing cap
screws, check that the diameter of the latter,
measured at the centre of the threaded portion, is not
more than 0,1 mm less than the diameter measured
about 10 mm from the end of the screw.
Manually check that the connecting rods (109) are free to
slide along the crankshaft axis and that the axial play is
between 0,250 and 0,275 mm (measured using feeler
gauges (13)).
122vfm19 Fig. 93
109 13
122vfm20 Fig. 94
A3.60 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Flywheel
Removing the flywheel
– Split the engine from the gearbox (see chapter
"Engine/gearbox separation").
– Lock the flywheel (124).
124
124vfm00 Fig. 95
– Remove 2 diagonally opposing screws (125) and insert

the guide pins (128).
125
– Remove the remaining screws attaching the
flywheel (124) to the crankshaft (126).
– Remove the tool locking the flywheel.
124
126
124vfm01 Fig. 96
– Screw 2 screws into the holes (127) to enable the

flywheel to be lifted using a hoist.
Using the two guide pins (128) control the extraction of the
flywheel (124) using a hoist.
124
128
127 126
124vfm02 Fig. 97
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.61

Removal/refitting
Refitting the flywheel

– Check the clutch friction surface (A). If this is scored it
may be necessary to resurface it.
– Check the condition of the starter gear ring (B); replace A
B
if any teeth are broken or excessively worn. Fit a new
gear ring, preheated to a temperature of 150 °C for 15 to
20 seconds.
124vfm05 Fig. 98
– Mount the flywheel on the crankshaft.

– Hand tighten one screw.
– Unscrew the two pins (128).
128
124vfm06 Fig. 99
– Lock the flywheel (124) onto the crankshaft by hand

tightening the screws (125).
N.B.: Always check, during any rebuild, that tappings 125
and screw threads show no sign of wear or
contamination.
– Tighten the attachment screws (125) for the
flywheel (124) to the recommended torque.
124
124vfm08 Fig. 100
A3.62 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Crankshaft
Removing the crankshaft
– Remove the timing chain cover, the sump and the
balance shafts (see chapters "Camshaft", "Balance
shafts" and "Valve gear").
– Remove the flywheel (see chapter "Engine flywheel").
– Remove the rear bearing seals and the front bearing
seal (see chapters "Front bearing seal" and "Rear
bearing seal").
• 3-cylinder engine (Fig. 101)
– Undo the screws (131) and remove the pulley (132). 131
• 4-cylinder engine (Fig. 102)
– Undo the screws (134) and remove the pulley (135). 132
123vfm10 Fig. 101
135 134
123vfm11 Fig. 102
– Remove the big end bearing caps (see chapter

"Pistons and connecting rods").
– Withdraw the screws (136) and remove the main 136 137
bearing caps (137).
123vfm14 Fig. 103
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.63

Removal/refitting
– The bearing shell (138) on the last-but-one

bearing (137) has a shoulder to act as a thrust bearing.
137
Note: Identify the installation position of the upper
and lower bearing shells; they must be refitted in the
same position.
138
123vfm15 Fig. 104
– Remove the crankshaft (126) from the block.
126
123vfm16 Fig. 105
– Remove the bearing shells from their housings (138).
138
123vfm17 Fig. 106
A3.64 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Replacement of the oil pump drive pinion on

the crankshaft
Check that the teeth on the splined ring (197) fitted to the
crankshaft (126) are not damaged or worn; if necessary,
make 2 diametrically opposed scratches on the ring (197)
and remove it using an extractor (198).
When fitting a new splined ring, heat it in a furnace for no 126
more than 60 seconds at a constant temperature of
197
160 °C before pressing it on to the crankshaft.
Reinstalling the crankshaft

– Fit the bearing shells (138) (Fig. 106).
Note: Where bearing shells are being reused, they
must be refitted in the same location as before.
Replacement bearing shells (138) are supplied with 198
internal diameters reduced by 0,250 - 0,500 mm.
– Carefully clean the bearing shells (138), align the oil 221vfm11 Fig. 107
holes and install them in their respective housings.

The last-but-one bearing (138) has one bearing shell that
is shouldered. 137
138
121
139
123vfm20 Fig. 108
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.65

Removal/refitting
Checking crankshaft bearing play

• Install the crankshaft (126).
– Fit the bearing caps to the crankshaft (see chapter 137
"Refitting the connecting rod/piston assembly").
• Check the play between the crankshaft journals and
their respective shells in the bearing caps as follows:
– Thoroughly clean all components and remove any
trace of oil.
– Place a section of calibrated wire (121) longitudinally
on the crankshaft journal (139).
– Fit the bearing caps (137), with their bearing
shells (138), to their corresponding mounts. 138
• Oil the screws (136) and tighten them to the 121
recommended torque.
– Remove the bearing caps. 139
The play is determined by comparing the width of the
123vfm20 Fig. 109
calibrated wire (121) at the point of greatest compression
with the graduated scale on the packaging (123) that
contained the calibrated wire. 136
Numbers transferred to the scale give the play in
millimetres.
If the play differs from the recommended figure, replace
the bearing shells and repeat the check. Once the
recommended play has been achieved, oil the bearing
shells and install them permanently on the mounts,
tightening the attachment screws as described earlier.
– Check the attachment screws to confirm that they can
be reused (see paragraph "Refitting the cylinder head").
– Check the crankshaft end float (see chapter
"Checks/adjustments").
123vfm22 Fig. 110
123
121
123vfm21 Fig. 111
A3.66 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Carry out the following operations in the reverse order of

that used for dismantling, observing the recommended
torque figures. For the main adjustments, refer to the ø 3,5 5
141a
relevant chapters for the components concerned.
Front bearing oil seal

142
Removal (Fig. 112)
– Remove the radiator, fan, drive belts and crankshaft
pulley. Further details will be found in the chapters 126
corresponding to the component concerned.
– Extract the crankshaft seal unit from the front cover.
140
Apply tool° 00 11 308 860 (140) to the crankshaft front
taper (126). Drill holes 5 mm deep in the inner 143
seal (141a) using a 3,5 mm drill; access through the tool
144
guidance holes.
– Fix the tool (140) to the seal (141a) by tightening the 123vfm24 Fig. 112
screws (143).
– Extract the seal (141a) by tightening the screw (142).
Using a rod (145) and a lever (146), extract the outer

seal (141b) from the front cover (144) (Fig. 113).
144
141b
145
146
123vfm25 Fig. 113
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.67

Removal/refitting
Refitting (Fig. 114)

– Fit the centring pin (147a) of tool n° 00 11 308 880 to
the crankshaft front taper (126), attach it using the
screws (148) and offer up against it the new seal
unit (141).
– Position part (147b) on the centring pin (147a), undo 147b
screw (149) until the seal unit (141) is installed in the
149
front cover (144).
141
Rear bearing seal 148
Removal (Fig. 115) 147a

– Split the engine from the gearbox (see chapter 126
"Engine/gearbox separation").
For the removal of the flywheel, see chapter "Engine
flywheel".
123vfm26 Fig. 114
– Extract the seal unit from the timing cover by attaching
tool n° 00 11 308 870 (150) to the crankshaft rear
taper (126). Drill holes 5 mm deep in the inner seal using ø 3,5 5 151b
a 3,5 mm drill; access through the tool guidance holes.
– Fix the tool (150) to the seal (151a) by tightening the
screws (152).
– Extract the seal (151a) by tightening the screw (153).
– Using a rod and a lever, extract the outer seal (151b) 151a
from the timing cover. 126
Refitting (Fig. 116)

Fit the centring pin (154a) of tool n° 00 11 308 890 to the 153
crankshaft rear taper (126), attach it using the
150
screws (155) and offer up against it the new bearing
seal (151). Position part (154b) on the centring 152
pin (154a), screw in screw (156) until the seal (151) is fully
inserted in the timing cover.
124vfm03 Fig. 115
154b
155 151
154a 126
154b 156
124vfm04 Fig. 116
A3.68 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Camshaft, balance shafts and

auxiliary drive gears
Removal 158
– Separate the engine from the front axle (see
corresponding chapter). 157
– Drain the engine by unscrewing the two plugs.
– Remove the toolbox and the pressure line support
screws for the auxiliary spool valves.
– Remove the lines from the transmission oil cooler, the
hydraulic pumps, the oil pressure gauge and gearbox oil
vent.
– Drain the transmission oil.
– Undo the screws (158) noting their position and then
remove the engine sump (157), recovering the gasket
(engine seen from below in the diagram).
125vfm01 Fig. 117
– Using an M8 (159) screw lock the balance shafts (160)
at TDC.
– Remove the attachment screws (161) and lift off the
cover (162).
162
159
160 161
125vfm02 Fig. 118
– Split the engine from the gearbox.

– Remove the clutch.
– Remove the flywheel.
163
– Remove the mounts for the engine covers.
– Remove the rear bearing seal. 164
For details of these operations refer to the corresponding
chapter.
– Withdraw the screws (163) noting their position and
then remove the gear train housing (164) recovering the
injector pump pinion.
112vfm12 Fig. 119
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.69

Removal/refitting
– Withdraw the pinion (165) that drives the injector pump,

then its hub.
165
112vfm21 Fig. 120
– Remove the screws (166) and extract the camshaft

drive pinion (169), then the intermediate pinion (167) and
the hydraulic pump pinion (168).
166 169
167
168
112vfm05 Fig. 121
Removing the camshaft

Remove the screws (173) and the plate (174) that retains
the camshaft (46). 174
Note: Note the way that the plate (174) is mounted.
173
46
126vfm07 Fig. 122
A3.70 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
– Carefully remove the camshaft (46) from the engine

block.
46
126vfm08 Fig. 123
Refitting
Using a felt pen, mark the bevelled tooth on the drive
pinion (170) mounted on the crankshaft (126) to ensure
correct timing.
Note: Screw in 2 rods to make it easy to turn the
crankshaft.
170 126
112vfm06 Fig. 124
Position the camshaft (46) retainer plate (174) with the

oblong hole orientated towards the top of the block and
the marking turned towards the operator; tighten the
screws (173) to the recommended torque.
174
46
173
112vfm18 Fig. 125
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.71

Removal/refitting
– Check the camshaft (46) end float.

– The endfloat should be 0,23 ± 0,13 mm.
46
112vfm19 Fig. 126
Replacing the bearings

Use special tools n° 00 11 308 900 (175) and
47
n° 60 05 005 566 (176) to remove and replace the front
and rear bearings (47).
– When installing the bearings (47) ensure that the oil
holes coincide with those in the housings in the block.
175
176
126vfm06 Fig. 127
– Oil the camshaft bearings and fit the camshaft (46)

taking care not to damage the bearings or the housings
during this operation.
– Turn the crankshaft (126) and the camshaft (46) to
align the markings on the pinions (169) and (170).
169 46 170 126
112vfm07 Fig. 128
A3.72 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
– Place the shaft of the dial gauge (18) on the camshaft

drive pinion (169) and check that the backlash between
pinions (169) and (170) is between 0,076 and 0,280 mm.
18
If the backlash falls outside these values, identify and
replace the appropriate components.
169
170
112vfm08 Fig. 129
– Tighten the screws (166) to the recommended torque

to attach the pinion (169) to the camshaft (46).
169
166 46
112vfm09 Fig. 130
– Attach the injector pump drive pinion (165) (see

chapter "A2").
165
112vfm21 Fig. 131
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.73

Removal/refitting
Note: The surface must be clean to ensure an

effective seal.
Apply Loctite 510 sealing compound in a bead (171)
of a few millimetres in diameter and extending around
the entire mating surface (Fig. 132).
The bead must be uniform without lumps, air bubbles,
thin areas or discontinuities.
Any imperfections must be corrected as soon as
possible. 171
Avoid applying too much sealing compound as this

would tend to be extruded along both faces of the
mating surface and might block oil galleries.
After completing application of the sealing
compound, assembly must be completed quickly
(10-20 minutes).
– Fit the timing gear casing (164) to the engine. 112vfm11 Fig. 132
Note: Always check, during any rebuild, that tappings

and screw threads show no sign of wear or
contamination.
163
– Insert the attachment screws (163) in their correct
locations and tighten to the recommended torque. 164
– Refit the rear bearing seal (see chapter "Rear bearing
seal").
– Refit the flywheel (see chapter "Engine flywheel").
– Refit the cover (162) making sure that the stamped
markings (A) on the balance shaft pinions coincide to
ensure correct phasing (Fig. 134).
112vfm12 Fig. 133
162
112vfm13 Fig. 134
A3.74 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
– Tighten the attachment screws (161) for the

cover (162) to the correct torque.
– Remove the lock screw (159) from the balance
shafts (160). 162
159
160 161
125vfm02 Fig. 135
– Position the new gasket on the block.

– Fit the sump (157).
– Insert the screws (158) and tighten to the
recommended torque.
157 172
– Tighten the plugs (172) to the recommended torque.
158
112vfm16 Fig. 136
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.75

Removal/refitting
Oil cooler
189
Removal
Remove the screws (189) and remove the oil cooler
baseplate (179), the intermediate plate and the
gasket (190).
179
221vfm03 Fig. 137
Refitting
Note: Always check, during any rebuild, that
tappings and screw threads show no sign of wear or 190
contamination.
– Fit to the block the oil cooler (180), a new gasket (190)
and the baseplate (179).
– Tighten the screws (189) to the recommended torque.
180
179
221vfm12 Fig. 138
Removal
192
Undo the attachment screws (191) and remove the
baseplate (184) with its gaskets (192), (193) and the oil 184
cooler (185). 191
193 185
221vfm06 Fig. 139
A3.76 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Refitting
Note: Always check, during any rebuild, that
tappings and screw threads show no sign of wear or 192
contamination.
184
– Fit to the block the oil cooler (185), the new 191
gaskets (192), (193) and the baseplate (184).
193 185
221vfm06 Fig. 140
Oil pump
– Separate the engine from the front axle (see
corresponding chapter).
– Remove the fan and its pulley. 194
– Remove the drive belts.
– Remove the crankshaft pulley.
– Remove the tensioner and the mounting screws for the
3rd hydraulic pump (depending on equipment fit).
– Remove the screws (195) noting their position and
remove the cover (194).
195
221vfm07 Fig. 141
– Remove the gasket (196).

When refitting carry out the dismantling operations in the
reverse order, tightening to the recommended torques.
196
221vfm13 Fig. 142
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.77

Removal/refitting
Thermostat
Removal
Removal of the thermostat unit . Undo the three
attachment screws (199), remove the thermostat 199
housing (200) then remove the gasket (201) and the
thermostat (202).
201
Refitting
– Fit the thermostat housing (200) with the 202
thermostat (202) and the gasket (201). 200
Note: A new gasket (201) must be used.
– Refit the pulley mount and the fan pulley, and tighten to
the recommended torques.
The procedure for refitting the fanbelt is described in the
251vfm07 Fig. 143
chapter "Checks/adjustments".
Water pump 130
Removal
– Slacken the belt tensioner to enable the belt to be
removed.
– Disconnect the water hose (thermostat) and drain the
system.
– Remove the screws (130) and remove the water 25
pump (25).
123vfm27 Fig. 144
Refitting
Fit a new gasket (207) to the water pump (25).
25
207
251vfm10 Fig. 145
A3.78 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
– Fit the water pump (25).

– Fit the screws (133) and tighten to the recommended
torque.
25
133
251vfm11 Fig. 146
Turbocharger
Removal 211
• Removal of the turbocharger:
– Undo the terminal (211) and disconnect the oil line.
– Undo the turbocharger attachment nuts (212) on the
exhaust manifold.
– Remove the turbocharger and gasket.
Refitting
Carry out the dismantling operations in the reverse order,
tightening to the recommended torques.
Reconditioning the turbocharger

Important: It is difficult to recondition a turbocharger 212
without the necessary tools and training. Do not
disassemble a turbocharger completely. 167vfm01 Fig. 147
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.79

Diagnostics
"Engine oil pressure too low" sheet

First check oil level and quality, the oil filter, and operation of the oil pressure switch.
221hsm17 Fig. 148
A3.80 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Diagnostics
"Engine oil pressure too high" sheet

First check oil level and quality and the oil filter.
221hsm16 Fig. 149
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.81

Diagnostics
"Excessive oil consumption" sheet

First check for leaks from the external pipes and the cap/plug seals.
Excessive oil consumption
No Presence of oil Yes

in the colling system?
Check for excessive

Check oil cooler.
pressure in
Repair or replace.
the crankcase
(crankcase gas)
Is the problem No
Depending on
See “Excessive still occuring?
equipment level,
engine oil pressure”
check for leaks
diagnostic sheet
at the turbo charger Yes
Failure:
Is sealing – Head gasket.
No
correct? – Cracked block.
– Block cracked.
Repair or replace.
Yes
Problems with pistons, See instruction

rings and cylinder sheet
liners. “Sealing check for
Check and repair. turbo-charger oil seal”
End
122vfm14 Fig. 150
A3.82 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Diagnostics
"Coolant temperature too high" sheet

First check coolant quality and level. Check for leaks from external engine system components.
Cooling fluid temperature

too high
No Are the quality and level Yes

of fluid correct?
If oil is present in the cooling

fluid tank, check the cylinder Drain or complete up
to the appropriate level. Check for dirt, leaks and
head and cylinder head gasket.
clogging on the radiator.
See diagnostic sheets.
Repair or replace.
Is the problem No
Is the problem Yes still occuring?
still occuring?
Yes
No
Check the fan motor,
belt, tensioner.
Repair or replace.
Is the problem No
still occuring?
Yes
Check the operating condition

of the thermostat.
Repair or replace.
Is the problem No
still occuring?
Yes
Check the operating

condition
of the water pump.
Repair or replace.
End
221msm28 Fig. 151
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB A3.83

Diagnostics
Coolant in the oil or vice versa

Coolant sealing Lubrication system sealing
Symptoms Symptoms
– Coolant leaking through the cylinder head gasket. – Oil leaking through the cylinder head gasket.
– Coolant in the oil pan. – Oil in the coolant.
– Insufficient level in the tank. – Insufficient oil level in the crankcase.
– High oil level. – Insufficient rocker lubrication (abnormal noises).
– Coolant leaking through the crankcase breather. Possible causes
Possible causes – Insufficient tightening torque.
– Insufficient tightening torque. – Deformed, damaged, or irregular engine block surface.
– Deformed, damaged, or irregular engine block surface. – Deformed, damaged or irregular cylinder head surface.
– Deformed, damaged or irregular cylinder head surface. – Oil or coolant temperature too high.
– Oil or coolant temperature too high. – Cylinder head gasket surface deformed or cracked.
– Cylinder head gasket surface deformed or cracked. – Elastomer parts of cylinder head gasket damaged or
– Elastomer parts of cylinder head gasket damaged or cracked.
cracked. – O-rings damaged in the oil passages to the rockers.
Important: Oil may appear in the coolant as a result of
a poor oil cooler seal.
A3.84 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

T 506 GEARBOX
B1
MECHANICAL PART
B2
HYDRAULIC PART
B3
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
Chapter B

CONTENTS
B1 – MECHANICAL PART
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
DESCRIPTION OF GEARBOX WITH MECHANICAL CLUTCH, REVERSER AND DOUBLER ....................................B1.2
DESCRIPTION OF GEARBOX WITH MECHANICAL PTO, HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER......................B1.4
TRANSMISSION KINEMATICS ......................................................................................................................................B1.6
DISMANTLING PROCEDURE
DISMANTLING PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................................................B1.11
TIGHTENING TORQUES AND MAIN ADJUSTMENTS

GEARBOX WITH MECHANICAL REVERSER AND DOUBLER ..................................................................................B1.12
GEARBOX WITH HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER .....................................................................................B1.13
TORQUE SETTINGS AND SEALANTS

INTERFACE BETWEEN ENGINE AND CLUTCH HOUSING.......................................................................................B1.14
INTERFACE BETWEEN CLUTCH HOUSING AND GEARBOX CASING ....................................................................B1.14
TRANSMISION WITH MECHANICAL CLUTCH

PTO AND VEHICLE DRIVE CLUTCH...........................................................................................................................B1.16
MECHANICAL DOUBLER.............................................................................................................................................B1.26
MECHANICAL REVERSER ..........................................................................................................................................B1.32
TRANSMISSION WITH HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER

POWER TAKE-OFF CLUTCH.......................................................................................................................................B1.40
HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER ................................................................................................................B1.50
GEARBOX
GEAR CASING..............................................................................................................................................................B1.66
RANGE CHANGE CASING...........................................................................................................................................B1.68
REMOVING THE SHAFTS............................................................................................................................................B1.70
REFITTING THE SHAFTS ............................................................................................................................................B1.74
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

B2 – HYDRAULIC PART
2 PUMP HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

NOMENCLATURE FOR MECHANICAL REVERSER AND DOUBLER SYSTEM..........................................................B2.2
NOMENCLATURE FOR HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER SYSTEM.............................................................B2.2
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND MECHANICAL DOUBLER..............................................B2.3
LOCATION OF REVERSER AND MECHANICAL DOUBLER COMPONENTS .............................................................B2.4
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC OF HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER ..................................................................B2.5
LOCATION OF HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER COMPONENTS ................................................................B2.6
3 PUMP HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND MECHANICAL DOUBLER..............................................B2.7
LOCATION OF REVERSER AND MECHANICAL DOUBLER COMPONENTS .............................................................B2.8
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC OF HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER ..................................................................B2.9
LOCATION OF HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER COMPONENTS ..............................................................B2.10
NOMENCLATURE FOR MECHANICAL REVERSER AND DOUBLER SYSTEM........................................................B2.11
NOMENCLATURE FOR HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER SYSTEM...........................................................B2.11
18 BAR LOW PRESSURE SYSTEM WITH CLUTCHLESS REVERSER

DESCRIPTION ..............................................................................................................................................................B2.12
DESCRIPTION ..............................................................................................................................................................B2.13
CONTROL LOGIC FOR CLUTCHLESS REVERSER AND "TWINSHIFT" DOUBLER.................................................B2.14
"SAFETY PATCH" SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................................................................................B2.15
LOW PRESSURE LUBRICATION SYSTEM FOR CLUTCHLESS REVERSER

DESCRIPTION ..............................................................................................................................................................B2.16
TRANSFER AIR PUMP .................................................................................................................................................B2.17
CROSS-SECTION OF CLUTCH LUBRICATION ..........................................................................................................B2.18
CHECKING FLOW FROM THE "SAFETY PATCH" SOLENOID VALVE......................................................................B2.19
CHECKING THE PRESSURE IN THE CLUTCHLESS REVERSER UNIT ...................................................................B2.20
CHECKING THE PRESSURE IN THE SLOW FORWARDS CLUTCH.........................................................................B2.20
CHECKING THE PRESSURE IN THE FAST FORWARDS CLUTCH ..........................................................................B2.21
CHECKING THE PRESSURE IN THE REVERSE CLUTCH ........................................................................................B2.22
CHECKING THE CLUTCH LUBRICATION PRESSURES............................................................................................B2.23
CHECK ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE.........................................................................................................................B2.24
CHECKING THE FLOW FROM THE HYDRAULIC PUMP (2-PUMP SYSTEM) .........................................................B2.25
CHECKING THE FLOW FROM THE 3RD PUMP.........................................................................................................B2.25
CHECKING THE TRANSFER AIR PUMP.....................................................................................................................B2.25
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

"INSPECTION RESULTS" SHEET
CHECKING FLOW FROM THE "SAFETY PATCH" SOLENOID VALVE......................................................................B2.26
CHECKING THE PRESSURE IN THE CLUTCHLESS REVERSER UNIT ...................................................................B2.26
CHECKING THE PRESSURE IN THE SLOW FORWARDS CLUTCH.........................................................................B2.26
CHECKING THE PRESSURE IN THE FAST FORWARDS CLUTCH ..........................................................................B2.27
CHECKING THE PRESSURE IN THE REVERSE CLUTCH ........................................................................................B2.27
CHECKING THE CLUTCH LUBRICATION PRESSURES............................................................................................B2.27
CHECK ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE.........................................................................................................................B2.28
CHECKING THE FLOW FROM THE 3RD PUMP.........................................................................................................B2.28
B3 – ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
GEARBOX ELECTRONIC CONTROL

INTRODUCTION TO THE "EHM 24" ..............................................................................................................................B3.2
"EHM 24" INPUTS/OUTPUTS........................................................................................................................................B3.3
""SAFETY PATCH"" SAFETY..........................................................................................................................................B3.4
SHUTTLE REVERSER....................................................................................................................................................B3.9
MECHANICAL REVERSER ..........................................................................................................................................B3.10
CLUTCH PEDAL ...........................................................................................................................................................B3.11
TWINSHIFT DOUBLER.................................................................................................................................................B3.12
COMPONENT LAYOUT
COMPONENT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................................B3.13
ELECTRICAL TESTS
SUPPLY CIRCUIT SWITCH..........................................................................................................................................B3.16
EARTHING SWITCH .....................................................................................................................................................B3.17
CONTROL LEVER ........................................................................................................................................................B3.18
CONTACT SENSOR .....................................................................................................................................................B3.18
TEMPERATURE SENSOR (THERMISTOR) ................................................................................................................B3.18
HALL EFFECT SENSOR...............................................................................................................................................B3.19
"EHM 24" ELECTRONICS UNIT, "SAFETY PATCH" AND TIMER UNIT .....................................................................B3.20
PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID VALVE .........................................................................................................................B3.21
ON/OFF SOLENOID VALVE .........................................................................................................................................B3.22
MEASUREMENT AND CHECK POINTS

CHECKS OF TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE SWITCHES, SLOW FORWARD, FAST FORWARD AND
REVERSE (118A), (118B), (118C) ................................................................................................................................B3.23
CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR (114) .........................................................................B3.23
CHECKING THE SPEED SENSOR (37).......................................................................................................................B3.24
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

CHECKING SUPPLY VOLTAGES TO UNITS (184), (306)..........................................................................................B3.24
FUNCTIONAL CHECK OF "SAFETY PATCH"..............................................................................................................B3.24
CHECKING THE +/– CONTROL SWITCHES (238)......................................................................................................B3.24
CHECKING THE PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID VALVES (192A), (192B), (192C)......................................................B3.25
CHECKING THE REVERSER SELECTOR (188) .........................................................................................................B3.25
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH (189).......................................................................................................B3.26
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (187) ...................................................................................B3.26
CHECKING THE MECHANICAL REVERSER NEUTRAL SWITCH (314)....................................................................B3.26
CHECKING THE RANGE III SENSOR (68) ..................................................................................................................B3.26

CHECKING PRESSURE SWITCHES (118A), (118B), (118C) .....................................................................................B3.27
CHECKING TEMPERATURE SENSOR (114) ..............................................................................................................B3.27
CHECKING THE SPEED SENSOR (37).......................................................................................................................B3.27
CHECKING SUPPLY VOLTAGES TO UNITS (184), (306)..........................................................................................B3.27
CHECKING THE +/– CONTROL SWITCHES (238)......................................................................................................B3.28
CHECKING THE PROPORTIONAL SOLENOID VALVES (192A), (192B), (192C)......................................................B3.28
CHECKING THE REVERSER SELECTOR (188) .........................................................................................................B3.28
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH (189).......................................................................................................B3.29
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

B1
MECHANICAL PART
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description of gearbox with mechanical clutch, reverser and doubler
1 3 I III
2 4 II
1 2 3 4 5
325vfm27 Fig. 1
B1.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Dry clutch 11" (1)
Driven plate
Type of lining "Cerametallic"

Number of surfaces 3 + 3 (3-cylinder engine) or 4 + 4 (4-cylinder engine)
Diameter (in mm) 280
Compression load 570 ± 52 daN (3 cylinders) and 750 ± 65 daN (4 cylinders)
Thickness of new disk (in mm) 7,6
Thickness of worn disk (in mm) 5,6
Clutch clearance (in mm) 1
Pressurising Mechanical
Control Hydraulic
Driver interface Mechanical lever
Clutch disk
Number of surfaces 4 + 4 (3 cylinders) or 6 + 6 (4 cylinders)

Hub Spring shock absorber
Pressurising and control Mechanical
Driver interface Mechanical pedal
Mechanical doubler (2)* – Mechanical reverser (3)
Type Synchronizer
Control Mechanical
Speeds (4) – Ranges (5)
Number of gears 4 synchronised gears

Number of ranges 3 dog-clutch ranges
Crawl option* 0,5 km/h (different pinion size)
* Depending on the model of tractor.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.3

Description of gearbox with mechanical PTO, hydraulic reverser and doubler
1 3 I III
2 4 II
2
1 3 4
325vfm28 Fig. 2
B1.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

PTO dry clutch 11" (1)
Driven plate
Type of lining "Cerametallic"

Number of surfaces 3 + 3 (3 cylinders) or 4 + 4 (4 cylinders)
Pressurising Mechanical
Control Hydraulic
Hub Spring shock absorber
Hydraulic reverser and doubler (2)
Reverse
Clutch Multidisc wet clutch

Number of discs 5
Disc diameter (in mm) 132
Type of lining Organic
Pressurising Hydraulic
Control Electrical
Driver interface Shuttle reverser lever
Slow and fast forward
Clutches 2 multi-disk wet clutches

Number of discs 5
Disc diameter (in mm) 132
Type of lining Organic
Pressurising Hydraulic
Control Electrical
Driver interface Pulse buttons
Speeds (3) – Ranges (4)
Number of gears 4 synchronised gears

Number of ranges 3 dog-clutch ranges
Crawl option* 0,5 km/h (different pinion size)
* Depending on the model of tractor.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.5

Transmission kinematics
Transmission with mechanical clutch and reverser (30 km/h - crawl)
55 55
52** 44**
40 33 26
34 26 27 26 19
20 33** ➟I ➟ 17
10 540
➟
➟
➟ ➟
27 4 2 III 12*
➟3 ➟1 ➟II 24 41 ➟
24 38* 1 000
36 36 43 27** 35** 540 eco
49 52
55 52 61 51
46** 58
17 12 48
33* 14* 82*
325vfm29 Fig. 3
* On strengthened transmission.
** Without crawl option.
B1.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Transmission with mechanical clutch, reverser and doubler (30 km/h - crawl)
HI LO 55 55
35 40 33 26
39 34 26 26 19
27
20 ➟I ➟ 17
10 540
➟
➟
➟ ➟
27 4 2 III 12*
➟3 ➟1 ➟II 41 ➟
24 24 38* 1 000
40 36 36 43 52
38 49 540 eco
55 52 61 51
58
17 12 48
33* 14* 82*
325vfm30 Fig. 4
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.7

Transmission with mechanical clutch, reverser and doubler (40 km/h - crawl)
HI LO 55 55
35 40 33 26
39 34 26 26 19
27
20 ➟I ➟ 17
12 540
➟
➟
➟ ➟
27 4 2 III 15*
➟3 ➟1 ➟II 38 ➟
24 24 38* 1 000
40 36 36 43 52
38 49 540 eco
55 52 61 51
58
17 12 48
33* 14* 82*
325vfm31 Fig. 5
B1.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Transmission with mechanical PTO clutch, hydraulic reverser and doubler (30 km/h - crawl)
26
19
51
58
540 eco
1 000
➟
540
61
17
38*
82*
41
48
14*
12
33*
17
12*
10
➟
➟ I 26
52
55
24
27
52
➟
➟ II
III
55
24
20
55
➟1
➟
2
26
49
33
43
➟3
➟
4
40
36
36
34
26
38
39
40
35
325vfm32 Fig. 6
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.9

Transmission with mechanical PTO clutch, hydraulic reverser and doubler (40 km/h - crawl)
26
19
51
58
540 eco
1 000
➟
540
61
17
38*
82*
38
48
14*
12
33*
17
15*
12
➟
➟ I 26
52
55
24
27
52
➟
➟ II
III
55
24
20
55
➟1
➟
2
26
49
33
43
➟3
➟
4
40
36
36
34
26
38
39
40
35
325vfm33 Fig. 7
B1.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Dismantling procedure
1 1’
1
2
3
1’
2’
325vfm34 Fig. 8
Nomenclature 1 Removal of clutch and stops. 1’ Removal of PTO clutch and stop.
2 Removal of mechanical reverser and doubler*. 2’ Removal of hydraulic reverser and doubler. 3 Removal of gearbox shafts.
* According to equipment.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.11

Tightening torques and main adjustments
Gearbox with mechanical reverser and doubler
± 0,05 ± 0,05
0,20 mm 0,05 mm 0,20 ± 0,05 mm 0,20 mm
3,5 daN.m + 60° 8,4 daN.m
Frenetanch (242) Frenetanch (242) Frenetanch (242) 7 daN.m Formajoint (510) 5 daN.m
2 daN.m 3,5 daN.m 3,5 daN.m
11,5 daN.m 3,3 daN.m 2,3 daN.m Frenetanch (242) Frenetanch (242) Formajoint (510)
3,5 daN.m 3,5 daN.m
19 daN.m
0,15 ± 0,05 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0,25

± 0,05
mm
325vfm35 Fig. 9
B1.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Gearbox with hydraulic reverser and doubler
± 0,05 ± 0,05
0,05 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0,20 ± 0,05 mm 0,20 mm
3,5 daN.m + 60° 8,4 daN.m
Frenetanch (242)
3,5 daN.m Frenetanch (242) 7 daN.m Formajoint (510) 5 daN.m
3,5 daN.m
2,5 daN.m
11,5 daN.m 3,3 daN.m 2,5 daN.m Frenetanch (242)

3,5 daN.m Formajoint (510)
19 daN.m
± 0,05
0,15 mm 0 mm 0 mm 0,25 ± 0,05 mm
325vfm36 Fig. 10
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.13

Torque settings and sealants
Interface between engine and clutch housing Interface between clutch housing and gearbox casing
Formajoint (510)
325vfm37 Fig. 11 325vfm38 Fig. 12
Nomenclature Nomenclature
3,5 daN.m + Frenetanch (242). 8,4 daN.m.
8,4 daN.m. 19 daN.m.
11,5 daN.m.
B1.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Notes
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.15

Transmision with mechanical clutch
PTO and vehicle drive clutch

Exploded view of clutch housing
29
33
28
27
26
25
24 30
23
29 31
22
21
32
20
19
14
18
8
7 17
6 16
5
11
12
9
9 15
11
10
4
3
2
9
1
10
9
13
325vfm39 Fig. 13
B1.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Nomenclature (Fig. 13)
1 Ball bearing. 18 Ball bearing.

2 Power take-off shaft. 19 O-ring.
3 Vehicle drive release bearing. 20 Lip seal.
4 Ball bearing with outer locking ring. 21 Outer circlip.
5 Power take-off release bearing. 22 Ball bearing.
6 Ball bearing. 23 Inner locking ring.
7 PTO release bearing carrier. 24 Vehicle drive shaft with mechanical doubler.
8 Plug. 25 Lip seal.
9 Bushes. 26 Needle bearing.
10 Pins. 27 Washer.
11 Drive pawls. 28 Locating pin.
12 Forks. 29 Assembly screw.
13 PTO clutch engagement shaft. 30 Pin.
14 Vehicle drive release bearing carrier. 31 Inspection plate.
15 Forward drive clutch engagement shaft. 32 Screws.
16 Release bearing guide. 33 Clutch housing.
17 Screws.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.17

Exploded view of clutch
35
34
36
37
43
38
44
39
40
41
42
47
46
45
325vfm40 Fig. 14
Nomenclature
34 PTO clutch driven plate (3-cylinder engine). 42 Vehicle drive clutch driven plate with sprung hub (3-cylinder
35 PTO clutch driven plate (4-cylinder engine). engine).
36 PTO clutch pressure plate. 43 Vehicle drive clutch driven plate with sprung hub (4-cylinder
engine).
37 Shims.
44 PTO clutch release levers.
38 Vehicle drive clutch diaphragm spring.
45 Vehicle drive clutch release levers.
39 Pin.
46 Clutch body.
40 Spring retainer ring.
47 Screws.
41 Vehicle drive clutch pressure plate.
B1.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal of clutch
(stage 1 page B1.11).
• Disconnect the clutch housing (33) from the engine as
follows:
– Disconnect any pipes, hoses and wiring harnesses that
prevent removal of the housing.
– Make the tractor safe with stands and trolleys.
– Lock the sway action between the front axle and the
cradle.
– Remove the clutch housing (33) from the engine.
• Remove the clutch from the engine flywheel using tool
n° 00 11 314 940.
• Remove the flywheel if the PTO shaft bearing needs to
be replaced.
• Replace or dismantle the clutch (see below). 33
Removing the clutch 325vfm41 Fig. 15
– Place the clutch horizontally in a press.

– Compress the PTO pressure plate using tool
n° 00 11 314 950 (Fig. 16).
– Remove the 3 nuts (50) from the PTO release levers.
– Relax the pressure and remove the springs (51).
– Replace the PTO release levers if necessary. 37
– Compress the diaphragm spring (38) using tool
n° 00 11 314 950.
– Remove the keys(37).
– Release the press.
– Recover the diaphragm (38), the retainer ring (40) and
the pin (39). 50
– Unscrew the 3 screws (52).
– Remove the pressure plate (41) and the vehicle drive
plate. 51
38 52
– Replace the vehicle drive release levers if required.
325vfm42 Fig. 16
52 38 40 37
39 41
325vfm43 Fig. 17
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.19

41
37 38
39 40 38
325vfm44 Fig. 18 325vfm45 Fig. 19
Refitting the clutch

– Refit the vehicle drive and PTO release levers.
– Position the vehicle drive pressure plate, the driven
plate (41), the pin (39), the spring retainer ring (40) and 47
the diaphragm spring (38).
Important: Use part (A) of tool n° 00 11 314 950 to
centre the vehicle drive plate.
– Compress the diaphragm spring (38) and fit the
keys (37).
– Insert the screws (47) during this operation to centre
the keys (Fig. 20).
– Release the press.
– Remove the screws (47) and the tools.
– Refit the PTO pressure plate (36).
– Carry out the adjustment (see next paragraph).
325vfm46 Fig. 20
36
325vfm47 Fig. 21
B1.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB


– Refit the clutch and the PTO driven plate using centring
tool n° 00 11 314 940 (Fig. 22).
– Adjust the release levers using the washers from tool
n° 00 11 314 940.
– Bring the release levers into contact with the washers
by adjusting the screws and nuts (Fig. 22).
– Lock the nuts after adjustment.
Small washer for adjusting the vehicle drive release
levers.
Large washer for adjusting the PTO release levers.
N.B.: On tool n° 00 11 314 940 the centre washer is
used for adjusting the PTO release levers on those
tractors fitted with the clutchless reverser.
Removal/refitting release bearings

(stage 1 page B1.11). 325vfm48 Fig. 22
– Remove the pins (10) to enable removal of the

forks (12) and the release bearings/carrier assembly.
– Replace the release bearings (4), (6) if required. 6
– Refit the bearings using a press (Fig. 24). 4
– Replace the bushes (9) in the housing if necessary. 11
– Lightly grease the bushes and the release bearing/ 9
carrier assembly.
– Refit in the reverse order of dismantling, correctly
locating the drive pins (11) in their respective release
bearing carriers. 12
10
325vfm49 Fig. 23
325vfm50 Fig. 24
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.21

24 16 17 23
23
325vfm51 Fig. 25 325vfm52 Fig. 26
Removal/refitting of vehicle drive shaft

Before removing the release bearings:
– Remove the screws (17) and remove the guide (16)
and shaft (24) assembly.
N.B.: On a tractor not fitted with a doubler, the 24
shaft (24) remains in the housing; it is connected to
the reverser synchroniser. 16
– Recover the circlip (23).
– Use a press to remove the shaft (24) from the
guide (16) (Fig. 27).
– Replace the bearing and seal if necessary; lubricate
them before installing using a press.
– Lubricate the seal (20) and fit it using tool
n° 00 11 315 000.
– Refit in reverse order to removal.
– Take care during installation to align the marks on the
325vfm53 Fig. 27
locking ring with the mark on the guide (16).
– Tighten the screws on the release bearing carrier guide
to 3,5 daN.m.
20
325vfm54 Fig. 28
B1.22 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Adjusting the controls

Forwards motion
– Fit the clutch pedal to its bracket.
– Position the flexible cable on its brackets (53), (54).
– Fit the fork (55) to the cable and the shaft (15).
– Tension the cable using the nuts (56) to provide a
freeplay of around 20 mm at the pedal.
PTO with hydraulic assistance 54
– Fit the lever to its bracket. 20 mm
– Adjust the push-button (57) using the nut (58).
– With the lever engaged, check using feeler gauges for 53
a clearance of 1 mm between the nut (58) and the 55
plunger (59). 56
– Fit the master cylinder to its bracket. 15
– Pull on the shaft (13) to bring the stop in contact with
the pins.
325vfm55 Fig. 29
– Screw the fork (60) in or out to achieve the adjustment
(Fig. 31).
– Then release pressure on the shaft and fit the pin (61).
57
58
59
325vfm56 Fig. 30
13
61
60
325vfm57 Fig. 31
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.23

Mechanical PTO
– Fit the lever to its bracket.
– Attach the cable using the nuts (62), (63).
– Fit the cable (64) to the lever.
– Fit the fork (65) to the cable.
– Engage the lever (66).
the pins.
(Fig. 32).
– Then release pressure on the shaft and fit the pin (67). 64
66
62
13
67
63
65
325vfm2k Fig. 32
B1.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Notes
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.25

Mechanical doubler
Exploded view
28
26
25
27
29
17
16
15
13
24
12
23
11
22
21
20
14
19
7
6
18
10
9
3
8
2
5
1
325vfm58 Fig. 33
B1.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

1 Lip seal. 11 Driven pinion - low range. 21 Shims.

2 Operating shaft. 12 Bush. 22 Roller bearing.
3 Spring. 13 Washer. 23 Washer.
4 Ball. 14 Pin. 24 Dual pinion - low range.
5 Fork. 15 Adjustment shim. 25 Low range shaft.
6 Guide rod. 16 Spacer. 26 Ball bearing.
7 Pin. 17 Reverser input shaft. 27 Screws.
8 Direct drive pinion - high range. 18 Screws. 28 Bearing sleeve.
9 Outer circlip. 19 Cover. 29 Gearbox casing.
10 Synchronizer. 20 O-ring.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.27

Removal/refitting of mechanical doubler

Remove the clutch housing (33) as follows:
– Refer to Chapter "H" for complete cab removal.
Operations 1 to 31.
– Drain the transmission system. 2
cradle.
– Remove the stops and the drive shaft (see relevant
paragraphs).
– Remove the cover (19).
– Disconnect the control lever to enable the shaft (2) to 325vfm60 Fig. 34
be pushed inside the casing.

– Separate the clutch casing (33) from the gearbox
housing (29).
19
325vfm61 Fig. 35
33
29
325vfm59 Fig. 36
B1.28 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

– Remove the bearing (28) from the shaft/pinion

assembly.
– Replace the bearings and pinions if necessary,
ensuring that they are fitted using a press.
– Remove the circlip (9).
– Remove the synchroniser cone unit (10) with its fork.
– Remove the bushes, washers and the spacer.
9
– Align the washer (13) with the pin (14).
– Carry out the following two adjustments.
Important: Ensure that the control arm is correctly
located by pulling it back into the fork driver and fit
the rod (Fig. 34).
10 28
Adjusting the doubler upper motion shaft
– Fit the upper motion shaft without shims and without
the lower shaft. 325vfm62 Fig. 37
Using feeler gauges check the gear set end float (Fig. 39).
– Fit a set of shims corresponding to the end float
measured minus a play of 0,20 mm. 13
For example, if the play measured is 0,80 mm
0,80 – 0,20 = 0,60
In this example, shims with a thickness of 0,60 mm must
be inserted.
14
325vfm63 Fig. 38
0,20 mm
325vfm64 Fig. 39
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.29

Adjusting the doubler lower motion shaft

• Fully dismantle the doubler.
• Refit the clutch housing.
• Ensure correct sequencing of the pinions and bearings
before taking the measurement.
• Using a depth gauge:
– Record dimension "A" (distance between the cover
mounting surface and the bearing outer cage).
– Record dimension "B" (distance between the cover
mounting surface and the shim contact surface). A
• Calculate dimension "C" (corresponds to the play to be
taken up).
C= B –A
• Fit a set of shims corresponding to dimension "C" minus
a clearance of 0,15 ± 0,05. If possible, adjust towards the
maximum end of this tolerance.
For example, if "A" = 8,85 mm and "B" = 7,85 mm 325vfm65 Fig. 40
C = 8,85 – 7,85
C=1
Shim thickness:
1 – 0,10 = 0,90
1 – 0,20 = 0,80
In this example, the thickness of the shims to be installed
should be between 0,80 and 0,90 mm (and as close to B
0,80 mm as possible).
325vfm66 Fig. 41
± 0,05
0,15 mm
325vfm67 Fig. 42
B1.30 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Adjusting the control lever
32
34
31
34
33
325vfm68 Fig. 43
– Fit the lever to its bracket. – Fit the fork end (33) to the operating arm.
– Position the flexible control cable using the – Check that the doubler changes correctly (locking the
clamps (31). fork).
– Fit the fork end (32) to the lever. – Adjust the fork ends and nuts (34) if required.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.31

Mechanical reverser
Exploded view
1
2
3
4
5
2
6
7 19
9
21
12 8
22
10
11
20
23
13
24
25 14
15
16
17
26
27
28
18
42
29
45
48
43
44
46
47
49
30
31
32
33
34
40 35
36
37
38
39
41
325vfm69 Fig. 44
B1.32 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

1 Contactor for direction of travel. 18 Pin. 35 Ball bearing with outer locking ring.
2 Seal 19 Screws. 36 Shims.
3 Pushrod. 20 Gearbox cover. 37 Ball bearing.
4 Ball. 21 O-ring. 38 Seal
5 Screws. 22 Link tube. 39 Bearing sleeve.
6 Spring. 23 Screws. 40 Screws.
7 Locking ball. 24 Gearbox casing. 41 Lip seal (only for tractors without
8 Guide rod. 25 Ball bearing. doubler).
9 Screws. 26 Reverser shaft. 42 Pin.
10 Fork. 27 Bush. 43 Bush.

11 Rotor. 28 Power take-off shaft. 44 Reverse gear pinion.
12 Disc. 29 Synchronizer. 45 Needle bearing.
13 Pin. 30 Shims. 46 Screws.

14 Operating shaft. 31 Ball bearing with outer locking ring. 47 Seal
15 Spring. 32 Shims. 48 Reverse countershaft.
16 Lip seal. 33 Reverse gear pinion. 49 O-ring.

17 Link. 34 Shims.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.33

Dismantling the mechanical reverser

33 33 20
24
325vfm70 Fig. 45
– Gain access to the mechanical reverser as follows: – Remove the stops and the drive shaft (see relevant
– Refer to Chapter "H" for complete cab removal. paragraphs).
Operations 1 to 31. – Separate the clutch housing from the gearbox
– Drain the transmission system. casing (24).
– Disconnect any pipes, hoses and wiring harnesses that – Remove the mechanical doubler if fitted to the tractor.
prevent removal of the housing. – Remove the gearbox cover (20).
– Make the tractor safe with stands and trolleys. – Remove the tow hitch and the linkage casing (see
– Lock the sway action between the front axle and the chapter "E1").
cradle. – Remove the PTO shaft via the rear of the axle (see
– Remove the clutch housing (33) from the engine (see chapter "C1").
relevant paragraphs).
B1.34 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

– Remove the bearing (39).

– Remove the 2 gear change lever guide rods (see
relevant paragraph).
– Remove the interlock and the reverser contactor.
– Remove the guide rod (8) and the fork (10).
39
Important: Any disk removed must always be
replaced by a new one.
– Remove the shaft (26) with the bearings (31), (35), (37)
and the pinion (33).
– Extract the synchroniser cone (29) via the top of the
gearbox.
10
8
325vfm71 Fig. 46
37 35 31
26 33 29
325vfm72 Fig. 47
29
325vfm73 Fig. 48
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.35

13
11
14
15
13
18
325vfm74 Fig. 49 325vfm75 Fig. 50
– Drill and tap the spindle (13), and extract it using an

inertia puller.
– Remove the pin (18) connecting the spindle (14) to the
fork operating arm (11).
– Extract the spindle (14) taking care to recover the 27 31 33
spring (15).
– Remove the fork operating arm (14).
– Dismantle the pinion (33) by removing the bearing
retainer ring (31).
– Extract the bearings from the shaft (26) using a press.
– Replace the bush (27) taking care to refit it lubricated
using a press.
26
325vfm76 Fig. 51
27
26
325vfm77 Fig. 52
B1.36 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Refitting the mechanical reverser

• Adjust the pinion (33) on its bearings (see next
paragraph).
• Refit the shaft using a press with:
37 33 30
– The washer (30).
– The bearings spaced by the thickness of the shims as
determined.
– The bearing (37).
– The pinion (33).
• Reinstall the assembly in reverse order to removal.
• Fit the shaft (13) using Scelbloc (648).
• Fit the pin (18) attaching the shaft (14) to the fork 36
operating arm (11) using leverage.
• Fit the bearing and tighten the screws coated with
Frenetanch (242) to 3,5 daN.m.
325vfm78 Fig. 53
13
325vfm79 Fig. 54
14 11 18
325vfm80 Fig. 55
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.37

Adjusting the pinion (33) on the

bearings (31), (35)
• Fit the bearing (35) in the pinion (33). 31 35
• Fit a set of shims "A" corresponding to:
– The thickness of the shims removed earlier
– A shim of thickness 0,50 mm (only used while taking
measurements).
• Fit the bearing (31) in the pinion.
• Place the assembly in a press and apply gentle
pressure to the two inner bearing cages (Fig. 57).
• Place the pinion (33) in contact with a bearing retainer
ring.
• Position a dial gauge set to 0 on the pinion.
• Pull the pinion towards the locking ring for the other A 33
bearing and record dimension "B".
taken up). 325vfm81 Fig. 56
C=A–B
• Fit a set of shims corresponding to dimension "C" plus a
play of 0,05 ± 0,05. If possible, adjust towards the
Example: if"A" = 1,6 mm (1,1 + 0,5) and "B" = 0,75 mm
C = 1,6 – 0,75
C = 0,85
Shim thickness:
0,85 + 0 = 0,85
0,85 + 0,10 = 0,95
should be between 0,85 and 0,95 mm (and as close to
325vfm82 Fig. 57
± 0,05
0,05 mm
325vfm83 Fig. 58
B1.38 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

47
45
44
46
325vfm84 Fig. 59
– Fit the lever to its bracket. – Check that reverser change operates correctly (change
– Position the flexible control cable using the fork locking).
clamps (44). – Adjust the fork ends and nuts (47) if required.
– Fit the fork end (45) to the lever.
– Fit the fork end (46) to the operating arm.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.39

Transmission with hydraulic reverser and doubler
Power take-off clutch

Exploded view of clutch housing
22
25
26
18
17
16
14 27
13 20
12 21
11 19
22 24
23
15
5
8
4 9
3 8
2
1
10
325vfm85 Fig. 60
B1.40 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

1 Ball bearing. 11 Lip seal. 21 Adjustment shim.

2 Power take-off shaft. 12 Inner circlip. 22 Assembly screw.
3 Power take-off release bearing. 13 Ball bearing. 23 Screws.
4 Ball bearing. 14 Release bearing guide. 24 Inspection plate.
5 PTO release bearing carrier. 15 Screws. 25 Drive shaft with fast forward clutch bell
6 Bushes. 16 O-rings. housing.
7 Pins. 17 Supply tube. 26 Clutch housing.

8 Rotor. 18 Supply plate. 27 Pin.
9 Fork. 19 O-ring.
10 PTO clutch engagement shaft. 20 Rings.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.41

Exploded view of PTO clutch
28
30
33
29
32
31
325vfm86 Fig. 61
Nomenclature
28 PTO clutch driven plate (3-cylinder engine). 31 PTO clutch release levers.
29 PTO clutch driven plate (4-cylinder engine). 32 Screws.
30 PTO clutch pressure plate. 33 Clutch body with sprung hub.
B1.42 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal of clutch
(stage 1’ page B1.11).
– Disconnect the clutch housing (26) from the engine as
follows:
cradle.
– Remove the clutch from the engine flywheel using tool
n° 00 11 314 940.
– Remove the flywheel if the PTO shaft bearing needs to
be replaced.
– Replace or dismantle the clutch (see below). 26
Removing the clutch 325vfm87 Fig. 62

– Compress the PTO clutch pressure plate (30) using
tool n° 00 11 314 950.
– Remove the 3 nuts (36) from the PTO release levers. 30 36
– Relax the pressure and remove the springs (37).
– Replace the PTO release levers if necessary.

– Refit the PTO release levers.
– Refit the PTO pressure plate
– Carry out the adjustment (see next paragraph).
37
325vfm88 Fig. 63
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.43


– Refit the clutch and the PTO driven plate using centring
tool n° 00 11 314 940.
– Adjust the release levers using the middle-sized plate
from tool n° 00 11 314 940 (Fig. 64).
– Place the levers in contact with the plate by adjusting
the nuts.
– Lock the nuts after adjustment.
N.B.: On tool n° 00 11 314 940 the small and large
plates are used for the adjustment of the road and
PTO clutch release levers on tractors fitted with
mechanical clutches.
Removal/refitting of clutch release bearing

– Extract the pins (7) to remove the fork (9) and the
clutch release bearing/carrier assembly. 325vfm89 Fig. 64
– Replace the bearing if required.

– Refit the bearing using a press.
– Replace the bushes in the housing if required. 38 15
– Remove the feed plate and tubes (17).
– Remove the screws (15) and extract the guide 17 7
assembly using the tapped holes (38) (Fig. 65).
325vfm90 Fig. 65
B1.44 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

– Recover the shims behind the guide.

– Replace the bearing (13) and the seal (11) if required.
– Press in the bearing and seal after lubricating them.
Important: Always replace O-rings and ring seals (20).
N.B.: After fitting the retainers to the shaft, compress
them and lubricate generously fo the installation of
the spool valve.
13
– Carry out the adjustment of the guide (see next 11
paragraph).
20
– Tighten the screws (15) on the release bearing carrier
guide to 3,5 daN.m.
– Lightly oil the bushes and the release bearing (3) /
carrier (5) assembly. 15
– Refit in the reverse order of dismantling, correctly
locating the drive pins (8) in their respective release
bearing carriers.
325vfm91 Fig. 66
3
5
8 8
325vfm92 Fig. 67
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.45

Adjusting the release bearing guide

– Measure dimension "A" (distance between the bearing
carrier mating surface and the shoulder) using a depth
gauge. A
– Measure dimension "B" (distance between the bearing
carrier mating surface and the bearing outer race) using
a depth gauge.
– Calculate dimension "C" (corresponds to the play to be
taken up).
C=B–A
– Fit a set of shims corresponding to dimension "C"
minus a clearance of 0,05 ± 0,05.
If possible, adjust towards the maximum end of this
tolerance.
325vfm93 Fig. 68
325vfm94 Fig. 69
B1.46 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

For example, if "A" = 5,37 mm and "B" = 5,75 mm

C = 5,75 – 5,37
C = 0,38 0,05 ± 0,05 mm
Shim thickness:
0,38 – 0 = 0,38
0,38 – 0,10 = 0,28
325vfm95 Fig. 70
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.47


PTO with hydraulic assistance
– Adjust the push-button (57) using the nut (58).
With the lever engaged, check using feeler gauges for a
clearance of 1 mm between the nut (58) and the
plunger (59).
– Fit the master cylinder to its bracket.
– Pull on the shaft (13) to bring the stop in contact with 57
the pins.
(Fig. 72).
59
325vfm56 Fig. 71
13
61
60
325vfm57 Fig. 72
B1.48 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Mechanical PTO
– Attach the cable using the nuts (62), (63).
– Fit the cable (64) to the lever.
– Fit the fork (65) to the cable.
– Engage the lever (66).
the pins.
(Fig. 73).
66
62
13
67
63
65
325vfm2k Fig. 73
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.49

Hydraulic reverser and doubler

Exploded view of upper shaft (fast forward clutch)
32
40
43
31
39
42
38
41
37
36
30
35
29
34
28
24
23
27
26
14
25
13
33
22
18
9
21
17
12
20
16
11
19
15
10
6
5
7
3
4
1
2
325vfm96 Fig. 74
B1.50 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

1 Screws. 22 Blanking plate.

2 Release bearing guide. 23 Locking ring.
3 O-ring. 24 Cup washer.
4 Outer circlip. 25 Locking ring.
5 Adjustment shim. 26 Bush.
6 Ball bearing with outer locking ring. 27 Square section seal.
7 Rings. 28 Outer circlip.
8 Drive shaft with fast forward clutch bell housing. 29 Fast forward clutch hub.
9 Lip seal. 30 Clutch housing drive shaft.
10 Bush. 31 Bush.
11 Bush. 32 Lip seal.
12 Washer. 33 Screws.
13 Needle bearing. 34 Bearing sleeve.
14 Inner circlip. 35 O-ring.
15 Square section seal. 36 Ball bearing.
16 Piston guide. 37 Shims.
17 Square section seal. 38 Inner circlip.
18 Piston. 39 Shims.
19 Cup washer. 40 Outer circlip.
20 Spring. 41 Input shaft coupling sprocket.
21 Disk and back plates. 42 Seal.
43 Gearbox casing.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.51

Exploded view of lower shaft (Slow forward and reverse clutch)
43
91
92
90
82
93
88
89
81
83
79
88
78
87
61
86
62
77
80
85
76
63
66
84
64
75
67
74
65
68
73
69
67
72
70
66
71
71
65
70
72
64
69
73
63
68
74
62
75
61
60
55
56
57
58
59
54
53
49
47
46
45
44
52
51
50
48
325vfm97 Fig. 75
B1.52 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

43 Gearbox casing. 69 Cup washer.

44 Screws. 70 Spring.
45 Supply plate. 71 Cup washer.
46 O-rings. 72 Piston.
47 Supply tube. 73 Square section seal.
48 Screws. 74 Piston guide.
49 Spool valve head. 75 Square section seal.
50 O-ring. 76 Plug.
51 Rings. 77 Lower shaft with slow forward and reverse clutch bell housing.
52 Shims. 78 Washer.
53 Roller bearing. 79 Roller bearing.
54 Washer. 80 Screws.
55 Lower shaft drive pinion with cam for air pump. 81 Bearing sleeve.
56 O-ring. 82 O-ring.
57 Air pump. 83 Cover.
58 Bracket. 84 Screws.
59 Screws. 85 Pin.
60 Outer circlip. 86 Washer.
61 Ball bearing. 87 Shims.
62 Outer circlip. 88 Conical bearings.
63 Inner circlip. 89 Reverse counter shaft pinion.
64 Ball bearing. 90 Reverse countershaft.
65 Clutch hub. 91 Screws.
66 Locking ring. 92 Seal
67 Blanking plate. 93 O-ring.
68 Disks and back plates.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.53

Removal of hydraulic clutches

49 51 57
325vfm98 Fig. 76
Remove the clutch housing as follows:

Operations 1 to 31.
– Drain the transmission system.
cradle.
– Disconnect the clutch housing from the engine.
– Remove the PTO clutch release bearing (see relevant 55
paragraphs). 33
– Remove the clutch lubrication/control plates and tubes.
– Remove the pump (57).
– Remove the spool valve head (49) and ring seals (51).
– Disconnect the clutch housing from the gearbox. 325vfm99 Fig. 77
– Extract the pinion (55) with the inner bearing race (33)
using a bearing puller.
B1.54 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

– Withdraw the upper shaft with the clutch assembly.

– Recover the bush (26) and remove the circlip (28).
– Drive out the hub (29) using a mallet. 29 28 26
325vfm0a Fig. 78
– Remove the lower shaft with the clutch bearing

assembly (81). 33
– Remove the bearing (81) if required. 30
– Extract the reverse gear countershaft after having
removed the screw on the left side of the box..
– Remove the screws (33).
– Withdraw the shaft (30) with the bearing (34).
34
81
325vfm0b Fig. 79
N.B.: To remove the coupling sprocket (41) and the

ring seal, remove the gearbox cover and the PTO
shaft (see chapter "C1").
41
325vfm0c Fig. 80
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.55

Removal/refitting of the upper shaft

After having removed the shaft (8). 23 24
22
– Remove the locking ring (23).
– Remove the plate (22), the disks and back plates.
– Compress the ring (24) using tools n° 00 11 314 960
and n° 60 05 006 153.
– Withdraw the locking ring (25).
– Recover the cup washers and the spring.
– Remove the piston (18) using a jet of compressed air.
– Recover the guide (16).
– Replace the seals if required.
– Remove the flexible ring, the rings and the
bearing (13). 8
– Extract the bearings (10), (11) and the lip seal if
required. 25
– Refit the lubricated seal using tools n° 00 11 314 970
325vfm0d Fig. 81
and n° 00 11 314 980 (Fig. 83).
– Refit the two bearings, pre-assembled using tool
n° 00 11 314 980 (Fig. 83).
– Refit the needle roller bearing.
– Refit the guide and the piston using lubricated seals.
– Refit the spring system in the reverse order of
dismantling.
25
18
16 13
325vfm0e Fig. 82
10
11
325vfm0f Fig. 83
B1.56 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

30 32 38
40
39
34
36
31
325vfm0g Fig. 84 325vfm0h Fig. 85
After having removed the shaft (30) with the bearing (34).
– Remove the circlip (40) and the shims (39).
– Extract the shaft from the bearing using a press.
– Replace the bush (31) if required.
– Replace the seal (32) if required, refit it using a press
using lubrication (Fig. 86).
– Remove the ring (38) and recover the shims.
– Replace the bearing (36) if required; install using a
press (Fig. 86).
– Refit the bearing in the reverse order for dismantling
and carry out the following adjustments (Fig. 87).
325vfm0i Fig. 86
325vfm0j Fig. 87
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.57

Adjusting the bearing in the sleeve (34)

– Fit the circlip (38) in the sleeve without the bearing.
– Ensure that the circlip is fully engaged in the slot
towards the top (Fig. 88).
38
– Position the depth gauge set to 0 against the circlip
(Fig. 88).
– Record dimension "A" (distance between the circlip
and the bearing thrust surface).
– Record dimension "B" (thickness of circlip).
– Record dimension "C" (bearing depth).
– Calculate dimension "D" (corresponds to the play to be
taken up)
D=A–B–C
– Position a set of shims corresponding to dimension "D".
Example if "A" = 26,5 mm, "B" = 3 mm and 34
"C" = 23 mm
325vfm0k Fig. 88
D = 26,5 – 3 – 23
D = 0,50
In this example, shims with a thickness of 0,50 mm must
be inserted.
325vfm0l Fig. 89
0 mm
325vfm0m Fig. 90
B1.58 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Adjusting the shaft (30) in the bearing

– Fit the bearing with the shim thickness determined
above.
– Fit the shaft in the bearing.
– Fit the circlip (40) without shims to the shaft (30).
– Ensure that the circlip is fully engaged in the slot
towards the top (Fig. 91). 30
– Position the depth gauge set to 0 against the circlip 40
(Fig. 91).
– Record dimension "E" (distance between the circlip
and the bearing inner race).
– Record dimension "F" (thickness of circlip).
– Calculate dimension "G" (corresponds to the play to be
taken up).
G=E–F
– Position a set of shims corresponding to
dimension "G". 325vfm0n Fig. 91
For example, if "E" = 4,60 mm and "F" = 1,75 mm

G = 4,60 – 1,75
G = 2,85
In this example, shims with a thickness of 2,85 mm must E
be inserted.
325vfm0o Fig. 92
0 mm
325vfmp Fig. 93
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.59

Removing/refitting the lower shaft

After removing the lower shaft. 60 65 65 79
– Extract the hubs (65) using a bearing puller (Fig. 95).
– Replace the bearings (61) if necessary, using a press.
– Replace the bearing inner bush (79) if required, using a
press.
Important: Remember to replace the washer (78)
behind the bush (79).
Dismantling the clutches

– Remove the locking ring (66).
– Remove the plate (67), the disks and back plates.
61 61 78
325vfm0q Fig. 94
61 79
65
325vfm0r Fig. 95
67 66
325vfm0s Fig. 96
B1.60 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

– Compress the ring (69) (spring 70) using tools

n° 00 11 314 960 and n° 60 05 006 153 (Fig. 97).
– Withdraw the circlip (62) and the bearing (64).
– Recover the cup washers and the spring.
– Remove the piston (72) using a jet of compressed air.
– Recover the guide (74).
– Replace the seals if required.
– Refit the guide and the piston using lubricated seals.
– Refit the spring system in the reverse order of
dismantling. 72
– Position the hub, the plate (67), the disks and back
plates.
Important: New discs must be soaked in a bath of
transmission oil for one hour.
– Slide the shaft (77) with the corresponding ferrule onto
the back plates.
325vfm0t Fig. 97
– Holding the assembly, turn it upside down.
– Fit the locking ring.
74 64 62 69 70
325vfm0u Fig. 98
77
67
325vfm0v Fig. 99
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.61

Removal/refitting of reverse countershaft

After having removed the shaft (90).
– Remove the screw from the end of the shaft.
– Recover the washer (86) and the shims (87).
– Replace the bearings if required.
Important: Mark the two bearing cones if they are to 90 86
be removed and refitted later.
– Adjust the bearings.
– Replace the seal (93) and refit after lubrication.
– Tighten the screw attaching the shaft (90) to the casing
to 8 daN.m.
93 87
Shimming of tapered roller bearings
– Insert the number of shims found on dismantling under
the washer (86).
325vfm0w Fig. 100
– Tighten screw (84) to 3,5 daN.m.
– Check a dynamic friction torque of 0,35 daN.m using a
spring balance (Fig. 101).
– Add or remove shims to get the torque within tolerance.
– Tighten the screw (84) coated with Frenetanch (242) to
3,5 daN.m.
84
325vfm2l Fig. 101
B1.62 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Refitting hydraulic clutches

– Refit in reverse order to removal while observing the 28 29
following instructions.
– Tighten the bearing screws after coating with 26
Frenetanch (242) to 3,5 daN.m.
– Fit the hub (29) with the ring (28) and the collar (26).
– Install on the hub, the locking ring (23), the plate (22),
the disks and back plates.
transmission oil for one hour.
– Slip the shaft (8) with its shroud onto the back plates.
– Fit the retaining ring (23).
Important: Always replace seals and retainers.
N.B.: After fitting the retainers to the shaft, compress
them and lubricate generously fo the installation of
the spool valve. 325vfm0x Fig. 102
– Fit the pinion (55), the washer (54) and the bearing
inner race (53).
– Refit the clutch housing.
– Carry out the necessary adjustments (see next
paragraph and details of adjusting the release bearing
carrier guide in the chapter "PTO clutch").
23 22 8
325vfm0y Fig. 103
53
54
55
325vfm0z Fig. 104
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.63

Adjusting the lower shaft

– Check that the bearing (53) is fully inserted.
– Measure dimension "H" (distance between the seating
face and the bearing outer cage) using a depth gauge.
– Measure dimension "I" (distance between the seat of
the spool valve head and the shoulder) using a depth
gauge.
– Calculate dimension "J" (corresponds to the play to be H
taken up)
J=H–I
– Insert a set of shims corresponding to dimension "J"
minus a play of 0,15 ± 0,05.
If possible, adjust towards the maximum end of this
tolerance.
For example, if "H" = 9,92 mm and "I" = 7,62 mm 53
J = 9,92 – 7,62
325vfm1a Fig. 105
J = 2,30
Shim thickness:
2,30 – 0,10 = 2,20
2,30 – 0,20 = 2,10
In this example, the thickness of the shims to be installed I
325vfm1b Fig. 106
± 0,05
0,15 mm
325vfm1c Fig. 107
B1.64 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Notes
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.65

Gearbox
Gear casing
Exploded view
2
3
1
4
5
6
7
8
19
18 9
10
17
21 11
22
12
16 13
20 14 19
23 15
31
18
30
29
23
24 22
25
28
27
36 26
37
38
39
40
41 32
33
34
35
325vfm1d Fig. 108
B1.66 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Gearbox
1 Transmission casing. 22 Disc.

2 Screws. 23 Pin.
3 Gear casing cover. 24 Second gear driven pinion.
4 Inner circlip. 25 Bush.
5 Shims. 26 Third gear driven pinion.
6 Ball bearing. 27 Third and fourth gear synchroniser.
7 Input shaft drive pinions for 4th, 3rd, 2nd and 1st gears). 28 Third and fourth gear fork.
8 Washer. 29 Third and fourth gear selector.
9 Needles. 30 Third and fourth gear guide rod.
10 Bush (needle seat). 31 Locking plunger.
11 Forward intermediate shaft with range-change drive pinion. 32 Ball bearing.
12 Roller bearing. 33 Double pinion (driven pinion - 4th gear and driven pinion -
13 Washer. reverse).
14 First gear driven pinion. 34 Spacer.
15 Bush. 35 Inner circlip.
16 First and second gear synchroniser. 36 Ball bearing.

17 First and second gear fork. 37 Shims.
18 Screws. 38 Bearing sleeve.
19 Lock. 39 Ball bearing with outer locking ring.

20 First and second gear guide rod. 40 Shims.
21 First and second gear selector. 41 Outer circlip.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.67

Gearbox
Range change casing

Exploded view
54 44
53 47 45
52 46 43
51
50 42
49
66
65
64
63
59
58
1
18
48
56
23
57 60
55 19
68
69
61 67
62
22
70
71
18
31
77
23
72
19 73
78
79
74
22
75
76
80
325vfm1e Fig. 109
B1.68 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Gearbox
1 Transmission casing. 62 Range I selector.

42 Screw - plug. 63 Rear intermediate shaft with range I drive pinion.
43 Screws. 64 Ball bearing.
44 Plug. 65 Shims.
45 Range change casing cover. 66 Inner circlip.
46 Flat seal. 67 Output shaft with input gear.
47 Speed sensor. 68 Shim.
48 Range III contactor. 69 Taper roller bearings.
49 Ball bearing. 70 Range I driven pinion.
50 Washer. 71 Nut.
51 Needle bearing. 72 Washer.
52 Spacer. 73 Needle bearing.
53 Needle bearing. 74 Double pinion (driven for ranges I and II, driving for range I).
54 Double pinion (driven and driving for ranges I and II). 75 Bush.
55 Spacer washer. 76 Sliding gear for ranges II and III.
56 Needle bearing. 77 Fork for ranges II and III.
57 Spacer. 78 Ranges II and III guide shaft.
58 Range I driven pinion. 79 Selector for ranges II and III.
59 Sliding gear for range I. 80 Hub for ranges II and III.
60 Fork for range I.
61 Range I guide shaft.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.69

Gearbox
Removing the shafts

• Remove the casings and covers from the gearbox as
3 45
follows:
Operations 1 to 31.
• Disconnect any pipes, hoses and wiring harnesses that
cradle.
– Disconnect the clutch housing (see relevant paragraph
depending on type of clutch).
– Remove the covers (3), (45).
– Remove the sensors (47), (48).
325vfm1f Fig. 110
• Remove the tow hitch and the linkage casing (see
chapter "E1").
– Remove the PTO shaft via the rear of the axle (see
chapter "C1").
• Remove the mechanical doubler and reverser on those 47
tractors so equipped (see relevant paragraphs).
• Remove the hydraulic doubler and reverser on those
tractors so equipped (see relevant paragraphs).
• Remove the gearchange guide shafts on tractors fitted
48
with hydraulic doubler and reverser.
• Remove the range change guide shafts.
• Extract the fork (60) for range I.
325vfm1g Fig. 111
60
325vfm1h Fig. 112
B1.70 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Gearbox
7 6
4
5
6
325vfm1i Fig. 113 325vfm1j Fig. 114
Input shaft
– Remove the input shaft (7).
63
– Remove the bearing (6) and the shims (5).
– Remove the flexible ring (4).
Rear intermediate shaft

• Remove the shaft (63) by striking its end using an
appropriate tool (Fig. 115).
• Remove:
– The sliding gear (59).
– The pinions (54), (58).
– The spacers.
– The needle roller bearings.
49
– Remove the bearing (49).
– Replace the bearing (64) if required; install using a
press. 325vfm1k Fig. 115
50 49 54 58 59 64
325vfm1l Fig. 116
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.71

Gearbox
Output shaft
Important: To dismantle the two lower shafts
(intermediate front and outpt shaft) the flared tubes 76 74 70
and the rear crown wheel/differential assembly have
to be removed (see chapter "C1").
• Remove the fork (77) for ranges II and III.
• Lock the input shaft using the differential and a rear
wheel drive shaft planet gear.
• Loosen nut (71) using a castle wrench.
Important: All nuts (71) removed must be replaced
with new items.
• Withdraw the output shaft through the rear axle
compartment.
Important: Make sure that you recover all the 77 71
needles (9).
• Remove: 325vfm1m Fig. 117
– The needle rollers (9).

– The washer (8).
– The hub (80), noting its orientation. 9 8 72
– The bush (75).
– The nut (71).
– The bearing cone for the bearing near the nut.
• Remove the bearing cups if required using a suitable
tool.
Important: Any bearing cup removed must be
replaced along with its cone (impacts occuring during
removal may cause failure initiation). 80 75
• Remove the bearing cone at the input pinion end using 325vfm1n Fig. 118
a bearing puller.
Important: Mark the two bearing cones if they are to
B1.72 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Gearbox
Front intermediate shaft

• Remove the circlip (41).
• Recover the shims.
• Remove the sleeve (38) with its bearing.
• Retrieve the shims (37).
• Remove the shaft (11) by striking its end using an
appropriate tool.
• Remove:
– The double pinion (33) with its bearings and spacer.
33
– The pinions (26), (24), (14).
– The collars.
– The bush (10).
Important: The collar (10) is used when replacing the
26 24 14
needles.
• If nexcessary, replace the roller bearing (12), installing it 325vfm1o Fig. 119
using a press.
38 37 12 11
41 13 10
325vfm1p Fig. 120
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.73

Gearbox
Refitting the shafts

10 9
Front intermediate shaft
• Replace any defective components.
• Assemble on the shaft (11) the needles (9) coated in
grease using the collar (10).
N.B.: When installing the output shaft, the collar (10)
will be pushed into its housing.
• Engage the washer (13) on the shaft in contact with the
bearing (12).
• Assemble:
– The pinion (14) and its collar.
– The synchroniser ring (16).
– The pinions (24), (26) and their collar.
11
– The synchroniser ring (27).
– The double pinion (33) and its bearing. 325vfm1q Fig. 121
• Engage the shaft by tapping its end using a mallet.
• Fit the spacer (34), the ring (35) and the bearing (36)
via the front of the casing.
35 16 13 12
• Carry out the necessary adjustments (see next
paragraph).
• Position the shim sets "G" and "H" on each side of
bearing (39).
• Fit the circlip (41).
• Position the forks in the sliding gears.
41 39 34
325vfm1r Fig. 122
26 14
24
27 33
36
325vfm1s Fig. 123
B1.74 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Gearbox
Adjustment of intermediate front shaft

Important: Fit the output shaft (see next paragraph) in
order to be able to carry out the adjustment which
involves 2 stages.
– Fit the circlip (41) to the shaft without the bearing
sleeve (38), the bearing (39) and the shims.
– Ensure that the entire assembly is butted against the
shaft pinion (11).
– Ensure that the circlip is fully engaged in the groove
forwards (Fig. 125).
– Position the depth gauge set to 0 against the circlip
(Fig. 125).
– Record dimension "A" (distance between the circlip
and the inner bearing cage (36)).
38 39
– Record dimension "B" (thickness of circlip).
– Record dimension "C" (thickness of bearing (39)).
325vfm1t Fig. 124
– Calculate dimension "D" (corresponds to the play to be
taken up).
D=A–B–C
– Record the thickness of shims corresponding to 41
dimension "D" and continue the adjustment.
Example if "A" = 25,10 mm, "B" = 1,90 mm and
"C" = 19 mm
D = 25,20 –1,90 – 19
D = 4,30
Important: Using "D" as a basis, then determine the 11
thickness of shims to be inserted on each side of the
bearing (39).
325vfm1u Fig. 125
36
325vfm1v Fig. 126
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.75

Gearbox
• Between the hub (80) and the pinion (74), insert a feeler
gauge 0,30 mm thick using a set of feelers (Fig. 127).
• Ensure that the assembly is butted against the output 74
shaft (0,30 shim tight).
• Fit the bearing sleeve (38) without its bearing and
tighten to 3,5 daN..
• Position the depth gauge set to 0 tight against the
bearing locking ring in the bearing sleeve (Fig. 128).
• Record dimension "E" (distance between the face and
the bearing inner cage (36)).
• Record dimension "F" (distance between the locking
ring and the bearing face on the gearbox side) (Fig. 129).
• Calculate:
– Dimension "G" (thickness of shim to be inserted
behind the bearing (39)) (Fig. 129).
– Dimension "H" (thickness of shim to be inserted in 80
front of the bearing (39)) (Fig. 129).
325vfm1w Fig. 127
G=E–F
H=D–G
– Withdraw the feeler gauges. 36
– Position the shim sets "G" and "H" on each side of
bearing (39) (Fig. 129).
– Fit the circlip (41) (Fig. 129).
– Check that the clearance between the hub (80) and the
pinion (74) is 0,25 ± 0,05 mm using feeler gauges.
Example if "E" = 16,90 mm, "F" = 14,15 mm and E
"D" = 4,30 mm
G = 16,90 –14,15 38
G = 2,75
H = 4,30 – 2,75
H = 1,55
In this example, the shim thickness:
– Behind the bearing (39) should be 2,75 mm.
325vfm1x Fig. 128
– In front of the bearing (39) should be 1,55 mm.
B1.76 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Gearbox
H 41 39
“F”
± 0,05
0,25 mm
80 74
G
325vfm1y Fig. 129
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.77

Gearbox
Output shaft
Replace any defective components.
Reminder: If the taper bearing seats have been
dismantled they must be replaced as must the
castellated nut (71). 11
9
Important: If the taper roller bearings (69) or the
output shaft are to be replaced. Adjust pinion
meshing (see chapter "C1").
• Confirm that the bush (10) and the needles (9) are fitted
to the shaft (11).
• Position the bearing cone (gearbox end) in its seat.
• Assemble:
– The washer (8).
– The hub (80) and its sliding gear. 8 80
– The needle bearings and the collar.
– The pinion (74). 325vfm1z Fig. 130

– The nut (71).
– The pinion (70). 9 72
• Engage the shaft by tapping its end using a mallet.
Important: Accurately align the output shaft as it is
inserted into the front intermediate shaft. The
bush (10) will be pushed by the output shaft and the
needles will then be in contact woth both shafts.
• Offer up the nut (71).
• Check a turning torque of between 4 and 6 daN using a
spring balance without the differential crown wheel
(Fig. 132).
• Tighten or loosen the nut to bring the value within the
tolerance.
• Lock the nut by bending the lock washer. 10 69
• Position the fork in the sliding gear.
325vfm2a Fig. 131
70 71 74
325vfm2b Fig. 132
B1.78 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Gearbox
Input shaft
7
• Refit the bearing sleeve with (see corresponding
chapter):
– The synchroniser on tractors with mechanical reverser.
– The coupling pinion on tractors with clutchless reverser.
• Fit the shaft (7) with its bearing.
Adjusting the input shaft

– Ensure that the shaft is fully forward.
– Position the circlip (4) in the casing without shims.
– Ensure that the circlip is fully engaged in the rear of its
groove.
– Measure dimension "A" (space between the circlip and
the bearing outer cage) using feeler gauges.
– Insert a shim set corresponding to dimension "A" minus
a play of 0,20 ± 0,05 mm. If possible, adjust towards the 325vfm2c Fig. 133
– Check using feeler gauges.
For example, if "A" = 0,85 mm
0,85 – 0,15 = 0,70
0,85 – 0,25 = 0,60
should be between 0,60 and 0,70 mm (and as close to A
325vfm2d Fig. 134
± 0,05
0,20 mm
325vfm2e Fig. 135
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.79

Gearbox
Rear intermediate shaft

• Replace any defective components. 0,20
± 0,05
mm
4 49 50
• Fit the bearing (49) in contact with the circlip (4).
• Assemble:
– The collars.
• Engage the shaft fitted with the bearing (64) by tapping
its end using a mallet.
Adjusting the rear intermediate shaft

– Ensure that the shaft is fully forward.
– Position the circlip (66) in the casing without shims.
– Ensure that the circlip is fully engaged in the rear of its
groove. 325vfm2f Fig. 136
– Measure dimension "A" (space between the circlip and

the bearing outer cage) using feeler gauges.
54 58
– Insert a shim set corresponding to dimension "A" minus
a play of 0,20 ± 0,05 mm. If possible, adjust towards the
– Check using feeler gauges.
For example, if "A" = 0,50 mm
0,50 – 0,15 = 0,35
0,50 – 0,25 = 0,25
should be between 0,25 and 0,35 mm (and as close to 64
0,35 mm as possible). 59
325vfm2g Fig. 137
66
325vfm2h Fig. 138
B1.80 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Gearbox
Refitting the gearbox controls

– Fit all the controls in the reverse order of dismantling.
Important: Remember to fit the locking plunger (31)
between the two guide shafts (gear and ranges).
– Tighten the lockpin (19) to 8 daN.m.
– Insert the screw (18).
– Engage a gear ratio.
– Position the fork so that it is free to move in the sliding
gear when the gear is engaged. 19
– Half tighten the screw (18).
– Engage the other gear ratio. 31
– Check the clearance between the fork and the 18
operating sleeve.
– Tighten screw (18) to 10,5 daN.m.
– Re-join the tractor and refit the casings/housings (see
– Bond the casings using Formajoint (510).
Dismantling the gearbox cover

– Remove the gearbox cover plate (82). 31
– Remove the fork operating arms (84).
– Remove the operating arm pins (85).
– Remove the shafts (86).
325vfm2i Fig. 139
83
84 86
85
82
86
84
85
325vfm2j Fig. 140
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B1.81

Notes
B1.82 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

B2
HYDRAULIC PART
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

2 pump hydraulic system
Nomenclature for mechanical reverser and doubler system

Nomenclature (Fig. 1 and 2)
1 Reservoir. 7 4-wheel drive solenoid valve.
2 160 micron filter. 8 Pressure regulator.
3 10,8 cm³ pump. 9 Differential lock solenoid valve.
4 15 micron high pressure filter. 10 Rear PTO clutch spool valve.
5 Steering unit "OSPC 80 ON". 11 Rear PTO clutch actuator.
6 Steering actuator. 12 Oil cooler.
Nomenclature for hydraulic reverser and doubler system

1 Reservoir. 13 Proportional forward solenoid valve (fast).
2 160 micron filter. 14 Proportional reverse solenoid valve.
3 10,8 cm³ pump. 15 Accumulator (9 bar).
4 15 micron high pressure filter. 16 Pressure connector.
5 Steering unit "OSPC 80 ON". 17 Transmission oil pressure sensor.
6 Steering actuator. 18 Differential lock solenoid valve.
7 "safety patch" solenoid valve. 19 Rear PTO clutch spool valve.
8 Flow divider. 20 Rear PTO clutch actuator.
9 Low pressure 10 micron filter. 21 Oil cooler.
10 4-wheel drive solenoid valve. 22 Lubrication solenoid valve.
11 Pressure regulator. 23 5 bar valve.
12 Proportional forward solenoid valve (slow). 24 Clutchless reverser hydraulic unit.
B2.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Schematic diagram of hydraulic reverser and mechanical doubler
6
5
7
18 bar
8
9
200 bar 200 bar
190 bar 0-36 l/min
150 bar
10
11 12 12-48 l/min
115 bar
3,5 bar 15 µm
220 bar
10,8 cm³ 19 cm³
2
3 160 µm
398vfm30 Fig. 1
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B2.3

Location of reverser and mechanical doubler components
10
12
3
10
4
11
2
5
9
8
7
6
12
398vfm46 Fig. 2
B2.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Hydraulic schematic of hydraulic reverser and doubler
6
5
18 bar 12 13 14 15
3,5 bar 10
9 11 16
17
10 µm
24 18
7
200 bar 200 bar 190 bar 0-36 l/min
19
6 l/min 8
20
115 bar
21
22
3,5 bar 15 µm
5 bar
4 23
10,8 cm³ 19 cm³
2
3
160 µm
398vfm31 Fig. 3
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B2.5

Location of hydraulic reverser and doubler components
23
19
21
3
19 4
20
22
2
5
15
7
18
14
13
12
11
10
24
9
21
398vfm47 Fig. 4
B2.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Schematic diagram of hydraulic reverser and mechanical doubler
18 bar
8
200 bar 200 bar 0-36 l/min

190 bar
T
150 bar
4
115 bar 6
0,6
0,9
0,8
3,5 bar 15 µm
19 cm³ 14,4 cm³ 10,8 cm³
3 190 bar 12-38 l/min

2
160 µm
10-36 l/min
398vfm32 Fig. 5
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B2.7

5
4
2
7
8
9
398vfm48 Fig. 6
B2.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Hydraulic schematic of hydraulic reverser and doubler
18 bar
12 13 14 15
3,5 bar 10
9 11 16
17
10 µm
21 18
8
200 bar 200 bar 0-36 l/min
190 bar
19
6 l/min 7 T
20
115 bar
6
0,6
5
0,9
0,8
5 bar
4
3,5 bar 15 µm
19 cm³ 14,4 cm³ 10,8 cm³
3 2 190 bar 12-38 l/min
160 µm
10-36 l/min
398vfm33 Fig. 7
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B2.9

4
19
19
20
2
5
15
5
8
18
14
13
12
11
10
21
9
398vfm49 Fig. 8
B2.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB


1 Reservoir. 6 Oil cooler.
2 160 micron filter. 7 Differential lock solenoid valve.
3 10,8 cm³ pump. 8 Pressure regulator.
4 Rear PTO clutch actuator. 9 4-wheel drive solenoid valve.
5 Rear PTO clutch spool valve.

1 Reservoir. 12 Proportional forward solenoid valve (slow).
2 160 micron filter. 13 Proportional forward solenoid valve (fast).
3 10,8 cm³ pump. 14 Proportional reverse solenoid valve.
4 5 bar valve. 15 9 bar accumulator.
5 Lubrication solenoid valve. 16 Pressure connector.
6 Oil cooler. 17 Transmission oil pressure sensor.
7 Flow divider. 18 Differential lock solenoid valve.
8 "safety patch" solenoid valve. 19 Rear PTO clutch spool valve.
9 Low pressure 10 micron filter. 20 Rear PTO clutch actuator.
10 4-wheel drive solenoid valve. 21 Clutchless reverser hydraulic unit.
11 Pressure regulator.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B2.11

18 bar low pressure system with clutchless reverser
Description
18 bar
3,5 bar
10 µm
6 l/min
398vfm34 Fig. 9
The low pressure system maintains a pressure of 18 bar Flow supplied to the low pressure system is 6 l/min
in the clutchless reverser hydraulic unit. The clutchless controlled by the flow divider. A 10 micron filter protects
reverser hydraulic unit distributes the pressure to: the solenoid valves (if work is required on the clutchless
– The front axle solenoid valve. reverser hydraulic unit, the 10 micron filter should be
replaced as well as the hydraulic filters). The accumulator
– The differential lock solenoid valve.
pressurised to 9 bar supplements the low pressure
– The PTO clutch spool valve. system when significant flow demands occur at low rpm.
– The forwards solenoid valve and the reverse solenoid (check the pressure every 500 hours; see this chapter for
valve. check procedure).
B2.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
6 7 8
➟I ➟
4
➟
2
➟
III
➟ ➟
➟3 ➟1 ➟ II ➟
5
4
18 bar
3,5 bar
3 10 µm
6 l/min
1 2
398vfm35 Fig. 10
Nomenclature
1 Power supply. 4 Clutchless reverser hydraulic unit. 7 Slow forwards piston.

2 To radiator. 5 Accumulator. 8 Reverse gear piston.
3 "safety patch" valve. 6 Fast forwards piston.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B2.13

Control logic for clutchless reverser and "Twinshift" doubler
Slow forwards Fast forwards Reverse

Direction of Piston 7 Piston 6 Piston 8
solenoid valve solenoid valve solenoid valve
motion (bar) (bar) (bar)
(current) (current) (current)
1,9 18 0 0 0 0
Forwards
0 0 1,9 18 0 0
Reverse 0 0 0 0 1,9 18
B2.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

"safety patch" solenoid valve
398vfm36 Fig. 11
Nomenclature
1 Flow divider. 4 Solenoid. C Return reservoir to cooler.

2 Spring. 5 Spool. P Pressure.
3 Adjustment screw. A Supply to hydraulic clutchless reverser T Return to reservoir.
unit.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B2.15

Low pressure lubrication system for clutchless reverser
Description
The lubrication system lubricates the slow/fast forwards
and reverse clutches. It includes a cooler, a solenoid
valve, a relief valve set at 5 bar that maintains lubrication
pressure. The solenoid valve distributes oil flow to the
clutches when:
– The reverser is in forwards/reverse.
– The clutch pedal is released.
5 bar
398vfm37 Fig. 12
B2.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Transfer air pump
4
1
398vfm38 Fig. 13
Nomenclature
1 Clutch housing. 4 Transmission casing.

2 Transfer air pump. 5 Air extraction from transfer pump.
3 Transfer pipe. 6 Cam.
An air pump is used to transfer oil from the clutch housing The air pump is operated by a cam on the drive pinion for
to the transmission casing to prevent a self-drive the lower shaft and generates an air pressure in the
phenonenon. clutchless reverser casing.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B2.17

Cross-section of clutch lubrication
398vfm39 Fig. 14
Nomenclature
1 Air pump. Lubrication ducts.
B2.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test conditions:
– Engine at nominal speed.
– Oil temperature 60°C.
Checking flow from the "safety patch" solenoid valve
398vfm40 Fig. 15
– Disconnect the rigid pipe.

– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736.
– Check the flow which should be 6 l/min
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B2.19

Checking the pressure in the clutchless reverser unit
398vfm41 Fig. 16
– Connect test unit n° 60 05 705 076 to the clutchless reverser unit using an adaptor (Male JIC 9/16, Metric 12 x 150).
– Check the pressure which should be 18 bar.
Checking the pressure in the slow forwards clutch
398vfm44 Fig. 17
– Connect test set n° 60 05 705 076 to the pressure outlet (1).

– Engage slow forwards.
B2.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checking the pressure in the fast forwards clutch
398vfm43 Fig. 18

– Engage fast forwards.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B2.21

Checking the pressure in the reverse clutch
398vfm42 Fig. 19

– Engage reverse.
B2.22 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checking the clutch lubrication pressures
398vfm50 Fig. 20

– Put into forward or reverse gear.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B2.23

Check accumulator pressure
398vfm43 Fig. 21
– Connect test set n° 60 05 705 076 to a clutch pressure outlet.

– Engage the clutch to which the pressure gauge is connected.
– Check the pressure by stopping the engine without switching off (by disconnecting the electrical stop on the injector
pump).
– The pressure drops slowly to 9 bar then falls to zero.
B2.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checking the flow from the hydraulic pump (2-pump system)

See chapter "E".
Checking the flow from the 3rd pump
398vfm45 Fig. 22
– Connect the test set n° 60 05 005 736 to the pump outlet.

– Check the flow which should be 25 l/min
Checking the transfer air pump

There is no specific checking procedure.
N.B.: Symptoms of failure are the development of a residual torque and difficulty changing gear.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B2.25

"Inspection results" sheet
Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Serial n°: ................................................................................................................................................................................
Checking flow from the "safety patch" solenoid valve
Test conditions "safety patch" solenoid valve voltage

Flow in l/min
Oil temperature 60°C (volts)
Engine running at 2 300 rpm 6 12
Recorded values

Flow in l/min
Engine running at 2 300 rpm
Checking the pressure in the clutchless reverser unit

Pressure in bar
Recorded values

Pressure in bar
Checking the pressure in the slow forwards clutch
Test conditions
Slow forwards solenoid valve current
Oil temperature 60°C Pressure in bar
(Amps)
Slow forwards engaged 18 1,9
Recorded values
Test conditions
Slow forwards solenoid valve current
(Amps)
Slow forwards engaged
B2.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checking the pressure in the fast forwards clutch
Test conditions
Fast forwards solenoid valve current
(Amps)
Fast forwards engaged 18 1,9
Recorded values
Test conditions
Fast forwards solenoid valve current
(Amps)
Fast forwards engaged
Checking the pressure in the reverse clutch

Test conditions
Reverse solenoid valve current
(Amps)
Reverse gear engaged 18 1,9
Recorded values
Test conditions
Reverse solenoid valve current
(Amps)
Reverse gear engaged
Checking the clutch lubrication pressures
Test conditions "safety patch" solenoid valve Lubrication solenoid valve

Oil temperature 60°C Pressure in bar voltage voltage
Engine running at 2 300 rpm (volts) (volts)
Forward or reverse gear

5 12 12
engaged
Recorded values
Test conditions "safety patch" solenoid valve Lubrication solenoid valve

Oil temperature 60°C Pressure in bar voltage voltage
Engine running at 2 300 rpm (volts) (volts)
Forward or reverse gear

engaged
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B2.27

Check accumulator pressure
Test conditions
Pressure in bar Measured value
Oil temperature 60°C
With the engine stopped 9
Checking the flow from the 3rd pump
Test conditions
Flow in l/min Measured value
Engine running at 2 300 rpm 25
B2.28 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

B3
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Gearbox electronic control
Introduction to the "EHM24"

The T 506 clutchless reverser transmission is controlled by the "EHM24" electronics unit. This unit manages the clutchless
reverser functions as well as the Twinshift doubler.
km/h
mph
C/F
60cvfm00 Fig. 1
B3.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

"EHM24" inputs/outputs
The "EHM24" electronics unit has 2 connectors each with 12 pins.
SO2
SO1
60cvfm01 Fig. 2
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.3

EHM24
Connec-
Pin Function Signal
tor
1 Earth Earth
2 Computer fail indicator Digital output +12 volts = indicator lights up
3 Forward Digital input Clutchless reverser selected to forward = + 12 V
4 — — —
5 Forward speed Frequency input Hall effect sensor
6 Contactor for range III Digital input Range III = + 12 V
S01
7 Clutch pedal switch Digital input Declutched = + 12 V

8 Neutral Digital input Clutchless reverser in neutral = + 12 V
9 Reverse Digital input Clutchless reverser in reverse = + 12 V
10 Clutch pedal position Analog input Clutch pedal sensor (4-20 mA)
11 — — —
12 + 12 Volt supply 12 V switched Key in position 1 ou 2
1 "Hare/Tortoise" function Digital input + 12 volts = hare - 0 volt = tortoise
2 Reverse PWM output Proportional solenoid valve
3 Slow forward drive PWM output Proportional solenoid valve
4 RS232 RS232 Diagnostics
5 RS232 RS232 Diagnostics
6 Reverse Analog input Proportional electrovalve return
S02
7 Fast forward drive Analog input Proportional electrovalve return

8 Slow forward drive Analog input Proportional electrovalve return
9 Audio warning: Digital output + 12 V = audio warning sounded
10 Fast forward drive PWM output Proportional solenoid valve
Solenoid valve power
11 + 12 V Clutch + clutchless reverser not neutral = + 12 V
supply
12 Oil temperature/calibration Analog input Thermistor
""safety patch"" safety

Description
The "T 506" clutchless reverser is equipped with a safety device, the "safety patch". This safety system prevents forward/
reverse movement of the tractor if one or other of the forward/reverse solenoid valves seizes.
118a Transmission oil pressure sensor 120 Fuse. 188 Clutchless reverser control.
(reverse). 175 "safety patch" Relay. 299 "safety patch" solenoid valve.
118b Transmission oil pressure switch - 184 "EHM24" electronics unit. 306 "safety patch" electronics unit.
forward slow drive.
185 Instrument panel. 307 Electronics unit timer.
118c Transmission oil pressure switch -
forward fast drive.
B3.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

184
120
175
188
185
307
306
118a 118c 118b
299
60cvfm02 Fig. 3
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.5

Functional diagram
306
299
R3
R4
D2
R1
R2
D1
307
D+
W
A
118c
B+
M
118b
175
118a
188
5A
85
86
120
30
87
87a
60cvfm03 Fig. 4
B3.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Connector
306
J107
A1 A2 A4 A6 A7 A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B6 B7 B8 B9
+ APC
60cvfm04 Fig. 5
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.7

Functional logic
– When the tractor is started, the reverser is in neutral and the "safety patch" solenoid valve is supplied with 12 V.
– When the reverser is selected to forwards or reverse, the transmission oil pressure switches detect an oil pressure on a
clutch . In this case, the reverser energises the time delay unit and hence the "safety patch" solenoid valve.
– When the reverser is in neutral and a forward/reverse solenoid valve is seized, the time delay unit is no longer powered
by the reverser and the pressure switches. The "safety patch" solenoid valve is de-energised. In this situation, the
diagnostic light on the instrument panel comes on steady as well as the transmission oil pressure warning light.
Tractor in neutral but Tractor in fast forward

Test conditions Tractor in slow forward
Tractor in neutral slow forward solenoid drive but slow forward
Tractor running drive
valve seized solenoid valve seized
Presure switch states and solenoid valves pressures

Reverse (118a) Closed - 0 bar Closed - 0 bar Closed - 0 bar Closed - 0 bar
Forward slow (118b) Closed - 0 bar Open - 18 bar Open - 0 bar Open - 0 bar
Forward fast (118c) Closed - 0 bar Closed - 0 bar Closed - 0 bar Closed - 0 bar
Timer unit (307)
Voltage (volts) 12 12 0 0
"safety patch" solenoid valve (299)
Voltage (volts) 12 12 0 0
Instrument panel lights
Transmission
Out Out Steady "on" Steady "on"
controller fault
Transmission oil
Out Out Lit Lit
pressure
Tractor state
Forwards motion No Yes No No
B3.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Shuttle reverser
184
188
192b
192a
192c
68
114
˚C/˚F
37
km/h 189
mph
238 187
185
60cvfm05 Fig. 6
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.9

37 Speed sensor. 187 Clutch pedal potentiometer. 192b Fast forwards solenoid valve.
68 Contactor for range III. 188 Clutchless reverser control. 192c Reverse solenoid valve.
114 Transmission oil temperature sensor. 189 Clutch pedal switch. 238 +/– selector and declutch function.
184 "EHM24" electronics unit. 192a Slow forwards solenoid valve.
185 Instrument panel.
Reverser control
Power supplies:
B1 • +APC.
B5 • Earth.
1
A
4
B
5
60cvfm06 Fig. 7
Control logic
Position Forwards (A2) Reverse (A4) Neutral (B2) Power (B4)
Neutral 0V 0V + 12 V 0V
Forwards + 12 V 0V 0V + 12 V
Reverse 0V + 12 V 0V + 12 V
Declutched 0V 0V + 12 V + 12 V
Mechanical reverser
On the "T506" transmission with mechanical reverser, a neutral sensor switch (314) is electrically connected to the
instrument panel to authorise starting. (see chapter "F").
B3.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Clutch pedal
Nomenclature
187 Clutch pedal potentiometer.
189 Clutch pedal switch.
189
187
60cvfm07 Fig. 8
Clutch pedal potentiometer (187)

This sensor requires adjustment (see chapter "G3" Win
Métadiag©).
Nomenclature
1 Earth.
2 12 Volt supply.
3 Signal.
60cvfm08 Fig. 9
Clutch pedal switch (189)

This sensor requires adjustment (see chapter "G3" Win
Métadiag©).
60cvfm09 Fig. 10
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.11

TWINSHIFT doubler
184 185
12 V = 0V=
0V= 12 V =
238
3
E7 – +
4
1
E6 2
5
+ APC B2
188
60cvfm10 Fig. 11
Nomenclature
184 "EHM24" electronics unit. 185 Instrument panel. 188 Clutchless reverser control.
Control logic
Oil pressure switch (contact state)

Fast forward Slow forward Reverse solenoid
Direction of motion
solenoid valve solenoid valve valve 118a 118b 118c
(rear) (slow) (fast)
1,9 A — Closed Closed Open

Forwards 0
— 1,9 A Closed Open Closed
Reverse 0 0 1,9 A Open Closed Closed
B3.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Component layout
37 Speed sensor. 187 Clutch pedal potentiometer.

68 Contactor for range III. 188 Clutchless reverser control.
114 Transmission oil temperature sensor. 189 Clutch pedal switch.
118a Transmission oil pressure sensor (reverse). 192a Slow forwards solenoid valve.
118b Transmission oil pressure switch - forward slow drive. 192b Fast forwards solenoid valve.
118c Transmission oil pressure switch - forward fast drive. 192c Reverse solenoid valve.
120 Fuse. 238 +/– selector and declutch function.
175 "safety patch" Relay. 299 "safety patch" solenoid valve.
184 "EHM24" electronics unit. 306 "safety patch" electronics unit.
185 Instrument panel. 307 Electronics unit timer.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.13

Component layout
184 185 188
189
187 J100
307
175
120 306
606vfm49 Fig. 12
B3.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Component layout
68
37
238
314 118a
118c
118b
299
114
192c 192b 192a
606vfm50 Fig. 13
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.15

Electrical tests
Supply circuit switch

Continuity test
0V
Test conditions:
– Power off.
– Switch actuated if normally open, at rest if normally
closed.
• Check the continuity at the switch terminals according
to its state.
• Connect multimeter n° 60 05 006 744 (ohmmeter
function).
Voltage test
Ω
Test conditions:
– Power on.
601msm00 Fig. 14
closed.
• Check the contactor output voltage according to its
state.
• Connect multimeter n° 60 05 006 744 (voltmeter + 12 V
function) in parallel.
601msm01 Fig. 15
B3.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Electrical tests
Earthing switch
Continuity test
0V
Test conditions:
– Power off.
closed.
• Check the continuity at the switch terminals according
to its state.
• Connect multimeter n° 60 05 006 744 (ohmmeter
function).
Voltage test
Ω
Test conditions:
– Power on.
601msm02 Fig. 16
closed.
• Check the voltage between the consumer and the
switch according to its state.
• Switch open consumer supply voltage. + 12 V
• Contact closed zero voltage.
• Connect multimeter n° 60 05 006 744 (voltmeter
• Use cable n° 60 05 005 734.
601msm03 Fig. 17
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.17

Electrical tests
Control lever
Voltage test
Test conditions:
– Power on.
• Check the control lever output voltage according to its
state.
Contact sensor
Repeat the same procedure as for the supply circuit
switch and the earthing switch.
Temperature sensor (thermistor)

Resistance test
Test condition:
– Increase the sensor temperature progressively.
• Check the change of resistance with temperature.
+ 12 V
• With the sensor disconnected, connect a multimeter n°
60 05 006 744 (ohmmeter function) in parallel, with the
sensor.
601msm04 Fig. 18
˚C
601msm05 Fig. 19
B3.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Electrical tests
Hall effect sensor

Voltage test
Test condition:
– Power on.
• Check the sensor supply voltage. With the sensor 3 2 1
connected, connect a multimeter n° 60 05 006 744
(voltmeter function) in parallel.
• Check the variation in signal voltage. With the sensor
connected, connect a multimeter n° 60 05 006 744
(voltmeter function) in parallel.
Current test
Test condition: V
– Power on. + 12 V
• Check the current supplied on the signal line.
601msm19 Fig. 20
• Connect a multimeter n° 60 05 006 744 (ammeter
function) in series. To avoid tripping the multimeter
protective device, start at the highest setting.
• Use tool n° 60 05 005 734 to connect to the relevent
connection or use an amperometric clamp.
3 2 1
+ 12 V
601msm20 Fig. 21
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.19

Electrical tests
"EHM24" electronics unit, "safety

patch" and timer unit
Voltage test (on connection concerned)
Test conditions:
– Power on.
• Energise the input or output to be checked.
• Check the unit's input and output voltage depending on
the relevant operating state. + 12 V
Frequency test (on connection concerned)*

Test conditions: + 12 V
V
– Power on.
• Activate the input to be checked. 601msm09 Fig. 22
• Check the unit's input voltage against the relevant
sensor state.
• Connect a multimeter n° 60 05 006 744 (frequency
meter function) in parallel.
Current test (on connection concerned)

Test conditions:
– Power on.
• Activate the output to be checked.
• Check the increase in the current supplied at the output + 12 V
from the unit.
function) in series.
Hz
+ 12 V
601msm10 Fig. 23
+ 12 V
+ 12 V
601msm11 Fig. 24
*Except "safety patché and timer unit.
B3.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Electrical tests
Proportional solenoid valve

Current test
Test conditions:
– Power on.
– Power supplied to solenoid valve.
• Check increase in current consumed by the solenoid + 12 V
valve.
function) in series.
• Use cable n° 60 05 005 734 or an amperometric clamp
on the solenoid valve supply wire.
Resistance test
Test conditions:
– Power off.
601msm13 Fig. 25
– Solenoid valve disconnected.
• Check coil resistance at the solenoid valve terminals.
• With the solenoid valve disconnected, connect a
multimeter n° 60 05 006 744 (ohmmeter function) in
parallel.
• Use cable n° 60 05 005 734.
+ 0V
601msm14 Fig. 26
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.21

Electrical tests
On/off solenoid valve

Voltage test
Test conditions:
– Power on.
+ 12 V
• Check the voltage at the solenoid valve input
acccording to the order state.
• Use cable n° 60 05 005 734.
Resistance test
V
Test conditions:
– Power off.
– Solenoid valve disconnected.
601msm15 Fig. 27
• Check coil resistance at the solenoid valve terminals.
• With the solenoid valve disconnected, connect a
multimeter n° 60 05 006 744 (ohmmeter function) in
parallel.
• Use cable n° 60 05 005 734.
Current test + 0V
Test conditions:
– Power on.
• Check increase in current consumed by the solenoid
valve.
function) in series. Ω
• To avoid tripping the multimeter protective device, start
at the highest setting.
• Use cable n° 60 05 005 734 or an amperometric clamp
601msm16 Fig. 28
on the solenoid valve supply wire.
+ 12 V
601msm17 Fig. 29
B3.22 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Measurement and check points
Checks of transmission oil pressure

switches, slow forward, fast forward
and reverse (118a) (118b) (118c)
See electrical tests, sensor switch (on supply circuit) for
details of test procedure.
2
– Operating pressure = maximum 35 bar.
– Engine stopped (0 bar), switch closed.
– Engine running, clutchless reverser (18 bar) in a
selected position, switch open.
– If pressure drops to less than 2 bar, switch closes.
Checking the transmission

temperature sensor (114)
See electrical tests, temperature sensor (Thermistor) for
583msm00 Fig. 30
details of test procedure.
– Characteristics: Range from – 30 °C to 130 °C.
Resistance variation with temperature.
Ω
– At 20 °C the resistance is 2,5 kΩ.
10 000
1 000
100
– 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 ˚C
584vfm18 Fig. 31
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.23

Checking the speed sensor (37)

AC output signal.
Static check
Ohmmeter
Sensor terminals Values in MΩ
terminals
+ – 1 2 ∞*
+ – 2 1 8*
+ – 1 3 ∞*
+ – 3 1 19,5
+ – 2 3 ∞*
+ – 3 2 5
* Infinity.
584vfm23 Fig. 32
Checking supply voltages to units (184) (306)

Using multimeter n° 60 05 006 744 check the supply to the units listed on pages B3.4 and B3.7 and in chapter "F".
Functional check of "safety patch"

Test conditions:
– With the tractor running, reverser selector in neutral, disconnect one of the 3 clutch pressure switches.
– Confirm that it is impossible to make the tractor move when operating the reverser control lever and check that the
diagnostic and transmission oil pressure lights are lit on the instrument panel.
Important: If the tractor moves, the solenoid valve (299) in the "safety patch" must be replaced.
Checking the +/– control switches (238)

See electrical tests, supply circuit switch for details of test procedure.
– Switches at rest, contact open.
– Switches actuated, contact closed.
– Switches supplied at 12 V.
B3.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checking the proportional solenoid valves (192a) (192b) (192c)

See electrical tests, proportional solenoid valve for details of test procedure.
– Coil resistance approximately 2,5 ohms.
– Currents checked against the following control logic.
Direction of motion Fast forward drive Slow forward drive Reverse
1,9 A 0
Forwards 0
0 1,9 A
Reverse 0 0 1,9 A
Checking the reverser selector (188)

See electrical tests, controller for details of the checking procedure.
– Two magnets (x) and (y) are located on the reverser selector on either side of the hinge with contacts on an electronic
testing board.
– Voltages checked according to the following control logic.
x y
2
3 1
4
B4 A4 A2 B2 A5 B1 B5
+ 12 V
601msm18 Fig. 33
Ignition
B4 A4 A2 B2 A5
Position
x y (power) (rear) (front) (neutral) (rise)
Forwards 2 — 12 V 0V 12 V 0V 0V
Neutral 3 1 0V 0V 0V 12 V 0V
Reverse 4 — 12 V 12 V 0V 0V 0V
Rise — 1 or — 12 V 0V 0V 12 V 12 V
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.25

Checking the clutch pedal switch (189)

– Pedal in upper position, contacts closed between 2 and 3 and open between 1 and 4.
– Pedal in lower position, contacts open between 2 and 3 and closed between 1 and 4.
– See chapter "F".
Checking the clutch pedal position sensor (187)

See electrical tests, Hall effect sensors for details of test procedure.
– Sensor supplied at 12 volts.
– See chapter "G3" Win Métadiag©.
Checking the mechanical reverser neutral switch (314)

– Reverser in neutral, contact open.
– Reverser in forwards or reverse, contact closed.
Checking the range III sensor (68)

– Range III, contact closed.
– Range III disengaged, contact open.
B3.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
The serial number: .................................................................................................................................................................
Checking pressure switches (118a) (118b) (118c)
Nominal values Recorded values

Test conditions
Contact state Contact state
Engine stopped, contact open Closed

Engine running, reverser in forwards or
reverse drive
Checking temperature sensor (114)

Recorded values
Test conditions
Temperature (°C) Resistance (kΩ)
Increase the sensor temperature progressively
Checking the speed sensor (37)
Test conditions Sensor terminals Resistance (MΩ) Recorded values
2-1 8
Static check, sensor disconnected 3-1 19,5
3-2 5
Checking supply voltages to units (184) (306)
Test conditions
Connector Pin Supply voltage (volts) Recorded values
Power on
S01 1 0
"EHM24" unit
S01 2 12
J107 B9 12
J107 B4 12
"safety patch" unit
J107 B3 0
J107 A9 0
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.27

Checking the +/– control switches (238)

Test conditions
Contact open
Switch not operated Open
Switch operated Closed
Checking the proportional solenoid valves (192a) (192b) (192c)
Test conditions
Fast forward solenoid valve Slow forward solenoid valve Reverse solenoid valve
Engine running with voltage
(192b) (192a) (192c)
applied
1,9 A 0
Reverser in forwards 0
0 1,9 A
Reverser in reverse 0 0 1,9 A
Recorded values
Reverser in forwards
Reverser in reverse
Checking the reverser selector (188)
Voltage (volts)
Test conditions
Power on B4 A4 A2 B2 A5
(power) (rear) (front) (neutral) (rise)
Forwards 12 0 12 0 0
Neutral 0 0 0 12 0
Reverse 12 12 0 0 0
Rise 12 0 0 12 12
Recorded values
Forwards
Neutral
Reverse
Rise
B3.28 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checking the clutch pedal switch (189)

Test conditions
Sensor disconnected
Pin 2 - 3 Pin 1 - 4 Pin 2 - 3 Pin 1 - 4
Pedal in upper position Closed Open
Pedal in lower position Open Closed
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB B3.29

Notes
B3.30 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

T 506 REAR AXLE
C1
MECHANICAL PART
C2
HYDRAULIC PART
C3
Chapter C

CONTENTS
C1 – MECHANICAL PART
TIGHTENING TORQUES AND MAIN ADJUSTMENTS

REAR AXLE.................................................................................................................................................................... C1.3
AXLE TUBES.................................................................................................................................................................. C1.4
DRIVE PINION
EXPLODED VIEW .......................................................................................................................................................... C1.5
REMOVAL ...................................................................................................................................................................... C1.6
REFITTING..................................................................................................................................................................... C1.7
ADJUSTING PINION MESHING .................................................................................................................................... C1.8
DIFFERENTIAL
EXPLODED VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................ C1.10
REMOVAL .................................................................................................................................................................... C1.12
REMOVING/REFITTING THE DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING.......................................................................................... C1.13
PRELOAD OF DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING BEARINGS............................................................................................... C1.16
ADJUSTING THE BACKLASH ..................................................................................................................................... C1.17
AXLE TUBES
EXPLODED VIEW OF THE NORMAL DUTY NARROW AND WIDE VINEYARD/ORCHARD AXLE TUBE ............... C1.18
EXPLODED VIEW OF THE HEAVY DUTY WIDE VINEYARD/ORCHARD AXLE TUBE ............................................ C1.18
REMOVAL/REFITTING ................................................................................................................................................ C1.20
REMOVAL/REFITTING THE PLANET CARRIERS ..................................................................................................... C1.21
REMOVAL/FITTING THE BEARINGS AND SEALS .................................................................................................... C1.23
ADJUSTING THE WHEEL SHAFT BALL BEARINGS (WIDE/ORCHARD NORMAL DUTY AXLE TUBE) ................ C1.25
ADJUSTING THE WHEEL SHAFT TAPER BEARINGS (NARROW AND HEAVY DUTY AXLE TUBE) .................... C1.26
REPLACING A WHEEL STUD ..................................................................................................................................... C1.26
POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO)

EXPLODED VIEW OF 540 RPM VERSION................................................................................................................. C1.27
EXPLODED VIEW OF 540/1000 OR 540/540 ECONOMIC VERSION........................................................................ C1.28
REMOVAL/REFITTING ................................................................................................................................................ C1.30
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

BRAKES
EXPLODED VIEW OF BRAKE MECHANISM.............................................................................................................. C1.34
EXPLODED VIEW OF MAIN BRAKE CONTROLS...................................................................................................... C1.35
REMOVAL/REFITTING OF BRAKE MECHANISM ...................................................................................................... C1.37
ADJUSTING THE MAIN BRAKE CONTROL MECHANISM ........................................................................................ C1.38
REMOVAL/REFITTING OF BRAKE PEDALS.............................................................................................................. C1.39
ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRAKE PEDALS ................................................................................................................... C1.39
REMOVAL/REFITTING OF MASTER CYLINDERS..................................................................................................... C1.39
ADJUSTING THE MASTER CYLINDERS.................................................................................................................... C1.39
REMOVAL/REFITTING OF THE HAND BRAKE.......................................................................................................... C1.40
HAND BRAKE ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................................................................... C1.40
C2 – HYDRAULIC PART
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
NOMENCLATURE FOR MECHANICAL REVERSER AND DOUBLER SYSTEM......................................................... C2.2
NOMENCLATURE FOR HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER SYSTEM............................................................ C2.2
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND MECHANICAL DOUBLER............................................. C2.3
COMPONENT LAYOUT (MECHANICAL REVERSER AND DOUBLER) ..................................................................... C2.4
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC OF HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER ................................................................. C2.5
COMPONENT LAYOUT (HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER) ........................................................................ C2.6
LOW PRESSURE CIRCUIT 18 BAR

DESCRIPTION OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (MECHANICAL REVERSER AND DOUBLER) ........................................ C2.7
DESCRIPTION OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER)........................................... C2.8
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK PISTON ..................................................................................................................................... C2.9
FUNCTIONAL LOGIC..................................................................................................................................................... C2.9
REAR POWER TAKE-OFF

DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL SYSTEM..................................................................................................................... C2.10
LUBRICATION.............................................................................................................................................................. C2.11
ADJUSTMENT.............................................................................................................................................................. C2.11
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

BRAKING SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................................................. C2.12
DRAINING THE PRIMARY BRAKE CIRCUIT.............................................................................................................. C2.13
FLUSHING THE PRIMARY BRAKE SYSTEM ............................................................................................................. C2.13
BLEEDING THE PRIMARY BRAKE CIRCUIT ............................................................................................................. C2.14

CHECKING THE PRESSURE IN THE CLUTCHLESS REVERSER UNIT .................................................................. C2.15
CHECKING THE FLOW FROM THE HYDRAULIC PUMP .......................................................................................... C2.15
CHECKING THE FLOW FROM THE 3RD PUMP........................................................................................................ C2.15
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK PRESSURE CHECK ............................................................................................................... C2.15
CHECKING THE PTO CLUTCH SPOOL VALVE PRESSURE.................................................................................... C2.16
BRAKE VALVE CHECK ............................................................................................................................................... C2.17

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK PRESSURE CHECK ............................................................................................................... C2.18
CHECKING THE PTO CLUTCH SPOOL VALVE PRESSURE.................................................................................... C2.18
C3 – ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
REAR AXLE ELECTRONIC CONTROL

DIFFERENTIAL MONITORING...................................................................................................................................... C3.2
REAR PTO CONTROL................................................................................................................................................... C3.5
ADJUSTING THE MICRO-SWITCHES (41, 54, 55, 308, 309)....................................................................................... C3.8
COMPONENT LAYOUT
COMPONENT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................................. C3.9
ELECTRICAL TESTS
SUPPLY CIRCUIT SWITCH......................................................................................................................................... C3.11
EARTHING SWITCH .................................................................................................................................................... C3.11
ON/OFF SOLENOID VALVE ........................................................................................................................................ C3.11
SPEED SENSOR ......................................................................................................................................................... C3.11

CHECKING DIFFENTIAL LOCK SWITCH (232).......................................................................................................... C3.12
CHECKING CLUTCH CONTACTOR (309), PTO SELECTOR (308, 55, 54, 41) AND PARKING BRAKE
CONTACTOR (204)...................................................................................................................................................... C3.12
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

CHECKING REAR DIFFERENTIAL SOLENOID VALVE (102).................................................................................... C3.12
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH (214) ............................................................................................. C3.13
CHECKING THE BRAKE PEDAL CONTACTORS (203A, 203B) ................................................................................ C3.13

CHECKING DIFFENTIAL LOCK SWITCH (232).......................................................................................................... C3.14
CHECKING CLUTCH CONTACTOR (309), PTO SELECTOR (308, 55, 54, 41)......................................................... C3.14
DIFFERENTIAL SOLENOID VALVE VOLTAGE (102)................................................................................................. C3.14
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH (214) ............................................................................................. C3.14
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL CONTACTORS (203A, 203B) ........................................................................................ C3.14
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

C1
MECHANICAL PART
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Notes
C1.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Rear axle
540/540 eco 540

Formajoint (510)
540/1 000
B B
C C
134
A A
± 0,10
0,20 mm
Frenetanch (242)
3 daN.m 5 daN.m
3,3 daN.m
Frenetanch (242) Frenetanch (242)
12 daN.m 19 daN.m
B–B C–C
A–A
0,50 ± 0,20
12 daN.m
Frenbloc (270)
13 daN.m
19 daN.m
345vfm26 Fig. 1
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.3

Axle tubes
8 daN.m
Frenbloc (270)
Formajoint (510)
Formajoint (510)
± 0,20
0,30 mm
19 daN.m
19 daN.m
1,8 2,5 daN.m

ø 190 mm 27,5 daN.m
33,6 daN.m
1,3 2 daN.m
ø 245 mm
0,8 daN.m
45 daN.m
0,8 daN.m
45 daN.m
45 daN.m
345vfm27 Fig. 2
C1.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Drive pinion
Exploded view
7
2
3
4
5
6
345vfm28 Fig. 3
Nomenclature
1 Crown wheel. 4 Taper roller bearing. 6 Range I driven pinion.
2 Drive pinion (output shaft). 5 Taper roller bearing. 7 Nut.
3 Shim.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.5

Drive pinion
Removal
3
• Remove the casings and covers from the gearbox as
follows:
Operations 1 to 31.
2
cradle.
– Disconnect the clutch housing (see chapter "B1").
– Remove the input and intermediate rear shafts (see
chapter "B1"). 4
– Remove the tow hitch and the linkage casing (see
chapter "E1"). 345vfm29 Fig. 4
removal of PTO).
– Remove the axle tubes (see relevant paragraph).
– Remove the differential and crown wheel (see relevant
paragraph).
• Remove the drive pinion (2) (output shaft) (see
chapter "B1").
• Remove the bearing cups if required using a suitable
tool (Fig. 5).
Important: Any bearing cup removed must be
replaced along with its cone (impacts occuring during
removal may cause failure initiation).
• Remove the bearing inner cone (4), drive pinion side,
using a bearing puller.
• Retrieve the shim (3).
Important: Mark the two bearing cones if they are to 345vfm30 Fig. 5
C1.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Drive pinion
Refitting
• Replace any defective components. 4
Reminder: If the taper bearing seats have been

dismantled they must be replaced as must the
castellated nut (7).
• Refit the bearing cups coated with Scelbloc (648) using
tool n° 00 11 315 020.
Important: Adjust pinion meshing (see next
paragraph).
• Refit the shim (3) and the bearing cone (4) using a
press.
• Confirm that the bush (10) and the needles (9) are fitted
to the shaft (11).
Important: Accurately align the output shaft as it is 3
inserted into the front intermediate shaft. The
345vfm31 Fig. 6
bush (10) will be pushed by the output shaft and the
needles will then be in contact woth both shafts.
• Refit the drive pinion (2) (output shaft) (see 10
chapter "B1").
• Offer up the nut (7).
• Check a turning torque of between 4 and 6 daN using a
spring balance without the differential crown wheel 2
(Fig. 8).
• Tighten or loosen the nut to bring the value within the
tolerance.
• Lock the nut by bending the lock washer.
11 9
345vfm32 Fig. 7
345vfm33 Fig. 8
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.7

Drive pinion
Adjusting pinion meshing

• Locate each bearing cone in its respective cup.
• Position tool n° 00 11 315 030 (Fig. 9).
• Tighten the nut to achieve a turning torque on the tool of
4 to 6 daN. A
• Position tool n° 00 11 315 040 (Fig. 9).
• Record dimension "A" (distance between the crown
wheel axis and the bearing cone (4)).
• Record dimension "B" (inscribed on the head of the
drive pinion).
• Calculate dimension "C" corresponding to the thickness
of the shim (3).
C=A–B
• Position a shim corresponding to dimension "C" behind
the bearing cone (4). 11 different shim thicknesses are
available between 2,50 and 3,50 mm. 345vfm34 Fig. 9
For example, if A = 136,87 and B = 134

C
C = 136,87 – 134
C = 2,87
In this example, the shim thickness required should be A
close to 2,87 mm and 2,90 mm should therefore be used.
345vfm35 Fig. 10
C1.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Notes
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.9

C1.10
345vfm36
1
25
2
26
3
Exploded view
6
27
28
5 29
7 30
9
31
10
32
11
4 13
12
8
11
10
15
10
Differential
14
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

13
14
11
10
35
14
16
17
18
19
20
34 21
8 22
33 23
18
17 24
16
Fig. 11
Differential

1 Bearing sleeve. 13 Planet gear washers. 25 O-ring.
2 Shims. 14 Planet gears. 26 Guide rod.
3 Crown wheel. 15 Differential cover. 27 Pin.
4 Drive pinion. 16 Spring. 28 Fork.
5 Taper roller bearing. 17 Differential lock. 29 Spring.
6 Screws. 18 Locating pin. 30 Plug.
7 Bush. 19 Bush. 31 Locknut.
8 Locating pin. 20 Operating sleeve. 32 Stop screw.
9 Differential housing. 21 Stop washer. 33 Differential housing*.
10 Sun gear washers. 22 Locking ring. 34 Pin*.
11 Sun gears. 23 Taper roller bearing. 35 Pin*.
12 Pins. 24 Shims.
* On the normal duty transmission.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.11

Differential
Removal
1
• Remove the rear axle covers as follows:
Operations 1 to 31.
– Remove the tow hitch and the linkage casing (see
chapter "E1").
removal of PTO).
– Remove the axle tubes (see relevant paragraph).
– Remove the brake mechanisms (see relevant
paragraph).
• Remove the differential lock control system.
• Attach the differential housing to an appropriate lifting
device (Fig. 13).
• Remove the bearings (1). 345vfm38 Fig. 12
• Match the bearings to their cups and mark them if the

taper bearings are not being replaced.
• Remove the differential case from the rear axle housing.
Important: Mark both bearing cups if they have been
removed and are to be refitted.
345vfm37 Fig. 13
C1.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Differential
Removing/refitting the differential

housing
3
• Remove the differential housing as described in earlier
pages.
• Seperate the crown wheel (3) from the differential
housing.
N.B.: On heavy duty transmissions, when removing
the crown wheel, the cover (15) will be found to be
15
seperate from the differential housing.
• If required, remove the bearing cones using a bearing
puller (Fig. 15).
Important: Mark the two bearing cones if they are to
12 17 22
• Remove the locking ring (22).
• Romove the sliding gear, the lock (17) and its spring.
345vfm39 Fig. 14
• Remove the sun and planet gears:
– On the heavy duty transmission, remove the two
shafts (12) after seperating the differential housing.
– On the normal duty transmission, remove the pin (34)
behind the crown wheel to enable removal of the
shaft (35).
345vfm40 Fig. 15
35
34
17
345vfm41 Fig. 16
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.13

Differential
• If required, replace the bushes (7) using a press, after

coating with grease, using tool n° 00 11 315 050
(Fig. 17).
• Replace each planet and sun gear with its friction 7
washer. 36
N.B.: Position the sun gear with the grooves towards
the differential lock.
• On the normal duty transmission:
– Align the planet gears with the shaft (Fig. 18).
– Rotate the assembly.
– Engage the shaft (35) (Fig. 18).
– Position the pin in its housing (36).
• On the heavy duty transmission:
– Position the two shafts.
– Close the cover.
• Refit the differential lock in the reverse order to that 345vfm42 Fig. 17
used for dismantling.

• Refit the crown wheel. 35
• On normal duty transmissions, fit the pin retention
washer.
• Tighten the screws, lightly coated with Frenbloc (270),
to 12 daN.m.
• Set the bearing pre-load and adjust the backlash (see
• Fit the differential lock hydraulic or mechanical control
system (for adjustment see next paragraph).
• Adjust the stop screw to achieve a clearance of
0,5 ± 0,2 mm between the sliding gear (20) and the
washer (21), with the differential lock engaged (Fig. 19).
345vfm44 Fig. 18
0,50 ± 0,20
345vfm43 Fig. 19
C1.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Differential
Adjusting the mechanical differential lock

selector (depending on equipment fit)
42
• Fit the lever (38) to its shaft.
41
• Fit the teleflex cable in the sheath end stops (40)
and (41).
• Fit the cable to the pedal (39) and the lever (38).
• Check for correct engagement of the differential lock
(on the stop of the LH adjustment - see previous
paragraph).
• Adjust if required using the nut (42).
38
39
40
345vfm45 Fig. 20
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.15

Differential
Preload of differential housing

bearings
Important: If the taper bearings, bearing blocks or the
differential casing have been replaced, the differential
bearings must be pre-loaded.
• Refit the RH bearing with its bearing cup (5) without
shims.
• Refit the differential housing.
• Position the shims removed (24) behind the LH bearing
cup.
• Tighten the bearing block screws to 12 daN.m.
1st method
If work has been carried out on the drive pinion (output
shaft):
• Using a spring balance, check for a turning torque 345vfm46 Fig. 21
corresponding to the turning torque of the drive pinion

alone plus 0,80 to 1,15 daN (Fig. 21).
• Add or remove shims from behind the LH bearing cup to
achieve the required tolerance.
Important: Whenever the differential bearing pre-load
is adjusted, check and adjust the backlash (see next
paragraph).
Example: for a turning torque on the drive pinion of 5
5,75 daN:
24
5,75 + 0,80 = 6,55
5,75 + 1,15 = 6,90
In this example, the turning torque should be between
6,55 and 6,90 daN.
2nd method
If work has only been carried out on the differential
housing: 345vfm47 Fig. 22
• Measure the torque on the outer diameter of the

differential housing without the crown wheel.
The torque should be:
Crown wheel and pinion 10/41 12/38 15/38
Casing 2 planets ø 150 mm 1,75 to 2,51 daN 1,35 to 1,94 daN 1,08 to 1,55 daN
Casing 4 planets ø 174 mm 1,51 to 2,17 daN 1,16 to 1,67 daN 0,93 to 1,34 daN
C1.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Differential
Adjusting the backlash

• Ensure that the pre-load on the differential bearings is
correct.
• Position the probe of a dial gauge half way up a crown
wheel gear tooth (Fig. 23).
• Check that the backlash is 0,20 ± 0,10 mm.
• Carry out this operation at 3 points around the ring gear.
If the backlash is incorrect, the procedure to be followed
involves transfering a given shim thickness from one
bearing to the other to move the drive pinion towards or
away from the crown wheel.
Important: Do not eliminate shims when transfering
them, or the bearing pre-load will be incorrect.
When the backlash is correct, complete the fitting of the
bearing blocks.
• Refit the locking mechanisms and tighten down the 345vfm48 Fig. 23
screws coated with Frenetanch (242) to 12 daN.m.

• Re-check the bearing per-load to confirm the
adjustments.
345vfm49 Fig. 24
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.17

Axle tubes
Exploded view of the normal duty narrow and wide vineyard/orchard axle tube
22 15
23
20 16
17
15
14
9 13
21
11
10 7
19
6
18
5
4
8 12
8*
25*
27* 24*
26*
2
1
3
345vfm50 Fig. 25
* Normal duty wide vineyard/orchard axle tube.
Exploded view of the heavy duty wide vineyard/orchard axle tube
33
23 32
34 31
28 22 30
11 34 17
26 30
21
20
12
25
7
10
5
29
4 18
8 3
345vfm51 Fig. 26
C1.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Axle tubes
Nomenclature
1 Screws. 13 Pins. 25 Grease nipple.
2 Protector. 14 Pins. 26 Lip seal.
3 Wheel shaft. 15 Washers. 27 Ball bearing.
4 Wheel stud. 16 Needles. 28 Locking ring.
5 Lip seal. 17 Planet gears. 29 Washer.
6 Spacer. 18 Shims. 30 Tapered roller bearing.
7 Taper roller bearing. 19 Tripod washer. 31 Washer.
8 Casing. 20 Screws. 32 Screws.
9 Screws. 21 Lockwasher. 33 Locating pin.
10 Locating pin. 22 Crown wheel. 34 O-ring.
11 Taper roller bearing. 23 Sun gear.
12 Planet carrier. 24 Ball bearing.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.19

Axle tubes
Removal/refitting
• Remove the axle tube as follows:
21 23
– Immobilise the tractor.
– Apply the handbrake.
– Remove the relevant wheel.
– Remove the cab strut.
– Raise the cab slightly.
– Make the cab safe.
– Remove any tubes or accessories that interfere with
removal.
– Position an appropriate support on a trolley jack under
the axle tube or use a load spreader.
– Separate the axle tube from the rear axle housing. 17
• Remove the sun gear (23).
• Remove the lock washer (21). 345vfm52 Fig. 27
• Clean the gasket faces between the casing and axle

tube using a non-greasy solvent.
• Apply Formajoint (510) to the face of the rear axle 21 23
casing.
N.B.: On heavy duty axle tubes, position the 2 O-ring
seals (34) soaked in oil and apply a bead of
Formajoint (510) to the faces of the crown gear.
• Fit the sun gear (23) into the axle.
• Make sure that the lock washer (21) is present.
• Screw two locating pins in diametrically opposing
positions on the rear axle casing. 17
• Couple the axle tube to the rear axle housing.
N.B.: Rotate the shaft (3) to help the sun gear (23)
engage with the planet gears (17).
34 34
• Clean the screws (9) and coat them with Loctite
Frenetanch (242). 345vfm53 Fig. 28
• Install the screws (9)and torque tighten them to 19
daN.m.
• Reassemble in reverse order to removal. 23
• Reassemble the wheel. Tightening torque 45 daN.m.
9
3
345vfm54 Fig. 29
C1.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Axle tubes
Removal/refitting the planet carriers

16
On narrow, normal duty axle tube 17
• Remove the lock washer (21). 15
14
• Remove screw (20). 21
20
• Remove the retaining washer (19) and shim(s) (18).
• Remove the planet carrier (12).
• Drive out the pins (14).
• Remove:
– The shafts (13).
– The planet gears (17).
19
– The washers (15). 18
– The needle rollers (16).
• Clean and check the parts. 13
• Fit the planet gears (17) and the friction washers (15).
345vfm55 Fig. 30
• Fit the needle rollers (16) coated in grease into each
planet gear.
• Engage the 3 shafts (13).
• Fit the pins (14).
N.B.: The axle tube casings are supplied without the 12
crown gear; press in the crown gear using tool
n° 00 11 314 950.
• Refit the planet carrier. 16
• Shim as described in the procedure below.
• Tighten screw (20) to 33,6 daN.m.
• Position the lock washer (21) , coated with grease.
17 15
345vfm56 Fig. 31
345vfm57 Fig. 32
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.21

Axle tubes
On the heavy duty axle tube

• Remove the lock washer (21). 32
• Remove screw (20).
• Remove the retaining washer (29) and shim(s) (18). 33
• Remove the planet carrier (12). 31
• Remove the screws (32). 30
17
• Remove: 30
– The washers (31).
– The locating pins (33). 12
– The planet gears (17). 21
– The taper roller bearings (30). 20
29
Important: If the taper roller bearings are not 18
replaced, mark each bearing to match it to its planet
gear.
• Clean and check the parts. 345vfm58 Fig. 33
• Fit the planet gears (17) with the taper roller
bearings (30).
• Check that the two locating pins (33) are present. 32
• Fit the washers (31).
• Tighten the screws (32), coated with Frenbloc (270), to 21
8 daN.m.
N.B.: The taper roller bearings (30) do not require
adjustment.
• Refit the planet carrier.
• Shim as described in the procedure below.
• Tighten screw (20) to 27,5 daN.m.
20 31
345vfm59 Fig. 34
C1.22 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Axle tubes
Removal/fitting the bearings and

seals
• Remove the axle tube from the rear axle housing. 3 6 27
• Remove the planet carrier.
• Extract the shaft (3) from the axle tube.
N.B.: On the heavy duty axle tube, remove the
retaining ring (28).
• Recover the bearing cone (11) or the bearing (27)
• Recover the seal (26) (depending on equipment fit).
• Extract the bearings and seals at the wheel end. 7,5 mm
• Romove the bushes (6) on the narrow, normal duty axle
24 26
tube.
• Clean the seal bearing faces. The seal bearing faces,
the cups and cones should be free from burrs and 345vfm60 Fig. 35
impacts.
7 28
3 26 11
345vfm61 Fig. 36
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.23

Axle tubes
N.B.: Fit the seals the right way round.

• Press in the bearing (24), wheel side.
• Press on the bearing cup (7) using tool: 3 6 27
– N° 00 11 315 090 for heavy duty axle tubes
– N° 00 11 315 130 for narrow axle tubes.
• Fit the bush (6) (depending on equipment fit).
• Grease and press in the seal (5) using tool:
– N° 00 11 315 070 for heavy duty axle tubes.
– N° 00 11 315 110 for normal duty axle tubes.
• Grease and press in the seal (26) using tool:
7,5 mm
– N° 00 11 315 120 for the normal duty axle tube.
• Press on the bearing cup (11) using tool: 24 26
– N° 00 11 315 130 for narrow axle tubes. 345vfm60 Fig. 37
• Engage the shaft in the casing.

• Press in the bearing cone (11) or the bearing (27)
(depending on equipment fit). 7 28
N.B.: On the heavy duty axle tube, refit the retaining
ring (28).
• Refit the planet carrier.
Important: Always adjust the wheel shaft bearings
after replacing the bearings, the casing, the shaft or
the planet carrier.
3 26 11
345vfm61 Fig. 38
7 5
345vfm62 Fig. 39
C1.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Axle tubes
Adjusting the wheel shaft ball

bearings (Wide/orchard normal duty
12
axle tube)
• Position the axle tube vertically. B
• Calculate a greater thickness of shims "A" to obtain
play.
• Fit the bolt (19) and the washer (20). Tighten to 33,6
daN.m.
• Ensure that the stack is butted against the shaft.
• Place the probe of a dial guage on the planet
carrier (12) and lever it up to measure dimension "B"
(Fig. 40). Measure at 3 points and take the average.
taken up) .
C=A–B
345vfm63 Fig. 40
• Fit a set of shims corresponding to dimension "C" plus a
play of 0,30 ± 0,20.
Example if A = 2,05 mm and B = 0,95 mm
C = 2,05 – 0,95 21 19 20
C = 1,10
Shim thickness:
1,10 + 0,10 = 1,20
1,10 + 0,50 = 1,60
According to the example, shims with a thickness of
between 1,20 and 1,60 mm should be inserted.
• Tighten the screw (20) to the recommended torque. ± 0,20
0,30 mm
345vfm64 Fig. 41
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.25

Axle tubes
Adjusting the wheel shaft taper

bearings (narrow and heavy duty
19 29 20 21
axle tube)
• Position the shims removed (18) behind the
washer (19) or (29) (depending on equipment fit).
• Tighten the bearing screw to the recommended torque:
– Narrow axle tube: 33,6 daN.m.
– Heavy duty axle tube: 27,5 daN.m.
• Using a spring balance applied to the studs, check the
turning torque (Fig. 44): 18
– Narrow axle tube: 1,8 to 2,5 daN.m at ø 190 mm.
– Heavy duty axle tube: 1,3 to 2 daN.m at ø 245 mm.
• Add or remove shims (18) to achieve the desired
tolerance.
• Tighten the screw (20) to the recommended torque. 345vfm65 Fig. 42
Replacing a wheel stud

• Drive out the defective stud.
• Clean the serrations left by the stud in the stub axle
flange.
• Coat the serrations of the new stud with Frenbloc (270).
• Position the new stud in the serrations formed by the
old stud.
After having made sure that the splines are correctly lined
up, drive the stud head against the inside of the stub axle
flange using a copper hammer.
345vfm57 Fig. 43
345vfm66 Fig. 44
C1.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

345vfm67
31
1 30
29
17
28
16
27
15
26
25
14
32
13
42
12 36
11 37
41
8
Exploded view of 540 rpm version
9
38
10
7
6 33 40
5 24
39
4 23
3 22 35
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

44
2 21
34
43
Power take-off (PTO)
48
49
47
50
52
20
53
19 45
18 46
54 51
Fig. 45
C1.27
Exploded view of 540/1000 or 540/540 economic version
32
31
30
53
29
52
28
50
27
49
26
48
56
17
23
54 51
47
16
22
15
21
46
45
55
20
13
19
12
18
1
11
8
9
10
7
6
5
4
3
2
345vfm68 Fig. 46
C1.28 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Nomenclature
1 Power take-off shaft. 29 Lip seal.
2 Washer. 30 Bearing sleeve.
3 Proportional cone. 31 Protector.
4 Normal cone. 32 Screws.
5 Pin. 33 Lock.
6 Locking ring. 34 Rpm selector rod.
7 Bush. 35 Rpm selector fork.
8 Normal/proportinal sliding gear. 36 Rotor.
9 Spring. 37 Lip seal.
10 Ball. 38 Pin.
11 Bush. 39 Disc.
12 Bearing bush. 40 Pin.
13 Roller bearing with external retaining ring. 41 Lever.
14 Upper PTO shaft with driven pinions 540, 1000 or 42 Handle.
540 economy. 43 Bracket.
15 Ball bearing. 44 Rpm sensor.
16 Inner circlip. 45 Rotor.
17 Cover. 46 Normal/proportional control rod.
18 Bearing bush. 47 O-ring.
19 Roller bearing with external retaining ring. 48 Bracket.
20 Washer. 49 Ball.
21 540 driven pinion. 50 Spring.
22 Hub. 51 Screws.
23 Output shaft. 52 Link.
24 Operating sleeve. 53 Pin.
25 Driven pinion with 1000 or 540 economy. 54 Normal/proportional sensor.
26 Washer. 55 Upper PTO shaft with 540 driven pinions.
27 Ball bearing. 56 Coupling pinion.
28 O-ring.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.29

Removal/refitting
9
• Remove the cab. Operations 1 to 31.
• Remove the linkage housing (see chapter "E1"). 10
• Remove the rear hitch.
2
• If necessary, remove the differential lock control (see
1
relevant paragraph). 7
6
Upper shaft
• Remove the normal/proportional driver towards the
outside of the casing.
• Remove the cover (17). 17
• Remove the circlip (16). 16
• Drive out the upper shaft using an air jet.
• Remove the PTO shaft (Fig. 48). 13
• Drive out the pin (5). 12
345vfm69 Fig. 47
• Recover the cone (4).
• Extract the slide (8) with the cone (3).
N.B.: When seperating the cone (3) with the slide (8),
recover the balls (10) and the spring (9).
2 3 8 4 5 1
• Compress the retaining ring (6) into its housing to
enable the bush (7) to be withdrawn (Fig. 49).
• Recover the washer (2).
• Withdraw the shaft (1) through the rear of the casing.
N.B.: To replace the bearing (13) and the bush (12),
remove the lower shaft (see next paragraph).
345vfm70 Fig. 48
6 7
345vfm71 Fig. 49
C1.30 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB


• Replace the bearing (15) if required; install using a
press.
8
• If required, replace the bush in the upper shaft; grease
and press into place.
• Place the cone (3) in the slide (8).
• Fit the retaining ring (6). 7
• Insert the balls and springs (9).
• Compress the springs (9) to fully engage the bush (7)
on the retaining ring (6).
• Reinstall the PTO shaft in the reverse order to that used
for dismantling.
• Engage the upper shaft with its bearing (15) and bush.
9
• Position the retaining ring (6). 6 3
• Fit the cover lightly coated with Formajoint (510).
• Reposition the fork (46). 345vfm72 Fig. 50
• Fit the bracket (48).

• Tighten the screw to 2 daN.m.
15 46
• Place the lightly greased spring and ball in the
lever (52).
• Fit the lever (52) to the rod (46). 8
345vfm73 Fig. 51
46
48
52
345vfm74 Fig. 52
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.31

Adjusting the normal/proportional selector
59
60
58
61
61
58
345vfm75 Fig. 53
• Fit the lever to its bracket. • Fit the fork end (60) to the rod (52).
• Position the flexible control cable using the clamps (58). • Check the correct transmission of the selection (locking
• Fit the fork end (59) to the lever. of the rod).
• Adjust the fork ends and nuts (61) if required.
C1.32 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Output shaft
• Remove the bearing housing (32).
• Replace the seal (29) if required and press in place
after greasing using tool n° 00 11 315 060.
• Remove the upper shaft (see previous paragraph).
• Remove the lock (33).
• Dismantle the PTO speed selector control (depending
on equipment fit).
• If necessary, fit a new lip joint in the casing, greasing
before installation.
• Drive out the shaft (23) using compressed air.
• Replace the bearing (27) if required; install using a 21
press.
33 25
N.B.: Refit the washer (26) before the bearing (27).
24 32
• Remove (depending on assembly):
345vfm76 Fig. 54
– The sliding gear (24) and its hub.
– The coupling gear (56) (depending on equipment fit).
– The bearing (19) and the insert (18).
• Refit in reverse order to removal.
• Tighten screw (33) to 8 daN.m.
29 32
345vfm77 Fig. 55
56 23
19
18 20 26 27
345vfm78 Fig. 56
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.33

C1.34
22
345vfm79
19
20
21
19
18
1 4 22
5 8 16
2
15
6 9 14
3
13
10
30
12 17
13
Exploded view of brake mechanism
29 23
13
7 24
25
11
30
Brakes
26
37 31
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

27
13
29
50
49
38
45
36
44
13
28
52
51
43
32 39
46
33 41
47
34 40
45
35 41
48
42
Fig. 57
Brakes
Exploded view of main brake controls
73
71
72
70
55
69
68
64
67
63
66
62
65
55
61
60
53
54
58
59
56
57
60
55
55
345vfm80 Fig. 58
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.35

Brakes
Nomenclature
1 Handbrake handle. 26 Lever. 51 Slave cylinder.
2 Handbrake rod. 27 Pin. 52 Bracket.
3 Pin. 28 Pin. 53 Bracket.
4 Boot. 29 Lever. 54 Pin.
5 Ratchet. 30 Screws. 55 Screws.
6 Leaf spring. 31 Lever. 56 Brake pedal switches.
7 Pin. 32 Brake mechanism. 57 LH brake pedal.
8 Bracket. 33 Brake disc. 58 RH brake pedal.
9 Spring. 34 Backplate. 59 Spring.
10 Fork end. 35 Bearing sleeve. 60 Upper screw stop.
11 Pin. 36 Brake housing. 61 Bush.
12 Arm. 37 Locating pin. 62 Lock.
13 Pin. 38 Screws. 63 Spring.
14 Tie-rod. 39 Fork end. 64 Washer.
15 Nut. 40 Nut. 65 Pin.
16 Fork end. 41 Locknut. 66 Fork end.
17 Pin. 42 Fork end. 67 Nut.
18 Lever. 43 Lever. 68 Bellows.
19 Lip seal. 44 Spring. 69 Washer.
20 Shaft. 45 Spacer. 70 Circlip.
21 Pins. 46 Bushes. 71 Pushrod.
22 Lever. 47 Pin. 72 Left master cylinder.
23 Tie-rod. 48 Circlip. 73 Right master cylinder.
24 Fork end. 49 Bracket.
25 Cap. 50 Handbrake switch.
C1.36 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Brakes
Removal/refitting of brake
mechanism 38
13
28
• Remove the axle tube (see relevant paragraph).

• Withdraw the sun gear.
• Disconnect the fork ends from the lever (26).
• Extract the shaft (13).
• Pivot the lever (26) to gain access to the screw (30). 75
• Remove screw (30).
• Extract the shaft (28). 26
• Remove the screws (38).
• Extract the brake housing (36) using 2 screws (M12 x
1,75 x 110) inserted into the holes (75).
• Remove the disks, the back-plates and the mechanism.
transmission oil for one hour. 345vfm81 Fig. 59
• Position the disks, back-plates and the mechanism in

the housing (36).
• Install the housing (36).
• Turn the screws (38) alternately to progressively tighten
down the housing.
Important: While tightening the screws (38) ensure
that the last disk and the last back-plate are correctly
located (Fig. 61).
• Refit the control system in the reverse order of
dismantling.
• Tighten screw (30) to 13 daN.m.
• Refit the sun gear and the axle tube (see relevant
paragraph).
30 28 36
345vfm82 Fig. 60
36
345vfm83 Fig. 61
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.37

Brakes
Adjusting the main brake control

mechanism
• Fit the slave cylinder (51).
• Shorten the turnbuckle (40) until the brakes lock.
• Then slacken the turnbuckle (40) until the brakes just 51
unlock.
26
• Further slacken the turnbuckle (40) by 1,1 turns and
lock using the nuts (41).
40
• Repeat for both sides.
Important: When releasing the pedal check that the
wheels are not braked. 41
• Couple the brake pedals.
• Check for correct braking of both wheels simultanously.
• Repeat the adjustment if necesssary.
• Retighten the lock-nuts (41). 345vfm84 Fig. 62
26 41 40 41 51
345vfm85 Fig. 63
C1.38 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Brakes
Removal/refitting of brake pedals

60
• Release the springs (59).
• Extract the shaft (54).
• Remove the pedals. 60 54
• If required, replace the bushes (61); grease and press 61
in place.
59
Adjustment of the brake pedals
• Adjust the upper stops so that both pedals sit at the
same height.
Removal/refitting of master cylinders

• Drain and remove the brake fluid reservoir (see 345vfm86 Fig. 64
chapter "C2").
• Remove the inlet (76) and outlet pipes (77). 77 76 66
• Disconnect the fork end (66).
• Remove the master cylinder(s).
N.B.: See chapter "B2" for instructions on bleeding
the brakes.
Adjusting the master cylinders

• Fully depress the brake pedal on the relevant master
cylinder.
• Adjust the fork end (66) so that the push rod (71) is not
contacting the end of the master cylinder (Fig. 66).
• Fit the fork end to the pedal.
345vfm87 Fig. 65
66
71
345vfm88 Fig. 66
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.39

Brakes
Removal/refitting of the hand brake

4 5 6
• Remove the fork end (10) from the shaft (2).
• Remove the pin (3) to enable removal of the shaft (2)
and the spring.
• Remove the boot (4).
• Replace the pawl (5) and the leaf spring (6) if
necessary.
2
• Refit in reverse order to removal. 12
• Grease the hand brake shaft (2) and the arm (12).
• If required, dismantle the control mechanism (levers, 3
rods etc.).
10
345vfm89 Fig. 67
Hand brake adjustment
22 18 23 24 26 13
2 12 14 13
m
18 m
mm
221
345vfm90 Fig. 68
C1.40 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Brakes
• Remove the hand brake shaft (2).

• Fit tool n° 00 11 320 230 so that the arm (12) rests on it
(Fig. 69).
• Adjust the tie rod (14) to 221 mm between centres
(Fig. 68).
• Fit the tie rod (14) between the arm (12) and the
lever (18). 2
• Fit and adjust the main brake operating mechanism
(see relevant paragraph). 12
With the main brakes released:
– Loosely install (shaft (13) free) the tie rod/fork end
assembly (23), (24) to levers (22) and (26) (Fig. 68).
• Fit the hand brake handle shaft to the arm (12).
• Pull up the hand brake to bring the arm (12) into a
horizontal position (Fig. 68).
00 11 320 230
• Make a gauge using a flat iron bar 18 mm wide and
345vfm91 Fig. 69
100 mm long (Fig. 70).
• Using the gauge, check that the distance between
shafts (A) and (B) is 18 mm (Fig. 68 and 70).
• Adjust the length of the tie rod (14) to get as near as mm
18 B
possible to 18 mm.
Important: After adjustment, check that none of the
fork ends or tie rods are under tension.
A
14
345vfm92 Fig. 70
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C1.41

Notes
C1.42 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

C2
HYDRAULIC PART
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Hydraulic system

1 Reservoir. 8 Pressure regulator.
2 160 micron filter. 9 Differential lock solenoid valve.
3 10,8 cm³ pump. 10 Rear PTO clutch spool valve.
4 15 micron high pressure filter. 11 Rear PTO clutch actuator.
5 Steering unit "OSPC 80 ON". 12 Oil cooler.
6 Steering actuator. 13 Differential lock actuator.
7 4-wheel drive solenoid valve.

1 Reservoir. 12 9 bar accumulator.
2 160 micron filter. 13 Pressure connector.
3 10,8 cm³ pump. 14 Transmission oil pressure sensor.
4 15 micron high pressure filter. 15 Differential lock solenoid valve.
5 Steering unit "OSPC 80 ON". 16 Rear PTO clutch spool valve.
6 Steering actuator. 17 Rear PTO clutch actuator.
7 "safety patch" solenoid valve. 18 Oil cooler.
8 Flow divider. 19 Lubrication solenoid valve.
9 Low pressure 10 micron filter. 20 5 bar valve.
10 4-wheel drive solenoid valve. 21 Clutchless reverser hydraulic unit.
11 Pressure regulator. 22 Differential lock actuator.
C2.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Hydraulic system
Schematic diagram of hydraulic reverser and mechanical doubler*
6
5
7
8
18 bar
9
200 bar 200 bar
190 bar 0-36 l/min
150 bar
10
11 12 12-48 l/min
115 bar
4
3,5 bar 15 µm
220 bar
10,8 cm³ 19 cm³
3 2
160 µm
398vfm55 Fig. 1
* For the 3-pump hydraulic system (mechanical reverser and doubler) see chapter "B2".
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C2.3

Hydraulic system
10
12
3
10
4
11
2
5
13
3
9
8
7
6
12
398vfm56 Fig. 2
C2.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Hydraulic system
Hydraulic schematic of hydraulic reverser and doubler*
6
5
3,5 bar 18 bar 12
10
9 11 13
14
10 µm
21
15
7
200 bar 200 bar 190 bar 0-36 l/min
16
6 l/min 8
17
115 bar
18
19
4
3,5 bar 15 µm
5 bar
20
10,8 cm³ 19 cm³
3 2
160 µm
398vfm57 Fig. 3
* For the 3-pump hydraulic system (hydraulic reverser and doubler) see chapter "B2".
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C2.5

Hydraulic system
20
16
18
3
16 4
17
19
2
5
22
12
7
15
11
10
21
9
18
398vfm58 Fig. 4
C2.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Low pressure circuit 18 bar
Description of hydraulic system (mechanical reverser and doubler)
1
18 bar
345vfm15 Fig. 5
Nomenclature
1 Pressure regulator. 4 Rear PTO clutch spool valve.
2 4-wheel drive solenoid valve. 5 Rear PTO clutch actuator.
3 Differential lock solenoid valve. 6 Oil cooler.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C2.7

Low pressure circuit 18 bar
Description of hydraulic system (hydraulic reverser and doubler)
3,5 bar 18 bar

2
11
1
10 µm
10 12
3
6 l/min 9
4
6 5
7
5 bar 8
345vfm16 Fig. 6
Nomenclature
1 Pressure regulator. 7 Lubrication solenoid valve.
2 4-wheel drive solenoid valve. 8 5 bar valve.
3 Differential lock solenoid valve. 9 Flow divider.
4 Rear PTO clutch spool valve. 10 "safety patch" solenoid valve.
5 Rear PTO clutch actuator. 11 Low pressure 10 micron filter.
6 Oil cooler. 12 Clutchless reverser hydraulic unit.
C2.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Differential lock
Differential lock piston

Nomenclature
1 Piston.
2 Hydraulic coupling.
3 Hinge axis.
4 Adjustment screw.
1
Adjustment
Adjust the piston (1) using screw (4) so that it is
perpendicular to the rear axle casing.
2 3 4
345vfm17 Fig. 7
Functional logic
Function Mechanical state Electrical state Hydraulic state
Differential lock Locked 12 V 18 bar

Differential lock Unlocked 0V 0 bar
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C2.9

Rear power take-off
Description of control system
2
3
345vfm18 Fig. 8
Nomenclature
1 Rear PTO clutch spool valve. 5 Oil return line.
2 Casing oil return line. 6 Clutch actuating cylinder.
3 Spool valve supply (18 bar). 7 Return spring.
4 Actuator supply line.
Adjusting the controls

See chapter "B1".
C2.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Rear power take-off
Lubrication
345vfm19 Fig. 9
Lubrication is achieved through the PTO output shaft (1).
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C2.11

Braking system
Description
10
4
2
10
9
1
345vfm20 Fig. 10
Nomenclature
1 Brake fluid reservoir. 6 Right brake bleed screw.
2 Master cylinder. 7 Left brake bleed screw.
3 Brake valve bleed screw. 8 Tubes supplying the brake valve and the slave cylinders.
4 Brake valve. 9 Link pipe.
5 Slave cylinders. 10 Hollow bolt.
C2.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Braking system
Important: The use of an inappropriate fluid can

damage seals and cause serious brake malfunctions.
Draining the primary brake circuit

(Fig. 10, 11 and 12).
– Open the bleed screws (3), (6), (7) and the
connectors (10).
– Disconect the pipes (8), (9).
– Place a container under the screws (3), (6), (7) and the
connectors (10).
– Allow the fluid (Type Elf Matic G3) to drain from the 3
system for at least 10 minutes.
– Remove the reservoir (1) and its lines at the master
cylinder (2). Drain and clean the reservoir.
345vfm21 Fig. 11
Flushing the primary brake system

(Fig. 10 and 12).
– Refit the lines and the reservoir and close the bleed
screws.
– Fill the reservoir with new fluid.
– To enable the brake fluid to flow when flushing, with the
pedals linked depress and release slowly about ten
times, covering the entire stroke of the pedal unit, and
repeat the operation if required.
– With the pedals pressed down, open the bleed
screws (6), (7) and allow the air to escape.
– Re-tighten the bleed valves. 7 6
– Repeat the operation until the volume of brake fluid
contained in the system has been collected (see
operating manual).
Important: Brake fluid used for flushing is considered 345vfm22 Fig. 12
to have been used and must be destroyed in

accordance with current legislation.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C2.13

Braking system
Bleeding the primary brake circuit

(Fig. 13 and 14).
This operation requires 2 operatives.
Connect 3 flexible transparent pipes (internal diameter
6 mm) to each bleed valve (6), (7), (3) and immerse them
in a 1 litre vessel containing 0,5 litre of fluid.
N.B.: When bleeding, all the transparent hoses must
be immersed in the fluid (Elf Matic G3).
N.B.: If difficulties are encountered during bleeding,
bleed the master cylinders.
– With pedals coupled, pump about 10 times through the 3
entire stroke of the master cylinders to completely fill the
circuit.
– With the pedals pressed down, open the bleed
screws (6), (7) and allow the air to escape.
345vfm21 Fig. 13
– Re-tighten the bleed valves.
– Decouple the pedals.
– Pump the right pedal and then hold down.
– Open the right hand bleed screw (6).
– Allow the fluid to flow out; close the bleed screw and
release the pedal.
– Repeat these "pump, press and hold" operations until
no more air bubbles escape.
– Repeat the operation to bleed the left side.
– Repeat these operations on both left and right sides to
purge the brake valve (3).
– Check that the brakes work properly (tractor testing).
– Recheck that the system does not contain any air. 7 6
– Check the effectiveness of the bleed by connecting a 0
to 200 bar pressure gauge . See "measurement and
check points" sheet.
345vfm22 Fig. 14
C2.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test conditions: Checking the flow from the hydraulic

– Engine at nominal speed. pump
See chapter "E".
Checking the pressure in the

clutchless reverser unit Checking the flow from the 3rd pump
See chapter "B2". See chapter "B2".
Differential lock pressure check
345vfm24 Fig. 15
– Connect test set n° 60 05 705 076 in parallel to the differential lock solenoid valve outlet.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C2.15

Checking the PTO clutch spool valve pressure
345vfm23 Fig. 16
– Connect test set n° 60 05 705 076 in parallel to the differential lock solenoid valve outlet.
C2.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Brake valve check

– Connect test set n° 60 05 705 076 using connectors
n° 60 05 001 948 and n° 60 05 005 739.
– Slowly depress the coupled brake pedals.
– Check the pressure; it should be between 120 and
150 bar.
345vfm25 Fig. 17
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C2.17

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Serial n°: ................................................................................................................................................................................
Differential lock pressure check
Test conditions Differential lock solenoid valve voltage

Pressure in bar
Oil temperature 60°C (volt)
Recorded values
Test conditions Differential lock solenoid valve voltage

Pressure in bar
Oil temperature 60°C (volt)
Checking the PTO clutch spool valve pressure

Test conditions
Oil temperature 60°C Pressure in bar Recorded values
PTO disengaged 0
Checking the brake valve pressure
Test conditions
Oil temperature 60°C Pressure in bar Recorded values
Brake pedals applied 120 to 150
C2.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

C3
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Rear axle electronic control
Differential monitoring
Description
Differential locking is monitored from the instrument panel (see chapter "G1").
N.B.: The differential lock indicator light (1) flashes when the solenoid is short-circuited.
185
37
232
102
345vfm00 Fig. 1
Nomenclature
37 Speed sensor. 185 Instrument panel.

102 Differential solenoid valve. 232 Rear axle differential lock switch.
C3.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Input/output
Connector "JX2" on the instrument panel. 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
1 33
2 34
3 35
4 36
8 12 16 20 24 28 32
4
5
3 9
6 13
10 17
2
14 21
7
11 18 25
1
15 22 29
8
19 26 33
12
16 23 30
20 27 34
24 31
28 35
32
36
345vfm01 Fig. 2
Pin N° JX2 Type of signal
19 Differential lock 12 volts

27 Supply to differential solenoid valve 12 volts
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C3.3

Schematic diagram
+ APC
185
110
JX1 37
Fa 16/10 A
232
JX2
2
3 19 17 27 31 22 21 5 6 20
7 J90
M0
J132
1
102
2
M1
345vfm02 Fig. 3
Nomenclature
37 Speed sensor. J90 Differential control connector.

102 Differential solenoid valve. JX2 Instrument panel connector.
110 Fuse box (instrument panel). MO Earth for instrument panel and transmission harness.
185 Instrument panel. M1 Earth for transmission harness.
232 Rear differential solenoid valve switch.
C3.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Rear PTO control

Description
PTO monitoring is achieved by a series of micro-switches that notify the instrument panel of the selection (proportioanl or
standard) of the desired rpm (540 rpm, 540 eco rpm or 1000 rpm). The instrument panel displays PTO rpm.
309
185
41 308 54 55
345vfm03 Fig. 4
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C3.5

Input/output
Connector "JX2" on the instrument panel. 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
1 33
2 34
3 35
4 36
8 12 16 20 24 28 32
4
5
3 9
6 13
10 17
2
14 21
7
11 18 25
1
15 22 29
8
19 26 33
12
16 23 30
20 27 34
24 31
28 35
32
36
345vfm04 Fig. 5
5 540 eco rpm or 1000 rpm PTO 0 volts

6 540 rpm PTO 0 volts
20 PTO engaged 12 volts
21 Standard power take-off 12 volts
22 Proportional PTO 12 volts
C3.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Schematic diagram
+ APC
185
110
Fa 16/10 A
JX2
19 17 27 31 22 21 5 6 20
309
1
P111
2
J111
55
1
J117
2
P117
54
M1
1
J116
2
P116
308
1
J115
2
P115
41
1
J114
2
P114
345vfm05 Fig. 6
Nomenclature
41 Rear proportional PTO switch. 185 Instrument panel.

54 PTO540 eco rpm or 1000 rpm selector switch. 308 Standard PTO contactor.
55 540 rpm PTO selection switch. 309 Rear PTO clutch contactor.
110 Fuse box (instrument panel). M1 Earth for transmission harness.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C3.7

Adjusting the micro-switches (41),

(54), (55), (308), (309)
– Engage the control of the sensor to be adjusted.
– Place a 1 mm feeler gauge (1) between the sensor and
the control.
– Adjust the sensor until the feeler gauges can be easily
withdrawn.
345vfm06 Fig. 7
C3.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Component layout
185
185 232
110
JX2
J90
M0
203a
203b
110
214
309
185
204 55
54
M1 41
308
345vfm07 Fig. 8
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C3.9

Component layout
"T506" transmission with hydraulic reverser and doubler "T506" transmission with mechanical reverser and doubler
37 37
185 185
J138
102 102
345vfm08 Fig. 9 345vfm09 Fig. 10
Nomenclature (Fig. 8, 9 and 10)
37 Speed sensor. 102 Differential solenoid valve. 204 Parking brake contactor. J90 Differential control connector.
41 Rear proportional PTO switch. 110 Fuse box. 214 Brake fluid level contactor. JX2 Instrument panel connector.
54 PTO540 eco rpm or 1000 rpm selector switch. 185 Instrument panel. 232 Rear differential solenoid valve switch. M0 Earth for instrument panel and transmission harness.
55 540 rpm PTO selection switch. 203a RH brake pedal switch. 308 Standard PTO contactor. M1 Earth for transmission harness.
203b LH brake pedal switch. 309 Rear PTO clutch contactor.
C3.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Electrical tests
Supply circuit switch On/off solenoid valve

See chapter "B3".
See chapter "B3".
Earthing switch Speed sensor

See chapter "B3".
See chapter "B3".
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C3.11

Checking diffential lock switch (232)

See electrical tests, supply circuit switch for details of test
procedure.
– Switch neutral, contact open between terminals 2 and
3.
– Switch actuated, contact closed between terminals 2
and 3. 7 4 5 6 9
– Switch supplied at 12 V.
8 1 2 3 10
345vfm10 Fig. 11
Checking clutch contactor (309), PTO

selector (308), (55), (54), (41) and
parking brake contactor (204)
See electrical tests, earthing circuit switch for details of
test procedure.
– Contactor at rest, contact open.
– Contactor operated, contact closed.
345vfm11 Fig. 12
Checking rear differential solenoid

valve (102)
See electrical tests, on/off solenoid valve for details of test
procedure.
Characteristics:
– Solenoid valve supplied at 12 V. 102
– Resistance 8 ohm.
N.B.: When the solenoid valve is short-circuited, the
differential lock light on the instrument panel flashes.
345vfm12 Fig. 13
C3.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checking the brake fluid level switch

(214)
procedure. 1 2
– Switch at rest, contact closed between terminals 1 and
2.
– Switch actuated, contact open between terminals 1 and
2.
345vfm13 Fig. 11
Checking the brake pedal

contactors (203a), (203b)
procedure.
– Pedals released, contact open between pins 1 and 2.
– Pedals presed down, contact closed between pins 1
and 2.
1
2
345vfm14 Fig. 12
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB C3.13

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Switch at rest Switch operated Measured value

Test conditions
Contact state between2 and 3 At rest Operated
Master switch off Open Closed
Checking clutch contactor (309), PTO selector (308), (55), (54), (41)
Value recorded for contactor

Switch at rest Switch operated
n°
Test conditions
Contact state At rest Operated
Differential solenoid valve voltage (102)
Differential solenoid valve voltage

Test conditions Recorded values
(volts)
Switch at rest 0
Switch operated 12
Checking the brake fluid level switch (214)
Contactor at rest Contactor operated Recorded values

Test conditions
Master switch off Closed Open
Checking brake pedal contactors (203a) (203b)
Contactor at rest Contactor operated Recorded values

Test conditions
Contact state At rest Operated
C3.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

FRONT AXLE
D1
MECHANICAL PART
D2
HYDRAULIC PART
D3
Chapter D

CONTENTS
D1 – MECHANICAL PART
GENERAL
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FRONT AXLES.................................................................................................... D1.2
TABLES OF FRONT AXLE STATIC AND DYNAMIC LOADINGS................................................................................. D1.4
IDENTIFICATION PLATE............................................................................................................................................... D1.5
TYPE OF AXLE .............................................................................................................................................................. D1.5
REDUCTION AND FRONT/REAR INTER-AXLE RATIOS............................................................................................. D1.6
PREPONDERANCE ....................................................................................................................................................... D1.8
TORQUE SETTINGS AND SEALANTS

AXLE "20.09 C" (NARROW VINEYARD) ....................................................................................................................... D1.9
AXLE "20.09" (3 CYLINDER WIDE VINEYARD).......................................................................................................... D1.11
AXLE "20.09" (3 CYLINDER ORCHARD) .................................................................................................................... D1.13
AXLE "20.11" (4 CYLINDER WIDE VINEYARD).......................................................................................................... D1.15
AXLE "20.11" (4 CYLINDER ORCHARD) .................................................................................................................... D1.17
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................................................... D1.19
REMOVAL/REFITTING OF SUSPENDED FRONT AXLE

EXPLODED VIEW OF FRONT AXLE SUB-FRAME AND MOUNT ............................................................................. D1.20
REMOVAL .................................................................................................................................................................... D1.21
REFITTING................................................................................................................................................................... D1.22
REMOVAL/REFITTING OF AXIAL FRONT AXLE

EXPLODED VIEW OF FRONT AXLE SUB-FRAME AND MOUNT ............................................................................. D1.23
REMOVAL .................................................................................................................................................................... D1.24
REFITTING................................................................................................................................................................... D1.24
STEERING ACTUATOR FOR SUSPENDED AXLE

EXPLODED VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................ D1.25
REMOVAL .................................................................................................................................................................... D1.26
REFITTING................................................................................................................................................................... D1.26
DISMANTLING ............................................................................................................................................................. D1.27
REFITTING................................................................................................................................................................... D1.27
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

STEERING ACTUATOR FOR THE AXIAL AXLE
EXPLODED VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................ D1.28
REMOVAL .................................................................................................................................................................... D1.29
REFITTING................................................................................................................................................................... D1.29
DISMANTLING ............................................................................................................................................................. D1.30
REFITTING................................................................................................................................................................... D1.30
REDUCTION GEAR AND WHEEL HUB FOR "20.09 C" AXLE

EXPLODED VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................ D1.31
REMOVING THE EPICYCLIC REDUCTION GEAR .................................................................................................... D1.32
REFITTING THE EPICYCLIC REDUCTION GEAR ..................................................................................................... D1.32
REMOVING THE WHEEL HUB.................................................................................................................................... D1.33
REFITTING THE WHEEL HUB .................................................................................................................................... D1.33
REDUCTION GEAR AND WHEEL HUB FOR "20.09" AND "20.11" AXLES
EXPLODED VIEW OF REDUCTION GEAR AND WHEEL HUB FOR "20.09" AXLE .................................................. D1.34
EXPLODED VIEW OF REDUCTION GEAR AND WHEEL HUB FOR "20.11" AXLE .................................................. D1.35
REMOVING THE EPICYCLIC REDUCTION GEAR .................................................................................................... D1.36
REFITTING THE EPICYCLIC REDUCTION GEAR ..................................................................................................... D1.37
REMOVING THE WHEEL HUB.................................................................................................................................... D1.38
REFITTING THE WHEEL HUB .................................................................................................................................... D1.38
WHEEL KING PINS AND HUB CARRIER

REMOVAL OF KING PINS ........................................................................................................................................... D1.40
REFITTING THE KING PINS ....................................................................................................................................... D1.41
REMOVAL OF HUB CARRIER .................................................................................................................................... D1.43
REFITTING THE HUB CARRIER................................................................................................................................. D1.43
CROWN WHEEL AND PINION AND DIFFERENTIAL

EXPLODED VIEW OF THE PINION GEAR FOR THE SUSPENDED AXLE............................................................... D1.44
EXPLODED VIEW OF THE CROWN WHEEL AND PINION FOR THE SUSPENDED AXLE..................................... D1.45
REMOVAL OF CROWN WHEEL AND PINION ........................................................................................................... D1.46
REFITTING THE CROWN WHEEL AND PINION........................................................................................................ D1.47
EXPLODED VIEW OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE............................................................................................................. D1.48
DISMANTLING THE DIFFERENTIAL .......................................................................................................................... D1.49
INSTALLING THE DIFFERENTIAL .............................................................................................................................. D1.49
ADJUSTING THE CROWN WHEEL AND PINION ...................................................................................................... D1.50
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

4-WHEEL DRIVE UNIT WITH ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC ENGAGEMENT
SECTIONAL VIEW ....................................................................................................................................................... D1.54
REMOVAL .................................................................................................................................................................... D1.55
REFITTING................................................................................................................................................................... D1.55
EXPLODED VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................ D1.56
DISMANTLING ............................................................................................................................................................. D1.57
REFITTING................................................................................................................................................................... D1.57
4-WHEEL DRIVE UNIT WITH MECHANICAL ENGAGEMENT

SECTIONAL VIEW ....................................................................................................................................................... D1.59
REMOVAL .................................................................................................................................................................... D1.60
REFITTING................................................................................................................................................................... D1.60
EXPLODED VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................ D1.60
DISMANTLING ............................................................................................................................................................. D1.63
REFITTING................................................................................................................................................................... D1.63
D2 – HYDRAULIC PART
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2 PUMP HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (MECHANICAL REVERSER AND DOUBLER) ......................................................... D2.3
COMPONENT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................................. D2.4
3 PUMP HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER)............................................................ D2.5
FRONT AXLE ENGAGEMENT

OPERATING PRINCIPLE............................................................................................................................................... D2.7
FUNCTIONAL LOGIC..................................................................................................................................................... D2.9

CHECKING THE FRONT AXLE ENGAGEMENT PRESSURE.................................................................................... D2.10

CHECKING THE FRONT AXLE ENGAGEMENT PRESSURE.................................................................................... D2.11
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

D3 – ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
ELECTRONIC CONTROL OF FRONT AXLE

CONTROLLING FRONT AXLE ENGAGEMENT............................................................................................................ D3.2
INPUT/OUTPUT ............................................................................................................................................................. D3.4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM................................................................................................................................................. D3.5
COMPONENT LAYOUT
ELECTRICAL TESTS
SUPPLY CIRCUIT SWITCH........................................................................................................................................... D3.9
ON/OFF SOLENOID VALVE .......................................................................................................................................... D3.9

CHECKING DIFFENTIAL LOCK SWITCH (232).......................................................................................................... D3.10
CHECKING THE FRONT AXLE ENGAGEMENT SWITCH (234)................................................................................ D3.10
CHECKING THE FRONT AXLE ENGAGEMENT SOLENOID VALVE (101)............................................................... D3.10

CHECKING THE FRONT AXLE ENGAGEMENT SWITCH (234)................................................................................ D3.11
CHECKING THE FRONT AXLE ENGAGEMENT SOLENOID VALVE (101)............................................................... D3.11
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

D1
MECHANICAL PART
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

General
General characteristics of front axles
Front axle - narrow vineyard (VE)
Type of Carraro axle (a) 20.09C
Carraro reference (b) 147533 147586 148450
Type of axle Suspended
Overall width (in mm) 1 030
Weight in kg (with oil) 150
Type of differential lock Self-locking
Number of differential lock discs 10
Steering wheel turns between locks 3,75
3 cylinder wide vineyard (VL) front axle
Type of Carraro axle (a) 20.09
Carraro reference (b) 148423 148425 148424 148422
3 cylinder orchard (F) front axle
Type of axle Axial
(a) and (b): See identification plate (Fig. 1).
D1.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

General
4 cylinder wide vineyard (VL) front axle
Carraro reference (b) 145920 145921 145926 145922 147527 147528
4 cylinder orchard (F) front axle
Type of axle Axial
N.B.: Characteristics such as the number and size of the wheel studs, width between wheel hubs, steering and
pivot angles, oil type and capacity for pinions and differential are given in the tractor operating manual.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.3

General
Tables of front axle static and dynamic loadings
Track Static load

Tractor type Axle type and reference
(in mm) (daN)
"VE" tractor 20.09C (147533) 20.09C (147586) 20.09C (148450) 920 5 625
"VL" tractor 20.09 (148422) 20.09 (148423) 20.09 (148424) 20.09 (148425) 1 112 5 625
"F" tractor 20.09 (148455) 20.09 (148456) 20.09 (148457) 20.09 (148458) 1 237 5 625
20.11 (145920) 20.11 (145921) 20.11 (145922) 20.11 (147526)

"VL" tractor 1 106 6 250
20.11 (147527) 20.11 (147528)
"F" tractor 20.11 (145925) 20.11 (145927) 20.11 (147529) 20.11 (147530) 1 281 6 250
Dynamic load
Track
Tractor type Axle type and reference (in daN at
(in mm)
40 km/h)
820 2250
"VE" tractor 20.09C (147533) 20.09C (147586) 20.09C (148450)
1120 1579
1012 2250
"VL" tractor 20.09 (148422) 20.09 (148423) 20.09 (148424) 20.09 (148425)
1312 1671
1137 2250
"F" tractor 20.09 (148455) 20.09 (148456) 20.09 (148457) 20.09 (148458)
1437 1718
20.11 (145920) 20.11 (145921) 20.11 (145922) 20.11 (147526) 1006 2500
"VL" tractor
20.11 (147527) 20.11 (147528) 1306 1854
1181 2500
"F" tractor 20.11 (145925) 20.11 (145927) 20.11 (147529) 20.11 (147530)
1481 1925
D1.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

General
Identification plate
454vfm00 Fig. 1
Type of axle
Axial axle
454vfm01 Fig. 2
Suspended axle
454vfm02 Fig. 3
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.5

General
Reduction and front/rear inter-axle ratios
Number of teeth
Crown
Axle Maximum Power wheel Reducer ring Final Front/Rear
Tractor type
reference speed take-off and gear/planet/sun gears drive inter-axle ratio
pinion
20.09 C 52/57 1,60124

13/30
(147533) 52/58 1,57364
40 km/h
20.09 C
52/60 15/32 1,64551
(147586)
"VE" tractor 43/15/11 1/3,909
52/57 11/32 1,6446
20.09 C 52/58 11/32 1,61624

30 km/h
(148450) 52/59 11/32 1,58885
52/60 11/32 1,56237
20.09 52/57 1,59387
16/29
(148423) 52/59 1,53984
40 km/h
20.09 52/57 1,67742
18/31
(148425) 52/59 1,62056
"VL" tractor 52/57 1,62082
20.09
52/59 13/30 1,56588
(148424)
30 km/h 52/60 1,53978
20.09
52/60 15/32 1,66563
(148422) 48/17/12 1/5
20.09 52/57 1,625
18/32
(148455) 52/60 1,54375
40 km/h
20.09 52/57 1,49425
15/29
(148456) 52/60 1,41954
"F" tractor
20.09 52/58 1,49332
13/32
(148457) 52/60 1,44354
30 km/h
20.09 52/57 1,62082
13/30
(148458) 52/60 1,53978
D1.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

General
Number of teeth
Crown
Axle Maximum Power wheel Reducer ring Final Front/Rear
Tractor type
reference speed take-off and gear/planet/sun gears drive inter-axle ratio
pinion
20.11 52/60 27/42 1,61306

(145920) 52/57 27/42 1,69796
20.11 40 km/h 52/60 18/32 1,41143
(145921)
20.11
52/57 18/31 1,53364
(147526)
"VL" tractor
20.11 52/60 15/29 1,62233
(145922) 52/57 15/29 1,70772
60/23/12 1/6
20.11
30 km/h 52/58 13/30 1,40602
(147527)
20.11 52/60 1,51766

15/31
(147528) 52/57 1,59754
20.11 52/57 1,48571

18/32
(147529) 52/60 1,41143
40 km/h
20.11 52/57 1,53364
18/31
(145925) 52/60 1,45696
"F" tractor 52/58 1,52094
20.11
52/60 15/32 1,47024
(145927) 60/23/12 1/6
30 km/h 52/57 1,54762
20.11
52/58 13/30 1,40602
(147530)
To find the front/rear inter-axle ratio of your tractor, you

must know:
– If the transmission israted at 30 or 40 km/h.
– The axle reference. This is located on the identification
plate (b) (Fig. 1).
– The number of teeth in the PTO gearing. The last digit
of this number is stamped on the left side of the 4-wheel
drive gearbox (Fig. 4).
Example: 8 indicates a pinion with 58 teeth.
Important: Rolling diameters may differ between tyre
manufacturers for tyres of the same nominal
dimension. The preponderance therefore needs to be
calculated (see relevant paragraph) to be certain of
staying within the tolerance percentage.
454vfm03 Fig. 4
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.7

General
Preponderance
In order to obtain good balance for the tractor, the front wheel speed needs to be slightly faster that that for the rear wheels.
This is called preponderance. Min/Max values fall between 2 % and 4 %.
Calculating preponderance (%)
(Synchronisation ratio x Front circumference) – Rear circumference

%= x 100
Rear circumference
Calculation of front circumference while respecting the tolerance of 2 % to 4 %
Rear circumference x (1 + 0,02 or 0,04)

Front circumference =
Front/Rear inter-axle ratio
Calculation of rear circumference while respecting the tolerance of 2 % to 4 %
Synchronisation ratio x Front circumference

Rear circumference =
(+ 0,02 or 0,04)
D1.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Axle "20.09 C" (narrow vineyard)
9,5 daN.m
4 daN.m 3,5 daN.m Frenetanch (242) 4 daN.m 12 daN.m 1 daN.m 7 daN.m 1,3 daN.m Frenbloc (270) 12 daN.m Scelbloc (638)
1,6 ± 0,03 mm
Frenbloc (270) Frenbloc (270) 4 daN.m 0,8 daN.m 12 daN.m 16,9 daN.m Formajoint (510)
12 daN.m 7 daN.m
1,5 ± 0,03 mm 2,8 ± 0,03 mm
454vfm04 Fig. 5
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.9

12 daN.m 30 daN.m
16,5 daN.m
19 daN.m
16,9 daN.m 15 daN.m
4 daN.m 12 daN.m 26,6 daN.m 7 daN.m 16,9 daN.m
454vfm05 Fig. 6
D1.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Axle "20.09" (3 cylinder wide vineyard)
1 daN.m
9,5 daN.m
Scelbloc (638) 9,5 daN.m 2,5 daN.m 12 daN.m 7 daN.m Frenbloc (270)
1,3 daN.m
1,6 ± 0,03 mm
Frenbloc (270) Frenbloc (270) 0,8 daN.m 12 daN.m 16,9 daN.m Formajoint (510) Selbloc (638)
7 daN.m
1,5 ± 0,03 mm 2,8 ± 0,03 mm
454vfm06 Fig. 7
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.11

12 daN.m 30 daN.m
16,5 daN.m
16,9 daN.m
12 daN.m
15 daN.m 16,9 daN.m
26,6 daN.m 7 daN.m
19 daN.m
454vfm07 Fig. 8
D1.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Axle "20.09" (3 cylinder orchard)
9,5 daN.m
Scelbloc (638) 9,5 daN.m 2,5 daN.m 12 daN.m 7 daN.m 1,3 daN.m Frenbloc (270) 26,6 daN.m
Scelbloc (638)
1,6 ± 0,03 mm
Frenbloc (270) Frenbloc (270) 0,8 daN.m 12 daN.m 16,9 daN.m 7 daN.m Formajoint (510)
7 daN.m
1,5 ± 0,03 mm 2,8 ± 0,03 mm
454vfm08 Fig. 9
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.13

12 daN.m
12 daN.m 30 daN.m
16,5 daN.m
19 daN.m
1 daN.m
15 daN.m
Frenetanch (242)
454vfm09 Fig. 10
D1.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Axle "20.11" (4 cylinder wide vineyard)
1 daN.m
9,5 daN.m 7 daN.m
Frenbloc (270) Frenbloc (270) 0,8 daN.m 7 daN.m
9,5 daN.m
Frenbloc (270)
1,3 daN.m
1,6 ± 0,03 mm
8 daN.m 2,5 daN.m 0,8 daN.m 12 daN.m 16,9 daN.m Formajoint (510) Selbloc (638)
1,5 ± 0,03 mm 2,8 ± 0,03 mm
454vfm10 Fig. 11
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.15

16,9 daN.m
12 daN.m
15 daN.m 16,9 daN.m 26,6 daN.m 7 daN.m
12 daN.m 30 daN.m
16,5 daN.m
19 daN.m
454vfm11 Fig. 12
D1.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Axle "20.11" (4 cylinder orchard)
12 daN.m 9,5 daN.m

Scelbloc (638) Frenbloc (270) 12 daN.m 0,8 daN.m 1,3 daN.m 9,5 daN.m 26,6 daN.m Scelbloc (638)
7 daN.m
1,6 ± 0,03 mm
8 daN.m 2,5 daN.m 0,8 daN.m 12 daN.m 16,9 daN.m 7 daN.m Formajoint (510)
1,5 ± 0,03 mm 2,8 ± 0,03 mm
454vfm12 Fig. 13
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.17

12 daN.m 30 daN.m
16,5 daN.m
12 daN.m
1 daN.m
15 daN.m
Frenetanch (242)
454vfm13 Fig. 14
D1.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Wheel alignment
Method of adjustment
X
X X
A2
M M
A1
X X
453hsm71 Fig. 15
Wheel alignment is adjusted with the wheels fitted to the – Adjust the track rods (M) so that "A1" = "A2" or "A2" –
tractor and resting on the ground. The measurements 1 mm (toe-in).
between the rims are taken at the horizontal axis of the
N.B.: Dimensions "M" must be equal.
wheels, at the edge of the rims between the 2 points "X".
– Make a mark at these points. – Tighten the track rod locknuts to the recommended
torque.
– Measure "A1" between points "X".
– Move the tractor forward until the wheels have
completed a half-rotation (front axle disengaged) and
measure "A2" (between the same points "X").
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.19

Removal/refitting of suspended front axle
Exploded view of front axle sub-frame and mount
6
4
1
5 2
2
1
6
7
8
454vfm14 Fig. 16
Nomenclature
1 Washer. 4 Lock screw. 7 Hollow screw.
2 Bush. 5 Washer. 8 Seals.
3 Front axle spindle. 6 Shaft lubrication pipe.
D1.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal
– Position the tractor on flat stable ground. 4
– Chock the rear wheels.
– Remove the front axle casings and drive shaft.
– Disconnect the hydraulic hoses to the steering actuator.
– Remove the fuel tank.
– Remove the lubrication pipe hollow screw attachment
at the end of the axle (3).
N.B.: On the "20.09 C" axle the two hydraulic
hoses (9) must be removed from the transmission oil
cooler to gain access to the lock screw (4).
– Undo this screw (4) that locks the spindle (3).
N.B.: On tractors fitted with the "20.09 C" axle, this 9
screw is only accessible from the right side of the 454vfm15 Fig. 17
tractor.
– Jack-up and support the front of the tractor.
– Remove the front wheels.
– Support the front axle.
– Extract the spindle (3) using a locally-made tool
(Fig. 19).
– Remove the front axle.
454vfm16 Fig. 18
M12
M12
40
10
ø 14
280
M12
ø 42
ø 50
454vfm89 Fig. 19
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.21

00 11 314 170
454vfm17 Fig. 20 454vfm18 Fig. 21
Refitting
– Break up and remove the bushes (2).
– Insert new bushes (2) using tool n° 00 11 314 170.
– Mark the location of the hole for the lock screw on the
shaft (3) to facilitate its orientation when refitting.
– Lubricate the shaft (3) before refitting.
– Apply Loctite Frenbloc (270) to the lock screw (4) and
tighten to 9,6 daN.m.
– Complete the remaining operations in the reverse order
of dismantling.
– Bond the 4 screws for the front axle shaft using Loctite
Frenbloc (270) and tighten to 4,5 daN.m.
N.B.: Remember to reconnect the front axle
lubrication pipe. 3
– Tighten the wheel nuts to 45 daN.m.

454vfm16 Fig. 22
9
454vfm15 Fig. 23
D1.22 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting of axial front axle
Exploded view of front axle sub-frame and mount
3
4
5
6
7
14
8
15 9
10
11
13 12
454vfm19 Fig. 24
Nomenclature
1 Bush. 6 Seal. 11 Bush.
2 Front bearing bracket. 7 Axle body. 12 Screws.
3 Grease nipple. 8 Washer. 13 Nut.
4 Bush. 9 Bush. 14 Rear bearing bracket.
5 Washer. 10 O-ring. 15 Screws.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.23

Removal/refitting of axial front axle
Removal
– Position the tractor on flat stable ground.
– Remove the front wheels.
– Support the axle.
– Remove the 4 screws (15) from the front axle bearing
brackets.
15
Refitting
454vfm20 Fig. 25
– Reassemble in reverse order to removal.
– If necessary replace the bushes in the front axle
bearing brackets.
– Apply Loctite Frenbloc (270) to the screws (15).
– Tighten the 4 bearing bracket screws (15) to 35 daN.m.
D1.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Steering actuator for suspended axle
Exploded view
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13 9
4
5
3
2
1
14
13
12
11
10
454vfm21 Fig. 26
Nomenclature
1 Dust seal. 6 Seal. 11 Track rod and track rod end.
2 Lip seal. 7 Shaft. 12 Nut.
3 Cover. 8 Ring. 13 Ball joint.
4 O-ring. 9 Cylinder. 14 Screws.
5 Seal. 10 Track rod end nut.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.25

Removal
– Extract the track rod ends (11) using a separator.
– Disconnect the track rods by locking one of the two ball 11
joints (13).
– Unscrew the other ball joint (13) by inserting a spanner
between the actuator shaft and the ball joint that has
alreaady been locked (Fig. 29).
– Remove the track rods.
– Remove the 6 actuator mounting screws (14).
– Remove the steering actuator.
Refitting
– Proceed in reverse order to the removal operations and
tighten to the specified torque. 454vfm22 Fig. 27
– Tighten the 6 actuator mounting screws (14) to

12 daN.m.
– Tighten the ball joints (13) to 30 daN.m.
13 14
– Tighten the track rod end attachment nut (11) to
16,5 daN.m.
N.B.: If the length of the track rods (11) has changed,
this may affect wheel alignment (see relevant
paragraph).
454vfm23 Fig. 28
13
454vfm24 Fig. 29
D1.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Dismantling
– Open the actuator.
– Extract the sleeve (9) from the body of the axle.
– Remove all seals.
8 6
454vfm25 Fig. 30
Refitting
N.B.: New seals must be used and lubricated when
refitting.
– Refit the actuator (see relevant paragraph).
4
5
3
454vfm26 Fig. 31
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.27

Steering actuator for the axial axle
Exploded view
9
1
10
2
6
8
5 11
4
3
7
2
12
1
11
10
9
8
454vfm27 Fig. 32
Nomenclature
1 Dust seal. 5 Shaft. 9 Track rod and track rod end.
2 Lip seal. 6 Ring. 10 Nut.
3 Cover. 7 Actuator body. 11 Ball joint.
4 Piston seal. 8 Nut. 12 Screws.
D1.28 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal
– Extract the track rod ends using a ball joint extractor.
– Disconnect the track rods by locking one of the two ball
joints (11).
– Unscrew the other ball joint (11) by inserting a spanner
between the actuator shaft and the ball joint that has
alreaady been locked (Fig. 35).
– Remove the track rods (9).
– Unscrew the actuator mounting screws (12). 9
Refitting
– Proceed in reverse order to the removal operations and
tighten to the specified torque. 454vfm28 Fig. 33
– Tighten the actuator attachment screws (12) to

12 daN.m.
– Tighten the ball joints (11) to 30 daN.m.
– Tighten nut (8) to 16,5 daN.m.
N.B.: If the length of the track rods (9) has changed,
this may affect wheel alignment (see relevant
paragraph).
8 11 12
454vfm90 Fig. 34
11
454vfm29 Fig. 35
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.29

Dismantling
1
2
7
5
4
6
3
2
1
454vfm30 Fig. 36
– Open the actuator.

– Extract the shaft (5) from the axle body.
– Remove all seals.
Refitting
N.B.: New seals must be used and lubricated when refitting.
– Refit the actuator (see relevant paragraph).
D1.30 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Reduction gear and wheel hub for "20.09 C" axle
Exploded view
10
9
8
7
5
4
3
6
2
1
19
18
16
15
14
17
13
12
11
454vfm31 Fig. 37
Nomenclature
1 Plug. 8 Washer. 15 Planet gear shaft.
2 Seal. 9 Flange. 16 Planet gear.
3 Screws. 10 Tapered roller bearing. 17 Needles.
4 Cover. 11 Wheel nut. 18 Bearing.
5 O-ring. 12 Washer. 19 Seal.
6 Screws. 13 Wheel stud.
7 Circlip. 14 Hub.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.31

Removing the epicyclic reduction

gear 3
– Raise the relevant front wheel and support using
stands.
– Remove the wheel.
– Position the drain plug at the bottom. 4
– Drain the reduction gear.
– Remove the 2 screws (3).
N.B.: If changing the sun gear, extract the circlip (7) to
enable the CV joint to be removed. 3
– Unscrew the 3 screws (6). 454vfm32 Fig. 38
– Remove the flange (9) and the hub (14).

– Extract the planet gear shafts (15).
– Remove the planet gears (16). 14
N.B.: To extract the seal (19), the wheel hub must be

removed (see relevant paragraph).
6
Refitting the epicyclic reduction gear
N.B.: Check all components and change any that are
defective.
refitting.
– Bond using Loctite (270) and tighten the 3 screws (6) to
7 9
12 daN.m.
454vfm33 Fig. 39
– Tighten the cover screws (3) to 3,5 daN.m.
– Top up the oil.
15
19
14
18
16
454vfm34 Fig. 40
D1.32 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removing the wheel hub

19 7
– Remove the epicylic reduction gear (see relevant
paragraph). 18
– Remove the wheel king pins (see relevant paragraph).
– Remove the CV joint by extracting the circlip (7) from
the sun gear.
– Remove the ring seal (19).
– Extract the bearing cone (18).
N.B.: This operation destroys the bearing (18).
Refitting the wheel hub

– Fit the bearing inner cage (18) using tool
n° 00 11 314 140. 16
N.B.: The seal (19) must be fitted with the

454vfm35 Fig. 41
inscription "oil side" towards the oil.
– Use tool n° 00 11 314 190 to fit the new sealing
bush (19).
– Assemble the hub bearing outer cages using an
appropriate tool.
– Refit the CV joint.
– Refit the king pins (see relevant paragraph).
– Refit the epicyclic reduction gear (see relevant
paragraph). 00 11 314 140 18
454vfm36 Fig. 42
00 11 314 190
454vfm37 Fig. 43
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.33

Reduction gear and wheel hub for "20.09" and "20.11" axles
Exploded view of reduction gear and wheel hub for "20.09" axle
17
20
19
18
23
24
16
15
21
14
22
5
13
12
11
10
6
7
3
8
2
9
1
8
7
6
4
454vfm38 Fig. 44
Nomenclature
1 Plug. 9 Planet gear. 17 Wheel stud.
2 Seal. 10 Planet gear shaft. 18 Hub.
3 Screws. 11 Circlip. 19 Tapered roller bearing.
4 Cover. 12 Crown wheel. 20 Seal.
5 Washer. 13 Locking ring. 21 Sleeve.
6 Washer. 14 Crown wheel. 22 Screws.
7 Needles. 15 Tapered roller bearing. 23 Washer.
8 Washer. 16 O-ring. 24 Nut.
D1.34 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Exploded view of reduction gear and wheel hub for "20.11" axle
17
23
24
20
19
18
16
15
9
13
12
21
22
14
11
8
7
6
2 10
1 5
4
454vfm39 Fig. 45
Nomenclature
1 Plug. 9 Planet gear. 17 Wheel stud.
2 Seal. 10 Planet gear shaft. 18 Hub.
3 Screws. 11 Circlip. 19 Tapered roller bearing.
4 Cover. 12 Crown wheel. 20 Seal.
5 Washer. 13 Locking ring. 21 Sleeve.
6 Washer. 14 Crown wheel. 22 Screws.
7 Needles. 15 Tapered roller bearing. 23 Washer.
8 Plate. 16 O-ring. 24 Nut.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.35

A
3 14
22
27 26 25
454vfm40 Fig. 46 454vfm41 Fig. 47
Removing the epicyclic reduction

gear
– Chock the rear wheels
– Raise the relevant front wheel and support using
stands.
– Position the plug at the bottom.
– Drain the reduction gear.
– Remove the 2 screws (3).
– Remove the circlip (25), the splined washer (26) and
the washer (27).
22
– Remove the screws (22) that attach the epicyclic ring
gear. 454vfm42 Fig. 48
– Use two of the screws (22) as extractors by screwing
them into the holes (A) tapped in the ring gear.
D1.36 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

22
12
14 21 12 13
454vfm43 Fig. 49 454vfm44 Fig. 50
– Extract the locking ring (13) to separate

components (12) and (14). 3
N.B.: The sleeves (21) must be removed using a
press.
– Withdraw the circlips (11) to remove the planet shafts
(Fig 44 or 45).
Refitting the epicyclic reduction gear

defective.
1
refitting.
– Bond the screws (22) for the crown gear using Loctite
Frenbloc (270) and tighten to 9,5 daN.m. 454vfm46 Fig. 51
– Tighten the screws (3) to 2,5 daN.m.
– Refill the reducer gear with oil (see operating manual).
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.37

20
19
18
454vfm48 Fig. 52 454vfm45 Fig. 53
Removing the wheel hub

– Remove the epicyclic reducer and the wheel king pins
(see relevant paragraphs).
– Remove the CV joint. 15 19
– Withdraw the hub (18) using a press.
– Extract the bearing cone (19) using an extractor.
C A C
Refitting the wheel hub

B
defective.
refitting.
Important: No specific preload or clearance setting is
454vfm47 Fig. 54
required to fit bearings (15) and (19). Check
dimensions "A", "B", "C" before fitting new parts.
A = 11,975 to 12,025 mm.
B = 52,229 to 52,279 mm.
C = 20 to 20,1 mm.
D1.38 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

00 11 314 250
20
19
18
454vfm48 Fig. 55 454vfm49 Fig. 56
– Fit the new bearing cone (19) to the bearing carrier.

– Fit the hub bearing cups using an appropriate tool.
N.B.: The seal (20) must be fitted with the
inscription "oil side" towards the oil. 22
– Use tool n° 00 11 314 210 to replace the seal (20) on 12
axle "20.09" and tool n° 00 11 314 250 on axle "20.11".
– Put the hub in place while attaching the ring gear (12).
– Refit the CV joint.
– Refit the epicyclic reducer and the wheel king pins
(see relevant paragraphs).
454vfm44 Fig. 57
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.39

Wheel king pins and hub carrier
Removal of king pins
3 5 2 10
4 1 9 6
454vfm50 Fig. 58
– Position the tractor on flat stable ground. – Extract the steering track rod end using a ball joint
– Apply the handbrake. puller.
– Chock the rear wheels. – Support the wheel hub carrier.
– Raise the relevant front wheel and support using – Unscrew the lower (1) and upper (2) king pins.
stands. – Withdraw the wheel hub carrier (3) with the CV joint
– Remove the wheel. shaft from the axle body.
– Extract the lower bush (4) from the axle body.
– Cut the upper bush (5) to extract it.
D1.40 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

454vfm51 Fig. 59 454vfm52 Fig. 60
– Withdraw the ball joint (9) using an extractor.

– Extract the lip seal (6) and the bush(es) from the axle
body using an appropriate extractor.
00 11 314 150
N.B.: On "20.09 C" axles, the axle body has 2 bushes
nested one inside the other. Only the inner bush
must be replaced. If changing the outer bush,
a Facom U51"B" extractor must be used with an
appropriate support (Fig. 62).
4 9 1
Refitting the king pins
refitting.
– Fit the bush (9) onto the pin (1) using tool
n° 00 11 314 150.
– Using the same tool, insert the bush (4) into the body
(Fig. 61). 454vfm53 Fig. 61
N.B.: The bush (4) must be cooled in liquid nitrogen

before insertion.
454vfm54 Fig. 62
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.41

00 11 314 040
00 11 314 240
454vfm55 Fig. 63 454vfm56 Fig. 64
N.B.: The bush (5) must be cooled in liquid nitrogen

before insertion.
– Fit the new bush (5) using tool n° 00 11 314 040.
– Insert the bush (8) using tool n° 00 11 314 240.
– Position the seal (6) with the lip on the differential side 6
using tool n° 00 11 314 160.
– Support the reducer gear with the CV joint to avoid 00 11 314 040
damaging the lip on the seal (6).
– Insert the assembly into the axle body.
– Fit the lower and upper king pins.
N.B.: Remember to fit the Belleville washers.
– Tighten the screws (10) to 12 daN.m.
Complete the operation in the reverse order used during
dismantling.
454vfm58 Fig. 65
10
454vfm57 Fig. 66
D1.42 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal of hub carrier

– Remove the epicyclic reduction gear, the hub and the 12 11
wheel king pins (see relevant paragraphs).
– Remove the lip seal (11).
– Extract the bush (12) using a sleeve.
Refitting the hub carrier

refitting.
– Insert the new bush (12) using tool n° 00 11 314 120
("20.09 C" axle) or tool n° 00 11 314 200 ("20.09"/
"20.11" axle).
– Fit the new seal (11) using tool n° 00 11 314 060
("20.09 C" axle) or tool n° 00 11 314 220 ("20.09"/
20.11 axle). 454vfm59 Fig. 67
– Reinstall the epicyclic reduction gear, the hub and the
king pins (see relevant paragraphs).
00 11 314 120
454vfm60 Fig. 68
00 11 314 060
454vfm61 Fig. 69
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.43

Crown wheel and pinion and differential
Exploded view of the pinion gear for the suspended axle
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
454vfm62 Fig. 70
Nomenclature
1 Crown wheel. 6 Flexible sleeve. 11 O-ring.
2 Pinion. 7 Tapered roller bearing. 12 Seal.
3 Shim for adjusting pinion end float. 8 Tab washer. 13 Hub.
4 Tapered roller bearing. 9 Castellated nut. 14 Circlip.
5 Washer. 10 Washer.
D1.44 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Exploded view of the crown wheel and pinion for the suspended axle
2
3
4
5
6
5
7
8
9
10
11
454vfm63 Fig. 71
Nomenclature
1 Crown wheel. 5 Washer. 9 Castellated nut.
2 Pinion. 6 Flexible sleeve. 10 Lip seal.
3 Shim for adjusting pinion end float. 7 Tapered roller bearing. 11 Seal holder.
4 Tapered roller bearing. 8 Tab washer.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.45

7 00 11 314 070
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
00 11 314 090
454vfm64 Fig. 72 454vfm65 Fig. 73
Removal of crown wheel and pinion

– Remove the front axle (see relevant paragraph).
1
Suspended front axle
– Remove the hub (13).
Suspended and axial axles

– Unlock the nut (9) using tools n° 00 11 314 070 and
n° 00 11 314 090.
– Remove the cover supporting the crown wheel and
pinion.
– Mark the differential bearings in relation to the
differential housing.
– Remove the differential housing. 454vfm66 Fig. 74
– Remove the crown wheel and pinion.
– Extract the pinion bearing cups.
– Extract the bearing cone (4) using an extractor.
– Remove the ring gear (1). 4
454vfm67 Fig. 75
D1.46 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Refitting the crown wheel and pinion

refitting.
– Adjust pinion end float (see relevant paragraphs).
– Apply Loctite Frenbloc (270) to the crown wheel screws
and tighten to 9,5 daN.m.
– Use tool n° 00 11 313 970 to refit the pinion bearing
cups.
– Fit the lip seal (12) using tool n° 00 11 314 130
(suspended front axle only) (Fig. 70).
– Apply Loctite Formajoint (510) to the mating face of the 9,5 daN.m
differential mount on the casing.
– Tighten the differential mount attachment screws to
16 daN.m.
– Refit the front axle (see relevant paragraph). 454vfm68 Fig. 76
00 11 313 970
454vfm69 Fig. 77
16 daN.m
454vfm70 Fig. 78
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.47

Exploded view of differential case
15
16
27
17
18
26
23
24
25
15
16
22
21
20
19
18
17
454vfm71 Fig. 79
Nomenclature
15 Screws. 20 Backplate. 25 Washer.
16 Locking tab. 21 1,4 mm disc. 26 Differential half-casing.
17 Castellated nut. 22 2,8 mm disc. 27 Screws.
18 Tapered roller bearing. 23 Pin.
19 Differential half-casing. 24 Planet gear.
D1.48 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Dismantling the differential

– Remove the crown wheel and pinion (see relevant
paragraph).
20
– Extract the tapered bearing (18) using and appropriate
extractor and support frame. 21
– Open the casing and extract the parts contained inside.
22
Installing the differential

– Check the thicknesses of the discs and friction
backplates.
Nomenclature
20 Thickness of a backplate: 1,5 ± 0,03 mm
(minimum thickness: 1,4 mm).
21 Thickness of a disc: 1,6 ± 0,03 mm
22 Thickness of a disc: 2,8 ± 0,03 mm 454vfm72 Fig. 80
N.B.: Any parts that are worn beyond allowable limits

must be replaced. 18
N.B.: Use the drive shaft to align the discs and
backplates.
refitting.
– Use tool n° 00 11 314 110 to refit the tapered
bearings (18).
– Refit and adjust the crown wheel and pinion (see
454vfm73 Fig. 81
00 11 314 110
454vfm74 Fig. 82
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.49

Adjusting the crown wheel and pinion

00 11 314 020
Adjusting pinion protrusion
– Remove the crown wheel and pinion (see relevant
paragraph).
– Fit the pinion bearing cups using tool n° 00 11 313 970.
– Maintain pressure on the inner races of these bearings A
using a screw and washers.
N.B.: It must be possible to turn the bearings by hand.
– Install tools n° 00 11 314 020 and n° 00 11 314 030.
– Fit the 2 bearing half flanges and measure distance "A"
with the depth gauge probe in contact with the bearing
inner cage (Fig. 83). 00 11 314 030
– Note dimension "B" marked on the end of the pinion.
– Calculate the required shim thickness "C":
C=A–B 454vfm91 Fig. 83
Example:
A = 95,51 mm mesured.
B = 92,90 inscribed on the end of the pinion.
C = 2,61 mm.
B
2,61 mm of shims therefore need to be used. Fit a shim
that is closest to this dimension: 2,60 mm.
– Fit shims (3) of thickness "C" on the pinion shaft.
– Fit the tapered bearing cone (4) located under the head 92,90
of the pinion gear using tool n° 00 11 314 100.
454vfm75 Fig. 84
00 11 314 100
4
3
454vfm76 Fig. 85
D1.50 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Adjusting the pinion gear pre-load

Important: A new spacer (6) must be fitted.
N.B.: All pre-loads must be measured without the
pinion oil seal.
N.B.: This adjustment is only required on the pinion
after fitting the 2 tapered bearings.
Important: Do not tighten the castellated nut (9) in a
single operation.
– Tap the ends of the pinion lightly with a hammer to seat 5
the bearings correctly.
6
The nut (9) must be tightened in stages, without
excessive force, using tools n° 00 11 314 070 and 5
n° 00 11 314 090.
– Wrap the cord around the splined part of the gear. 9
– Using spring balance n° 77 01 388 008 the force (P)
required to turn the pinion. 454vfm77 Fig. 86
N.B.: Ignore the starting torque.

(P) should fall between 10,5 and 15,7 daN.
– Lock the nut by bending the lock washer. 00 11 314 070
00 11 314 090
454vfm78 Fig. 87
77 01 388 008
454vfm79 Fig. 88
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.51

Adjusting backlash
N.B.: Do not invert the bearing nuts or the direction in
which the crown wheel is fitted.
– Refit the differential housing.
– Tighten the castellated nuts (17) until they are in
contact wth the bearings.
– Gently tighten down the casing bearing caps. 17
17
– Apply the same torque to the differential bearing nuts.
Use tool n° 60 05 006 534.
– Tap the bearings lightly with a plastic hammer to ensure
correct seating.
– Turn the crown wheel several revolutions.
– Place the probe of a 90° dial gauge in contact with the
surface of a crown wheel tooth (Fig. 90). 60 05 006 534
– Measure the backlash at 4 opposing points on the

crown wheel. 454vfm80 Fig. 89
– Calculate the average of the readings.

This value must be between 0,17 and 0,23 mm.
If the values differ, place the probe on the tooth where the
lowest value was recorded.
– Adjust the bearing nuts to move the crown wheel away
from or closer to the pinion, starting on the crown wheel
side:
If the backlash measured is below the stated tolerance
range, screw in the nut on the side away from the crown
wheel and screw out the other nut by the same amount.
If the backlash measured is above the stated tolerance
range, screw out the nut on the side adjacent to the crown
wheel and screw in the other nut by the same amount.
454vfm81 Fig. 90
D1.52 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Adjusting the differential bearing pre-load

– Wind a cord around the splines in the pinion shaft.
– Measure the rotational force "F" for the crown wheel/
pinion assembly using tool n° 77 01 388 008.
Depending on the pre-load on the pinion "P" measured
earlier (see relevant paragraph), carry out the following
calculation:
– In the following table, read value "F" for the relevant
front axle.
Example:
For a "20.09 C" (147533) axle
F
If P = 11 daN.
F = 15,5 to 17,8 daN.
– Apply the same torque to the differential bearing nuts.
– Check and re-adjust the pinion backlash set earlier
(see relevant paragraph). 451hsm46 Fig. 91
Type of axle Axle reference Value "F"
147533 F = (P + 4,5) to (P + 6,8) daN

20.09 C 148450 F = (P + 4,3) to (P + 6,4) daN
147586 F = (P + 4,9) to (P + 7,4) daN
148422 F = (P + 4,9) to (P + 7,4) daN
148423 F = (P + 5,8) to (P + 8,7) daN
148424 F = (P + 4,5) to (P + 6,8) daN
148425 F = (P + 6,1) to (P + 9,2) daN
20.09
148455 F = (P + 6,1) to (P + 9,1) daN
148456 F = (P + 5,5) to (P + 9,3) daN
148457 F = (P + 4,3) to (P + 6,5) daN
148458 F = (P + 4,6) to (P + 7,5) daN
145920 F = (P + 6,7) to (P + 10,2) daN
145921 F = (P + 5,9) to (P + 8,8) daN
147526 F = (P + 6,1) to (P + 9,2) daN
145922 F = (P + 5,4) to (P + 8,1) daN
147527 F = (P + 4,5) to (P + 6,8) daN
20.11
147528 F = (P + 5,1) to (P + 7,6) daN
147529 F = (P + 6,1) to (P + 9,1) daN
145925 F = (P + 6,1) to (P + 9,1) daN
145927 F = (P + 5) to (P + 7,5) daN
147530 F = (P + 4,6) to (P + 7,5) daN
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.53

4-wheel drive unit with electro-hydraulic engagement
Sectional view
3,5 daN.m
6 daN.m
476vfm02 Fig. 92
D1.54 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal
24
– Drain the rear axle (see operating manual).
– Disconnect the 4-wheel drive unit hydraulic control line.
– Unscrew the four attachment screws for the 4-wheel
drive unit.
– Remove the unit.
Refitting
N.B.: Check for the presence of the two locating
pins (24) on the rear axle casing.
476vfm00 Fig. 93
– Apply Loctite Formajoint (510) to the mating face
between the unit and the casing.
– Tighten the four screws attaching the unit to the tractor
to 9 daN.m.
– Apply Loctite Frenetanch (242) to the attachment
screws for the suspended front axle shaft and tighten to
4,5 daN.
– Check the rear axle oil level (see operating manual).
– Test front axle engagement and check for leaks from
the unit.
4,5 daN.m
476vfm01 Fig. 94
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.55

Exploded view
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
1
4
3
2 24
23
22
21
20
1
476vfm03 Fig. 95
Nomenclature
1 Screws. 9 Circlip. 17 Washer.
2 Front cover. 10 Washer. 18 Ball bearing.
3 O-ring. 11 Spring. 19 Circlip.
4 Lip seal. 12 Sliding dog clutch. 20 Casing.
5 Ball bearing. 13 O-ring. 21 O-ring.
6 Shaft. 14 O-ring. 22 O-ring.
7 Cylindrical cotter. 15 Sleeve. 23 Rear cover.
8 Valve. 16 Driven pinion. 24 Locating pin.
D1.56 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

2
22
476vfm04 Fig. 96 476vfm05 Fig. 97
Dismantling
6
– Remove the unit (see relevant paragraph).
– Mark the covers (2) and (22) in relation to the unit
casing.
– Remove covers (2) and (22).
– Extract the shaft (6) forwards (front axle side).
– Remove the components from inside the casing.
– Remove the lip seal (4).
Refitting
refitting. 7 12
N.B.: Couple the shaft (6) and the dog clutch (12)
476vfm06 Fig. 98
correctly using the cotter (7).
N.B.: The shaft ball bearings are a press fit in the unit
casing. The ball bearings are installed using a press.
– Slip on the new lip seal (4) using tool n° 00 11 314 050.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.57

N.B.: Ensure that the valve (8) is fitted the right way
round.
– Tighten the cover attachment screws (1) to 3,5 daN.m.
– Refit the 4-wheel drive unit to the tractor (see relevant
paragraph).
476vfm07 Fig. 99
476vfm05 Fig. 100
D1.58 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

4-wheel drive unit with mechanical engagement
Sectional view
464vfm00 Fig. 101
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.59

Removal
– Drain the rear axle (see operating manual).
– Disconnect the front axle engagement lever.
– Unscrew the four attachment screws for the 4-wheel
drive unit.
– Remove the unit.
4,5 daN.m
Refitting
N.B.: Check for the presence of the two locating
pins (23) on the rear axle casing (Fig. 103).
476vfm01 Fig. 102
– Apply Loctite Formajoint (510) to the mating surface of
the unit to the rear axle casing.
– Tighten the four screws attaching the unit to the tractor
to 9 daN.m.
– Apply Loctite Frenetanch (242) to the attachment
screws for the suspended front axle shaft and tighten to
4,5 daN.
– Check the rear axle oil level (see operating manual).
– Test front axle engagement and check for leaks from
the unit.
Exploded view
1 Seal. 14 Operating shaft. 27 Lever.
2 Ball bearing. 15 Pin. 28 Spacer.
3 Shaft. 16 Spring. 29 Control lever.
4 Circlip. 17 Screws. 30 Washer.
5 Washer. 18 Front cover. 31 Locknut.
6 Cotter. 19 O-ring. 32 Screws.
7 Operating sleeve. 20 Spring. 33 Spring.
8 Sliding dog clutch. 21 Ball. 34 Ball.
9 Washer. 22 Casing. 35 Pin.
10 Ball bearing. 23 Locating pin. 36 Pin.
11 Driven pinion. 24 Rear cover. 37 Stop screw.
12 Spring. 25 O-ring.
13 Fork. 26 O-ring.
D1.60 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

7
6
10
11
9
8
14
12 15
5 16
4
17
3
2 13 24
1
23
22
25
26
21 28
19
20
18
17
34
35 33
36 32
37 31
30
29
464vfm01 Fig. 103
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.61

47 45
44
46
43
42
41
39 40
28
27
38
30
29
464vfm02 Fig. 104
Nomenclature
38 Circlips. 42 Seal. 45 Screws.
39 Bracket. 43 Bracket. 46 Nut.
40 Link. 44 Washer. 47 Handle.
41 Shaft.
D1.62 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Dismantling
– Remove the unit (see relevant paragraph).
3 1 18 24
– Mark the two covers in relation to the unit casing.
– Remove covers (18) and (24).
– Extract the shaft (3) forwards (front axle side).
– Remove the components from inside the casing.
Refitting
refitting. 17 17
N.B.: Couple the operating sleeve (7) and the dog
clutch (8) using the cotter (6).
464vfm03 Fig. 105
N.B.: The shaft ball bearings are a press fit in the unit
casing. The ball bearings are installed using a press.
– Slip on the new seal (1) using an appropriate tool.
– Move the operating sleeve into the engaged position,
place the ball (34), spring (33) and screw (37) in contact 7
and tighten the lock nut (32). 6
– Check the clearance between the fork and the
operating sleeve. The backlash should be between 0,05
and 0,2 mm. 11
9
– Coat the stop screw (37) with Loctite Frenbloc (270) 8
and screw it down until it contacts the shaft (36), in the 14
12
disengaged position. 15
5
16
– Reassemble in reverse order to removal. 4
– Refit the unit to the tractor (see relevant paragraph).
13
464vfm04 Fig. 106
28
20
21
29
34
33 30
32
35 31
36
37
464vfm05 Fig. 107
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.63

Notes
D1.64 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

D2
HYDRAULIC PART
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Hydraulic system

1 Reservoir. 6 Steering actuator. 10 PTO clutch spool valve.
2 160 micron filter. 7 4-wheel drive solenoid valve. 11 PTO clutch actuator.
3 10,8 cm³ pump. 8 Pressure regulator. 12 Oil cooler.
4 15 micron high pressure filter. 9 Differential lock solenoid valve.
5 Steering unit OSPC 80 ON.

1 Reservoir. 9 Low pressure 10 micron filter. 16 PTO clutch spool valve.
2 160 micron filter. 10 4-wheel drive solenoid valve. 17 PTO clutch actuator.
3 10,8 cm³ pump. 11 Pressure regulator. 18 Oil cooler.
4 15 micron high pressure filter. 12 9 bar accumulator. 19 Lubrication solenoid valve.
5 Steering unit OSPC 80 ON. 13 Pressure connector. 20 5 bar valve.
6 Steering actuator. 14 Transmission oil pressure sensor. 21 Clutchless reverser hydraulic unit.
7 "safety patch" solenoid valve. 15 Differential lock solenoid valve.
8 Flow divider.
D2.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Hydraulic system
2 pump hydraulic system (mechanical reverser and doubler)
5 6
7
8
18 bar
200 bar 200 bar

190 bar 0-36 l/min
160 bar
10
11 12 12-48 l/min
115 bar
3,5 bar 15 µm
220 bar
10,8 cm³ 19 cm³
2
160 µm
3
1
398vfm51 Fig. 1
For the 3-pump hydraulic system (mechanical reverser and doubler) see chapter "B2".
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D2.3

Hydraulic system
Component layout
10
12
3
10
4
11
2
5
9
8
7
6
12
398vfm46 Fig. 2
D2.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Hydraulic system
3 pump hydraulic system (hydraulic reverser and doubler)
6
5
18 bar 12
3,5 bar 10
9 11 13
14
10 µm
15
7
200 bar 200 bar 21
16
6 l/min 8
17
190 bar 0-36 l/min
115 bar 18
19
4 5 bar
3,5 bar 15 µm
20
10,8 cm³ 19 cm³
2
3
160 µm
398vfm53 Fig. 3
For the 3-pump hydraulic system (hydraulic reverser and doubler) see chapter "B2".
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D2.5

Hydraulic system
Component layout
20
16
18
3
16 4
17
19
2
5
12
7
15
11
10
21
9
18
398vfm54 Fig. 4
D2.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Front axle engagement
Operating principle
Position with front axle disengaged
1
18 bar
476vfm08 Fig. 1
Nomenclature
1 18 bar pressure regulator. 3 Check valve.
2 Front axle engagement on/off solenoid valve. P Power supply.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D2.7

Position with front axle engaged
1
18 bar
476vfm09 Fig. 2
Nomenclature
1 18 bar pressure regulator. 3 Check valve.
2 Front axle engagement on/off solenoid valve. P Power supply.
D2.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Functional logic
Front axle engagement modes Electrical state Hydraulic state
Front axle selector OFF

Disengaged Indicator light OFF
Solenoid valve ON (+ 12 V) 18 bar
Switch ON
Engaged Indicator light ON
Solenoid valve OFF (0 V) 0 bar
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D2.9

Test conditions:
– Engine idling.
– Transmission oil temperature: 60°C.
Checking the front axle engagement pressure
476vfm10 Fig. 3
– Remove the 4-wheel drive housing supply pipe and fit a – Measure the pressure which should be 0 bar when the
hydraulic hose in its place. front axle is engaged.
– Connect pressure gauge n° 60 05 705 076 to the hose. – Measure the pressure which should be 18 bar when
the front axle is disengaged.
D2.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Checking the front axle engagement pressure
Electric state of the Electric state of the

Hydraulic state Hydraulic state
solenoid valve solenoid valve
Mechanical state
Nominal voltage Measured voltage Nominal pressure Recorded pressure
4-wheel drive engaged 0V 0 bar
4-wheel drive
12 V 18 bar
disengaged
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D2.11

Notes
D2.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

D3
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Electronic control of front axle
Controlling front axle engagement

Description
Front axle engagement is controlled from the instrument panel.
N.B.: The front axle engagement indicator light (1) flashes when the solenoid valve is short circuited.
185
37
232
234
101
454vfm82 Fig. 1
Nomenclature
1 Front axle engagement indicator light. 185 Instrument panel.

37 Speed sensor. 232 Rear differential solenoid valve switch.
101 Front axle engagement solenoid valve. 234 Selector for front axle engagement solenoid valve.
D3.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Operating mode
State Front axle engagement modes
Front axle selector OFF

State 1 Disengaged Indicator light OFF
Solenoid valve ON
Switch OFF
Engaged in automatic mode
State 2 Indicator light ON
(speed less than 14 km/h)
Solenoid valve OFF
Switch OFF
Disengaged, automatic mode
State 3 Indicator light ON
(speed less that 14 km/h)
Solenoid valve ON
Switch OFF
State 4 Engaged in over-ride mode Indicator light ON
Solenoid valve OFF
To change from state 1 to 2 requires either: To change from state 1 to 3 requires either:
– Brief pressure on the front axle engagement selector. – Brief pressure on the front axle engagement selector
– Engagement of the rear axle differential lock. when the speed is more than 14 km/h
To change from state 2 to 1: – Engagement of the rear differential lock when the
speed is more than 14 km/h.
– Brief pressure on the front axle engagement selector.
To change from state 1 to 4:
– Pressure on the front axle engagement selector for
– Speed must be more than 14 km/h.
more than 2 seconds.
– Speed must be less than 14 km/h.
To change from state 3 to 4 requires either:
– Pressure on the front axle engagement selector for
– Pressure on the front axle engagement selector for more than 2 seconds.
more than 2 seconds.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D3.3

Input/output
5 9 13 17 21 25 29
Connector "JX2" on the instrument panel. 1 33
2 34
3 35
4 36
8 12 16 20 24 28 32
4
5
3 9
6 13
10 17
2
14 21
7
11 18 25
1
15 22 29
8
19 26 33
12
16 23 30
20 27 34
24 31
28 35
32
36
454vfm83 Fig. 2

17 4-wheel drive control 12 volts
31 Supply to the 4-wheel drive solenoid valve 12 volts
D3.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Schematic diagram
+ APC
185
110
Fa 16/10 A
JX2
19 17 27 31 22 21 5 6 20
232
2
3
M1
7 J90
M0
7 J91
3
2
234
J132
1
102
2
M1 J128
1
101
2
454vfm84 Fig. 3
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D3.5

Notes
D3.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Component layout
Component layout
185
185 232
234
110
JX2
M0
110
454vfm85 Fig. 4
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D3.7

Component layout
T 506 transmission with hydraulic reverser and doubler T 506 transmission with mechanical reverser and doubler
37 37
185 185
101
101
454vfm86 Fig. 5 454vfm87 Fig. 6
Nomenclature (Fig. 3, 4, 5 and 6)
37 Speed sensor. 185 Instrument panel. J91 Connector for 4-wheel drive selector. M1 Earth for transmission harness.
101 4-wheel drive solenoid valve. 232 Rear differential solenoid valve switch. JX2 Instrument panel connector.
110 Fuse box (instrument panel). 234 Selector for front axle engagement solenoid valve. M0 Earth for instrument panel and transmission harness.
D3.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Electrical tests
Supply circuit switch

– See chapter "B3".

– See chapter "B3".
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D3.9


procedure.
Checking the front axle engagement

switch (234) 7 4 5 6 9
N.B.: When the solenoid valve is short-circuited, the

front axle engagement indicator light flashes. 8 1 2 3 10

procedure.
– Switch neutral, contact open between terminals 2 and
3.
– Switch actuated, contact closed between terminals 2
and 3. 345vfm10 Fig. 1
Checking the front axle engagement

solenoid valve (101)
procedure. 101
Characteristics:
– Solenoid valve supplied at 12 V.
– Resistance 8 ohm.
454vfm88 Fig. 2
D3.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Checking the front axle engagement switch (234)
Switch at rest Switch operated Measured value

Test conditions
Checking the front axle engagement solenoid valve (101)

Nominal Measured Measured
Test conditions Nominal voltage
resistance voltage resistance
Engaged 0V 8 ohm
Disengaged 12 V 8 ohm
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D3.11

Notes
D3.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

UNDRIVEN FRONT AXLE
D1
MECHANICAL PART
Chapter D

CONTENTS
D1 – MECHANICAL PART
GENERAL
CHARACTERISTICS...................................................................................................................................................... D1.2
TORQUE SETTINGS
AXLE "148827" (NARROW VINEYARD)........................................................................................................................ D1.3
AXLE "148829" (WIDE VINEYARD AND ORCHARD) .................................................................................................. D1.4
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................................................................... D1.5
REMOVAL/REFITTING OF FRONT AXLE

EXPLODED VIEW OF AXLE SUB-FRAME MOUNT ..................................................................................................... D1.6
EXPLODED VIEW OF AXLE BODY............................................................................................................................... D1.7
REMOVAL ...................................................................................................................................................................... D1.8
REFITTING..................................................................................................................................................................... D1.8
STEERING ACTUATOR
EXPLODED VIEW .......................................................................................................................................................... D1.9
REMOVAL ...................................................................................................................................................................... D1.9
REFITTING..................................................................................................................................................................... D1.9
DISMANTLING ............................................................................................................................................................... D1.9
REFITTING..................................................................................................................................................................... D1.9
SPINDLE CARRIER/KING PIN

REMOVAL .................................................................................................................................................................... D1.10
REFITTING................................................................................................................................................................... D1.10
WHEEL HUB
EXPLODED VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................ D1.11
REMOVAL .................................................................................................................................................................... D1.11
REFITTING................................................................................................................................................................... D1.12
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

D1
MECHANICAL PART
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

General
Characteristics
Carraro type and reference 148827 148829
Tractor type Narrow vineyard Wide vineyard and orchard
Maximum overall width (in mm) 893 1 115
Maximum overall width (in mm) 1 193 1 515
Number of turns of steering wheel to the right 3,77
Number of turns of steering wheel to the left 3
N.B.: Characteristics such as the number and size of the wheel studs, steering and swing angles are given in the
tractor operating instructions.
D1.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Torque settings
Axle "148827" (narrow vineyard)
32 daN.m 32 daN.m
16 daN.m
32,5 daN.m
8 daN.m 32,5 daN.m
14 daN.m 5,6 daN.m
44°
55° +– 2°
0°
5,6 daN.m 30 daN.m 30 daN.m
442vfm00 Fig. 1
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.3

Torque settings
Axle "148829" (wide vineyard and orchard)
32 daN.m 32 daN.m
16 daN.m
32,5 daN.m
8 daN.m 32,5 daN.m
14 daN.m 5,5 daN.m 5,5 daN.m 14 daN.m
44°
55° +– 2°
0°
5,6 daN.m 30 daN.m 30 daN.m
442vfm02 Fig. 2
D1.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Wheel alignment
Method of adjustment
X
X X
A2
M M
A1
442vfm01 Fig. 3
– Set the wheels straight. – Adjust the track rods (M) so that "A1" = "A2" – 3 or "A1"
Wheel alignment is adjusted with the wheels fitted to the = "A2" – 6 mm (toe-in).
tractor and resting on the ground. The measurements N.B.: Dimensions "M" must be equal.
between the rims are taken at the horizontal axis of the
wheels, at the edge of the rims between the 2 points "X". – Tighten the track rod locknuts to the recommended
torque.
– Make a mark at these points.
– Measure "A1" between points "X".
– Move the tractor forward to achive a half rotation of the
wheels and measure dimension "A2" (between the same
points "X").
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.5

Removal/refitting of front axle
Exploded view of axle sub-frame mount
6
4
1
5 2
2
1
6
7
8
454vfm14 Fig. 4
Nomenclature
1 Washer. 4 Lock screw. 7 Hollow screw.
2 Bush. 5 Washer. 8 Seals.
3 Front axle spindle. 6 Shaft lubrication pipe.
D1.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Exploded view of axle body
10
11
2
12
2
9 13
14
15
24
23 16
19
22 21
17
18
10
20
442vfm03 Fig. 5
Nomenclature
9 Bush. 15 Pin. 21 Steering actuator.

10 Grease nipple. 16 LH axle head. 22 Nut.
11 RH axle head. 17 Washer. 23 Washer.
12 Axle centre pivot. 18 Nut. 24 Pin.
13 Pin. 19 Bush.
14 Pin. 20 Nut.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.7

Removal
– Position the tractor on flat stable ground. 4
– Remove the fuel tank.
– Remove the lubrication pipe hollow screw attachment
at the end of the axle (3).
N.B.: On the "148827" axle, the two hydraulic
hoses (25) must be disconnected from the
transmission oil cooler to gain access to the lock
screw (4).
– Undo this screw (4) that locks the spindle (3).
N.B.: On tractors fitted with the "148827" axle, this 25
screw can be accessed only from the right side of the
442vfm04 Fig. 6
tractor.
1
– Remove the front wheels. 2
4
– Support the front axle. 3
– Extract the spindle (3) using a locally-made tool
(Fig. 8).
Refitting
– Break up and remove the bushes (2).
– Insert new bushes (2) using tool n° 00 11 314 170.
– Mark the location of the hole for the lock screw on the
shaft (3) to facilitate its orientation when refitting.
6
– Lubricate the shaft (3) before refitting.
– Apply Loctite Frenbloc (270) to the lock screw (4) and
442vfm05 Fig. 7
tighten to 9,6 daN.m.
– Complete the remaining operations in the reverse order M12
of dismantling.
M12
N.B.: Remember to reconnect the front axle spindle
40
10
lubrication line (6).

ø 14
280
M12
ø 42
ø 50
454vfm89 Fig. 8
D1.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Steering actuator
Exploded view
2
1
5
7
3 8
4
6
9
10
442vfm06 Fig. 9
Nomenclature
1 Shaft. 5 Seals. 8 Actuator body.
2 Grease nipples. 6 Cover. 9 Piston.
3 Ball joint. 7 Locknut. 10 Washer.
4 Circlip.
Removal Dismantling
– Disconnect the hydraulic hoses to the steering actuator. – Open the actuator.
– Undo the 2 actuator attachment bolts. – Remove all seals.
Refitting
Refitting N.B.: New seals must be used and lubricated when
– Refitting operations are in the reverse order of refitting.
dismantling. – Replace the nut (7).
– Tighten the actuator attachment bolts to 30 daN.m. – Refit by performing the removal operations in reverse.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.9

Spindle carrier/King pin
Removal
– Extract the steering track rod end using a ball joint
puller.
0,3 – 0,85 mm
– Remove the steering actuator mounting bolt if removing
the RH wheel spindle carrier. 1
– Raise the relevant wheel.
2
– Unscrew the nut (1).
– Push the spindle carrier down to extract the king pin.
Refitting
N.B.: A new lock nut (1) must be used.
– Check all components and change any that are
defective. 442vfm07 Fig. 10
– Refitting operations are in the reverse order of

dismantling.
– Tighten the king pin nut to 32 daN.m.
– Use a dial gauge to check that king pin backlash is
between 0,3 and 0,85 mm.
N.B.: If the backlash is outside limits, change the
bearing (2).
D1.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Wheel hub
Exploded view
7
8
12
13
2
3
4
6
9
14
10
11
442vfm08 Fig. 11
Nomenclature
1 Screws. 6 Bearing. 11 Steering stop.
2 Spacer. 7 Hub. 12 Washer.
3 Hub cap. 8 Bearing. 13 Seal.
4 Pin. 9 Wheel nut. 14 Spindle carrier/King pin.
5 Castellated nut. 10 Washer.
Removal
– Raise the relevant wheel. – Unscrew the nut (5).
– Remove the wheel. – Remove the hub.
– Remove the hub cap (3). – Remove the ring seal (13).
– Extract the split pin (4).
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB D1.11

Wheel hub
Refitting
13 5 1
442vfm09 Fig. 12
N.B.: All seals must be changed and lubricated on – Tighten the wheel hub nut (5) to 5 daN.m.
refitting. – Unscrew the nut to reveal the first hole for the split pin.
– Check all components and change any that are – Check that the hub turns.
defective. – Insert a new split pin (4).
– Refitting operations are in the reverse order of – Grease and replace the hub cap (3).
dismantling.
– Refit the wheel and tighten the wheel nuts to 16 daN.m.
D1.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

E1
COMMON ELEMENTS
E2
PUMP SYSTEM 1
E3
2-PUMP SYSTEM
E4
3-PUMP SYSTEM
Chapter E

CONTENTS
E1 – COMMON ELEMENTS
GEAR PUMPS
REMOVAL .......................................................................................................................................................................E1.2
REFITTING......................................................................................................................................................................E1.2
DISMANTLING ................................................................................................................................................................E1.2
REFITTING......................................................................................................................................................................E1.3
STEERING UNIT
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC FOR "OSPC 80 ON" UNIT...................................................................................................E1.4
EXPLODED VIEW OF "OSPC 80 ON" PUMP ................................................................................................................E1.5
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC FOR "OSPF 80 LS" UNIT ....................................................................................................E1.6
EXPLODED VIEW OF "OSPF 80 LS" PUMP..................................................................................................................E1.7
REMOVAL .......................................................................................................................................................................E1.8
REFITTING......................................................................................................................................................................E1.9
DISMANTLING ..............................................................................................................................................................E1.10
REFITTING....................................................................................................................................................................E1.11
BRAKE VALVE
CROSS SECTION OF CEE VALVE ..............................................................................................................................E1.13
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC FOR THE CEE VALVE ......................................................................................................E1.14
CROSS SECTION OF ITALY VALVE (CUNA)..............................................................................................................E1.15
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC OF ITALY VALVE (CUNA).................................................................................................E1.16
REMOVAL .....................................................................................................................................................................E1.16
REFITTING....................................................................................................................................................................E1.16
AUXILIARY SPOOL VALVES

EXPLODED VIEW OF AUXILIARY SPOOL VALVES (ALL SYSTEMS)......................................................................E1.17
SPOOL VALVE HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC (ALL SYSTEMS).....................................................................................E1.18
EXPLODED VIEW OF SPOOL VALVES (2-PUMP SYSTEM).....................................................................................E1.19
SPOOL VALVE HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC (2-PUMP SYSTEM) ................................................................................E1.20
EXPLODED VIEW OF SPOOL VALVES (3-PUMP SYSTEM).....................................................................................E1.21
SPOOL VALVE HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC (3-PUMP SYSTEM) ................................................................................E1.22
CROSS SECTION OF A 3 POSITION SPOOL VALVE ................................................................................................E1.24
CROSS SECTION OF A 4 POSITION SPOOL VALVE ................................................................................................E1.25
CROSS SECTION OF 190 BAR RELIEF VALVE (1-2-PUMP SYSTEM) ....................................................................E1.26
CROSS SECTION OF REGULATOR (2-PUMP SYSTEM)..........................................................................................E1.27
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

CROSS SECTION OF BLANKING PLATE (2-3-PUMP SYSTEM) ..............................................................................E1.30
REMOVAL .....................................................................................................................................................................E1.31
REFITTING....................................................................................................................................................................E1.31
CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS..........................................................................................................................................E1.32
DUAL SPOOL VALVE

HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM ................................................................................................................................................E1.33
SECTIONAL VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................E1.34
REMOVAL .....................................................................................................................................................................E1.37
REFITTING....................................................................................................................................................................E1.37
CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS..........................................................................................................................................E1.37
LINKAGE SWING ACTION SPOOL VALVE

(TRACTOR VF 2-ACTUATOR INSTALLATION)
SECTIONAL VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................E1.39
REMOVAL .....................................................................................................................................................................E1.40
REFITTING....................................................................................................................................................................E1.40
LINKAGE SYSTEM SELECTOR

SECTIONAL VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................E1.42
REMOVAL .....................................................................................................................................................................E1.43
REFITTING....................................................................................................................................................................E1.43
DISMANTLING ..............................................................................................................................................................E1.43
REFITTING....................................................................................................................................................................E1.43
SWING ACTUATOR
REMOVAL .....................................................................................................................................................................E1.44
REFITTING....................................................................................................................................................................E1.44
HYDRAULIC JACK
EXPLODED VIEW .........................................................................................................................................................E1.46
DISMANTLING ..............................................................................................................................................................E1.47
REFITTING....................................................................................................................................................................E1.47
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

MECHANICAL LINKAGE SPOOL VALVE
CROSS SECTIONS.......................................................................................................................................................E1.50
REMOVAL .....................................................................................................................................................................E1.53
REFITTING....................................................................................................................................................................E1.53
TCE 6 ELECTRONIC LINKAGE SPOOL VALVE

CROSS SECTIONS.......................................................................................................................................................E1.56
EXPLODED VIEW .........................................................................................................................................................E1.60
REMOVAL .....................................................................................................................................................................E1.61
REFITTING....................................................................................................................................................................E1.61
LINKAGE HOUSING
REMOVING THE LINKAGE HOUSING.........................................................................................................................E1.62
REMOVING THE LINKAGE HOUSING.........................................................................................................................E1.62
EXPLODED VIEW OF THE HOUSING AND THE ARMS.............................................................................................E1.63
DISMANTLING THE LINKAGE ACTUATOR.................................................................................................................E1.66
REFITTING THE LINKAGE ACTUATOR ......................................................................................................................E1.66
EXPLODED VIEW OF FORCE CONTROL...................................................................................................................E1.67
DISMANTLING THE LINKAGE ARMS ..........................................................................................................................E1.68
ADJUSTMENT TO THE FORCE CONTROL SPRING .................................................................................................E1.71
REFITTING THE LINKAGE ARMS................................................................................................................................E1.72
EXPLODED VIEW OF THE INTERNAL RODS AND LEVERS.....................................................................................E1.73
DISMANTLING INTERNAL RODS AND LEVERS ........................................................................................................E1.77
ADJUSTING INTERNAL RODS AND LEVERS ............................................................................................................E1.78
REFITTING OF INTERNAL RODS AND LEVERS........................................................................................................E1.79
ADJUSTING THE EXTERNAL CONTROLS .................................................................................................................E1.80
REMOVAL OF ADDITIONAL ACTUATOR....................................................................................................................E1.85
REFITTING THE ADDITIONAL ACTUATOR ................................................................................................................E1.85
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

E2 – PUMP SYSTEM 1
DESCRIPTION
CHARACTERISTICS.......................................................................................................................................................E2.2
COMPONENT LAYOUT
GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................................E2.3
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM ..................................................................................................................................................E2.5
CIRCUIT LAYOUT ON BEAM .........................................................................................................................................E2.6
HYDRAULIC MEASUREMENT AND CHECKING POINTS

CHECKING FLOW FROM THE 14,4 CM³ PUMP ...........................................................................................................E2.7
CHECKING MAXIMUM STEERING ACTUATOR PRESSURE ......................................................................................E2.8
ADJUSTING THE ANTISHOCK VALVES .....................................................................................................................E2.10
"HYDRAULIC INSPECTION RESULTS" SHEET

CHECKING FLOW FROM THE 14,4 CM³ PUMP .........................................................................................................E2.11
CHECKING MAXIMUM STEERING ACTUATOR PRESSURE ....................................................................................E2.11

BRAKE VALVE CHECK ................................................................................................................................................E2.12
ELECTRICAL CHECKS ON THE SOLENOID ACTUATOR FOR THE ITALIE (CUNA) BRAKE VALVE......................E2.12
CHECKING MAXIMUM FLOW AND PRESSURE IN AUXILIARY SPOOL VALVES....................................................E2.13
CHECKING FLOW TO THE LINKAGE SPOOL VALVE................................................................................................E2.15
CHECKING PRESSURE AT THE PRIMARY LINKAGE VALVE...................................................................................E2.16

Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

E3 – 2-PUMP SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT LAYOUT
GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................................E3.4
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM (MECHANICAL REVERSER AND DOUBLER) ......................................................................E3.5
CIRCUIT LAYOUT ON BEAM (MECHANICAL REVERSER AND DOUBLER) .............................................................E3.6
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM (HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER) .........................................................................E3.7
CIRCUIT LAYOUT ON BEAM (HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER) ................................................................E3.8

CHECKING FLOW FROM 10,8 CM³ STEERING PUMP ................................................................................................E3.9

CHECKING FLOW FROM 10,8 CM³ STEERING PUMP ..............................................................................................E3.13

CHECKING THE FLOW FROM THE DUAL SPOOL VALVE........................................................................................E3.20
CHECKING THE MAXIMUM PRESSURE FROM THE DUAL SPOOL VALVE ............................................................E3.21
ELECTRICAL CHECKS OF LINKAGE ARM SWING ACTION SOLENOID VALVES...................................................E3.23

Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

E4 – 3-PUMP SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT LAYOUT
GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................................E4.4
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM (MECHANICAL REVERSER AND DOUBLER) ......................................................................E4.5
CIRCUIT LAYOUT ON BEAM (MECHANICAL REVERSER AND DOUBLER) .............................................................E4.6
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM (HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER) .........................................................................E4.7
CIRCUIT LAYOUT ON BEAM (HYDRAULIC REVERSER AND DOUBLER) ................................................................E4.8

CHECKING FLOW FROM THE 19,2 CM³ PUMP ...........................................................................................................E4.9
CHECKING THE MAXIMUM FLOW AND PRESSURE FOR AUXILIARY SPOOL VALVES N° 1, 2 OR 3 ..................E4.14

CHECKING THE MAXIMUM FLOW AND PRESSURE FOR AUXILIARY SPOOL VALVES N° 1, 2 OR 3 ..................E4.17

CHECKING THE MAXIMUM FLOW AND PRESSURE FOR AUXILIARY SPOOL VALVE N° 4 ..................................E4.19
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

CHECKING THE MAXIMUM FLOW AND PRESSURE FOR AUXILIARY SPOOL VALVE N° 4 ..................................E4.28
ON/OFF SOLENOID VALVE FOR LINKAGE BAR SWING FUNCTION.......................................................................E4.29
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

E1
COMMON ELEMENTS
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Gear pumps
Removal
– Remove the pump suction pipe(s).
2
– Undo the 4 pump attachment screws.
– If necessary, remove the 3 screws (1) from the
spacer (2) that supports the pump on the engine.
N.B.: Removal of the drive pinion and bearing
involves removal of the engine timing gear cover (see
engine chapter).
1
Refitting
N.B.: All seals must be changed and lubricated on
refitting.
N.B.: Apply Loctite Rectijoint (518) between the
pumps and the spacer (2).
Refit in the reverse sequence to that used for removal, 398vfm01 Fig. 1
using the following torque settings:

– Screw (1) for the spacer (2): 4,5 daN.m.
– Pump attachment screws (3): 2 daN.m.
– Pipe screws (4): 0,8 daN.m.
Dismantling 4 3
– Withdraw the suction tube (5) from the pumps
– Mark the pumps and the covers.
– Unscrew the 4 pump assembly screws (6).
– Decouple the pumps. 5
398vfm02 Fig. 2
398vfm03 Fig. 3
E1.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Gear pumps
Refitting
– Check the condition of the components removed.
refitting.
– Assemble the pumps and tighten the screws (7) to
6,5 daN.m.
– Refit the suction tube (5), tighten the 8 mm screws to
1,5 daN.m and the 5 mm screws to 0,5 daN.m.
– Reinstall the pumps (see relevant paragraph).
398vfm04 Fig. 4
398vfm05 Fig. 5
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.3

Steering unit
Hydraulic schematic for "OSPC 80 ON" unit
200 bar 200 bar
25 25
20 21
20 21
3
26
18
19
115 bar
491vfm13 Fig. 6

1 Identification plate. 10 Drive shaft. 19 Ball.
2 Cover attachment screw. 11 Leaf springs. 20 Pushrod.
3 Needle screw. 12 Spool valve sleeve. 21 Balls.
4 Washer. 13 Pin. 22 Body.
5 Cover. 14 Rotary slide. 23 Valve seat.
6 O-ring. 15 Bush. 24 Dust seal.
7 Fluted rotor and idler gear. 16 Roller thrust bearing. 25 Surge valves (180-200 bar).
8 Distributor plate. 17 Ring seal. 26 Pressure limiter (110-115 bar).
9 O-ring. 18 Threaded socket.
E1.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Steering unit
Exploded view of "OSPC 80 ON" pump
12
13
1
14
15
2
16
11
20
21
3
17
22
4
18
24
19
5
23
25
23
25
6
7
26
8
9
10
491vfm00 Fig. 7
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.5

Steering unit
Hydraulic schematic for "OSPF 80 LS" unit
200 bar 200 bar
25 25
20 21
20 21
26
115 bar
30 0,6
0,9
0,8
491vfm14 Fig. 8
1 Identification plate. 13 Pin. 25 Surge valves (180-200 bar).

2 Cover attachment screw. 14 Rotary slide. 26 Pressure limiter (110-115 bar).
3 Needle screw. 15 Bush. 27 Plug.
4 Washer. 16 Roller thrust bearing. 28 Spring.
5 Cover. 17 Ring seal. 29 Bush.
6 O-ring. 18 Threaded socket. 30 Priority valve.
7 Fluted rotor and idler gear. 19 Ball. 31 Screws.
8 Distributor plate. 20 Pushrod. 32 Spring.
9 O-ring. 21 Balls. 33 Screws.
10 Drive shaft. 22 Body. 34 Bush.
11 Leaf springs. 23 Valve seat. 35 Plug.
12 Spool valve sleeve. 24 Dust seal. 36 Seals.
E1.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Steering unit
Exploded view of "OSPF 80 LS" pump
12
13
14
15
1
16
11
20
2
21
17
3
22
18
24
19
23
4
25
36
5
23
27
28
25
29
30
6
26
31
32
33
34
7
35
8
9
10
491vfm01 Fig. 9
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.7

Steering unit
Removal
N.B.: Removal of the steering box does not require
removal of the cab as the operation is carried out from
inside the cab.
– Remove the steering wheel, the instrument panel and
all trim components near the instrument panel.
– Identify and unscrew the master cylinder hoses.
– Remove the master cylinder assembly with its bracket.
– Remove the clutch pedal bracket attachment
screws (40).
41
– Remove the fuse box support plate.
– Remove the spool valve cables.
– Withdraw the plates (41) and (42) that support the
levers located to left and right.
– Remove the clutchless reverser lever (depending on
equipment fit). 491vfm02 Fig. 10
– Identify and unscrew the the hydraulic unions on the

steering unit.
40
42
491vfm03 Fig. 11
491vfm04 Fig. 12
E1.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Steering unit
– Unscrew the 4 screws from the steering unit.

– Remove the unit via the left hand inspection hatch.
Refitting
Refit in the reverse sequence to that used for removal,
using the following torque settings:
– Steering unit to the structure: 4,8 daN.m.
– Priority valve (30) (depending on equipment fit): 3
daN.m.
– Steering wheel to steering column: 37 daN.m.
– Nuts attaching steering column to structure: 2,4 daN.m.
– Master cylinders bracket: 2,4 daN.m.
491vfm05 Fig. 13
30
3 daN.m
491vfm06 Fig. 14
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.9

Steering unit
Dismantling
– Seperate if necessary the priority valve (30) that is only
fitted to the "OSPF 80 LS" unit (Fig. 9).
– Identify and remove the cover (5).
– Withdraw the rotor, the stator, the distributor plate and
the drive shaft.
– Remove the 2 decompression valves (20).
– Withdraw the spool valve sleeve (12) and the spool
valve (14).
N.B.: Ensure that the pin (13) does not interfere
during dismantling.
5
– Extract the dust seal (24), the needle stop and the 2
washers.
– Withdraw the seal from the column (17) located inside
the unit (Fig 7 or 9).
491vfm07 Fig. 15
– Extract the spool (14) with the sleeve (12).
– Apply pressure to the spool to enable removal of the
spring blades (11) and the pin (13).
– If necessary remove the surge valves (25) and the 20
pressure limiter (26).
– Withdraw the spool from its sleeve.
491vfm08 Fig. 16
26 25
14
13
11
12
24
491vfm09 Fig. 17
E1.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Steering unit
Refitting
N.B.: Check the surface condition of the compoents
(spool, sleeve, body bores) before refitting. 14
refitting.
– Engage the rotary (14) spool in the sleeve (12). 11
– Refit the flat spring blades (11) on either side of the
slot, then the curved blades (11) (curved sides adjacent)
(Fig. 18).
– Centre the blades using 2 screwdrivers and fit the
retaining ring (15).
– Refit the pin (13) (Fig. 17). 12 15
– Fit the column oil seal (17) located inside the unit on
the end of tool n° 60 05 005 726 (Fig 7 or 9).
– Oil the seal.
491vfm10 Fig. 18
– Fit the installation sheath for tool n° 60 05 005 726 to
the body.
– Insert the seal holder into the sheath.
– Fit the seal.
– Remove the sheath and the installation tool.
60 05 005 726
Safety: Position the thick washer (16b) with the
chamfer towards the sleeve (12).
– Fit the thick washer, the roller stop (16a) and the other
washer (16c).
– Oil the sleeve (12) and the end of the rotary spool.
– Engage the spool and the sleeve.
– Centre the pin.
491vfm11 Fig. 19
16c
16a
16b
12
14
491msm07 Fig. 20
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.11

Steering unit
– Fit the 2 valves (20).

– Fit the distributor plate with the drive shaft slot in the
pin. 20
– Fit the rotor, the stator and the cover.
– Screw in all screws by hand then tighten opposite
screws in sequence to a torque of 3 ± 0,5 daN.m.
– Wrap Teflon or similar sealing tape around the thread of
the adjustment screws of the valves (25) and limiter (26).
– Tighten each screw.
– Refit the priority valve (30) (if removed and/or fitted)
and tighten the screws to 3 daN.m.
– Now proceed with testing and calibrating the
shockproof valves and the pressure limiter (if removed)
(see chapter "E2", "E3" or "E4" depending on the
hydraulic system).
491vfm08 Fig. 21
3 daN.m
491vfm15 Fig. 22
26 25
30
491vfm12 Fig. 23
E1.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Brake valve
Cross section of CEE valve

Rest position
P A
C
B
T
498vfm00 Fig. 24
Brake position
P A C
B
T
498vfm01 Fig. 25
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.13

Brake valve
Hydraulic schematic for the CEE

valve
Nomenclature
A Flow direction (spool valves).
B To hydraulic trailor brakes.
C Power to tractor master cylinders.
D Brake pedal system selector.
P Pump inlet.
T Reservoir.
C P D A B T
398vfm06 Fig. 26
P
T
C
B
A
498vfm02 Fig. 27
E1.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Brake valve
Cross section of Italy valve (Cuna)

Rest position (engine off)
C
A
B
P
398vfm07 Fig. 28
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.15

Brake valve
Hydraulic schematic of Italy valve (Cuna)
D
A C
B T
398vfm08 Fig. 29
Nomenclature
A Flow direction (spool valves). E Pressure switch, 10 bar.

B To hydraulic trailor brakes. F Brake switch.
C Control from master cylinders. P Pump inlet.
D Brake pedal system selector. T Reservoir.
Removal
– Disconnect and plug the valve hoses (1).
– Extract the attachment screws and remove the valve.
Refitting
– Check operation of the solenoid valve in the Italy
valve (Cuna) (see chapter "E2", "E3" or "E4" depending
on the hydraulic system).
– Refit the valve.
– Reconnect the hoses to the valve.
– Attach the valve to its bracket. 1
– Bleed the main and trailer brakes (see chapter "C").
398vfm09 Fig. 30
E1.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Auxiliary spool valves
Exploded view of auxiliary spool valves (all systems)

(Installation of up to 3 spool valves) N.B.: Details of the various spool valve installation
options are contained in the tractor operating manual.
N.B.: The installation described below applies to all
types of system (1, 2, 3-pump system).
11
8
10
5
12
3
13
2
14
398vfm10 Fig. 31
Nomenclature
1 O-rings. 8 Blanking plate.

2 Inlet plate with 190 bar pressure relief valve. 9 Stud.
3 O-rings. 10 Washer.
4 O-rings. 11 Nut.
5 Spool valve n° 1. 12 O-rings.
6 Spool valve n° 2 (with floating position). 13 Safety valve.
7 Spool valve n° 3. 14 Seals.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.17

Spool valve hydraulic schematic (all systems)

(Installation of up to 3 spool valves)
R
T
A III
II
C
190 bar
T P
398vfm0e Fig. 32
Nomenclature
A Hydraulic outlet to a receiver unit. P Pump supply.

B Hydraulic outlet to a receiver unit. R Valve to change from single to double action.
C Flow direction (linkage spool valve). T Reservoir.
E1.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Exploded view of spool valves (2-pump system)

11
10
13
14
11 8
10
15
16
9
17
7 12
18
6
3
5
2
1
398vfm11 Fig. 33
Nomenclature
2 Inlet plate. 11 Nut.
3 O-ring. 12 Washer.
4 O-rings. 13 O-rings.
5 Spool valve n° 1. 14 Washer.
6 Spool valve n° 2 (with floating position). 15 Stud.
7 Intermediate plate. 16 Spool valve n° 4.
8 Blanking plate. 17 Plate with flow limiter and 190 bar pressure relief valve.
9 Stud. 18 Flow rate adjuster.
N.B.: Details of the various spool valve installation options for this system are contained in the tractor operating
manual.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.19

Spool valve hydraulic schematic (2-pump system)

IV
P19
190 bar 0-36 l/min
12-48 l/min
A II
398vfm0b Fig. 34
Nomenclature
A Hydraulic outlet to a receiver unit. P19 Supply for 19,2 cm³ pump.
B Hydraulic outlet to a receiver unit. R Valve to change from single to double action.
C Flow direction (linkage spool valve). T Reservoir.
D System feed to dual spool valve (depending on equipment fit).
E1.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Exploded view of spool valves (3-pump system)

(Installation of up to 4 spool valves).
N.B.: Details of the various spool valve installation options for this system are contained in the tractor operating
manual.
13
11
14
11
10
10
8
15
9 16
17
18
7 12
3 5
2
18
1
398vfm12 Fig. 35
Nomenclature
2 Inlet plate with flow limiter and 190 bar pressure relief valve. 11 Nut.
3 O-ring. 12 O-rings.
4 O-rings. 13 Screws.
5 Spool valve n° 1. 14 Washer.
6 Spool valve n° 2 (with floating position). 15 Stud.
7 Spool valve n° 3. 16 Spool valve n° 4.
8 Blanking plate. 17 Plate with flow limiter and pressure relief valve.
9 Stud. 18 Flow rate adjuster.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.21

Spool valve hydraulic schematic (3-pump system)

A Hydraulic outlet to a receiver unit. P14 Supply for 14,4 cm³ pump.
B Hydraulic outlet to a receiver unit. P19 Supply for 19,2 cm³ pump.
C Flow direction (linkage spool valve). R Valve to change from double to single action.
D System feed to dual spool valve (depending on equipment fit). T Reservoir.
E1.22 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

D
R
IV
P14 0-36 l/min

190 bar
III
II
I
A
P19
190 bar 12-38 l/min
10-36 l/min
T C
398vfm0c Fig. 36
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.23

Cross section of a 3 position spool valve

Neutral position
A B
T1
P1 T3 P0 T0 T2
T3
A
B
T0
T1 P1 P0
T2
398vfm13 Fig. 37
Nomenclature
A Hydraulic outlet to a receiver unit. P0 Power supply.

B Hydraulic outlet to a receiver unit. P1 Supply to downstream system.
C Single action/double action valve. T0, T1, T2 Linkage casing reservoir.
D Spool latch and spring-loaded return to neutral. T3 Reservoir for downstream system.
E1.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Cross section of a 4 position spool valve

Neutral position
A B
T1
P1 T3 P0 T0 T2
P1
A
B
T0
T1 T3 P0
T2
398vfm14 Fig. 38
Nomenclature
A Hydraulic outlet to a receiver unit. P0 Power supply.

B Hydraulic outlet to a receiver unit. P1 Supply to downstream system.
C Single action/double action valve. T0, T1, T2 Linkage casing reservoir.
D Spool latch and spring-loaded return to neutral. T3 Reservoir for downstream system.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.25

Cross section of 190 bar relief valve (1-2-pump system)
190 bar
T0 T1
T0 C P
190 bar
T1
398vfm15 Fig. 39
Nomenclature
C Flow direction (linkage spool valve).

P Supply to auxiliary spool valves.
T0, T1 Linkage casing reservoir.
E1.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Cross section of regulator (2-pump system)
C0
P0
T
C1
P1
190 bar
P0 C0
48 l/min
0 – 36 l/min
190 bar
12 – 48 l/min
T P1 C1
398vfm16 Fig. 40
Nomenclature
C0 Flow direction (highest spool valve in the stack).

C1 Flow direction (spool valves 1, 2, 3).
P0 Supply to highest auxiliary spool valve in the stack.
P1 Supply to auxiliary spool valves 1, 2, 3.
T Linkage casing reservoir.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.27

190 bar
C0
T3 T0 T1
P0
P1
T0 C0 P0
12 – 38 l/min
48 l/min
190 bar 10 – 36 l/min

P1
T1 T3
398vfm17 Fig. 41
Nomenclature
C0 Flow direction. P1 Supply to linkage spool valve.
P0 Supply to auxiliary spool valves 1, 2, 3. T0, T3 Reservoir.
N.B.: This regulator supplies auxiliary spool valves 1, 2, 3 (depending on the equipment fit) and the linkage.
E1.28 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

C0 T T
P0
190 bar
P0 C0
36 l/min
190 bar 0 – 36 l/min
T P1 C1
398vfm18 Fig. 42
Nomenclature
C0 Flow direction (highest spool valve in the stack). P1 Supply to auxiliary spool valves 1, 2, 3.
C1 Flow direction (spool valves 1, 2, 3). T Linkage casing reservoir.
P0 Supply to highest auxiliary spool valve in the stack.
N.B.: This regulator supplies the highest auxiliary spool valve in the stack.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.29

Cross section of blanking plate

(2-3-pump system) A
(4 spool valves) T1 P1 T3 T0 T2
Nomenclature
A Installation without dual spool valve.
B Installation with dual spool valve.
N.B.: To change from installation (A) to

installation (B), a plug (C) must be added.
398vfm19 Fig. 43
T1 P1 T3 C T0 T2
398vfm20 Fig. 44
T0, T1, T2 A C B
P1
P1
398vfm21 Fig. 45
E1.30 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal
N.B.: Depending on the tractor's hydraulic equipment,
removal of the cab may be required.
– Remove the bracket for the trailer hydraulic brake
connector (19).
– Disconnect the hydralic hoses to the spool valves. 13
– Disconnect the auxiliary spool valve control cables. 19
– Remove the 4 screws (20) from the hydraulic
connectors to spool valve n° 4 to dismantle it (depending
on equipment fit).
– Unscrew the 3 attachment screws (13) for the end plate
and for spool valve n° 4 (depending on equipment fit).
– Unscrew the 3 nuts (11) and separate all the spool
valves, flow regulators and relief valves (depending on
equipment fit). 11
398vfm22 Fig. 46
Refitting
refitting. 11
– Refit in the reverse order to that used for dismantling.
– Tighten the spool valve screws to 3,5 daN.m.
– Adjust the control levers (see relevant paragraph).
– Apply Loctite Formajoint (510) to the seat (D) of the
return line and tighten the 2 screws to 1 daN.m.
P0
T2 T0 P1 T1
20 T3
398vfm23 Fig. 47
T3
T2
398vfm24 Fig. 48
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.31

Control adjustments
– Remove the battery.
– Position both the spool of the relevant valve and the
cab operating lever in the neutral position. 1 4 3
– Fit the cable sheath in the cab to the bracket (2) then to
the spool valve using the nuts (1).
– Adjust the cable using the shackles at either end.
– Tighten the nuts (1).
– Check for correct operation of the control lever for the
relevant spool valve in all positions and adjust if
necessary.
398vfm26 Fig. 49
3 4 2
398vfm25 Fig. 50
E1.32 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Dual spool valve
Hydraulic diagram
A
T
B C
E
150 bar
546vfm20 Fig. 51
Nomenclature
A Dual spool valve.
B Hydraulic jack.
C Linkage swing actuators (2 actuator installation).
D Linkage swing action spool valve.
E, F To hydraulic screw jack.
G, H To linkage swing action spool valve.
I Safety valve.
P Pump inlet.
D
T Reservoir.
G
H
E F
546vfm00 Fig. 52
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.33

Dual spool valve
Sectional view
Neutral position
G
E
F
T
E F
546vfm01 Fig. 53
E1.34 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Dual spool valve
Supply position
G
E
F
T
E F
546vfm02 Fig. 54
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.35

Dual spool valve
Safety valve
A-A
A
A
546vfm03 Fig. 55
E1.36 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Dual spool valve
Removal
– Remove the RH rear wheel and place the tractor on
axle stands.
– Withdraw interfering hydraulic lines.
– Disconnect the RH brake operating rod (1).
– Disconnect the spool valve controls.
– Remove the circuit selector (2) (depending on
assembly).
– Undo the 3 screws (3) for the dual spool valve and
remove it.
Refitting 1
N.B.: All seals must be changed and lubricated on 2

refitting.
– Refit in the reverse order to that used for dismantling. 546vfm04 Fig. 56
– Tighten the spool valve screws to 2,4 daN.m.

– Adjust the control levers (see relevant paragraph).
Control adjustments
– Remove the right-hand rear wheel.
– Position both the spool of the relevant valve and the
cab operating lever in the neutral position.
– Install the sheath in the cab on the bracket and then on
the spool valve using the nuts (4).
– Adjust the cable using the shackles (5) attached at
each end.
– Retighten the lock-nuts (6).
3
– Check for correct operation of the control lever for the
relevant spool valve in all positions and adjust if
necessary.
546vfm05 Fig. 57
5 6 4
546vfm06 Fig. 58
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.37

Linkage swing action spool valve
(Tractor VF 2-actuator installation)
Hydraulic diagram
A
D
P1
P2
546vfm21 Fig. 59
Nomenclature
A Spool valve for linkage lateral motion.
B To LH linkage swing action actuator. C
C To RH linkage swing action actuator.
D Choke.
P1 Fluid inlet from dual spool valve.
P2 Fluid inlet from dual spool valve.
T Reservoir.
P2 P1
546vfm07 Fig. 60
E1.38 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Sectional view
N.B.: The ball valves are represented schematically
B–B
A–A C
C–C
D–D
B B P2
C C
D
D D
A
P1
546vfm08 Fig. 61
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.39

Removal
– Disconnect the hydraulic lines connected to the spool
valve.
– Undo the 2 screws (E) and remove the spool valve.
– If necessary, remove the solenoid valves and the flap
valves.
Refitting E

– Tighten the spools in the solenoid valves to 2 daN.m
and the coil to 0,3 daN.m.
– Check operation of the solenoid valves (see chapter
"E2", "E3" or "E4" depending on the hydraulic system).
546vfm09 Fig. 62
E1.40 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Linkage system selector
N.B.: This selector is installed when the linkage arms have lateral motion (swing) (installation of 1 actuator).
Hydraulic diagram
A
T
B
E C
F
D
150 bar
P
546vfm22 Fig. 63
Nomenclature
A Dual spool valve. E To dual spool valve

B Circuit selector. F To linkage arm swing actuator.
C Linkage arms swing actuator. P Fluid inlet to dual spool valve.
D To dual spool valve T Reservoir.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.41

Sectional view
D E
546vfm10 Fig. 64
E1.42 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal
– Remove the RH rear wheel and place the tractor on
axle stands.
– Undo the tube connector (F). A
– Undo the 2 hollow screws (1) attaching the selector (B).
– Remove the selector.
Refitting
N.B.: Always change the O-rings (2).
E
– Tighten the selector mounting screws (1) to 6 daN.m.
D 1
F B
Dismantling
546vfm11 Fig. 65
– Undo the connector (3).
– Remove the circlip (4) and extract all the components.
– Clean and check the parts.
– Refit or replace the selector if necessary.
Refitting
Refit in the reverse order to that used for dismantling. 1
3
refitting.
4
546vfm12 Fig. 66
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.43

Swing actuator
Removal
Installation including one actuator
– Disconnect the hydraulic hose supplying the actuator.
– Extract the pin via the drilling (1).
– Undo the 4 screws.
– Withdraw the actuator from its mount.
– Remove the rod.
– Extract the seal (2) and replace it.
Installation consisting of 2 actuators

– Disconnect the actuator supply lines.
– Undo the 4 attachment screws (3) for the actuators.
– Remove the 2 actuators (4).
1
– Remove the rod.
– Extract the seal and replace it. 546vfm13 Fig. 67
Refitting
Refit in the reverse order to that used for dismantling.
546vfm14 Fig. 68
546vfm15 Fig. 69
E1.44 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Hydraulic jack
Hydraulic diagram
Nomenclature
A, B. Safety valve.
C. Jack actuator.
D, E. Jack actuator supply line. A
N.B.: There are 2 jack configurations depending on
the system and options. The jack may be either D
connected to an auxiliary spool valve (1) or to the
outlet of the dual spool valve (2). C
E
546vfm23 Fig. 70
E
D
546vfm16 Fig. 71
E D
546vfm17 Fig. 72
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.45

Hydraulic jack
Exploded view
5
4
3
14
10
13
2 11
4
1 12
546vfm18 Fig. 73
Nomenclature
1 Pin. 6 Brass seal. 11 Nut.

2 Shaft. 7 Hollow screw. 12 Piston seals.
3 Actuator body. 8 Hydraulic valve unit. 13 Washer.
4 Pin. 9 Piston. 14 Safety valves.
5 Pin. 10 Seals.
E1.46 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Hydraulic jack
Dismantling
– Disconnect the hydraulic hoses.
– Remove the jack.
– Remove the unit (8) housing the safety valves.
– Remove the plunger (15).
– Check the condition of the components removed.
– Undo the actuator nut (11) to gain access to the piston.
8
Refitting 11

refitting.
14 15
546vfm19 Fig. 74
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.47

Mechanical linkage spool valve
Hydraulic diagram
5 6
10
9
220 bar
11
12
T
A
3 4
383vfm43 Fig. 75
E1.48 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Nomenclature
1 Pressure from auxiliary spool valves.
2 Linkage spool valve.
3 Additional actuator.
4 Main linkage actuator.
5 Governor.
6 Spool.
7 Main spool.
8 Discharge valve (sensitivity).
9 Down valve.
10 Check valve.
11 Restrictor.
12 Safety valve (220 bar). 2
A To linkage actuator(s).
P Fluid inlet from auxiliary spool valves.
T Reservoir.
383vfm00 Fig. 76
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.49

Cross sections
Neutral position (engine running)
9
2
10
P
11
5
12
383vfm01 Fig. 77
E1.50 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

"up" position
2
9
8
10
11 5
12
383vfm02 Fig. 78
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.51

"Down" position
2
9
8
P
5
10
11
6 12
383vfm03 Fig. 79
E1.52 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal
– Partially remove the cab to extract the linkage spool
valve (see chapter "H").
– Disconnect the down valve controls and the sensitivity
handle by withdrawing the pins (13).
– Undo the hydraulic connections for the fixed lines to the
spool valve.
– Mark the position of the spool valve in relation to the
linkage housing.
– Undo the 2 attachment screws (14).
– Remove the spool valve.
– If necessary, adjust the main valve (see chapter "E2",
"E3" or "E4" depending on the hydraulic system).
383vfm04 Fig. 80
Refitting
refitting.
– Tighten the 2 spool valve attachment screws (14) to 13
2,4 daN.m.
12
383vfm05 Fig. 81
14
383vfm06 Fig. 82
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.53

TCE 6 electronic linkage spool valve
Hydraulic diagram
5 2
9
8
3 4
382vfm17 Fig. 83
E1.54 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Nomenclature
1 Pressure from auxiliary spool valves.
2 Linkage spool valve.
3 Additional actuator.
4 Main linkage actuator.
5 Flow regulator.
6 UP solenoid valve.
7 DOWN solenoid valve.
8 Check valve.
9 Safety valve (220 bar).
A To linkage actuator(s).
P Fluid inlet from auxiliary spool valves. 2
T Reservoir.
382vfm09 Fig. 84
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.55

Cross sections
Neutral position (engine running)
6
7
9
8
382vfm10 Fig. 85
E1.56 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

"up" position
6
7
9
8
382vfm11 Fig. 86
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.57

"Down" position
6
7
9
8
382vfm12 Fig. 87
E1.58 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Safety valve (open position)
382vfm13 Fig. 88
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.59

Exploded view
10
11
6 30
12
28
25 14
29 27
31 15
32 16
17
18
26
33
19
34 13
20
35 21
22
23
36 24
40
37
38
39
382vfm14 Fig. 89
E1.60 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

10 Screw for down solenoid valve. 21 O-ring. 32 Seal.

11 Washer. 22 Safety valve spring. 33 Plug.
12 O-ring. 23 Valve seat. 34 O-ring.
13 Blanking plate. 24 Safety ball valve. 35 Flow regulator.
14 Screws. 25 O-ring. 36 O-rings.
15 Sleeve. 26 Down valve spring. 37 O-ring.
16 O-ring. 27 "DOWN" valve. 38 Regulator spring.
17 Raising poppet valve spring. 28 Seal. 39 Plug.
18 "UP" valve. 29 Seal. 40 Screws.
19 Safety valve adjustment screw. 30 Seal.
20 Sleeve. 31 Seal.
Removal
– Remove the left rear wheel.
– Disconnect the wiring harness from the up and down
solenoid valves.
– Undo the hydraulic connections attached to the spool
valve.
– Undo the 3 spool valve attachment screws (40).
– If required, remove the two solenoid valves.
– Remove the spool valve.
40
382vfm15 Fig. 90
Refitting
T
N.B.: All seals must be changed and lubricated on A
refitting. P
N.B.: Procedures for inspecting and adjusting the
sensors and checking the solenoid valves for the 6
electronic linkage are contained in chapter "G2".
– Refit the up and down solenoid valves.
– Tighten the 3 spool valve attachment screws (40) to T
2 daN.m.
7
40
40
382vfm16 Fig. 91
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.61

Linkage housing
Removing the linkage housing

– Remove the rear wheels.
– Disconnect and remove the battery.
– Remove the cab or the roll cage (see chapter "H").
– Withdraw the upper bar from the third point
– Disconnect any hydraulic hoses and electrical
harnesses that interfere with the operation.
– Remove the battery bracket.
A
– If necessary remove the auxiliray spool valves (see
– Seperate the stabilising jacks from the linkage arms.
– Remove the force monitoring rod (A) (mechanical
linkage).
– Remove the dip stick.
383vfm07 Fig. 92
– Disconnect and remove the sensors monitoring
force (B), position (C) and travel limit (D) (electronic
linkage).
N.B.: Unscrew the linkage housing screws without
undoing the tubes from the brake bleed valves to
avoid having to bleed the brake system.
– Remove the housing using a load spreader.
D
C
Removing the linkage housing
– Assemble the housing using Loctite Formajoint (518).
– Tighten the housing screws to a torque of 12 daN.m.
– Adjust the controls (see relevant paragraph).
A B
383vfm44 Fig. 93
383vfm08 Fig. 94
E1.62 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Linkage housing
Exploded view of the housing and the arms

Exploded view of the housing (mechanical version)
12
2
11
3
10
4
5
383vfm09 Fig. 95
Nomenclature
1 Dip stick. 5 Bush. 9 Bushes.

2 Tube. 6 Locating pin. 10 Down valve.
3 Linkage housing. 7 Linkage housing screw. 11 Pin.
4 Bush. 8 Bushes. 12 Sensitivty lever.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.63

Linkage housing
Exploded view of the housing (electronic version TCE 6)
4
5
383vfm10 Fig. 96
Nomenclature
1 Dip stick. 4 Bush. 7 Linkage housing screw.

2 Tube. 5 Bush. 8 Bushes.
3 Linkage housing. 6 Locating pin.
E1.64 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Linkage housing
Exploded view of linkage arms
31
25 24
27 28
23 26
22 30
25 29
24 21
32
14
21 20
19
18
17
16 13
15
383vfm11 Fig. 97
Nomenclature
9 Cylinder. 16 Pin. 23 Washer.

10 Screws. 17 Circlip. 24 Circlip.
11 Piston seal. 18 Attachment screw for additional 25 Lever.
12 Piston. actuator. 26 Linkage arm pins.
13 O-ring. 19 Linkage arm. 27 Linkage arm.
14 Actuator rod. 20 Washer. 28 Pin.
15 Screws. 21 Lip seal.
22 Additional actuator rod.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.65

Linkage housing
Dismantling the linkage actuator

– Remove the linkage housing (see relevant paragraph).
– Remove the 8 screws (14) from the linkage actuator.
– Remove the piston from the actuator (16) using
compressed air.
N.B.: To remove the actuator rod (18), the linkage 14
arms must also be removed (see relevant paragraph).
383vfm12 Fig. 98
Refitting the linkage actuator

refitting.
– Lightly tighten down alternate and opposing cylinder
screws (14).
– Fully tighten down to 13 daN.m.
– Refit the linkage housing (see relevant paragraph).
18
383vfm14 Fig. 99
13
16
15
383vfm13 Fig. 100
E1.66 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Linkage housing
Exploded view of force control
47
48
46 45 44
49
43
42
41
50
51 40
52
53 39
38
37
56 36
35
62
55 34
54
61
60
59
57 33
58
67
66
TCE 6 65
64
57
63
383vfm15 Fig. 101
Nomenclature
29 Unit. 41 Grease nipple. 53 Link.

30 Locknut 42 Fork end. 54 Locking tab.
31 Threaded rod. 43 Pin. 55 Lever.
32 O-ring. 44 Pin. 56 Pin.
33 Washer. 45 Nut. 57 Washer.
34 Spring. 46 Pin. 58 Screws.
35 Washer. 47 Seal. 59 Circlip.
36 Cap. 48 Seal. 60 Locking tab.
37 Flange. 49 Bracket. 61 Cam.
38 Grease nipple. 50 Screws. 62 Pin.
39 Pin. 51 Spacer. 63 Seal.
40 Pin. 52 Nut.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.67

Linkage housing
Dismantling the linkage arms

– Remove the linkage housing (see relevant paragraph).
– Remove the third point support, the force control
spring (38) and its housing (33).
– Withdraw the circlips from the linkage arms.
33
– Mark the arms with reference to the shaft.
– Extract the arms, the washers and the lip seals (25).
38
383vfm17 Fig. 102
383vfm18 Fig. 103
25
30
383vfm16 Fig. 104
E1.68 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Linkage housing
19 29 30
383vfm19 Fig. 105 383vfm20 Fig. 106
– Mark the lever (29) in relation to the shaft (30).

– Remove the screw (19).
– Push on the shaft of the arm (30) from the side
opposite to the force control and from a position to
remove it (Fig. 106).
– Extract the bushes from the linkage housing using a
threaded rod M20 x 400, 2 nuts, tool n° 60 05 006 549,
and locally made tools (A) and (B) (left and right bushes)
(Fig. 109 and 110).
N.B.: The bushes may also be removed with a press B
using locally manufactured tools. A
– Adjust the force control spring if it has been removed
(see relevant paragraph).
60 05 006 549
383vfm21 Fig. 107
383vfm22 Fig. 108
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.69

Linkage housing
151 mm
70 mm
Ø 20 mm
11 mm
Ø 59,8 mm
Ø 55,8 mm
Ø 40 mm
383vfm23 Fig. 109
182 mm
90 mm
Ø 20 mm
7 mm
Ø 64,7 mm
Ø 40 mm
Ø 60 mm
383vfm24 Fig. 110
E1.70 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Linkage housing
Adjustment to the force control spring
34
39 37
C
A
35 40
383vfm25 Fig. 111
– Fit the spring uncompressed (rotating). Where components (35) and (40) have been replaced:
– Measure "A". – Adjust and measure dimension "C".
– Measure "B". – Unscrew part (35), bond components (35) and (40)
– Adjust to obtain A = B by replacing washer (37) or (39) using Loctite Frenetanch (242).
by another of appropriate thickness. – Readjust dimension "C".
– Replace the lock nut (34). – Refit the force control spring.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.71

Linkage housing
Refitting the linkage arms

refitting.
– Fit the bushes to the linkage housing using a threaded
rod M20 x 400, 2 nuts, tool n° 60 05 006 549, and the
locally manufactured tools used during dismantling (left
and right bushes) (Fig. 109 and 110).
– Coat the screw (19) with Loctite Frenetanch (242). B
– Refit the linkage housing (see relevant paragraph). A
60 05 006 549
383vfm21 Fig. 112
19 29 30
383vfm19 Fig. 113
E1.72 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Linkage housing
Exploded view of the internal rods and levers

Mechanical linkage
73
74
72 77
76
75
71
70
79
69
80
68
78
109
108
105
81
106
82
107
104
103 83
102
84
89 87
101
97
100 96
99
98
85
88
95
91
92
93 90
94
383vfm26 Fig. 114
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.73

Linkage housing
68 O-ring. 82 Circlip. 96 Link.

69 Bush. 83 Screws. 97 Spring.
70 Circlip. 84 Lever. 98 Screws.
71 Mounting plate. 85 Circlip. 99 Seal.
72 Pin. 86 Link. 100 Circlip.
73 Pin. 87 Circlip. 101 Lever.
74 Rocker. 88 Circlip. 102 Circlip.
75 Bush. 89 Pin. 103 Lever.
76 Washer. 90 Screws. 104 Roller carrier.
77 Circlip. 91 Locknut. 105 Pin.
78 Roller. 92 Lever. 106 Screws.
79 Circlip. 93 Seal. 107 Link.
80 Washer. 94 Screws. 108 Lever.
81 Washer. 95 Circlip. 109 Circlip.

110 Position control lever. 115 Washer. 120 Mounting plate.
111 Screws. 116 Clamp. 121 Bush.
112 Spring. 117 Pin. 122 O-ring.
113 Adjustment screw. 118 Circlip. 123 Force control lever.
114 Screws. 119 O-ring.
E1.74 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Linkage housing
114 115
120
119
118
117
116
111
113
112
121
122
116
110 121
123
112
113
383vfm27 Fig. 115
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.75

Linkage housing
Electronic linkage TCE 6
29
141
133
132
134
131
143
142
140
145 144
135
136
139
137
138
146
147 129
128
130 125
126
127
126
125
124
383vfm28 Fig. 116
Nomenclature
124 Load sensor. 132 Washer. 140 Pin.

125 Locknut. 133 End of range sensor. 141 Link.
126 Washer. 134 Sensor bracket. 142 Link.
127 Sensor bracket. 135 Screws. 143 Circlip.
128 Screws. 136 Screws. 144 Pin.
129 Washer. 137 Lever. 145 Nut.
130 Position sensor. 138 Circlip. 146 Screws.
131 Screws. 139 O-ring. 147 Pin.
E1.76 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Linkage housing
102 73
88
383vfm29 Fig. 117 383vfm30 Fig. 118
Dismantling internal rods and levers

– Remove the force and position control rods by 114
removing the circlips (88) and (102).
– Extract the pin (73) to enable removal of the force
control cam.
– Undo the 2 screws (113) and the 2 screws (114).
– Extract the circlip (118) then push on the position and
force control lever shaft to extract them (Fig. 115).
– Undo screw (106) to enable removal of the lever (108).
113
383vfm31 Fig. 119
106
108
383vfm32 Fig. 120
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.77

Linkage housing
± 0,2
112 mm 15 mm
48
,25
±0
,25
90
mm
96
383vfm33 Fig. 121
Adjusting internal rods and levers – Check that the stop (90) for the spool valve control has
a length of 15 mm.
– Position the linkage arms at the lower stop.
– Check the distance of 112 ± 0,2 mm between the spool
– Place the force and position control levers in the bottom valve control and the housing.
position.
N.B.: If the dimensions measured are outside the
– Remove the mechanical linkage spool valve. limits given above, carry out adjustments.
– Check that the length of the strut (96) is 48,25
± 0,25 mm.
E1.78 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Linkage housing
Refitting of internal rods and levers

refitting.
– Refitting operations are the reverse of those used for
dismantling.
– Coat the screw (106) with Loctite Frenbloc (270), as
well as the 2 screws (113).
– Tighten the 2 screws (113) until a torque of about 8 daN
is required to move the force and position control levers.
– Refit the linkage housing (see relevant paragraph).
– Carry out external adjustments to the force and position
control levers (see relevant paragraph).
113
383vfm31 Fig. 122
106
108
383vfm32 Fig. 123
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.79

Linkage housing
Adjusting the external controls

m
m
P
0
-3
20
B1 P1
E
383vfm33 Fig. 124
Position control
– Place a small load on the linkage. 2 1
– Loosen screw (1).
– Fully lower the force control (E) and position control (P)
levers.
B2
– Check that struts "P1" and "E1" contact the end B1
stop "B1".
– Start the engine and allow it to tick over.
P1
– Without touching levers (P) and (E), turn shaft (2) E1
anti-clockwise until the linkage arms start to rise.
– Stop turning the shaft to lock the arms.
– Tighten screw (1).
– Accelerate the engine to normal rpm. 3
– Raise and lower the linkage several times using the
position control lever. 383vfm35 Fig. 125
– Check for synchonisation between the lever and the

graduation in the cab.
– Adjust if required by changing the length of the strut (3).
– Also check the play of 20 to 30 mm when the arms are
at the upper stop.
– Repeat the adjustment until the correct values are
obtained.
E1.80 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Linkage housing
Draft control
– Make the locally manufactured tool opposite to be used
later to simulate a negative force.
Nomenclature
1 Third point lug.
2 Linkage housing.
1
3 M18 Nut.
4 Washer.
5 M18 x 100 Screw. 5 3 2
N.B.: This operation is to be repeated 2 to 3 times.
– Engine stopped, apply the locally manufactured tool so
that it is not under pressure.
– Measure the maximum throw of the cab force control
lever.
4
– Draw a line 20 mm in front of the upper position of the
force control lever (Fig. 127).
383vfm36 Fig. 126
mm
20
383vfm37 Fig. 127
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.81

Linkage housing
20 mm
B1 E1
A P1
383vfm38 Fig. 128
N.B.: Each 20 mm movement of the lever corresponds

to a dimension of 4 mm between the strut "E1" and
the stop "B1" (Fig. 129). If these values cannot be
obtained, change the length of the strut or replace it if
4 mm
necessary.
– With the linkage arms at the down position, simulate a
negative force by tightening the screw in the locally
B2
manufactured tool so as to seperate the bracket for the B1
third point from the linkage cover (Fig. 126).
– Start the engine and allow it to tick over. P1
– Slowly raise the force control lever (E) until the arms
E1
begin to move and mark the position of the lever.
If the strut (A) is too long this will cause the linkage to rise
too fast (linkage rises before the 20 mm mark is reached).
If the strut (A) is too short this will cause the linkage to rise
too slowly (linkage rises after the 20 mm mark is reached).
Depending on the result, adjust the length of the strut (A): 383vfm39 Fig. 129
– Stop the engine for safety reasons.

– Remove the strut (A) and adjust it.
– Repeat the test until the correct length of the strut (A) is
achieved.
– Remove the locally made tool.
E1.82 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Linkage housing
Sensitivity test
– Carry out an approximate position adjustment, placing 1
the linkage arms at mid-travel.
– Turn the sensitivity adjuster (C) (anti-clockwise) until 2
the linkage arms shake.
N.B.: If the lever (C) is on the stop and the linkage
does not shake, the control lever stop (C) requires
adjustment.
N.B.: It is recommended that the cab be partially D
removed to improve access to the linkage spool valve
(see chapter "H").
– To adjust the stop (C) for the knob, the dust cover (3)
needs to be removed.
– Loosen the screws (1).
– Simultaneously turn the nut (4) and the knob (C) C
clockwise.
383vfm40 Fig. 130
– Tighten the 2 screws (1).
– Turn the knob (C) anti-clockwise until the linkage
shakes. C 3 4
N.B.: Repeat the above operation to adjust the stop
until the linkage shakes.
– When the linkage shake position has been obtained, 1
turn the knob (C) until it stops.
– Turn an additional 1/4 turn clockwise.
– Lower the linkage arms.
– Undo the screws (1) again 2
– To obtain maximum sensitivity, turn the sensitivity
knob (C) and the nut (4) together anti-clockwise until it
comes up hard against the the down valve (D).
– Tighten the screws (1), and replace the dust cover (3).
383vfm41 Fig. 131
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.83

Linkage housing
– Replace the cab (see chapter "H").

– Set the desired sensitivity by turning the knob (C). 1
N.B.: The valve (D) sets the lowering speed and
latches in the transport position when it is fully 2
screwed down. This control requires no adjustment.
N.B.: See the tractor user manual for recommended
linkage operating procedures.
C
383vfm40 Fig. 132
C 3 4
383vfm41 Fig. 133
E1.84 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Linkage housing
Removal of additional actuator
383vfm42 Fig. 134
N.B.: The RH linkage arm has to be removed before removal of the additional actuator (see relevant paragraph).
Refitting the additional actuator

N.B.: All seals must be changed and lubricated on refitting.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E1.85

Notes
E1.86 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

E2
PUMP SYSTEM 1
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Characteristics
Type of system Open centre
Pumps
Number 1
Type Fixed capacity gear-type
Location On the engine (between engine and clutch)
Supply to steering + brake + auxiliary and linkage spool valves
Pump displacement 14,4 cm³/rev
Flow rate at idle (650 ± 50 rpm) 11,7 l/min
Flow rate at nominal rpm of 2300 33 l/min
Flow rate at max. engine speed* 36 l/min
Filters
Suction strainer - filtration threshold 160 microns
High pressure steering filter - filtration threshold 15 microns
Steering unit
Type OSPF 80 LS
Limiter calibration pressure 110 to 115 bar
Antishock valve calibration pressure 180 to 200 bar
Brake valve
Type CEE or Italy (Cuna)
Type of control Control hydraulically synchronised with the tractor brakes
Type Open centre, single or double action
Type of pressure take off points Push-pull
Maximum number 3
Limiter calibration pressure 190 bar
Linkage
Mechanical linkage SOLL. M60 MECC.
Relief valve pressure 220 bar
Number of cylinders 1 actuator in the linkage cover
Number of additional actuators 0 or 1
Low pressure system accumulator
Number 0
* The maximum speed must be 2 475 ± 50 rpm for a 3-cylinder engine and 2 480 rpm for a 4-cylinder engine.
E2.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Component layout
General
The hydraulic schematic on page E2.5 represents the N.B.: The tractor may be fitted with other components
1-pump basic system. It consists of the following not shown in the diagram. Example: Italie brake
components: valve (Cuna), linkage TCE 6.
– A mechanical transmission (wheel drive and The diagram on the next page is shown in the condition
mechanical PTO clutches). with engine turning.
– The CEE type hydraulic brake valve.
– A mechanical linkage.
– 3 auxiliary spool valves.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E2.3

Component layout

1 Reservoir. 9 Mechanical linkage spool valve.
2 160 micron filter. 10 CEE brake valve.
3 14,4 cm³ pump. 11 Blanking plate.
4 15 micron high pressure filter. 12 n° 3 auxiliary spool valve (3 positions).
5 3,5 bar by-pass valve. 13 n° 2 auxiliary spool valve (4 positions).
6 Priority valve. 14 n° 1 auxiliary spool valve (3 positions).
7 Steering unit. 15 Inlet plate.
8 Steering actuator. 16 Linkage actuator.
E2.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Component layout
Hydraulic diagram
8
7
10
9
11
200 bar 200 bar
12
115 bar
6 0,6 13
0,9
0,8
4
3,5 bar 15 µm 220 bar 14
5
190 bar
14,4 cm³ 3
15
16
2
160 µm
1
398vfm59 Fig. 1
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E2.5

Component layout
Circuit layout on beam
11
12
13
15
14
7
6
4
5
10
2
398vfm60 Fig. 2
E2.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Hydraulic measurement and checking points
Test conditions:
– Engine idling (650 ± 50 rpm).
Checking flow from the 14,4 cm³ pump
60 05 005 736
398vfm61 Fig. 3
Important: Check that that the adjuster on the hydraulic test set is fully slackened off.
– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 to the pump outlet (inlet to the steering filter) as shown in the above diagram.
– The flow measured should be 11,7 ± 1 l/min at tickover and 36 ± 1 l/min at maximum rpm.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E2.7

Test conditions:
– Engine running at nominal speed.
N.B.: Do not operate other hydraulic functions.
Checking maximum steering actuator pressure
60 05 705 076
60 05 005 718
B A
398vfm62 Fig. 4
– Connect the inputs to pressure gauge n° 60 05 705 076 – Record pressure (B) (return). e.g. 5 bar.
to the supply lines to chambers (A) and (B) as shown in the The service pressure (setting of the pressure limiter valve)
above diagram. is equal to the sum of these two pressures: 110 + 5 = 115
– Start the engine. bar. If this value is not achieved, adjust the pressure limiter
– Turn the wheels so as to fill chamber (A). (see following page).
– Record pressure (A). e.g. 110 bar.
E2.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Adjusting the pressure limiter
– Remove the steering unit (see chapter "E1").

– Unscrew the plug to gain access to the pressure limiter
adjustment screw (C).
– Turn the adjuster screw fully down to achieve the
maximum setting of 210 bar.
– Unscrew 2 turns to obtain a setting of 115 bar.
– Re-check the maximum steering actuator pressure
398vfm63 Fig. 5
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E2.9

Test condition:
– Steering unit removed (see chapter "E1" for removal).
Adjusting the antishock valves
D
392hsm38 Fig. 6
– Connect a manual calibration pump to one of the

supply lines (D) to the steering actuator. E F
– Apply pressure using the calibration pump and note the
opening pressure.
The opening pressure (D) must be between 180 and
200 bar.
– Apply the same procedure to the second steering
actuator supply.
If the setting is incorrect, adjust the antishock valves as
described below:
– Unscrew the plug (E) for each valve.
– Turn the adjuster screw located in the recess (F).
– Repeat the check of the opening pressure until the
correct value is obtained.
398vfm64 Fig. 7
E2.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

"Hydraulic inspection results" sheet
Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................

Flow rate
Test conditions
Nominal value Measured value
Engine idling (650 ± 50 rpm) 11,7 ± 1 l/min

Engine operating at maximum rpm 36 ± 1 l/min

Test conditions Measured value Sum of values
Pressure at (A) Pressure at (B) Pressure (A) + (B)
Engine running at nominal speed (2 300 rpm) 110 to 115 bar

Pressure
Test condition
Steering unit removed 180 to 200 bar
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E2.11

Brake valve check

To check the braking valve, refer to chapter "C2".
Electrical checks on the solenoid actuator for the Italie (Cuna) brake valve
398vfm0d Fig. 8

– Connect test set n° 60 05 006 744 (voltmeter setting) to With power off, disconnect the solenoid valve harness.
the electrical supply to the solenoid for the Italie (Cuna) – Connect test set n° 60 05 006 744 (ohmeter setting)
brake valve. accross the solenoid valve only.
– Power up the solenoid valve. – The resistance measured should be 10,6 ohm.
– The voltage measured across the solenoid valve
should be 12 Volts.
E2.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test conditions:
N.B.: Do not operate any high pressure systems (linkage, other auxiliary spool valves, for example).
Checking maximum flow and pressure in auxiliary spool valves
398vfm65 Fig. 3
– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 to an auxiliary spool – Tighten the test set valve to obtain a pressure of
valve pressure outlet as shown in the diagram below. 160 bar. The flow measured should be 34 ± 2 l/min at
– Maintain the relevant spool valve lever in the operating maximum rpm.
position. – Fully tighten the test set valve so that the flow tends
– The flow measured should be 11,7 ± 1 l/min at tickover. towards 0; the maximum pressure should be
190 ± 10 bar. If this value is not achieved, adjust the
– The flow measured should be 36 ± 1 l/min at maximum
pressure limiter (see following page).
rpm with a pressure of 0 bar.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E2.13

Test conditions:
– Engine off.

– Remove the cap (A) to access the adjustment nut (C).
– Slacken lock nut (B) without loosening the adjuster
screw.
– Adjust the pressure limiter by turning the adjuster
screw (C).
– Repeat the check of the limiter opening pressure.
A B
398vfm66 Fig. 4
398vfm67 Fig. 5
E2.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test conditions:
N.B.: Do not operate any high pressure systems (auxiliary spool valves, steering for example).
Checking flow to the linkage spool valve
398vfm68 Fig. 6
Important: Check that the valve on the hydraulic test – The flow measured should be 11,7 ± 1 l/min at tickover.
set is fully unscrewed. – Repeat the test at maximum rpm; the flow measured
– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 between the should be 36 ± 1 l/min.
auxiliary spool valves and the linkage spool valve as
shown in the above diagram.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E2.15

Checking pressure at the primary

linkage valve 77 01 388 793
Mechanical linkage 10
B
A
– Remove the mechanical linkage spool valve (see
relevant paragraph). C
– Install the linkage spool valve on tool n° 77 01 388 793.
– Place the tool in a vice.
– Connect a calibration pump to the linkage supply
outlet (A).
– Screw a plug (B) onto the linkage actuator supply
outlet.
– Move the spool by turning screw (C) on the tool.
opening pressure.
The pressure should be 220 ± 10 bar. If necessary, adjust 398vfm69 Fig. 7
the main valve.
N.B.: To adjust the valve, unscrew the lock nut (1) and
turn the screw (2) to obtain the desired value.
– Refit the spool valve for the mechanical linkage (see

– Remove the LH rear wheel and place the tractor on
jacks.
– Remove the TCE 6 spool valve (see relevant
paragraph).
– Locally manufacture the clamp (Fig. 10).
– Attach the clamp to the linkage spool valve.
– Immobilise the assembly in a vice. 1
– Connect a calibration pump to the linkage spool valve.
2
398vfm71 Fig. 8
opening pressure.
The pressure should be 220 ± 10 bar. If necessary, adjust
the main valve.
– Also check that the pressure gauge reading does not
decrease too fast (maximum allowable drop is from 150
to 100 bar in one minute).
E2.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

To adjust the valve, unscrew the lock nut (3) and turn the
screw (4) to obtain the desired value.
N.B.: If pressure drops too fast, the spool valve must
be replaced. 3
– Refit the linkage spool valve (see relevant paragraph).
398vfm70 Fig. 9
120 ± 0,15
± 0,15
8 75
12 + 00,2
± 0,15
± 0,1
35
43
52
25
± 0,1
88 ± 0,15
46
A A
± 0,1
18
29 20 – 00,2
82 ± 0,15
± 0,15
109
A–A
9 H 11
G ¼”
+ 0,3
± 0,15
0,5
+ 0,5
0
12,5
13
14
398vfm72 Fig. 10
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E2.17

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test conditions
Voltage Current Resistance Voltage Current Resistance
Solenoid valve powered 12 V 1,3 A 10,6 ohm

Flow rate
Test conditions
Oil temperature 60°C Nominal value Measured value

Engine operating at maximum rpm (presure 0 bar) 36 ± 1 l/min
Pressure
Test conditions
Engine operating at maximum rpm 190 ± 10 bar

Test conditions Flow rate

Checking pressure at the primary linkage valve

Pressure
Test condition
Linkage spool valve removed 220 ± 10 bar
E2.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

E3
2-PUMP SYSTEM
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Characteristics
Pumps
Number 1 double
Location On the engine (between engine and clutch)
Circuit 1: Steering supply + transmission control
Flow at tickover of 650 ± 50 rpm 8,8 l/min
Flow rate at nominal rpm of 2 300 25 l/min
Regulator setting (control) 18 bar
Circuit 2: Brake supply + auxiliary and linkage spool valves
Flow rate at nominal rpm of 2 300 44,5 l/min
Rated pressure 190 bar
Filters
Control filter - filtration threshold 10 microns
Steering unit
Type OSPC 80 ON
* The maximum speed must be 2 475 ± 50 rpm for a 3-cylinder engine and 2 480 ± 50 rpm for a 4-cylinder engine.
E3.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Brake valve
Maximum number of flow regulators 1
Flow rate control range 0 to 36 l/min
Maximum number 4
Linkage
Mechanical linkage SOLL. M60 MECC.
Number 1
Capacity 0,75 l
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.3

Component layout
General
The hydraulic diagram on page E3.5 represents the The two diagrams are shown with engine running and
2-pump hydraulic system of a tractor fitted with a spool valve n° 1 operated.
mechanical transmission with mechanical road and PTO
clutches.
The hydraulic diagram on page E3.7 represents the
2-pump hydraulic system of a tractor fitted with a
clutchless reverser transmission.
Nomenclature (Fig. 1, 2, 3, 4)
1 Reservoir. 18 Hydraulic jack.
2 160 micron filter. 19 Spool valve for linkage bar swing.
3 19,2 cm³ pump. 20 Linkage swing actuators.
4 10,8 cm³ pump. 21 Blanking plate.
6 3,5 bar by-pass valve. 23 Flow regulator.
7 Steering unit "OSPC 80 ON". 24 Spacer.
8 Steering actuator. 25 n° 2 auxiliary spool valve (4 positions).
9 4-wheel drive solenoid valve. 26 n° 1 auxiliary spool valve (3 positions).
10 Differential lock solenoid valve. 27 Inlet plate.
11 PTO clutch spool valve. 28 Clutchless reverser hydraulic unit.
12 Cooler. 29 9 bar accumulator.
13 Rear PTO clutch actuator. 30 Additional actuator.
14 CEE brake valve. 31 "safety patch" solenoid valve.
15 Dual spool valve for linkage bar swing and hydraulic stabilising 32 Lubrication solenoid valve.
jacks. 33 5 bar valve.
16 Mechanical linkage spool valve. 34 TCE 6 electronic linkage spool valve.
17 Linkage actuator.
N.B.: Spool valve (22) is always the n° 4 regardless of the number of auxiliary spool valves.
E3.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Component layout
Hydraulic diagram (mechanical reverser and doubler)
8
9 15
7
21
20
18 22
18 bar
10 23
200 bar 200 bar

190 bar 0-36 l/min
150 bar 19
11
13 12 12-48 l/min
115 bar
24
5
3,5 bar 15 µm
6 25
14
220 bar
26
10,8 cm³ 19,2 cm³
16
4 3 2
160 µm
27
17 30
1
398vfm73 Fig. 1
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.5

Component layout
Circuit layout on beam (mechanical reverser and doubler)
11
21
22
23
24
25
26 12
27
16
18
30
7
5
6
14
13
2
19
4
15
10
9
8
12
398vfm74 Fig. 2
E3.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Component layout
Hydraulic diagram (hydraulic reverser and doubler)
8
28 21
7
18 bar 29
3,5 bar
10 µm
31
10 18 22
200 bar 200 bar 190 bar 0-36 l/min
11
6 l/min 23
13
14
12-48 l/min
115 bar 24
12
5 32
3,5 bar 15 µm
6 5 bar 25
33
26
10,8 cm³ 19,2 cm³
4 3 2 34
160 µm 30 27
17
1
398vfm75 Fig. 3
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.7

Component layout
Circuit layout on beam (hydraulic reverser and doubler)
21
33
11
34 21
23
22
24
25
26
27
18
30
5
6
14
13
2
29
32
31
10
28
12
8
398vfm76 Fig. 4
E3.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test conditions:
Checking flow from 10,8 cm³ steering pump
60 05 005 736
398vfm77 Fig. 5
Important: Check that the valve on the hydraulic test set is fully unscrewed.
– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 to the pump outlet (inlet to the steering filter) as shown in the above diagram.
– The flow measured should be 8,8 l/min at tickover and 27 l/min at maximum rpm.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.9

Test conditions:
– Engine running at nominal speed (2 300 rpm).
N.B.: Do not operate any low pressure systems (transmission solenoid valves for example).
60 05 705 076
60 05 005 718
B A
398vfm78 Fig. 6
E3.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB


– Remove the steering unit (see chapter "E1"). C
adjuster screw located in the recess (C).
398vfm79 Fig. 7
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.11

Test condition:
– Steering unit removed (see chapter "E1" for removal).
D
392hsm38 Fig. 8

supply lines (D) to the steering actuator.
opening pressure.
200 bar.
Test conditions:
actuator supply.
described below.
– Unscrew the plug and turn the adjuster screw located in
the recess (E).
correct value is obtained. E
398vfm80 Fig. 9
E3.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Checking flow from 10,8 cm³ steering pump

Engine idling (650 ± 50 rpm) 8,8 l/min

Engine operating at maximum rpm 27 l/min
Measured value Measured value Sum of values

Test conditions
Pressure
Test condition
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.13

Test conditions:
60 05 005 736
398vfm81 Fig. 5
N.B.: This pump supplies the brakes and the auxiliary – Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 between the brake
and linkage spool valves. valve (depending on equipment fit) and the auxiliary
spool valves as shown in the following diagram.
Important: Check that the valve on the hydraulic test
set is fully unscrewed. – The flow measured should be 15,6 ± 1 l/min at tickover
and 48 ± 1 l/min at maximum rpm.
E3.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Brake valve check

398vfm0d Fig. 5

should be 12 Volts.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.15

Test conditions:
60 05 005 736
398vfm82 Fig. 5
E3.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Spool valve n° 1, 2, 3
Important: Check that the valve on the hydraulic test – Tighten the test set valve to obtain a pressure of
set is fully unscrewed. 160 bar. The flow measured should be 44 ± 2 l/min at
maximum rpm.
– Turn the flow control knob (depending on equipment
fit), located between the two spool valves, to position 0. N.B.: For tractors fitted with a flow regulator, turn the
– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 to the pressure regulator knob to change the flow rate. The flow
outlet on auxiliary spool valve n° 1, 2 or 3 as shown in the measured should vary from 48 to 12 l/min at
diagram on the previous page. maximum rpm.
– Maintain the relevant spool valve lever in the operating – Fully tighten the test set valve (flow regulator at
position. position 0), so that the flow tends towards 0; the
– The flow measured should be 15,6 ± 1 l/min at tickover maximum pressure should be 190 ± 10 bar at maximum
and 48 ± 1 l/min at maximum rpm. rpm. If this value is not achieved, adjust the pressure
limiter (see page E3.19).
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.17

Test conditions:
Spool valve n° 4
60 05 005 736
398vfm83 Fig. 5
Important: Check that the valve on the hydraulic test – Tighten the test set valve to obtain a pressure of
set is fully unscrewed. 160 bar. The flow measured should be 34 ± 2 l/min at
maximum rpm.
– Turn the flow control knob (depending on equipment
fit), located between the two spool valves, to position 10. – Turn the regulator knob to vary the flow. The flow
measured should vary from 36 to 0 l/min at maximum
– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 to the pressure
rpm.
outlet of auxiliary spool valve n° 4 as shown in the
diagram above. – Fully tighten the test set valve (flow regulator at
position 10), so that the flow tends towards 0; the
N.B.: Even if the tractor is only fitted with 1 or 2 spool maximum pressure should be 190 ± 10 bar at maximum
valves, the uppermost spool valve in the stack is rpm. If this value is not achieved, adjust the pressure
spool valve n° 4. limiter (see following page).
– Maintain the relevant spool valve lever in the operating
position.
– The flow measured should be 11,7 ± 1 l/min at tickover
E3.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test condition:
– Engine off.

– Remove the plug (A).
– Loosen the locknut (B) without turning the adjuster
screw (C).
screw (C).
A
398vfm84 Fig. 6
398vfm67 Fig. 7
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.19

Test conditions:
– Engine at nominal speed (2 300 rpm).
Checking the flow from the dual spool valve
60 05 005 736
398vfm85 Fig. 8
Important: Check that the valve on the hydraulic test – Turn the flow regulator knob to position 10 (depending
set is fully unscrewed. on equipment fit).
– Remove the right-hand rear wheel. – The flow measured should be 11,7 l/min at tickover and
36 l/min at maximum rpm.
– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 to one of the outlets
from the dual spool valve as shown in the above – The flow measured must vary from 0 to 36 l/min when
diagram. the regulator knob is turned from 0 to 10.
– Keep the operating lever of the relevant spool valve at
full travel and ensure that the other is at neutral.
E3.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test conditions:
– Engine at maximum rpm.
N.B.: Do not operate any high pressure systems
(linkage, other auxiliary spool valves, for example).
Checking the maximum pressure

from the dual spool valve
60 05 705 076
Checking the maximum pressure measured
at the outlet from the dual spool valve
– Connect pressure gauge n° 60 05 705 076 to one of
the dual spool valve outlets (hydraulic stabiliser jack or
swing actuator(s)).
398vfm86 Fig. 9
– Operate the relevant dual spool valve lever and ensure
that the other is in neutral.
– The measured pressure must be 150 bar. If it is not,
adjust the pressure limiter located on the dual spool valve
(see following page).
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.21

Checking maximum pressure measured at

the hydraulic stabiliser jacks
– Connect the pressure gauge n° 60 05 705 076 to one
of the supplies to the hydraulic stabiliser jack actuator as
shown opposite.
– Move the jack to its top stop by operating the relevant
spool valve lever, ensuring that the other is at neutral.
– The maximum pressure measured should be 150 bar.
If it is not, adjust the pressure limiter located on the dual
spool valve (see next paragraph).
150 bar
Adjusting the dual spool valve pressure
limiter
Remove the plug (A) and turn the screw to set the
60 05 705 076
pressure limiter.
398vfm87 Fig. 10
398vfm88 Fig. 11
E3.22 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Electrical checks of linkage arm swing action solenoid valves
398vfm0d Fig. 12

– Connect cable n° 60 05 005 734 and test set With power off, disconnect the solenoid valve harness.
n° 60 05 006 744 (voltmeter setting) to the electrical – Connect cable n° 60 05 005 734 and tester n°
supply to one of the linkage swing action solenoid valves. 60 05 006 744 (ohmmeter position) to the solenoid valve
– Power up the solenoid valve. only.
– The voltage measured across the solenoid valve – The resistance measured should be 10 ohm.
should be 12 Volts.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.23

Test conditions:
N.B.: Do not operate any high pressure services (auxiliary spool valves, for example).
398vfm89 Fig. 13
N.B.: Check that the valve on the hydraulic test set is – The flow measured should be 15,6 ± 1 l/min at tickover
fully unscrewed. and 48 ± 1 l/min at maximum rpm.
– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 between the For tractors fitted with a flow regulator:
auxiliary spool valves and the linkage spool valve as – Turn the regulator knob to vary the flow. The flow
shown in the above diagram. measured should vary from 48 to 12 l/min at maximum
– Turn the flow regulator knob to position 0 (depending rpm.
on equipment fit).
E3.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB


B
A
outlet (A).
outlet.
opening pressure.
– The measured pressure must be 220 ± 10 bar. If this is 398vfm69 Fig. 14
not the case, adjust the antishock valves.

jacks.
paragraph).
– Immobilise the assembly in a vice.
– Connect a calibration pump to the linkage spool valve. 1
– Apply pressure using the calibration pump and note the 2
opening pressure.
398vfm71 Fig. 15
– The measured pressure must be 220 ± 10 bar. If it is
not, adjust the main valve.
to 100 bar in one minute) .
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.25

be replaced. 3
398vfm70 Fig. 16
120 ± 0,15
± 0,15
8 75
12 + 00,2
± 0,15
± 0,1
35
43
52
25
± 0,1
88 ± 0,15
46
A A
± 0,1
18
29 20 – 00,2
82 ± 0,15
± 0,15
109
A–A
9 H 11
G ¼”
+ 0,3
± 0,15
0,5
+ 0,5
0
12,5
13
14
398vfm72 Fig. 17
E3.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................


Test conditions Nominal values Recorded values
Solenoid valve powered 12 V 1,3A 10,6 ohm
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.27

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................

Spool valve n° 1, 2, 3
Test conditions Regulator position 0

Nominal flow Flow recorded
Spool valve n° 4
Regulator position 10
Test conditions

Pressure
Test conditions
Flow rate
Test conditions

E3.28 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Checking the maximum pressure from the dual spool valve
Test conditions Pressure

Engine operating at maximum rpm 150 bar
Test conditions Nominal values Recorded values

Solenoid valve powered 12 V 1,2 A 10 ohm

Test conditions
Oil temperature 60°C Regulator Regulator Regulator Regulator
position 0 position 10 position 0 position 10

Engine operating at maximum rpm 48 ± 1 l/min 12 ± 1 l/min
Test condition Pressure

Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E3.29

Notes
E3.30 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

E4
3-PUMP SYSTEM
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Characteristics
Pumps
Number 1 dual + 1 single

Location On engine
Circuit 1: Steering supply + auxiliary and linkage spool valves
Flow rate at nominal rpm of 2 300 44,5 l/min
Circuit 2: Brake supply + auxiliary spool valves

Circuit 3: Supply for control and transmission lubrication
Pump displacement 10,8 cm³


Filters

Control filter - filtration threshold 10 microns
* The maximum speed must be 2 475 ± 50 rpm for a 3-cylinder engine and 2 480 ± 50 rpm for a 4-cylinder engine.
E4.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Steering unit
Type OSPF 80 LS
Linkage
Mechanical linkage SOLL. M60 MECC

Brake valve
Maximum number of flow regulators 2
Regulation range for flow to spool valve n° 4 0 to 36 l/min
Maximum number 4
Number 1
Capacity 0,75 l
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.3

Component layout
General
The hydraulic diagram on page E4.5 represents the The two diagrams are shown with engine running and
3-pump hydraulic system of a tractor fitted with a spool valve n° 1 operated.
mechanical transmission with mechanical road and PTO
clutches.
The hydraulic diagram on page E4.7 represents the
3-pump hydraulic system of a tractor fitted with a
clutchless reverser transmission.
Nomenclature (Fig. 1, 2, 3, 4)
1 Reservoir. 19 Linkage swing actuators.
2 160 micron filter. 20 Blanking plate.
3 10,8 cm³ pump. 21 n° 4 auxiliary spool valve (3 positions).
4 14,4 cm³ pump. 22 Flow regulator n° 2.
5 19,2 cm³ pump. 23 n° 3 auxiliary spool valve (4 positions).
7 3,5 bar by-pass valve. 25 n° 1 auxiliary spool valve (3 positions).
8 Priority valve. 26 Flow regulator n° 1.
9 Steering unit "OSPF 80 LS". 27 CEE brake valve.
10 Steering actuator. 28 Additional actuator.
11 4-wheel drive solenoid valve. 29 Linkage actuator.
12 Differential lock solenoid valve. 30 TCE 6 electronic linkage spool valve.
13 PTO clutch spool valve. 31 Clutchless reverser hydraulic unit.
14 Cooler. 32 9 bar accumulator.
15 Rear PTO clutch actuator. 33 "safety patch" solenoid valve.
16 Dual spool valve for linkage bar swing and hydraulic stabilising 34 Lubrication solenoid valve.
jacks. 35 5 bar valve.
17 Hydraulic jack.
18 Spool valve for linkage bar swing.
E4.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Component layout
Hydraulic diagram (mechanical reverser and doubler)
10
11
9 16
20
19
17
18 bar
18
21
12
200 bar 200 bar 0-36 l/min

190 bar
22
T
150 bar
13
27
15
115 bar 14 23
0,6
0,9
0,8
24
8 6
3,5 bar 15 µm
7
30 25
19,2 cm³ 14,4 cm³ 10,8 cm³
5 3 190 bar 12-38 l/min

4 2
160 µm 26
10-36 l/min
29 28
1
398vfm90 Fig. 1
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.5

Component layout
Circuit layout on beam (mechanical reverser and doubler)
13
20
30
21
22
24
21
23
25
24
25
26
30
17
28
9
8
6
7
27
15
2
5
4
18
16
3
14 10
398vfm91 Fig. 2
E4.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Component layout
Hydraulic diagram (hydraulic reverser and doubler)
10 31 20
9 18 bar
32
3,5 bar
17
17
10 µm
33
21
12
200 bar 200 bar 0-36 l/min

190 bar
13
22
6 l/min T
15
27
115 bar 14
23
0,6
34
0,9
0,8
24
5 bar
8 6
3,5 bar 15 µm 35
7
25
19,2 cm³ 14,4 cm³ 10,8 cm³
5 3 2 190 bar 12-38 l/min

4
160 µm
30 26
10-36 l/min
29 28
1
398vfm92 Fig. 3
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.7

Component layout
Circuit layout on beam (hydraulic reverser and doubler)
35
13
20
30
22
24
21
23
25
14
26
17
28
9
8
6
7
27
15
5
4
32
34
3
33
12
31
14 10
398vfm93 Fig. 4
E4.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test conditions:
60 05 005 736
398vfm94 Fig. 5
N.B.: This pump supplies the steering and the – Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 to the pump outlet
auxiliary and linkage spool valves. (inlet to the steering filter) as shown in the above
diagram.
set is fully unscrewed. – The flow measured should be 15,6 ± 1 l/min at tickover
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.9

Test conditions:
– Engine running at nominal speed (2 350 rpm).
N.B.: Do not operate any low pressure systems (transmission solenoid valves for example).
60 05 705 076
60 05 005 718
B A
398vfm95 Fig. 6
E4.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB


– Remove the steering unit (see chapter "E1").
adjustment screw (C).
398vfm63 Fig. 7
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.11

Test condition:
Steering unit removed (see chapter "E1" for removal).
D
392hsm38 Fig. 8

supply lines (D) to the steering actuator. E F
opening pressure.
200 bar.
actuator supply.
described below:
– Unscrew the plug (E) for each valve.
– Turn the adjuster screw located in the recess (F).
correct value is obtained.
398vfm64 Fig. 9
E4.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Brake valve check

398vfm0d Fig. 10

The voltage measured across the solenoid valve should
be 12 Volts.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.13

Test conditions: N.B.: Do not operate any high pressure systems

– Engine idling (650 ± 50 rpm). (linkage, other auxiliary spool valves, for example).
Checking the maximum flow and pressure for auxiliary spool valves n° 1, 2 or 3
60 05 005 736
398vfm96 Fig. 11
N.B.: The following procedure relates to auxiliary – Tighten the test set valve to obtain a pressure of
spool valves supplied from the 19,2 cm³ pump. 160 bar. The flow measured should be 36 ± 2 l/min at
maximum rpm.
set is fully unscrewed. – Turn the flow regulator knob to vary the flow from 38 to
12 l/min at maximum rpm.
– Turn the flow regulator knob (if fitted), located between
the linkage cover and the auxiliary spool valves to – Fully tighten the test set valve (flow regulator at
position 0. position (0)), so that the flow tends towards 0; the
maximum pressure should be 190 ± 10 bar at maximum
– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 to the pressure rpm. If this value is not achieved, adjust the pressure
outlet of auxiliary spool valve n° 1 as shown in the limiter (see following page).
diagram above.
position.
E4.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test condition:
Engine off.

screw (C).
screw (C).
A
398vfm84 Fig. 12
398vfm67 Fig. 13
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.15

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................


Measured value Sum of values

Test conditions
Pressure
Test condition
Test conditions
Oil temperature 60°C Voltage Current Resistance Voltage Current Resistance
Solenoid valve powered 12 V 1,3 A 10,6 ohm
E4.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Checking the maximum flow and pressure for auxiliary spool valves n° 1, 2 or 3

Oil temperature 60°C Nominal flow


Oil temperature 60°C Nominal flow
Pressure
Test conditions
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.17

Test conditions:
60 05 005 736
398vfm97 Fig. 14
Important: Check that the valve on the hydraulic test – The flow measured should be 11,7 ± 1 l/min at tickover
set is fully unscrewed. and 36 ± 1 l/min at maximum rpm.
– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 between the brake
valve (depending on equipment fit) and the auxiliary
spool valves as shown in the following diagram.
E4.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test conditions: N.B.: Do not operate any high pressure services

– Engine idling (650 ± 50 rpm). (auxiliary spool valves, for example).
Checking the maximum flow and pressure for auxiliary spool valve n° 4
10
60 05 005 736
398vfm98 Fig. 15
Important: Check that the valve on the hydraulic test For tractors fitted with a flow regulator:
set is fully unscrewed. – Turn the regulator knob from position 10 to 0 to vary
– Turn the flow regulator knob (if fitted), located at the top flow from 36 to 0 l/min at maximum rpm.
of the spool valve stack, to position 10 (Fig. 15). – Fully tighten the test set valve (flow regulator at
– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 to a pressure outlet position (10)), so that the flow tends towards 0; the
on an auxiliary spool valve as shown on the above maximum pressure should be 190 ± 10 bar at maximum
diagram. rpm. If this value is not achieved, adjust the pressure
limiter (see following page).
position.
– Tighten the test set valve to obtain a pressure of
160 bar. The flow measured should be 34 ± 2 l/min at
maximum rpm.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.19

Test condition:
Engine off.

screw (C).
screw (C).
A
398vfm84 Fig. 16
398vfm67 Fig. 17
E4.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test conditions: N.B.: Do not operate any high pressure systems

– Engine at maximum rpm. (linkage, other auxiliary spool valves, for
example).
10
60 05 005 736
398vfm99 Fig. 18
– Remove the right-hand rear wheel. – Turn the flow regulator knob (located at the top of the
– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 to one of the outlets stack) to position (10).
from the dual spool valve (hydraulic stabiliser jack or – The flow measured should be 11,7 l/min at tickover and
swing actuator(s)) as shown in the above diagram. 36 l/min at maximum rpm.
– Operate the relevant dual spool valve lever and ensure – The flow measured must vary from 0 to 36 l/min when
that the other is in neutral. the regulator knob is turned from 0 to 10.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.21

Test conditions:
– Engine at maximum rpm.
N.B.: Do not operate any high pressure systems
(linkage, other auxiliary spool valves, for example).
Checking the maximum pressure

from the dual spool valve
60 05 705 076
Checking the maximum pressure measured
at the outlet from the dual spool valve
– Connect pressure gauge n° 60 05 705 076 to one of
the dual spool valve outlets (hydraulic stabiliser jack or
swing actuator(s)).
398vfm86 Fig. 19
– Operate the relevant dual spool valve lever and ensure
that the other is in neutral.
– The measured pressure must be 150 bar. If it is not,
adjust the pressure limiter located on the dual spool valve
(see following page).
E4.22 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checking maximum pressure measured at

the hydraulic stabiliser jacks
– Connect the pressure gauge n° 60 05 705 076 to one
of the supplies to the hydraulic stabiliser jack actuator as
shown opposite.
– Move the jack to its top stop by operating the relevant
spool valve lever, ensuring that the other is at neutral.
– The maximum pressure measured should be 150 bar.
If it is not, adjust the pressure limiter located on the dual
spool valve (see next paragraph).
150 bar
Adjusting the dual spool valve pressure
limiter
– Remove the plug (A) and turn the screw to set the
60 05 705 076
pressure limiter.
398vfm87 Fig. 20
398vfm88 Fig. 21
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.23

398vfm0d Fig. 22

– Connect test set n° 60 05 006 744 (voltmeter position) – Connect test set n° 60 05 006 744 (ohmeter setting)
to the electrical circuit of one of the linkage bar swing accross the solenoid valve only.
actuators. – The resistance measured should be 10 ohm.
– Power up the solenoid valve.
should be 12 Volts. With power off, disconnect the
solenoid valve harness.
E4.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Test conditions: N.B.: Do not operate any high pressure services

– Engine idling (650 ± 50 rpm). (auxiliary spool valves, for example).
10
60 05 005 736
398vfm0a Fig. 23
Important: Check that the valve on the hydraulic test – The flow measured should be 11,7 ± 1 l/min at tickover
set is fully unscrewed. and 36 ± 1 l/min at maximum rpm.
– Connect test set n° 60 05 005 736 between the – The flow measured must vary from 36 to 10 l/min when
auxiliary spool valves and the linkage spool valve as the regulator knob is turned from 10 to 0.
shown in the above diagram.
– Turn the knob on the first regulator to flow position (10)
(located between the linkage cover and the spool valves)
to vary the flow.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.25


B
A
outlet (A).
outlet.
opening pressure.
The measured pressure must be 220 ± 10 bar. If this is 398vfm69 Fig. 24
not the case, adjust the antishock valves.

jacks.
paragraph).
– Immobilise the assembly in a vice.
– Connect a calibration pump to the linkage spool valve. 1
– Apply pressure using the calibration pump and note the 2
opening pressure.
398vfm71 Fig. 25
The measured pressure must be 220 ± 10 bar. If it is not,
adjust the main valve.
to 100 bar in one minute) .
E4.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

be replaced. 3
398vfm70 Fig. 26
120 ± 0,15
± 0,15
8 75
12 + 00,2
± 0,15
± 0,1
35
43
52
25
± 0,1
88 ± 0,15
46
A A
± 0,1
18
29 20 – 00,2
82 ± 0,15
± 0,15
109
A–A
9 H 11
G ¼”
+ 0,3
± 0,15
0,5
+ 0,5
0
12,5
13
14
398vfm72 Fig. 27
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.27

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................


Checking the maximum flow and pressure for auxiliary spool valve n° 4
Test conditions

Test conditions
Pressure
Test conditions
Flow rate
Test conditions

E4.28 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Checking the maximum pressure from the dual spool valve
Test conditions Pressure

Engine operating at maximum rpm 150 bar
ON/OFF solenoid valve for linkage bar swing function
Test conditions Nominal values

Solenoid valve powered 12 V 1,2 A 10 ohm
Test conditions Nominal flow Flow recorded
Regulator Regulator Regulator Regulator

position 10 position 0 position 10 position 0

Engine operating at maximum rpm 36 ± 1 l/min 10 l/min
Test condition Pressure

Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB E4.29

Notes
E4.30 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

ELECTRICAL SERVICES
F1
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
F2
HARNESS AND CONNECTOR PATHS
Chapter F

TECHNICAL SUPPORT USER GUIDE
Search from the schematic diagram by function

Facing the schematic diagrams are some connectors that provide additional help in understanding the diagram.
Important: Some diagrams by function represent the versions with a maximum of options. Wire markers may differ
from one option to another or from one variant to another. Refer to the chapter "Harness path and connectors" for
the exact validity of the wire markers according to options.
ABBREVIATIONS
+APC ...... + After contact

+AVC (constant source)+ Before contact
D+ ........... + Alternator
EHM........ Electro-hydraulic management (Electronic transmission control)
SR........... Shuttle reverser
TCE......... Electronic Tracto-Control
W ............ Engine speed information
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

CONTENTS
F1 – SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
ITEM LIST
DESIGNATION ................................................................................................................................................................F1.2
GENERAL WIRING
WIRING SCHEMATIC .....................................................................................................................................................F1.3
FUSES AND RELAYS

FUSEBOX (A) AND RELAYS ..........................................................................................................................................F1.4
FUSES AND RELAYS FOR "CLUTCHLESS" REVERSER VERSION ...........................................................................F1.5
FUSES AND RELAYS FOR MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION VERSION ......................................................................F1.6
FUSEBOX (B) AND CAB RELAYS..................................................................................................................................F1.7
EARTHS
EARTHING LOCATIONS ................................................................................................................................................F1.9
DESIGNATION OF EARTHS ..........................................................................................................................................F1.9
FUNCTIONS
STARTING SYSTEN, CHARGING CIRCUIT, PRE-HEATERS, ENGINE RPM ON "UNDER TORQUE" REVERSER
TRANSMISSION ...........................................................................................................................................................F1.10
STARTING SYSTEN, CHARGING CIRCUIT, PRE-HEATERS, ENGINE RPM ON MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION.F1.12
DIPPED HEADLIGHTS – HEADLIGHTS – HORN........................................................................................................F1.14
FRONT AND REAR WORKING LIGHTS ......................................................................................................................F1.15
STOP LIGHTS – FRONT AXLE ENGAGED – THEORETICAL SPEED .......................................................................F1.16
SIDE LIGHT INDICATOR – REAR WORK LIGHTS (ROLL BAR).................................................................................F1.17
FLASHING LIGHTS AND WARNING LIGHTS..............................................................................................................F1.18
ROTATING BEACON – CIGARETTE LIGHTER – RADIO – CAB LIGHT AND SPOT .................................................F1.19
FRONT AND REAR WINDSCREEN WIPER / WASHER..............................................................................................F1.20
INSTRUMENT PANEL VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING...............................................................................F1.21
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE – AIR FILTER BLOCKED – HANDBRAKE – BRAKE FLUID LEVEL – COOLANT
TEMPERATURE – FUEL GAUGE ................................................................................................................................F1.22
4-WHEEL DRIVE CONTROL – DIFFERENTIAL – REAR/PROPORTIONAL PTO.......................................................F1.23
25 A POWER SOCKET – PNEUMATIC SEAT .............................................................................................................F1.24
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE..................................................................................................F1.25
REVERSHIFT/DOUBLER CLUTCH AND DRIVE CONTROLS ....................................................................................F1.26
MANAGEMENT OF "CLUTCHLESS" REVERSER TRANSMISSION...........................................................................F1.28
INJECTION PUMP – FUEL FILTER..............................................................................................................................F1.30
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

DASHBOARD DISPLAY SELECTOR – DIAGNOSTIC PLUG ......................................................................................F1.31
TCE6 LINKAGE .............................................................................................................................................................F1.32
LINKAGE ARMS STABILISER ......................................................................................................................................F1.34
F2 – HARNESS AND CONNECTOR PATHS

HARNESS AND CONNECTOR PATHS..........................................................................................................................F2.3
1. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND TRANSMISSION HARNESS .........................................................................................F2.4
2. PREHEATING CONTROL HARNESS (OPTION) .....................................................................................................F2.12
3. RADIATOR COWLING HARNESS............................................................................................................................F2.13
4. ENGINE HARNESS...................................................................................................................................................F2.14
4A. ROTATING BEACON HARNESS (ROLL BAR) ......................................................................................................F2.17
4B. INJECTOR PUMP INTERFACE HARNESS ...........................................................................................................F2.18
5. CAB TOP HARNESS.................................................................................................................................................F2.20
5A. AIR CONDITIONING HARNESS ............................................................................................................................F2.23
6. TCE 6 HARNESS ......................................................................................................................................................F2.24
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

F1
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.1

Item list
Designation
1 Rotating beacon 54 PTO selector switch 540 eco or1000 rpm 115 Transmission oil pressure sensor 227 Starting relay
1a Rotating beacon (roll bar) 55 540 rpm PTO selection switch 116 Preheating fuse 232 Rear differential solenoid valve switch
2 RH dipped light 56a Lift RH external switch 117 Fuse 234 Front axle solenoid valve switch
3 LH dipped light 56b Lift LH external switch 118a Oil pressure switch transmission reverse 236 Force sensor TCE
4 RH flashing and side lights 57a Lift lower RH external switch 118b Oil pressure switch front transmission low forward range 237 TCE position sensor
4a RH front flashing light 57b Lift lower LH external switch 118c Oil pressure switch transmission forward high range 238 +/- selector and declutch function
5 LH flashing and side lights 60 Key ingition switch 119 Air conditioning electronic thermostat 249 Relay
5a LH front flashing light 61 Ventilation switch 120 Fuse 254 Fuse
6 Front right working light 65 Lighting switch 123 Seat compressor motor 261 Programming socket
7 front left working light 66 Windscreen wiper/washer switch 157 Rear working light (roll bar) 262 Diagnostic plug
8 Rear right working light 67 Calibration switch 163 Rear windscreen wiper/washer switch 262a Diagnostic plug
9 Rear left working light 68 High-speed range contactor 173 Horn 283 End of travel contactor TCE 6
10 RH rear light 73 TCE 6 Relay 175 safety patch Relay 284 Linkage arm stabiliser switch
10a RH rear flashing light 79 Car-radio 176 Control panel display selector 286 Stabilisers control switch
11 LH rear light 81 Trailer power socket 184 EHM24 electronics unit 286a Stabilisers control switch
11a LH rear flashing light 82 25A power socket 185 Instrument panel 287 Linkage stabilisers solenoid valve
12 Number plate light 83 LH loudspeaker 187 Clutch pedal potentiometer 287a Linkage stabilisers solenoid valve
13 Roof lamp 84 RH loudspeaker 188 Clutchless reverser control 294a Condenser fan
19 RH headlight 86 Cigarette lighter 189 Clutch pedal switch 294b Condenser fan
21 Rear screen wiper 90 Fan 191 Electronic computer TCE 6 298 Lubrication solenoid valve
23 LH headlight 92 Front screen wiper 192a Forward drive solenoid valve (slow) 299 "safety patch" solenoid valve
25 Injection stop solenoid valve 95 Air conditioning compressor clutch 192b Forward drive solenoid valve (fast) 302 Coolant fluid temperature sensor
30 Battery 96 Front windscreen washer pump 193 Reverse solenoid valve 306 "safety patch" electronics unit
31 Alternator 96a Rear windscreen washer pump 200 Engine oil pressure switch 307 Electronics unit timer
32 Starter 99 TCE up control 201 Engine thermistor 308 Standard PTO contactor
34 Glow plug 100 TCE down control 202 Fuel gauge 309 Rear PTO clutch contactor
37 Speed sensor 101 4-wheel drive solenoid valve 203a RH brake pedal switch 310 Powered soil engagement contactor
41 Rear proportional PTO switch 102 Differential solenoid valve 203b LH brake pedal switch 311 linkage up/down selector
45 Front work light switch 110 Fuse box (instrument panel) 204 Parking brake switch 312 Fuel filter water sensor
46 Rear work light switch 111 Fuse box (cab roof) 206 Air filter clogging valve 313 Solenoid valve for cold start advance mechanism
49 Hazard warning lights switch 112 Main fuse 210 Air conditioning system high and low pressure switch 314 Mechanical reverser neutral contactor
51 Air conditioning selector 112a Main fuse (cab roof) 214 Brake fluid level switch 315 Preheating control unit
52 Rotating beacon switch 114 Transmission oil temperature sensor 221 Flashing unit
52a Rotating beacon switch (roll bar) 114a Transmission oil temperature sensor 226 Preheating spark plug relay
F1.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

GENERAL WIRING
Wiring schematic
6
5 7
86
8
9
J11
J13 J17
J12 P39 J39
J16 5a
J18
51
J44 J19
J45 J15 90
J46 61
J47 P15 119
J48
JA
JB
83 210
M3 J14 P14
84 J42
+ –
111 J41
J10 P10
J11
P11 P11
1a J86 1 J146 J20 2
J98 M0 J89 J91 J99 J146 J98 M0 J89 J91 J99 P99
J90 J144 J97 J90 315
J101 J93 J92 J143 J101 J93 J92
J95 J138 J95
J142 226
203a 203b J105 203a 203b 34
J141
J131 J106 J21
S02 J100 306
JX2 JX1 J130 J134 JX2 JX1
184
185
J129 J107 J104 P104
185
J133 J133
J140
S01
J132 J132 J108
J116 J117 J114 J115 J116 J117 J114 J115
J128 J128
307
J126 J126
110 110 J108a
J120 J120 J118
J139 J139
J122 J122
J119 J119 J135
J121 M1 J112 J121 J120 J121 M1 J112 J121 J120 J136 25
J124 J124
J137 4b
175 5 4 175 5 4 J138 302
12 J123 12 J123 J78
313
P88 P63 P59 P61 P60 P88 P63 P59 P61 P60 P68
J88 J63 J59 J61 J60 214 J88 J63 J59 J61 J60 214 J68
262
J72 191 73 J67 4 3
J1 J9
236 237 J69
23
32
J65 J66
201 3
M2 J70 J75
32 J40 P40
J5 173
M4
J6
J7 P62 J62 J71 2
J73
J8 31
P73 206 19
J2
J3
J4
1a
6 4a
605vfm10
Nomenclature
1 Instrument panel and transmission harness (direction change under load). 4 Engine harness. 5a Air conditioning harness.
1a Instrument panel and transmission harness (mechanical reverser). 4a Spotlight wiring harness (roll bar). 6 Harness TCE 6 (option).
2 Preheating control harness (option). 4b Injector pump interface harness. Optional components.
3 Radiator cowling harness. 5 Cab top harness. Follow the arrow to resume the corresponding interconnection.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.3

Fuses and relays
Fusebox (a) and relays

Version with clutchless reverser transmission Version with mechanical transmission
Fa 9 Fa 1 Fa 9 Fa 1
7,5 A 10 A 7,5 A 10 A
Fa 10 Fa 2 Fa 10 Fa 2
5A 10 A E4 E5 E9 5A 10 A E4 E5
Fa 11 Fa 3 Fa 11 Fa 3
10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
Fa 12 Fa 4 Fa 12 Fa 4
15 A 15 A 7,5 A 15 A
Fa 13 Fa 5 E3 E8 Fa 13 Fa 5 E3
20 A 10 A 20 A 5A
Fa 14 Fa 6 Fa 14 Fa 6
10 A 5A 10 A 5A
Fa 15 Fa 7 Fa 15 Fa 7
10 A 5A E1 E2 E6 E7 10 A 5A E1 E2 E6
Fa 16 Fa 8 Fa 16 Fa 8
10 A 7,5 A 7,5 A ––
604vfm00 604vfm01
Conductor allocations Conductor allocations

Ref Designation of fuses Rating Ref Relay allocation Ref Designation of fuses Rating Ref Relay allocation
Fa 1 Dipped headlights E1 Start Fa 1 Dipped headlights E1 Start
15 A
Fa 2 Headlights E2 Brake lights Fa 2 Headlights E2 Brake lights
10 A
Rear working light E3 Working light Rear working light E3 Working light
Fa 3 Fa 3 10 A
(roll bar only) E4 Dipped headlights (left/right) (roll bar only) E4 Dipped headlights
Fa 4 Rotating beacon/hazard warning light switch 15 A E5 Headlights (left/right) Fa 4 Rotating beacon/hazard warning light switch 15 A E5 Headlights
Fa 5 ISO / implement electrical socket 10 A E6 Deactivation of doubler solenoid valve Fa 5 ISO / implement electrical socket E6 Preheating control
Fa 6 Left hand lights E7 Activation of doubler solenoid valve Fa 6 Left hand lights 5A
5A
Fa 7 Right hand lights E8 Control of solenoid for ISC lubrication cut-off Fa 7 Right hand lights
Fa 8 Supply to doubler solenoid valve E9 Preheating control Fa 8 Not used —
7,5 A
Fa 9 Instrument panel audio warning Fa 9 Audio warning/instrument panel 7,5 A
Fa 10 Supply to stop light switch and stop lights 5A Fa 10 Supply to stop light switch and stop lights 5A
Fa 11 Supply to engine stop solenoid 10 A Fa 11 Supply to engine stop solenoid 15 A
Fa 12 Transmission computer 15 A Fa 12 Cab supply 7,5 A
Fa 13 Implement electrical socket 20 A Fa 13 Implement electrical socket 20 A
Fa 14 Supply to ISC control Fa 14 Pneumatic seat 15 A
Fa 15 Supply to hazard warning light switch Fa 15 Supply to hazard warning light switch 10 A
Diagnostic instrument panel/4 wheel drive selector – Diagnostic instrument panel/4 wheel drive selector –
10 A
Differential lock – Selector Differential lock – Selector
Fa 16 Fa 16 7,5 A
PTO 540-540 eco – 1 000/proportional/PTO phonic PTO 540-540 eco/1 000/proportional/PTO phonic wheel
wheel indicator, clutch pedal switch and sensor indicator
F1.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Fuses and relays for "clutchless" reverser version
Fa 1 30 30 Fa2 F1.10 30
+ APC + AVC F1.14 87 87 F1.14 F1.10 87
E4 E5 E9
F1.14
Fa 9 Fa 1 F1.14
F1.14 E4 30
7,5 A 10 A
85 87a 86 85 87a 86 85 87a 86
Fa 10 Fa 2
F1.16 E5 30
5A 10 A
F1.17
Fa 11 Fa 3
F1.10, 30 E3 30
10 A 10 A Fa 7 85 85
F1.26
87a Fa3 87a
E3 E8
Fa 12 Fa 4 86 86
F1.26, 34 F1.18 87 30 87 30
10 A 15 A
Fa 13 Fa 5
F1.24 F1.24
20 A 10 A
Fa 14 Fa 6
F1.26 F1.17
10 A 5A F1.10 30 30 Fa15 30 30 Fa8
87 87 F1.16 87 87 F1.26
Fa 15 Fa 7
E2 30 E3 85
10 A 5A E1 E2 E6 E7 F1.26
F1.16, 18, 24 F1.17 F1.10 F1.16
87a F1.26
Fa 16 Fa 8 F1.10 F1.26
F1.10, 16 E7 • E8 30
15 A 7,5 A
23, 26, 30, E9 85 85 87a 86 85 87a 86 85 86 85 87a 86
31
J89
F1.17
605vfm11
Layout of a relay
85 87 87a
86 30 605vfm12
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.5

Fuses and relays for mechanical transmission version
Fa 1 30 30 Fa2
+ APC + AVC F1.14 87 87 F1.14
E4 E5
F1.14
Fa 9 Fa 1 F1.14
F1.14 E4 30
7,5 A 15 A
85 87a 86 85 87a 86
Fa 10 Fa 2
F1.16 E5 30
5A 15 A
F1.17
Fa 11 Fa 3
F1.12, 30 E3 30
15 A 10 A Fa 7 85
87a Fa3
E3
Fa 12 Fa 4 86
F1.26, 34 F1.18 87 30
10 A 15 A
Fa 13 Fa 5
F1.24 F1.24
20 A 10 A
F1.12
Fa 14 Fa 6
F1.26 F1.17
15 A 5A Fa 7 30 30 Fa15 30
87 87 F1.16 F1.12 87
E2 30 Fa 15 Fa 7
E6 30 E3 85
10 A 5A E1 E2 E6
F1.16, 18, 24 F1.17 F1.12 F1.16
87a
Fa 16 Fa 8 F1.12 F1.12
F1.12, 16,
15 A — —
23, 26, 30, 85 87a 86 85 87a 86 85 86
31
J89
F1.17
605vfm13
Layout of a relay
85 87 87a
86 30 605vfm12
F1.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Fusebox (b)and cab relay
Conductor allocations
Fb 8 Ref Designation of fuses Rating
20 A
Fb 1 Front working lights
Fb 7 10 A
20 A Fb 2 Rear working lights and radio memory
Fb 6 Fb 3 Front screen wiper
7.5 A Fb 4 Rear screen wiper
7,5 A
Fb 5 Fb 5 Rotating beacon and roof light
7.5 A
Fb 6 Car radio supply
Fb 4 Fb 12
7.5 A 7,5 A Fb 7 Heating system/air conditioning supply
Fb 3 Fb 11 Fb 8 Right fan/condenser supply 20 A
7.5 A 5A Fb 9 Left fan/condenser supply
Fb 2 Fb 10 Fb 10 Air conditioning compressor supply
10 A 5A 5A
Fb 11 Number plate light and switch lighting
Fb 1 Fb 9
10 A 20 A Fb 12 Car radio memory 7,5 A
Ref Relay allocation

R1 R2
R1 Working light supply
R2 Heating/air conditioning system supply
R3 Fan control
R4 Air conditioning compressor supply
R3
R4
604vfm02
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.7

Fusebox (b)and cab relay
+ AVC
30 30
Fb 1 – 2 87 87 Fb 7
+ APC + AVC
R1 R2
Fb 11
Fb 8
F1.21 R3 87
20 A 85 87a 86 85 87a 86
Fb 7
F1.21 R2 87
20 A
Fb 6
F1.19
7,5 A F1.21 85
87a
R3 87 30
Fb 5 86
F1.19
7,5 A
Fb 8 – 9
Fb 4 Fb 12
F1.20 F1.19
7,5 A 7,5 A
Fb 3 Fb 11
F1.20 R1 • R2 85 F1.15, 19,
7,5 A 5A
20 F1.21 30
Fb 2 Fb 10 Fb 10 87
F1.15, 19 R1 87 R4 87 F1.21
10 A 5A
R4
Fb 1 Fb 9
F1.15 R1 87 R3 87 F1.21
10 A 20 A
85 87a 86
605vfm14
Layout of a relay
85 87 87a
86 30 605vfm12
F1.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Earths Designation of earths
Earth link via chassis.
Earthing locations Earths Designations
M0 Instrument panel and transmission harness
M1 Transmission harness
M2 Engine harness
M3 Cabin roof and air conditioning harness
M4 Linkage TCE 6 harness
M3
M0
M4
M2
P63
J63
M1
606vfm48
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.9

Functions
starting systen, charging circuit, pre-heaters, engine rpm on "under torque" reverser transmission
– +
30 112
227
1 50 A
P115
J115
J71 308 2
32
1
B+ D+
A W 1 188
M P114
M
J114 M2
31 41 2 J96
B4 F1.26
1 J63
P111
P63
J111
309 2
J73
2 22 21 33 20 26 10 11
JX1 JX2
– +
185
J68 A1
P59
P68 C4
C5
25 B2
B5
J59
B
F1.22 J70
116 M0
150 A 226
34
110
1 3 2 6 5 4 E1 E9
2
J99
1 J21 F1.14
P99
315
1
Fa16/10 A
Fa11/10 A
1 4 6 3 7
Fa8/7,5 A
3
4 J86
J20
6
7 I 0 I II
8
10 60
F1.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Ref Item
J59
25 Injection stop solenoid valve JX2 Ending P73 112
30 Battery J73 M0
10 Starter relay E1 86 227
31 Alternator 31
11 Battery charge E9 30
32 Starter 32
20 PTO engaged J111 2 30
34 Glow plug
S01
J63 P63 S02

J99
21 Standard power take-off J115 1
184
JX2 110
41 Rear proportional PTO switch J71 J93
P104
22 Proportional PTO J114 1 J59 P59 J104
JX1
J86
J90
60 Key ingition switch

J88 P88 J95 J91
J92 203a
26 Reverser not in neutral J96 B4

J98 203b
286a 286b
110 Fuse box

J89
33 Preheat warning light J99 2 P59 J59 P63 J63 J96 J143
J86
112 Main fuse
J97 J144
110 P144
J141
J142
116 Preheating fuse J123 J126

82 J122
J120
185 Instrument panel M2

J131
5 9 13 17 21 25 29 J111 P11
J11
188 Clutchless reverser control J124
1 33
226 Preheating spark plug relay J121
227 Starting relay 2 34 P73 J70 J119
J73 185
308 Standard PTO contactor 3 35 31 J115 J116 J117
309 Rear PTO clutch contactor J114 J118

J110
12
4 36
315 Preheating control unit J112
8 12 16 20 24 28 32
JX1 Ending 606vfm00 M1 606vfm02
2 Engine rpm input P59 C5

J21
315 J99 P99
4
5
J20
3 9
6 13
1 5 9 13 17 2 10 17
14 21
1 7
11 18 25
5 1
9 15 22 29
2 8
6 13
19 26 33
12
10 17
3
16 23 30
7 14
20 27 34
11 18
4
15 24 31
8
12 19 28 35
4 8 12 16 20 16
20
32
36
315
604vfm0r
604vfm0q
226
J21
34
32
606vfm01
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.11

Starting systen, charging circuit, pre-heaters, engine rpm on mechanical transmission
– +
30 112
227
1 50 A
P115
J115
J71 308 2
32
1
B+ D+
A W 1 314
M P114
M
J114 M2
31 41 2
1 J63
P111
P63
J111
309 2
J73
2 22 21 33 20 26 10 11
JX1 JX2
– +
185
J68 A1
P59
P68 C4
C5
25 B2
B5
J59
B M0
F1.22 J70
116
150 A 226
34 110
E1 E6
1 3 2 6 5 4
2
J99
1 J21 F1.14
P99
315
Fa16/10 A
Fa11/10 A
Fa8/7,5 A
1
3 1 4 6 3 7
4 J86
J20
6
7 I 0 I II
8
10 60
605vfm26
F1.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Ref Item
J59
25 Injection stop solenoid valve JX2 Ending P73 112
30 Battery J73
10 Starter relay E1 86 227
31 Alternator 31
11 Battery charge E9 30
32 Starter 32
34 Glow plug
S01
S02
41 Rear proportional PTO switch J71 J63 P63 184

JX2
22 Proportional PTO J114 1 P104
60 Key ingition switch J59

J104
JX1 J86
26 Reverser not in neutral J96 B4 P59

J88 P88 J95
110 Fuse box J98

286a 286b
33 Preheat warning light J99 2 P59 J59 P63 J63

112 Main fuse
J96
J143
110 J97 J144

P144
116 Preheating fuse J141

J142
185 Instrument panel 5 9 13 17 21 25 29

M2 J131
J123 J126
82 J122
J120
226 Preheating spark plug relay

J11
P11
1 33 J111 J124
227 Starting relay 286a

286b
J134
308 Standard PTO contactor 2 34 P73 J70 J133

185
J73 J119
J121
J141
309 Rear PTO clutch contactor 3 35 31

J142
J137
314 Mechanical reverser neutral contactor

J135
J138 J136
4 36 12
315 Preheating control unit

J140
314 J139
8 12 16 20 24 28 32 J132
J131 J130 J146 J129 J128
JX1 Ending 606vfm00 606vfm05
2 Engine rpm input P59 C5

J21
315 J99 P99
4 J63 P63
5 JX2
J20
3 9 J59 JX1
6 13 P59
1 5 9 13 17 2 10 17
21
1 7 14 M0
11 18 25
5 1
2 9
8 15 22 29 110
6 13
19 26 33
12
10 17
3
16 23 30
7 14
20 27 34
11 18
4
15 24 31
8
12 19 28 35 J111
4 8 12 16 20 16
20
32
36
315
604vfm0r
604vfm0q
J115 185
226
J21 J114
34
32
M1
606vfm01 606vfm06
M0
J63 P63 J99

JX2 110
J59 P59 JX1
J96 J86
110
J111
606vfm04
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.13

Dipped headlights – Headlights – Horn Ref Item
2 RH dipped light
3 LH dipped light
19 RH headlight
23 LH headlight
173 3 2 23 19 65 Lighting switch
110 Fuse box
173 Horn
185 Instrument panel
J59
J89 Ending J40
M2 P40
4 Headlights E5 85
5 +APC J70
19 J75
12 7 3 10 4 11 6 8 5 9 7 Dipped headlights E4 85
P40 8 Horn P59 A8
9 +APC Fa 9 23
J40 2
173
M2
A8 B8 C8 C1 B1 3
J59 3 6 9
P59
1 4 7
604vfm28
606vfm07
17
JX1
185 M0
JX1 110
J59 P59
J89
110
E4 E5 4 7 8 9 5
J89 J111
P89
M0
Fa 9/7,5 A
Fa 1/10 A
Fa 2/10 A
606vfm08
110 65
+ APC
+ AVC
F1.10, 12
605vfm02
F1.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

front and rear working lights Ref Item
6 Front right working light
7 front left working light
8 Rear right working light
M3
9 Rear left working light
45 Front work light switch
7 6 9 8 J46
46 Rear work light switch
111 Fuse box J47
112a Main fuse (cab roof)
111
6 M3
J46 Ending
J11
2 +APC Fb 1
7
3 Front right working light 6
5 +APC Fb 1
8
6 front left working light 7
7 Earth M3
8 + APC lighting switch Fb 11
J46 J47
9
2 2
3 3
5 5 7 4 5 6 9 112a
6 6
P10 J10
P11 J11
45 8 46 8
8 1 2 3 10
7 7
604vfm40
606vfm09
J47 Ending
M3
2 +APC Fb 2
3 Rear right working light 8
5 +APC Fb 2
6 Rear left working light 9
7 Earth M3
R1
7 4 5 6 9
Fb 11/5 A
Fb 2/10 A
Fb 1/10 A
111 8 1 2 3 10
1 1 604vfm40
J11 J10
P11 P10
1 1
60 A
112a
+ APC + AVC
605vfm06
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.15

Stop lights – Front axle engaged – Theoretical speed Ref Item
10 RH rear light
11 LH rear light
37 Speed sensor
81 Trailer power socket
+ APC 101 4-wheel drive solenoid valve
M0 F1.26 110 Fuse box (instrument panel)
185 Instrument panel JX2 110
203a RH brake pedal switch JX1
110 185 203a
203b LH brake pedal switch
203b
31 110
Fa 16/10 A
Fa 15/10 A
Fa 10/5 A
2
JX2 M0 J126
18
JX1 Ending
J122
1 Forward speed J133 1
J121
1
E2
JX1
1 5 9 13 17
1
1 2 5 606vfm10
2 9
6 13
J128 3
7
10
14
17
11 18
4
8 15
12 19
4 8 12 16 20 16
20
604vfm0q
203b 203a JX2

JX1
101 JX2 Ending

110
2 Forward speed earth J133 2
M0 J126
18 Stop switch E2 86
J122 J133
31 4-wheel drive solenoid valve J128 1
5 9 13 17 21 25 29 J121
1 33
2 34
3 35
3 1 2 J128
4 36 606vfm11
J133 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
M1
37 4
5
3 9
6 13
10 17
2
14 21
7
11 18 25
1
15 22 29
8
19 26 33
12
23 30
2 1 1 2 16
34
20 27
31
J121 J126 J122 24
28 35
6 3
32
36
81 604vfm0r
11 10
605vfm07
F1.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Side light indicator – Rear work lights (roll bar) Ref Item
4 RH flashing and side lights
5 LH flashing and side lights
10 RH rear light
11 LH rear light
5 4 12 Number plate light
65 Lighting switch
81 Trailer power socket JX2 110
P59
P61 P60 157 Rear work lights (roll bar) JX1
J59
J61 J60 185 Instrument panel
J89
2 1 2 1 110
M0 J126
M2 J89 Ending
J122
1 Sidelight Fa 6 J124
Fa 7 J121
5 +APC J86 1
12
12
A6 J59
606vfm12
81 7 5 3 6 9
3
A5
P59 J126
4
M1 1 4 7
P59 J59
3 2 3 2 M2
J121 J122 604vfm28

J60 P60
5
11 10 J61
P61
4
24
JX2
1
J124
185 2
P124 157
606vfm13
+ APC
E3
Fa 3/10 A
Fa 6/5 A
Fa 7/5 A
1 5
J89
P89
110
65
M0
+ AVC
605vfm04
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.17

Flashing lights and warning lights Ref Item
1a Rotating beacon (roll bar)
4a RH front flashing light
5a LH front flashing light
10a RH rear flashing light M0
+ APC + AVC 11a LH rear flashing light
49 Hazard warning lights switch
52a Rotating beacon switch (roll bar) J93
110
65 65 Lighting switch J59 J95 JX1
110 P59
81 Trailer power socket J98
110 Fuse box (instrument panel) 110
Fa 15/10 A
Fa 4/15 A

221 Flashing unit J126 J120
J93 Ending J119
P89 1 Earth M0
2 Trailer 1 turn-signal indicator JX1 9
J89
6 2 3
4 BLINKING J89 6 606vfm14
5 Tractor direction indicator JX1 13
M0 6 Power supply to indicator unit J98 2
J95 2
10 8 9 1 3 52a 4a
J98 M0 3 6
7 P59 J59
M2
2
3 185 J60 P60
3
R2 T R1 5a
49 1 4
J62
7 6 5 2 J61
604vfm0a
P61
JX1
5 13 9 4a
J98 Ending
J126 C7 C6 A3
P59 1 + APC hazard warning lights controls Fa 15
1
2 Power supply to indicator unit J93 6
3 J59 3 + AVC hazard warning lights controls Fa 4
4 5 Signalling control J89 6
M1
81 6 RH flashing ligth J89 3
606vfm15
6 RH flashing ligth J126 4
7 Control lighting J98 10
3 1 1 3 8 Earth M0
J61 J60 9 LH flashing light J89 2 1a
9 LH flashing light J126 1
P61 P60 4 3 5 2 10 Control lighting J98 7
221 J93
M2
5a 4a
1 2 7 4 5 6 9
J62
P62
6 1
8 1 2 3 10
1 2 2 1 M2
M0
J120 J119
604vfm40
J62
1a P62
11a 10a 31
605vfm05 606vfm16
F1.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Rotating beacon – Cigarette lighter – Radio – Cab light and spot Ref Item
1 Rotating beacon
13 Roof lamp 83 84
52 Rotating beacon switch JA M3
83 84 79 Car-radio 79 JB
13 83 LH loudspeaker
79 13 J46
84 RH loudspeaker
86 Cigarette lighter J48
JA JB
8 7 4 6 5 4 3 111 Fuse box (cab roof)
111
YL Ending
M3
J11
4 + AVC car radio memory Fb 6 JA

7 +APC Fb 2 JB
8 Earth M3
J17
1 3 5 7
1
86
2 4 6 8
604vfm0k P10 J10 86

P17
P11 J11
J17
1 2
606vfm17
M3
J48 7
8
52 2
Fb 12/10 A
Fb 6/7,5 A
Fb 5/7,5 A
Fb 2/10 A
Fb 11/5 A
111
+ AVC + APC
605vfm00
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.19

Front and rear windscreen wiper / washer Ref Item
21 Rear screen wiper
66 Windscreen wiper/washer switch
92 Front screen wiper
M3
96 96a 96 Front windscreen washer pump 79
92
+ – 96a Rear windscreen washer pump J44
M M M 13
111 Fuse box (cab roof) J45
163 Rear windscreen wiper/washer switch
J16
111
J12 J13 J44 Ending
M3
2 1 2 1 J16 J11
1 – Front windscreen wiper, self-parking J16 1
2 Earth J16 4
3 Earth J12 1
4 + Front windscreen wiper, self-parking J16 3
5 +AVC (constant source) Fb 3
6 + Front windscreen wash/wipe J16 2
J16 6 + Front windscreen wash/wipe J12 2 J18
7 Earth M3
2 1 3 4
P10 J10 86
J44 4 6 1 3 8 7 4 5 6 9 J11
P11
66 0 I II J13 J12
8 1 2 3 10
5 2 7
606vfm18
604vfm40
J45
M3 163
J16 Ending
0 I II
1 – Front windscreen wiper, self-parking J44 6

4

4 Earth J44 4
5
6
1
2
1 2
3
M3 4 3
7
604vfm51
2
Fb 3/7,5 A
Fb 4/7,5 A
Fb 11/5 A
J18
M
1
–
3
111
4
21
+ APC + AVC
605vfm01
F1.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Instrument panel ventilation and air conditioning Ref Item
51 Air conditioning selector
61 Ventilation switch
90 Fan
M3
95 Air conditioning compressor clutch 79
90 294a 294b 210 111 Fuse box (cab roof) P15 J15 13
M M M 119 Air conditioning electronic thermostat J19
210 Air conditioning system high and low pressure switch
294a Condenser fan
294b Condenser fan 111
P41 P42
J41 J42
A B A B
J15 Ending
J15 P14 J14 M3
1 Pressure switch/thermostat link J14 5 P15
2 Earth M3
3 Fan control Fb 7 J42 J41
61 51
210
P14
J14 1 2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
M3
2
119 3
P10 J10
604vfm0l J11
P11
J19
606vfm19
2 1 3
P15
J15
M3
J19
111 95
Fb 8/20 A
Fb 9/20 A
Fb 7/20 A
Fb 10/5 A
R2 R3 R4 95 111
J19
P19
606vfm20
+ APC + AVC
605vfm08
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.21

Engine oil pressure – Air filter blocked – Handbrake – Brake fluid level – Coolant Ref Item
temperature – Fuel gauge 185 Instrument panel M0
200 Engine oil pressure switch J99
201 Engine management thermistance JX2
202 Fuel gauge
JX1
J59 P59
204 Parking brake switch
206 Air filter clogging valve
214 201 214 Brake fluid level contactor
206 200 315 Preheating control unit
M2 JX1 Ending
J67 J70 6 Brake fluid warning light P59 B3

C A B 7 Hand brake warning light J110 2
1
202 8 Fuel level P59 B4 J110
15 Fuel low level warning P59 A4
16 Fuel level earth P59 C3 M1
M2
606vfm21
1 5 9 13 17
1
5
9
J75 2
6 13
10 17
3
2 1 3 7 14
18
4 11
P59 J59
8 15 M2
12 19
4 8 12 16 20 16
20
214
604vfm0q
J70
B6 B7 B4 A4 C3 A2 B3 B5
J59 JX2 Ending
J59
P59 15 Engine oil pressure P59 B7 206
28 Engine water temperature P59 A2
J99 315 36 Air filter blockage warning P59 B6
202
J75
5 9 13 17 21 25 29
204 1 33
J67
2 34 606vfm22
3 35
4 36
8 12 16 20 24 28 32
2 1
P110
J110
4
5
M1 3 9
13
6
36 15 28 6 7 8 15 16 10 17
2
21
JX2 JX1 7 14
18 25
1 11
15 22 29
8
19 26 33
12
16 23 30
20 27 34
24 31
28 35
32
185 36
604vfm0r
605vfm16
F1.22 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

4-wheel drive control – Differential – Rear/proportional PTO Ref Item
185 JX2 J90 J91
41 Rear proportional PTO switch M0
54 PTO540 eco rpm or 1000 rpm selector switch
55 540 rpm PTO selection switch
101 4-wheel drive solenoid valve
+ APC 102 Differential solenoid valve
110 Fuse box (instrument panel)
185 110
110 185 Instrument panel
232 Rear differential solenoid valve switch
234 Front axle solenoid valve switch
Fa 16/10 A
308 Standard PTO contactor
111
309 Rear PTO clutch contactor
JX2
19 17 27 31 22 21 5 6 20 J115 185 J116
JX2 Ending
J114
309 5 540 eco rpm or 1000 rpm PTO J116 1 J117
1 6 540 rpm PTO J117 1 M1
P111 17 4-wheel drive control J91 3
2
J111 19 Differential lock J90 3
20 PTO engaged J111 2 606vfm24
22 Proportional PTO J114 1
27 Differential solenoid valve J132 1 185
31 4-wheel drive solenoid valve J128 1
55 JX2 J90 J91
232
1
J117 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
2
P117 1 33
2
3 2 34
54
M1 3 35
1 110
J116 4 36
7 J90 P116 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 M0
2
111
308
M0 1
J115
2
P115
4
7 J91 5
41 3 9
6 13 J133
1 10 17 J128
J114 2
7 14 21 606vfm23
11 18 25
3 P114 1
22 29
2 2 8 15
19 26 33
12
16 23 30
20 27 34
24 31
234 28 35
32
J132 36
604vfm0r
1
102
2
M1 J128
1
101
2
605vfm17
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.23

25A power socket – Pneumatic seat Ref Item
82 25A power socket
110 Fuse box (instrument panel) M0
123 Pneumatic seat compressor motor
J123 Ending
+ AVC + APC
1 Compressor motor supply Fa 15
2 Earth M1
110 110
J123 82
Fa 13/20 A
Fa 15/10 A
Fa 5/10 A
1
604vfm0i
606vfm25
1 2
J123
P123
123
+
+ –
M1
82
605vfm18
F1.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Hydraulic oil temperature and pressure Ref Item
185 JX1
114a Transmission oil temperature sensor M0
115 Transmission oil pressure sensor
185
JX1 Ending
3 Transmission oil temperature warning light J112 1

18 Transmission oil pressure warning light J139 1
JX1 1 5 9 13 17 185
1
18 3 5
2 9
6 13
3 10 17 M1
7 14 J112
11 18
4
8 15
12 19
4 8 12 16 20 16
20
606vfm26
604vfm0q
185
JX1
M0
J139
606vfm27
J139 J112
P ˚C
115 114a
605vfm19
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.25

Revershift/doubler clutch and drive controls
M1
M0 114
67
188
68
193 192a 192b
˚C
J131 J129 J130
184
2 1 P97 J146
J97
P118 J96
S01 S02 2 1 2 1
1 2 2
J118 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 A2 A4 B1 B2 B4 B5
2 1 1
2 1
M0
261
3
J100 4
1
189
M0
1
J105 2
F1.28
J108 2 2 1 298 3
238 4
1
M0
J138
+
2 187
F1.16 1
–
M1 M0 2
J106
3 4 1 2 5 3
P134
E8 E6 E7
Fa 12/15 A
Fa 16/10 A
J134
Fa14/10 A
2 1
P104
J104 M1 1 30 26 34 12
1
JX1 JX2
Fa 8/7,5 A
F1.28
110 185
+ APC
605vfm20
F1.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Ref Item
S02 S01 184 P104 JX2 JX1
67 Calibration switch SO1 Ending
68 High-speed range contactor
1 Earth M0
2 Computer fail indicator J104 1
114 Transmission oil temperature sensor M0
2 Computer fail indicator J107 A1
184 EHM24 electronics unit
3 Reverse J96 A2 J104
5 Forward speed JX1 1
187 Clutch pedal potentiometer
188 Clutchless reverser control J96
6 High-speed range contactor J118 110 J97
189 Clutch pedal switch J133
7 Clutch pedal switch J105 1 J106 M0
192a Forward drive solenoid valve (slow)
8 Neutral J96 B2 J105
192b Forward drive solenoid valve (fast) J131
134
9 Reverse J96 A4
193 Reverse drive solenoid
10 Clutch pedal position J106 3 185
238 +/– selector and declutch function
12 +APC Fa 12
261 Programming socket
67
298 Lubrication solenoid valve 314
J100
J138
110
J96 Ending 1 2 1 J108 J107 J131 J130 J146 J129
2
A2 Forward SO1 3 J108a
606vfm28 606vfm30
A4 Reverse SO1 9
B1 +APC Fa 14 3
B2 Neutral SO1 8 S01 184 185 JX2
B2 Neutral J134 2 604vfm0m JX1
S02
B2 Neutral E8 85
M0
B4 Start-up safety information JX2 26
B4 Clutch pedal contact J105 3
B5 Earth M0
SO2 Ending J104 P104
J96
1 "Hare/Tortoise" function E7 87 110 J97
2 Reverse drive solenoid J131 1
1 2 3 4 5 3 Slow forward drive solenoid J136 1
J131
A 4 Win Métadiag© socket J100 3
B 5 Win Métadiag© socket J100 4
6 Reverse drive solenoid J131 2
7 Fast forward drive solenoid J137 1
8 Slow forward drive solenoid J136 2 185
9 Audio warning: JX2 12
J118
10 Fast forward drive solenoid J137 2
1
A
2
11 Solenoid valve supply J108 2

M1
12 Oil temperature J97 1
4
B
5
606vfm29
604vfm0b
1 2 1
2
604vfm0m
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.27

Management of "clutchless" reverser transmission
306 299
185
1
J140
JX2
J107 2
34
A1 A2 A4 A6 A7 A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B6 B7 B8 B9
M0
1
P104
F1.26
J104 2
11
SO2
184
12
SO1
175
85
86
118c 30 87
2
87a
120
P J137
1
5A
118b
2
1 2
P J136
1 P88
J88
1 2 1 2
118a
J108 J108a B+ D+
2
P108 P108a A
P J135 M
1 W
31
307
605vfm21
F1.28 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Ref Item
31 Alternator
118a Transmission oil pressure sensor (reverse)
118b Transmission oil pressure sensor, forward gear (slow)
118c Transmission oil pressure sensor, forward gear (fast)
120 Fuse
175 "safety patch" Relay
184 EHM 24 unit
299 "safety patch" solenoid valve
306 "safety patch" electronics unit
307 Electronics unit timer
J107 Ending
A1 Computer fail indicator SO1 2

A1 J104 1
A2 Lubrication solenoid valve J140 2
S01
A6 Shunt J107 B1
A7 Shunt J107 B2-B7
S02
A8 Electronics unit timer J108a 1
A9 Earth M0
A9 Earth J107 B3 J63 P63 184
B1 Shunt J107 A6-B6
J59 P59 JX2
B2 Shunt J107 A7 P104
B3 Earth J107 A9 J104 JX1
J86
B4 Shunt J107 B9 J88 J95
P88
B6 Shunt J107 B8-B1
M0
B7 Electronics unit timer J108a 1 J98
B7 Shunt J107 A7 286a 286b
B8 Shunt J107 B6 J96
B9 safety patch unit supply 175 87 J143
110 J144
B9 Shunt J107 B4 J97
P144
J141
J142
J126 J120
J123 82 J122
1
A J131
2
3
B
4
J11
P11
6
J111
7
J124
8
9
286a J134
286b
J105
J133
J121 185
J106
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J100 J101 J141
J119 314
A 307
J107 110 J142
B
604vfm18 J137
J135
J136
J138
12 J140
J108 J108a 175 120 J139
J132
J131 J130 J146 J129 J128
606vfm31
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.29

Injection pump – Fuel filter Ref Item
25 Injection stop solenoid valve
60 Key ingition switch
110 Fuse box
185 Instrument panel P59 J59
M2
302 312 302 Coolant temperature sensor
312 Fuel filter water sensor
313 Solenoid valve for cold start advance mechanism 214
˚C
J70
J69 Ending
1 Water detection warning light J59 A7 J59

J78
2 Earth M2
206
1 2 3 Water detector sensor supply J59 C2 312 J78
J69
J69 25
3 1 2 202
J75 313
25 313 M2
3 2 1 J68 P68
606vfm32
1
3
604vfm52
P68 JX2 JX1 M0
J68 A1 C2 A7
J59 110
J93
J59 J95 J86
P59 P59
J98
110 J86
14
J126 J120
60
JX1
185 J119
110
Fa 11/10 A
Fa 16/10 A
606vfm33
+ AVC
6 3
J86
I 0 I II
60
605vfm22
F1.30 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Dashboard display selector – Diagnostic plug Ref Item
M0
176 Dashboard display selector
JX2 P99
262 Diagnostic plug 110 J93
262 176 J90

J91
203a
J101 J101 Ending J92
203b
J89
J86
7 15 16 5 5 Earth M0
7 Line K JX2 3 J105
15 Line L JX2 7 J106
J100
J101
16 +APC Fa 16
J107
110
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J108 J108a
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 606vfm34
M0
110 176
1
Fa 16/10 A
P92
604vfm0e
2
J92
+ APC
3 7 13
JX2
185
605vfm23
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.31

TCE 6 linkage
310
31
237 236 B+
D+
+ AVC
A
M
W
311
117
10 A
J65 191
A
B 262a
C
P65 J72
P66 73
A J9
M2
B
C
J66
J1
G F C K D M H N L I J E
M4
J3
1
100
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
2
J8 J7 J6 J5 J2
J4
1
99
57b 56b 57a 56a 283 2
605vfm24
F1.32 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Ref Item 73
31 Alternator J65 Ending
J59
56a Lift RH external switch P73
A Sensor supply 191
56b Lift lower LH external switch 112
B Force signal 191 J73 J9 117
57a Lift RH external switch
C Earth 191 227
57b Lift lower LH external switch
73 TCE 6 Relay 31
99 "Up" selector TCE 6 32
A C 30
100 "Down" selector TCE 6
117 Fuse J71
191 Calculator TCE
236 Force sensor TCE 6 B
237 Position sensor TCE 6 604vfm33
262a Diagnostic plug
283 End of travel contactor TCE 6 P59
310 Powered soil engagement contactor J59
J66 Ending P63 J63
311 linkage up/down selector
M2
A Earth 191
B Force signal 191
J1 Ending C Sensor supply 191
P73 J70
C External linkage control J5 2 J73
C External linkage control J8 2 C A 31
RH End of travel contactor J2 1
E TCE 6 Electronics unit supply 73
F External linkage control J5 1
B
F External linkage control J7 1 604vfm32
LH External linkage control J6 1
LH External linkage control J8 1
H – DOWN solenoid valve J3 1
I – UP solenoid valve J4 2
J Earth M4 606vfm35
K External linkage control J6 2
K External linkage control J7 2
L + UP solenoid valve J4 1
M + End of travel contactor J2 2 311
N + DOWN solenoid valve J3 2
310
191
J72
J65 J1
J66
J A
J A
K B J5
I
236 237 J9
H C H N L C
J6
E G M D
F J2
F E J7
J3
604vfm25 J4 J8
J65 J66 J1
M4 J4
J3
237 100
236
99
606vfm36
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F1.33

Linkage arms stabiliser Ref Item
S02 S01 184 JX2 JX1
249 Relay
254 Fuse
284 Linkage arms stabiliser switch
M0
286a Stabiliser solenoid valve control switch
286b Stabiliser solenoid valve control switch J104 J144 286a 286b J143
+ AVC
287a Linkage arms stabiliser solenoid valve
287b Linkage arms stabiliser solenoid valve J96
254 110 J97 P144
J141
J105 J142
J144 Ending J131
10 A
1 Solenoid valve control J143 4

2 Solenoid valve control J143 1
67
3 Contactor supply J143 6
249 4 Contactor supply J143 3
110
249 254
J108
J108a 606vfm37
M0 3 1
4 2
110 286a 604vfm48

2 5 M0
Fa 12/7,5 A
284
J63 P63 JX2 J144 286a 286b J143

J143 J59 JX1
P59
286b 4 3 1 6
110
+ APC P144 J141
J142 286a
J111 286b
3 2 4 1 185
P144
J144
314
J141 J142
606vfm38
M1
J142
1
287a
2
J141
1
287b
2
605vfm25
F1.34 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

F2
HARNESS AND CONNECTOR PATHS
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F2.1

Harness and connector paths
Connectors .................................. Pages J16.................................................F2.21 J66 ................................................ F2.25 J98 .................................................. F2.7 J121.................................................F2.9 J143 .............................................. F2.10
JA.................................................. F2.20 J17.................................................F2.21 J67 ................................................ F2.15 J99 .................................................. F2.7 J122.................................................F2.9 J144 .............................................. F2.10
JB.................................................. F2.20 J18.................................................F2.21 J68 ................................................ F2.15 J100 ................................................ F2.7 J123.................................................F2.9 J146 .............................................. F2.10
JX1.................................................. F2.5 J19.................................................F2.21 J69 ................................................ F2.15 J101 ................................................ F2.7 J124.................................................F2.9 P11................................................ F2.10
JX2.................................................. F2.6 J20.................................................F2.12 J70 ................................................ F2.15 J104 ................................................ F2.7 J126.................................................F2.9 P14................................................ F2.23
J1 .................................................. F2.24 J21.................................................F2.12 J71 ................................................ F2.15 J105 ................................................ F2.7 J128.................................................F2.9 P15................................................ F2.22
J2 .................................................. F2.24 J40.................................................F2.14 J72 ................................................ F2.25 J106 ................................................ F2.7 J129.................................................F2.9 P40................................................ F2.13
J3 .................................................. F2.24 J41.................................................F2.23 J73 ................................................ F2.15 J107 ................................................ F2.8 J130.................................................F2.9 P59................................................ F2.11
J4 .................................................. F2.25 J42.................................................F2.23 J75 ................................................ F2.16 J108 ................................................ F2.8 J131.................................................F2.9 P60................................................ F2.16
J5 .................................................. F2.25 J44.................................................F2.21 J78 ................................................ F2.18 J108a .............................................. F2.8 J132.................................................F2.9 P61................................................ F2.16
J6 .................................................. F2.25 J45.................................................F2.21 J86 .................................................. F2.6 J110 ................................................ F2.8 J133.................................................F2.9 P62................................................ F2.17
J7 .................................................. F2.25 J46.................................................F2.21 J88 ................................................ F2.16 J111 ................................................ F2.8 J134.................................................F2.9 P63................................................ F2.11
J8 .................................................. F2.25 J47.................................................F2.22 J89 .................................................. F2.6 J112 ................................................ F2.8 J135...............................................F2.10 P68................................................ F2.18
J9 .................................................. F2.14 J48.................................................F2.22 J90 .................................................. F2.6 J114 ................................................ F2.8 J136...............................................F2.10 P73................................................ F2.16
J10 ................................................ F2.20 J59.................................................F2.15 J91 .................................................. F2.6 J115 ................................................ F2.8 J137...............................................F2.10 P99................................................ F2.12
J11 ................................................ F2.21 J60.................................................F2.15 J92 .................................................. F2.6 J116 ................................................ F2.8 J138...............................................F2.10 P104.............................................. F2.11
J12 ................................................ F2.21 J61.................................................F2.15 J93 .................................................. F2.6 J117 ................................................ F2.8 J139...............................................F2.10 P108.............................................. F2.11
J13 ................................................ F2.21 J62.................................................F2.15 J95 .................................................. F2.6 J118 ................................................ F2.8 J140...............................................F2.10 P108a............................................ F2.11
J14 ................................................ F2.21 J63.................................................F2.15 J96 .................................................. F2.7 J119 ................................................ F2.8 J141...............................................F2.10 S01................................................ F2.11
J15 ................................................ F2.21 J65.................................................F2.25 J97 .................................................. F2.7 J120 ................................................ F2.9 J142...............................................F2.10 S02................................................ F2.11
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F2.3

1. Instrument panel and transmission harness
S01
S02
184 P99
J63
P63
110 J93
J59 P59 P104 JX2
J104
JX1 J90
J86
M0
J88 P88 J95 J91
J92 203a
J98 203b
286a 286b J89
J86
J96
J143
110 J97 J144
P144
J141
J142
J120
J123 J126
82 J122
J131
J11
P11
J111
J124
286a J134
286b
J105
J133
185
J106 J121
J100 J101 J141 314
J119
J107
110 J142
185
J137
J116 J117 J135
J115
J138 J136
J108a J114
J108 12
J118
J140
J110
M1 J139
J132
J112
J131 J130 J146 J129 J128
606vfm39
Refer to component list F1-2 for designation of component numbers
F2.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Connector Designation Connector Designation
JX1 Instrument panel connector (20 pins) J140 safety patch solenoid valve (hydraulic unit control)
JX2 Instrument panel connector (36 pins) J141 Stabiliser arm solenoid valve
J86 Key operated ignition J142 Stabiliser arm solenoid valve
J89 Signalling control J143 Arm lock/swivel control
J90 Differential control J144 Stabiliser arm lock connector
J91 4-wheel drive control J146 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor (electronics unit EHM24)
J92 Dashboard display selector P11 +APC
J93 Flashing unit P59 Engine harness connection (24 pins)
J95 Rotating beacon switch P63 Engine harness connection (relay supply)
J96 ISC connector P88 Engine harness connector
J97 ISC calibration P104 2-pin connector (safety patch, electronics unit EHM24)
J98 Hazard light switch S01 Electronics unit connector EHM24 (grey)
J99 Pre-heater harness connector S02 Electronics unit connector EHM24 (black)
©
J100 Win Métadiag socket
J101 Win Métadiag© socket (instrument panel)
JX1 Ending
J104 2-pin connector (safety patch, electronics unit EHM24) 1 5 9 13 17
J105 Clutch pedal contact
S01 5
J106 Clutch pedal potentiometer 2 Engine rpm input P59 C5
J107 "safety patch" Connector 3 Transmission oil temperature J112 1
t
J108 Timer unit connector 5 Trailer 2 turn-signal indicator J93 3
J108a Timer unit connector 6 Brake fluid warning light P59 B3 4 8 12 16 20
7 Hand brake warning light J110 2
J110 Handbrake connector
8 Fuel level P59 B4
J111 PTO clutch connector 9 Trailer 1 turn-signal indicator J93 2
J112 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor t
11 +AVC (constant source) 1
J114 Proportional PTO 12 +APC 5
2 9
J115 Standard power take-off 13 Tractor direction indicator J93 5 6 13

10 17
14 Level in the fuel collector tank P59 A7 3
14
540 eco or 1000 rpm PTO setting
7
J116
15 Fuel low level warning P59 A4 4 11
15
18
8
J117 540 rpm PTO setting 16 Fuel level earth P59 C3 12 19
16
17 Headlights E5 87
J118 High-speed range contactor 20
18 Hydraulic oil pressure J139 1

J119 LH rear flashing light t 604msm0v
J120 RH rear flashing light 20 Earth M0
J121 Sidelight - LH stop light

J122 Sidelight - RH stop light
J123 Pneumatic seat
J124 Rear working light (roll bar)
J126 Trailer signalling socket
J128 4-wheel drive solenoid valve
J129 Front solenoid valve (low)
J130 Front solenoid valve (high)
J131 Reverse solenoid valve
J132 Differential solenoid valve
J133 Displacement speed sensor
J134 Doubler and neutral selector
J135 Reverse gear pressure sensor
J136 Forward low range pressure sensor
J137 Forward high range pressure sensor
J138 Lubrication solenoid valve
J139 Hydraulic oil pressure sensor
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F2.5

JX2 Ending J90 Ending
t t
2 Forward speed earth J133 2 2 +APC Fa16 7 4 5 6 9
3 Line K J101 7 3 Differential control JX2 19
t t
5 540 eco or 1000 rpm PTO J116 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
7 Earth M0
6 540 rpm PTO J117 1 1 33 8 1 2 3 10
7 Line L J101 15 2 34
t
10 Starting relay E1 86 3 35 604vfm40
11 Battery charge E9 30 4 36
12 Audio warning: S02 9
8 12 16 20 24 28 32
13 Instrument panel display J92 2
t
J91 Ending
15 Engine oil pressure P59 B7
t
t 7 4 5 6 9
2 +APC Fa16
17 4-wheel drive control J91 3
3 Differential control JX2 17
18 Stop switch E2 86
t
19 Differential lock J90 3 4
5 7 Earth M0
8 1 2 3 10
3
21 Standard power take-off J115 1 6 13
22 Proportional PTO J114 1 2 10 17

14 21
t 7
18 25 604vfm40
1 11
24 Sidelight Fa 7 8 15 22 29
33
t 12 19 26
23 30
26 Reverser not in neutral J96 B4 16
27 34
J105 3
20
24 31 J92 Ending
27 Differential solenoid valve J132 1 28 35
28 Engine water temperature P59 A2 32

1 Earth M0 1
36
2 Instrument panel JX2 13
2
t
30 Low range doubler warning light E7 87a
31 4-wheel drive solenoid valve J128 1 604vfm0w
604vfm0u
t
33 Preheat warning light (option) J99 2
34 UCE computer defect P104 1
t J93 Ending
36 Air filter blockage warning P59 B6 3 6
1 Earth M0
1
2
J86 Ending 3 Trailer 2 turn-signal indicator JX1 5
3
7 6 4 BLINKING J89 6
7
1 +APC J89 5 5 6 5 Tractor direction indicator JX1 13
1 4
t 6 Power supply to indicator unit J98 2
5
3 +AVC (constant source) Fuse mount a 604vfm0a
4 Starting relay E1 30 1
4
t 4
6 +APC Fuse mount a 1 3 3
2 2
7 +AVC (constant source) Fuse mount a 604vfm46 J95 Ending
t
2 AVC Fa4 7 4 5 6 9
J89 Ending 3 Rotating beacon control (roll bar) P59 A3
t
1 Sidelight Fa 6-7 7 Earth M0
8 1 2 3 10
2 LH flashing light P59 C7
2 LH flashing light J98 9 3 6 9
3 RH flashing ligth P59 C6
604vfm40
3 RH flashing ligth J98 6
4 Headlights E5 85
5 +APC J86 1
6 Hazard warning lights switch J98 5
1 4 7
6 Flashing unit J93 4
7 Dipped headlights E4 85
8 Horn P58 A8 604vfm28
9 +AVC (constant source) Fa 9
F2.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

J96 Ending 1 2 3 4 5 J101 Ending 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
t t
A2 Forward SO1 3 B 5 Earth M0
A4 Reverse SO1 9 t
t 7 Line K JX2 3
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B1 +APC Fa14 t
B2 Neutral SO1 8 15 Line L JX2 7
B2 Neutral J134 2 16 +APC Fa16
1
A
2
B2 Neutral E8 85
t
4
B
5
B4 Start-up safety information JX2 26
B4 Clutch pedal information J105 3
B5 Earth M0
604vfm0b
604vfm0e
J97 Ending
1 Hydraulic oil temperature SO2 12 1

1 Hydraulic oil temperature J146 1 J104 Ending
2
2 Earth M0
1 Computer fault SO1 2 1
604vfm0u
2 Electronics unit timer J108 2
2
604vfm0g
J98 Ending
1 + APC hazard warning lights controls Fa15

2 Power supply to indicator unit J93 6 J105 Ending
3 + APC hazard warning lights controls Fa4
t 7 4 5 6 9 1 Lubrication solenoid valve relay E8 85
5 Signalling control J89 6 1 SO1 7
6 RH flashing ligth J89 3 2 Electronics unit timer P104 2
6 RH flashing ligth J126 4 3 Reverser J96 B4 1 2 3 4
7 Control lighting J98 10 8 1 2 3 10 4 +APC J106 2
8 Earth M0 4 +APC Fa14
9 LH flashing light J89 2 604vfm45
9 LH flashing light J126 1 604vfm40
10 Control lighting M0 7
J106 Ending
1 Earth M0
J99 Ending 2 +APC J105 4 3 2 1
3 6 3 Clutch pedal position SO1 10
1 Engine coolant temperature signal P59 B5
1
2 Preheating indicator JX2 33

2
3 +APC Fa11 604vfm21

3
4 Earth M0
5 Engine post-start information E9 87
1 4
6 Engine start-up information E1 87a
604vfm0a
J100 Ending
1 Earth M0 6 7 8 9
t
3 EHM 24 unit information SO2 4
4 EHM 24 unit information SO2 5
t 1 2 3 4 5
604vfm39
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F2.7

J107 Ending J112 Ending
A1 Computer fault SO1 2 1 Instrument panel warning light JX1 3 1

A1 J104 1
t 604vfm12
1
t A
2
A6 Shunt J107 B1
3
B J114
4
A7 Shunt J107 B2-B7 Ending
A8 Electronics unit timer J108a 2
6
A9 Earth M0 1 Instrument panel information JX2 22
7
8
A9 Earth J107 B3 2 +APC Fa16 2 1
9
B1 Shunt J107 A6-B6
B2 Shunt J107 A7
B3 Earth J107 A9
B4 Shunt J107 B9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
604vfm36
t
A
B6 Shunt J107 B8-B1
B7 Electronics unit timer J108a 1 B
604vfm18
J115 Ending
B8 Shunt J107 A7
B8 Shunt J107 B6 1 Instrument panel information JX2 21
B9 "safety patch" Electronics unit supply 175 87 2 +APC Fa16 2 1
B9 Shunt J107 B4
604vfm36
J108 Ending
1 Return line + pressure sensor J135 1 1

J116 Ending
2 Clutch pedal contact J104 2
2
2 Electronics unit timer SO2 11 1 Instrument panel information JX2 7
2 Earth M1 2 1
604vfm0u
J108a Ending 604vfm36
1 "safety patch" electronics unit J107 B7 1

2 "safety patch" electronics unit J107 A8
2
J117 Ending
604vfm0u 1 Instrument panel information JX2 6

2 Earth M1 2 1
J110 Ending
604vfm36
1 Earth M1
2 Instrument panel warning light JX1 7 2 1
J118 Ending
604vfm36 1 Instrument panel information JX2 6 1 2

2 +APC Fa16
J111 Ending 604vfm23
1 +APC Fa16
2 Instrument panel warning light JX2 20 2 1
J119 Ending
1 RH rear flasher supply J125 4

2 Earth M1 2 1
604vfm36
604vfm36
F2.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

1 LH rear flasher supply J125 1 1 4-wheel drive solenoid valve JX2 31 1 2

2 Earth M1 2 1 2 Earth M1
604vfm23
604vfm36
J129 Ending
J121 Ending
1 Front solenoid valve (low) SO2 3 1 2
2 Front solenoid valve return (low) SO2 8
1 Stop lights J126 6
2 Earth M1 3 2 1
3 Sidelight J126 7 604vfm23
604vfm21
J130 Ending
1 Front solenoid valve (high) SO2 7 1 2

J122 Ending 2 Front solenoid valve return (high) SO2 10
1 Stop lights J126 6

604vfm23
2 Earth M1 3 2 1
3 Sidelight J126 5
J131 Ending
604vfm21
1 Reverse solenoid valve SO2 2 1 2
2 Reverse drive solenoid valve return SO2 6
J123 Ending
604vfm23
1
1 Compressor motor supply Fa15
2 Earth M1
2
J132 Ending
604vfm0i
1 Differential solenoid valve JX2 27 1 2
2 Earth M1
604vfm23
J124 Ending
1 Flood light supply E3 87

2 Earth M1 1 2 J133 Ending
1
1 Forward speed information JX1 1
2
1 Forward speed information SO1 5 3 2 1
604vfm10 2 Earth JX2 2
3 Sensor supply Fa16
604vfm21
J126 Ending
1 LH flashing light J120 1

1 LH flashing light J98 9 J134 Ending
t 4 4
3 Earth M1 1 +APC Fa16 4 1
4 RH flashing ligth J119 1 3 5 3 5 2 Neutral, clutchless reverser J96 B2 5 2
4 RH flashing ligth J98 6 3 (+) relay control E7 85
5 Sidelight J122 3 4 (–) relay control E6 85 6 3
5 Sidelight Fa7 5 Earth M1
2 6 2 6
5 Sidelight 12 604vfm24
6 Brake lights E2 87 1 1
6 Brake lights J121 1 604vfm30
6 Brake lights J122 1
7 Sidelight J121 3
7 Sidelight Fa6
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F2.9

1 "safety patch" unit information J108 1 1 Earth M1 1 2

2 Pressure sensor coupling J136 1 2 1 2 Solenoid valve supply J143 4
604vfm23
604vfm36
J143 Ending
J136 Ending
1 Solenoid valve and contactor supply J141 2
1 Solenoid valve and contactor supply J144 2 7 4 5 6 9
1 Pressure sensor coupling J135 2
2 1 2 Switch supply 249 87
2 Pressure sensor coupling J137 1
3 Switch J144 4
4 Solenoid valve and contactor supply J142 2
4 Solenoid valve and contactor supply J144 1 8 1 2 3 10
604vfm36
5 Switch supply 249 87
6 Switch J144 3
604vfm40
J137 Ending
1 Pressure sensor coupling J136 2 J144 Ending

2 Sensor supply 175 87 2 1
1 Solenoid valve control J143 4 3 1
2 Solenoid valve control J143 1 4 2
3 Contactor supply J143 6
604vfm36 4 Contactor supply J143 3
604vfm48
J138 Ending
1 J146 Ending
1 Solenoid valve supply E8 87
2 Earth M1 3 1 Hydraulic oil temperature information J97 1
1
2 Earth M1
1 2
3
2
2
604vfm29
604vfm0j
J139 Ending
P11 Ending
1 Hydraulic oil pressure E8 87 1
1 +APC Fa11/ 1
12*
* Mechanical transmission.
604vfm12
604vfm12
J140 Ending
1 Solenoid valve supply J107 A4 1 2

2 Solenoid valve feedback J107 A2
604vfm23
J141 Ending
1 Earth M1 1 2
2 Solenoid valve supply J143 1
604vfm23
F2.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

P59 Ending SO1 (grey) Ending
A1 Injection pump solenoid valve Fa11 1 Earth M0

A2 Engine coolant temperature warning light JX2 28 2 Computer fail indicator J104 1
A3 Rotating beacon control (roll bar) J95 3 2 Computer fail indicator J107 A1
A4 Fuel gauge warning light JX1 15 3 Forward J96 A2
A5 RH sidelight Fa7 t
A6 LH sidelight Fa6 9 5 Forward speed JX1 1
1
A7 Water detection warning light JX1 14 5 Forward speed J133 1 12 2
11 3
A8 Horn J89 8 6 High-speed range contactor J118 10 4
9 5
B1 LH headlight E5 87 7 Clutch pedal switch J105 1 8 6
7
B2 Starting relay E1 87a 8 Neutral J96 B2
B3 Brake fluid warning light JX1 6 9 Reverse J96 A4
B4 Fuel gauge supply JX1 8 10 Clutch pedal position J106 3 604vfm0f
B5 Engine water temperature (pre-heater unit) J99 1 t

B6 Air filter blocked JX2 36 12 +APC Fa12
B7 Oil pressure warning light JX2 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
B8 RH dipped light E4 87 A
C1 RH road lights E5 87
B
C2 Water detector sensor supply Fa16
C3 Fuel gauge JX1 16 C SO2 (black) Ending
C4 Alternator E9 30 604vfm19
1 "Hare/Tortoise" function E7 87
C5 Engine speed JX1 2
2 Reverse solenoid valve J131 1
C6 Front RH indicator J89 3
3 Slow forward drive solenoid J136 1
C7 Front LH indicator J89 2
4 Win Métadiag© socket J100 3
C8 LH dipped light E4 87
5 Win Métadiag© socket J100 4
1
6 Reverse solenoid valve J131 2 12 2
11 3
7 Fast forward drive solenoid J137 1 10 4
5
P63 Ending 8 Slow forward drive solenoid J136 2 9
8 6
7
9 Audio warning: JX2 12
1 +AVC (constant source) J86 7-3 1 10 Fast forward drive solenoid J137 2
2 Earth M0 11 Solenoid valve supply J108 2 604vfm0f
2
12 Oil temperature J97 1
604vfm0u
P104 Ending
1 Computer fail indicator JX2 34 1

2 Clutch pedal contact J105 2
2
604vfm0u
P108 Ending
1 Timer electronics unit information 307 1

2 Timer electronics unit information 307
2
604vfm0g
P108a Ending
1 Timer electronics unit information 307 1

2 Timer electronics unit information 307
2
604vfm0g
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F2.11

2. Preheating control harness (option)
Connector Designation
J20 Pre-heater unit line connector
J21 Pre-heater plug relay connector
J21 P99 Line connector for instrument panel and transmission

315 J99 P99
J20
J20 Ending
1 Preheating indicator P99 2

t
3 Pre-heater plug signal input 226 5 4 3 2 1
4 Engine after-start signal input P99 5
t
6 Pre-heater relay supply J21 1
7 +APC P99 3 10 9 8 7 6
8 Earth P99 4
t
10 Engine coolant temperature signal input P99 1 604vfm42
J21 Ending
1 Pre-heater relay supply J20 6

2 Earth P99 4 2 1
604vfm36
P99 Ending
1 Engine coolant temperature signal J20 10 3 2 1

315 2 Preheating indicator J20 1
3 +APC J20 7
4 Earth J20 8
5 "Engine started" signal J20 4 6 5 4
t
604vfm47
J21
32
606vfm40
F2.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

3. Radiator cowling harness
P40 Engine harness connectors
P40 Ending
t
3 RH dipped light 2 2 1
4 LH dipped light 3
5 LH headlight 23
6 RH headlight 19 7 3
7 Horn 173 12 8
8 RH headlight earth 19
9 LH headlight earth 23
10 RH dipped beam earth 2 14 13
11 LH dipped beam earth 3
J59 12 Horn earth 173 604vfm50
J40
P40
J70
J75
19
2
173 23
606vfm41
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F2.13

4. Engine harness
J9 TCE6 Electronics unit supply
J40 Radiator cowling harness connection

J88
J59
J59 Instrument panel harness connector
73
P73 J60 RH indicator and sidelight connector
J73 117 112
J9 J61 LH indicator and sidelight connector
227 J62 Rotating beacon connector (roll bar)
J63 Connector +AVC and earth
31 J67 Engine oil pressure
J68 Injector pump harness connector

32
J69 Fuel filter sensor
30 J71
J70 Coolant fluid temperature sensor
J71 D+
J73 Connector D+ (supply to relay TCE6 and safety patch relay)

J75
206 J75 Fuel gauge
J88 Connectors D+ and +AVC (safety patch relay supply)
P60 RH indicator and sidelight connector
P61 LH indicator and sidelight connector
P73 Connector D+
P59 J59 P63 J63
M2
J9 Ending
1 + Unit supply J1 E 1
J40
P40 J60
P60
214
P88
604vfm0o
J88 5
P73 J70 J62

J73 J61 J40 Ending
P61
31 t
3 RH dipped light J59 B8 4 9
4 LH dipped light J59 C8 14
J78
J59 5 LH headlight J59 B1 1
4 6 RH headlight J59 C1
2
25 7 Horn J59 A8 15
206 8 RH headlight earth M2 16
313 9 LH headlight earth M2
312 10 RH dipped beam earth M2 3
8 13
11 LH dipped beam earth M2
J69 12 Horn earth M2
J67 604vfm14
P68 t
202 J68
J75
606vfm42
F2.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

1
A1 Injection pump solenoid valve J68 1 1 +AVC (constant source) 227
A2 Engine coolant temperature warning light J70 A 2 Earth M2
A3 Rotating beacon control J62 2
A4 Fuel gauge warning light J75 1 2
A5 RH sidelight J60 2
A6 LH sidelight J61 2 604vfm15
A7 Water detection warning light J69 1
A8 Horn J40 7 A
B
B1 LH headlight J40 5 C
J67 Ending
B2 Starting relay 227 85 1
2
3
B3 Brake fluid warning light 214 4
5
1 Engine oil pressure J59 B7
6 1
B4 Fuel gauge supply J75 2
7
8
B5 Engine water temperature J70 B

B6 Air filter blocked 206
B7 Oil pressure warning light J67 1 604vfm12
B8 RH dipped light J40 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

C1 RH headlight J40 6 A
C2 Water detector sensor supply J69 3 B J68 Ending
C3 Fuel gauge J75 3
C4 Alternator J71 1 C
1 Injection pump solenoid valve J59 A1 1
J73 1 604vfm13
C5 Engine speed 31
C6 Front RH indicator J60 3
604vfm12
C7 Front LH indicator J61 3
C8 LH dipped light J40 4
J69 Ending
J60 Ending 1 Water detection warning light J59 A7

2 Earth M2 3 2 1
1 Earth M2 3 Water detector sensor supply J59 C2 1
2 Front RH indicator J59 C6 1 2 3 2
3 Front RH sidelight J59 A5 3

604vfm53
1
2
3
604vfm11
J70 Ending
A B
J61 Ending A Engine coolant temperature warning light J59 A2
B Engine water temperature (pre-heater unit) J59 B5
1 Earth M2 C Earth M2
1 2 3 C
2 Front LH indicator J59 C7 604vfm20
3 Front LH sidelight J59 A6
1
2
3
604vfm11 J71 Ending
1 D+ alternator J59 C4
1 D+ alternator J73 1 2 1
J62 Ending t
1 Earth M2
2 Rotating beacon J59 A3 1 2 604vfm17
1
2
604vfm10 J73 Ending
1 D+ alternator J71 1 1
604vfm12
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F2.15

J75 Ending
1 Fuel gauge warning light J59 A4

2 Fuel gauge supply J59 B4 3 2 1
3 Fuel gauge J59 C3
604vfm21
J88 Ending
1 D+ P73 1
2 +AVC (constant source) 31 1 2
1
2
604vfm10
P73 Ending
1 D+ J88 1 1
604vfm37
P60 Ending
1 Earth 4
2 RH sidelight 4 3 2 1
3 RH flashing ligth 4a
1
2
3
604vfm22
P61 Ending
1 Earth 5
2 RH sidelight 5 3 2 1
3 LH flashing light 5a
1
2
3
604vfm22
F2.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

4a. Rotating beacon harness (roll bar)
P62 Rotating beacon harness connector
P62 Ending
1a
1 Earth 1a
2 Rotating beacon 1a 1 2
1
2
604vfm43
J40
P40
214
J62
P62
31
606vfm43
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F2.17

4b. Injector pump interface harness
J78 Coolant fluid temperature sensor (injector pump)
P68 Injector pump harness connector
J78 Ending
1 Injection pump solenoid valve 25

2 Solenoid valve for cold start advance mechanism 313
2 1
604vfm16
P68 Ending
J78 1 Injection pump solenoid valve 25 1

1 Injection pump solenoid valve J78 1
25
604vfm37
313
P68
J68
606vfm44
F2.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Notes Notes
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F2.19

5. Cab top harness
YL Car-radio
JB Car-radio
83 84
J10 +AVC (constant source)
JA J11 +APC
JB
M3 J12 Front screen washer
79
J44 J13 Rear screen washer
P15 J15
J19 13 J45
J14 Air conditioning interface harness connector
J46
J47 J15 Ventilation/air conditioning interface harness connector
J48 J16 Front screen wiper
J16
J17 Rotating beacon harness connector
111 J18 Rear screen wiper
J19 Air conditioning compressor connector
J44 Connector for front screen wiper/washer selector

6
J11 J45 Connector for rear screen wiper/washer selector
J16 J46 Front working light switch connector
M3 J47 Rear working light switch connector

J15 JA J48 Rotating beacon switch connector
P15 JB
7 J14 P10 +AVC (constant source)
P14
P15 Cab top harness connection (air conditioning)
J41 8
J42
YL Ending
J17 J18 1 3 5 7
t
4 + AVC car radio memory Fb6
210 t
9 7 +APC Fb2 2 4 6 8
8 Earth M3
604vfm0k
JB Ending
1 3 5 7
t
3 + RH loudspeaker 84
4 – RH loudspeaker 84
P10 J10 5 + LH loudspeaker 83 2 4 6 8
6 – LH loudspeaker 83
604vfm0k
P11 J11
J13 J12
J10 Ending
J19
1 +AVC (constant source) R1, R2, R3, Fb3, 1
Fb4, Fb5, Fb6,
Fb12
606vfm45 604vfm38
F2.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

1
1 +APC R1, R2, Fb11 1 – Rear windscreen wiper parking position J45 6 1 2
2 + Rear screen wiper/washer J45 1
604vfm44 3 + Rear windscreen wiper parking position J45 2 4 3
4 Earth J45 4
604vfm51
J12 Ending
1
1 Earth J44 3
2 Front screen washer J44 6 J19 Ending
1
2 1 Air conditioning compressor Fb10
604vfm0i 604vfm44

1
1 Earth J45 3 1 – Front windscreen wiper, self-parking J16 1
2 Rear screen washer J45 6 2 Earth J16 4
3 Earth J12 1 7 4 5 6 9
2 4 + Front windscreen wiper, self-parking J16 3
5 +AVC (constant source) Fb3
604vfm0i 6 + Front windscreen wash/wipe J16 2
6 + Front windscreen wash/wipe J12 2 8 1 2 3 10
7 Earth M3
8 + APC lighting switch Fb11
J14 Ending
t 604vfm40
3 6
1 Right fan motor Fb8
1
2 Earth M3
2
3 Left fan motor Fb9
3
4 Earth M3 J45 Ending
5 Pressure switch/thermostat link J15 1
1 4
6 Air conditioning compressor relay R4 30 1 – Rear windscreen wiper parking position J18 1
604vfm0a 2 Earth J18 4
3 Earth J13 1 7 4 5 6 9
4 + Rear windscreen wiper parking position J18 3
5 +AVC (constant source) Fb4
J15 Ending
6 + Rear screen wiper/washer J18 2
1 2 6 + Rear screen wiper/washer J13 2 8 1 2 3 10
1 Pressure switch/thermostat link J14 5 1
7 Earth M3
2 Earth M3
2

3 Fan control Fb7
t 604vfm40
3
604vfm0l
J46 Ending
J16 Ending
t
2 Switch supply Fb1
1 – Front windscreen wiper, self-parking J44 6 1 2
7 4 5 6 9
3 Front right working light 6
4 3 t
5 Switch supply Fb1
4 Earth J44 4
6 front left working light 7 8 1 2 3 10
604vfm51 7 Earth M3
t 604vfm40
J17 Ending
1
1 Earth M3
2 Rotating beacon J48 3
604vfm0i
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F2.21

J47 Ending
t
2 Switch supply Fb2 7 4 5 6 9
3 Rear right working light 8
t
5 Switch supply Fb2
6 Rear left working light 9 8 1 2 3 10
7 Earth M3
t 604vfm40
J48 Ending
t
2 +AVC (constant source) Fb12 7 4 5 6 9
3 Rotating beacon control J17 2
t
7 Earth M3
8 1 2 3 10
t
604vfm40
P15 Ending
1 Thermostat 119 1 2 1
2 Ventilation earth 90
2
3 Fan control 61
604vfm0m
F2.22 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

5a. Air conditioning harness
P14 Air conditioning interface harness connector
J41 Condenser fan motor connector
J42 Condenser fan motor connector
J19
P14 Ending
1 Right fan motor J40 A 3 2 1

P15 J15 2 Right fan motor earth J40 B
3 Left fan motor J41 A
4 Left fan motor earth J41 B
5 Pressure switch 210 6 5 4
J11 6 Air conditioning compressor relay 210
604vfm47
J16
J41 Ending
A Fan motor P14 3

B Fan motor earth P14 4 B A
B
A
604vfm54
J42 Ending
6
A Fan motor P14 1
B Fan motor earth P14 2 B A
B
J15 A
P15
604vfm54
J14
P14 8
J41
J19 J42
210
606vfm46
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F2.23

6. Harness TCE6
J1 TCE6 electronics unit
J2 End of travel contactor

311
J3 REH raise control
310
191 J4 REH lower control
J5 RH external Electrohydraulic lift raise control
J6 RH external electrohydraulic lift lower control

J72
J65 J1 J7 LH external electrohydraulic lift raise control
J66 J8 LH external Electrohydraulic lift lower control
J9 TCE6 Electronics unit supply
J5 J65 Force sensor connector

236 237 J9
J66 Position sensor connector
J72 Win Métadiag© socket

J6
J2
J1 Ending
J7
t
C Exernal REH control J5 2
J3 C Exernal REH control J8 2
J4 D End of travel contactor J2 1
J8
E TCE6 Electronics unit supply 73
J A
F Exernal REH control J5 1 J A
F Exernal REH control J7 1 I K B
G Exernal REH control J6 1 H C H N L C
G Exernal REH control J8 1
G M D
H – DOWN solenoid valve J3 1 F E
I – UP solenoid valve J4 2 F E
J Earth M4
K Exernal REH control J6 2 604vfm25
K Exernal REH control J7 2
L + UP solenoid valve J4 1
M + End of travel contactor J2 2
N + DOWN solenoid valve J3 2
J65 J66 J1
M4
J3
J4 J2 Ending
1 End of travel voltage– J1 D

2 End of travel voltage+ J1 M 2 1
237
100
236
99 604vfm36
J3 Ending
1 Down valve voltage– J1 H

2 Down valve voltage+ J1 N 2 1
606vfm47
604vfm36
F2.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

1 Up valve voltage+ J1 L 1 Information from TCE6 electronics unit 191

1 2 2 Information from TCE6 electronics unit 191 1 2 3
2 Up valve voltage– J1 I
3 Information from TCE6 electronics unit 191
604vfm35 604vfm27
J5 Ending
1 3,6 V Reference voltage external TCE control J1 F

2 REH raise control J1 C 3 2 1
t
604vfm21
J6 Ending
1 3,6 V Reference voltage external TCE control J1 G

2 REH lower control J1 K 3 2 1
t
604vfm21
J7 Ending
1 3,6 V Reference voltage external TCE control J1 F

2 REH raise control J1 K 3 2 1
t
604vfm21
J8 Ending
1 3,6 V Reference voltage external TCE control J1 G

2 REH lower control J1 C 3 2 1
t
604vfm21
J65 Ending A C
A Sensor supply 191

B Force signal 191
C Earth 191 B
604vfm33
J66 Ending C A
A Earth 191
B Position signal 191
C Sensor supply 191 B
604vfm32
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB F2.25

Notes Notes
F2.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

G1
INSTRUMENT PANEL
G2
ELECTRONIC LINKAGE TCE 6
G3
WIN MÉTADIAG© MANUAL
Chapter G

CONTENTS
G1 – INSTRUMENT PANEL
DESCRIPTION
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .............................................................................................................................................. G1.2
INPUT/OUTPUT ............................................................................................................................................................. G1.4
CONNECTION AND FUNCTIONS OF THE WIRES OF CONNECTORS JX1 AND JX2............................................... G1.5
CHARACTERISTICS
INDICATOR OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................. G1.8
ENGINE TEMPERATURE AND FUEL GAUGES........................................................................................................... G1.9
WARNING LIGHTS ...................................................................................................................................................... G1.11
REMOVAL/REFITTING
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ............................................................................................................................................ G1.12

CHECK OF TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE SENSOR ........................................................................................... G1.13
CHECK OF AIR FILTER BLOCKAGE INDICATOR ..................................................................................................... G1.13
CHECK OF ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR......................................................................................................... G1.13
CHECK OF TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR.................................................................................... G1.13
CHECK OF SPEED SENSOR...................................................................................................................................... G1.14
CHECK OF FUEL WATER-CONTENT SENSOR ........................................................................................................ G1.14
CHECK OF ENGINE TEMPERATURE SENSOR ........................................................................................................ G1.15
CHECK OF ENGINE RPM ........................................................................................................................................... G1.15
CHECK OF FUEL GAUGE ........................................................................................................................................... G1.16
G2 – ELECTRONIC LINKAGE TCE 6
DESCRIPTION
VERSION TCE 6 ............................................................................................................................................................ G2.2
ELECTRICAL ARCHITECTURE .................................................................................................................................... G2.3
TCE 6 INPUTS/OUTPUTS ............................................................................................................................................ G2.4
CONNECTIONS TO TCE 6 UNIT................................................................................................................................... G2.5
SELF-CHECKING........................................................................................................................................................... G2.5
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

ADJUSTMENTS
POSITION SENSOR AND END STOP SWITCH ........................................................................................................... G2.6
LOAD SENSOR.............................................................................................................................................................. G2.7

CHECK OF END STOP SWITCH (310) ......................................................................................................................... G2.8
CHECK OF POSITION SENSOR (237) ......................................................................................................................... G2.8
CHECK OF FORCE SENSOR (236) .............................................................................................................................. G2.8
CHECK OF UP SOLENOID VALVE (99)........................................................................................................................ G2.9
CHECK OF DOWN SOLENOID VALVE (100) ............................................................................................................... G2.9
EXTERNAL UP/DOWN SELECTOR (56A), (56B), (57A), (57B).................................................................................... G2.9
RECORD SHEET FOR MEASURED SENSOR AND SWITCH VALUES FOR THE
TCE 6 SOLENOID VALVE
RECORD SHEET FOR MEASURED SENSOR AND SWITCH VALUES FOR THE TCE 6 SOLENOID VALVE ........ G2.10
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

G1
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Instrument cluster
Front view
7 8 9 10 11 12 B 12 13 14 15 16 17
6 18
5 19
4 20
2
21
1
22
23
A E D C
584vfm00 Fig. 1
Nomenclature
1 Fuel low level warning light. 18 Not used.
2 Level in the fuel collector tank. 19 Transmission computer defect light.
3 Main beam warning light. 20 Hydraulic doubler warning (reduced speed).
4 Direction indicators 2nd trailor. 21 Front axle engagement indicator light.
5 1st trailer direction indicators warning light. 22 Differential lock indicator.
6 Tractor direction indicators warning light. 23 Engine coolant temperature warning light.
7 Rear power take-off warning light. A Fuel gauge.
8 Front power take-off warning light. B Engine tachometer
9 Brake fluid level warning light. C Engine coolant temperature gauge.
10 Hand brake warning light. D Theoretical forward speed indicator in km/h or mph.
11 Battery charge warning light. E Display:
12 STOP warning light (emergency stop). – Trip hour meter
13 Engine oil pressure warning light. – Total hour meter
14 "Hydraulic doubler" oil pressure warning light. – Rear power take-off speed
– Engine speed in rpm
15 Transmission oil temperature warning light.
– Digital clock.
16 Blocked dry type air filter warning light.
17 Automatic pre-heating indicator.
G1.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Rear view
584vfm01 Fig. 2
Indicator lights
1 20-channel socket "JX1".
2 36-channel socket "JX2".
Digital displays
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G1.3

G1.4
584vfm22
+ APC
Input/output
+ APC + APC
Description
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

+APC
+AVC
JX2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 JX1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
B
C
K L D+ A
+ AVC
+ APC
Fig. 3
Description
Nomenclature
D+ Alternator. C Proportional PTO control.
+ APC + After contact. JX1 Single connector (20 pin).
+ AVC + Before contact. JX2 Single connector (36 pin).
A Speed sensor. K Line "K".
B PTO control. L Line "L".
Connection and functions of the wires of connectors "JX1" and "JX2"

Single connector "JX2" (36 pin)
33 29 25 21 17 13 9 5 1
34 30 26 22 18 14 10 6 2
35 31 27 23 19 15 11 7 3
36 32 28 24 20 16 12 8 4
584vfm14 Fig. 4
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G1.5

Description
Electrical level
Pin N° Function
Type of signal
1 Not used
2 Forward speed earth Earth
3 Line "K"
4 Not used
5 1000 rpm PTO Earth
6 540 rpm PTO Earth
7 Line "L"
8 Not used
9 Not used
10 Relay output 12 V
11 Battery charge
12 Not used
13 Push button Earth
14 Not used
15 Engine oil pressure Earth
16 Not used
17 4 wheel drive selector 12 V
18 Stop switch 12 V
19 Differential locking 12 V
20 PTO engaged 12 V
21 PTO control 12 V
22 Proportional PTO control 12 V
23 Not used
24 Sidelight (day/night) 12 V
25 Not used
26 Reverser not in neutral 12 V
27 Differential lock indicator Earth
28 Engine water temperature
29 Not used
30 "Slow" doubler 12 V
31 4 wheel drive solenoid valve output 12 V
32 Not used
33 Automatic glow plug indicator 12 V
34 Transmission controller fault 12 V
35 Not used
36 Air filter blocked Earth
G1.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Double connector "JX1" (20 pin)
17 13 9 5 1
18 14 10 6 2
19 15 11 7 3
20 16 12 8 4
584vfm15 Fig. 5
Electrical level
Pin N° Function
Type of signal
1 Forward speed
2 Engine rpm input
3 Transmission oil temperature Earth
4 Not used
5 Trailer 2 steering 12 V
6 Brake fluid Earth
7 Handbrake Earth
8 Fuel level
9 Trailer 1 steering 12 V
10 Front power take-off 12 V
11 +12 V constant source (AVC) 12 V
12 +12 V switched (APC) 12 V
13 Tractor steering 12 V
14 Level in the fuel collector tank Earth
15 Fuel low level warning
16 Fuel level earth
17 Headlight 12 V
18 Hydraulic pressure Earth
19 Not used
20 Earth Earth
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G1.7

Characteristics
Indicator operation
Dial and display unit
The following functions are provided by a signal
generated by the alternator:
– Analogue rev counter (dial).
– Rear PTO shaft rpm.
“JX1”
584vfm02 Fig. 6
At the alternator output, the signal from terminal "W" or

"R" (depending on the type of alternator) has the following
waveform (Fig. 7). The frequency is 0,3 Hz per rpm.
U
(v)
f (Hz)
584hsm10 Fig. 7
Analogue rev counter (engine rpm)

This is a stepping motor which receives a series of pulses
according to the frequency emitted by the alternator.
Engine rpm enables the ECU to calculate PTO shaft rpm.
G1.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Characteristics
Engine temperature and fuel gauges

Engine temperature gauge
88 ˚C 95 ˚C
A thermistor (resistance that varies with temperature) 74 ˚C 105 ˚C
sends a variable voltage to the ECU.
The position of the needle (2) varies as a function of
engine coolant temperature.
584vfm25 Fig. 8
If the red warning light flashes, this indicates a defect in
the information from the sensor (short circuit to earth,
open circuit, etc.).
– 105°C is the alarm threshold (red warning light on
steady).
584vfm08 Fig. 9
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G1.9

Characteristics
Fuel gauge
A rotary potentiometer sends a variable voltage to the ECU. The position of the needle varies with fuel level.
N.B.: A level is not necessarily representative of the volume of diesel left in the tank (this depends on the shape
of the tank).
180 Ω 7Ω
JX1
12 8 15 16
5
+ APC
6
4
584vfm10 Fig. 10
Nomenclature
3 Fuel gauge resistance in ohms. 5 Instrument panel connector.
4 Fuel gauge. 6 Low level switch.
Measure with an ohmmeter with the ignition switched off.
G1.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Characteristics
The gauge includes a low level warning light. When

activated (earthing of instrument panel terminal "JX2.15"
by terminal "JX1.16"), the gauge indicator illuminates.
584vfm09 Fig. 11
Warning lights
SPECIAL CASES
Engine temperature warning
n Light flashing
• Check:
– Engine temperature probe.
– Electrical system.
n Light on steady
• Check:
– Electrical system.
– Engine and engine environment (see diagnostic sheet
"Coolant temperature too high").
584vfm08 Fig. 12
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G1.11

Removal/refitting
Instrument cluster
Using a suction grip reference n° 60 05 020 187, remove
the instrument cluster.
To replace light bulbs:
– Remove the 6 screws (7) at the back of the instrument
cluster (Fig. 14).
– Remove the two locating pegs (8).
584vfm20 Fig. 13
584vfm21 Fig. 14
G1.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Check of transmission oil pressure

sensor
This closes when there is no pressure "b" (bar).
b
When the pressure reaches 12 bar, the contact opens. It
closes when the pressure drops below 12 bar (Fig. 15).
12 ± 1
Check of air filter blockage indicator
It is open when there is no pressure.
Check of engine oil pressure sensor

This closes when there is no pressure "b" (bar) (Fig. 16).
584vfm16 Fig. 15
0,9
0,6
584vfm17 Fig. 16
Check of transmission oil

temperature sensor
This consists of a material whose electrical resistance
(ohms) varies with temperature (Fig. 17).
It remains open up to 110 °C. Ω
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 °C
110 ± 3°C
584vfm27 Fig. 17
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G1.13

Check of speed sensor

AC output signal.
Static check
Ohmmeter
Sensor terminals Values in MΩ
terminals
+ – 1 2 ∞*
+ – 2 1 8*
+ – 1 3 ∞*
+ – 3 1 19,5
+ – 2 3 ∞*
+ – 3 2 5
* Infinity.
584vfm23 Fig. 18
Check of fuel water-content sensor

Set up electrical test configuration (Fig. 19).
Test
A Earth.
B Earth for dashboard warning light.
C Supply voltage 12 V.
D Test light (bulb in dashboard). D B
In the presence of water in the fuel, the circuit closes
(lamp "D" lights).
B
A
C C
A 12 V
584vfm24 Fig. 19
G1.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Check of engine temperature sensor

Resistance of the sensor varies with temperature. 88 ˚C 95 ˚C
74 ˚C 260 Ω 215 Ω 105 ˚C
385 Ω 160 Ω
584vfm06 Fig. 20
Check resistance of the sensor at the terminals of
connectors "JX1" and "JX2" (Fig. 21).
28
JX2
Ω*
20 JX1
584vfm07 Fig. 21
Check of engine rpm

f = 614 Hz at 1950 rpm f
– Use tool n° 60 05 006 744 (frequency indicator
function).
– Check that the signal reaches terminal "2" of connector
"JX1" on the instrument cluster.
* Measure with an ohmmeter with the ignition switched off. 584vfm03 Fig. 22
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G1.15

Check of fuel gauge

Check resistance of fuel gauge at terminals of
connector "JX1" (Fig. 23).
N.B.: Take care not to damage contacts when
carrying out this task.
180 Ω 7Ω
JX1
12 8 15 16
5
+ APC
Ω*
6
4
584vfm26 Fig. 23
* Measure with an ohmmeter with the ignition switched off.
G1.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

G2
TCE 6 ELECTRONIC LINKAGE
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
TCE 6
2 4 5
3 6 7 8
10
383vfn07 Fig. 1
Nomenclature
1 Safety warning light. 5 Upper limit adjustment selector. 8 Transport lock button.
2 Linkage movement indicator light (up). 6 Position adjustment control (work depth 9 3 position switch (up, neutral, down).
3 Linkage movement indicator light adjustment). 10 "Quick entry" button.
(down). 7 Lowering speed adjustor.
4 Force/position control sensitivity
adjuster knob.
G2.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Electrical architecture
11
12
14
13
382vfm00 Fig. 2
Nomenclature
Diagnostics 11 Information. 13 Linkage spool valve.

12 TCE 6 electronics unit. 14 Win Métadiag© socket.
Linkage
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G2.3

Description
TCE 6 inputs/outputs
J1-M J1-L
17 J1-D J1-I
15
V– A J1-N
S B J1-H
J66
+ 12 V C
J1-C
+ 12 V A J1-F
S B TCE 6
J65
V– C J1-G
J1-K
J1-E + 12 V APC
J1-J
18
A B C
16
J72
382vfm01 Fig. 3
Nomenclature
15 Linkage spool valve unit. 17 End of travel contactor. S Sensor signal.
16 Win Métadiag© socket. 18 "Quick entry" button.
G2.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description
Connections to TCE 6 unit

14-pin connector (J1)
A —
B —
C External linkage control
D Linkage end stop contactor
E TCE 6 supply unit
F External linkage control
G External linkage control
H – DOWN solenoid valve
I – UP solenoid valve 19
J Earth
K External linkage control
L + UP solenoid valve
M + End stop solenoid valve 382vfm02 Fig. 4
N + DOWN solenoid valve
3 channel (J65) force sensor connector

A Sensor supply
B Force signal
C Earth
3 channel (J66) position sensor connector

A Earth
B Position signal
C Sensor supply
Self-checking J1 J65
J66
The electronics unit has a self test function. The user is
notified by the flashing of the warning light (19). The flash 382vfm03 Fig. 5
sequence corresponds to a specific operating defect or
safety problem with the linkage control unit. Flash
sequence:
– Rapid and regular: Unit safety. The unit must be reset.
– 2 flashes/pause/2 flashes: Defect in position or force
sensor.
– Slow and regular: Incorrect user operation of the unit.
The unit must be reset (See chapter "G" of the user's
manual).
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G2.5

Adjustments
Position sensor and end stop switch
21 23 20 25
5˚
26 24
23 22
382vfm04 Fig. 6
Adjusting end stop switch (Fig. 6) Position sensor adjustment

– Position the linkage arms at the upper mechanical stop. – Position the linkage arms at the lower stop.
– Adjust component (20) using screw (23) so that it – Insert the potentiometer rod into its housing ensuring
contacts switch (21) and tighten set screw (22) to that the wires of the potentiometer (25) are pointing
0,4 daN.m. downwards.
– Lower the linkage arms and slacken screw (23) by – Rotate the potentiometer approximately 5° anti-
2 turns and then tighten lock nut (24). clockwise around its horizontal axis. Tighten nuts (26) to
0,1 daN.m.
G2.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Adjustments
Load sensor
28
5°
27
215 ± 1 mm 3,75 ± 0,15 mm
382vfm05 Fig. 7
Adjusting the force sensor

N.B.: When carrying out this adjustment, the upper
linkage arm must not be attached to a tool.
– Adjust (27) to 215 mm.
– Position the sensor (28) to achieve a clearance of
3,75 ± 0,15 mm.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G2.7

Check of end stop switch (310)

procedure (see chapter "B3"). 30
Check of position sensor (237)

29
See electrical tests, Hall effect sensor for details of test
procedure (see chapter "B3").
5˚
– Linkage arm in lower position (29)
Voltage: 9 volts.
Resistance: 3 000 ohm.
– Linkage arm at upper position (mechanical stop) (30).
Voltage: 3 volts.
Resistance: 900 ohm. 382vfm06 Fig. 8
Check of force sensor (236)

See electrical tests, Hall effect sensor for details of test
– Clearance X: 3,75 mm.
Voltage: 2 volts.
DOWN warning lamp lit on TCE 6 unit.
– Clearance X: 2,10 mm.
Voltage: 0,7 volts.
UP warning lamp lit on TCE 6 unit.
382vfm07 Fig. 9
G2.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Check of UP solenoid valve (99)

– The resistance of the UP solenoid valve in the linkage
spool valve is between 7 and 7,5 ohms. 31
– The UP solenoid valve (32) is powered by battery
voltage, i.e. about 12 volts.
Check of DOWN solenoid valve (100) 32
See electrical tests, proportional solenoid valve (see

chapter "B3").
– Resistance of the "down" solenoid valve (31) in the
linkage spool valve is between 7 and 7,5 ohms.
382vfm08 Fig. 10
Position of the DOWN
Current
control knob
1 0,54 A
3 0,55 A
5 0,77 A
7 0,97 A
9 1,20 A
External UP/DOWN selector (56a, 56b,

57a, 57b)
– Switches at rest, contact open
– Switches actuated, contact closed.
– Each switch is powered by 3,6 volts.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G2.9

Record sheet for measured sensor and switch values for the TCE 6
solenoid valve
Tractor type: ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Serial n°: ................................................................................................................................................................................
Check of end stop switch
State Input voltage Output voltage Input value recorded Output value recorded
Closed 12 V 12 V
Open 12 V 0V
Check of position sensor
Measured value
Linkage arm position Voltage Resistance
Voltage Resistance
Low 9V 3000 ohm

High (mechanical stop) 3V 900 ohm
Check of force sensor
State of the warning light Measured value

Clearance Voltage State of the
Down Up Voltage
warning light
3,75 mm 2V Lit X
2,10 mm 0,7 V X Lit
G2.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Record sheet for measured sensor and switch values for the TCE 6
solenoid valve
Check of UP solenoid valve
Measured value
Solenoid valve Supply voltage Resistance
Voltage Resistance
Up 12 V 7 ± 0,5 V
Down 11 V 7 ± 0,5 V
Check of DOWN solenoid valve
Measured value
Position of the DOWN control knob Current
Current
1 0,54 A
3 0,55 A
5 0,77 A
7 0,97 A
9 1,20 A
Check of external UP/DOWN selector
Ignition Operated At rest Selector state
Closed X
Open X
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G2.11

Notes
G2.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

G3
Chapter G3

CONTENTS
G3 – WIN MÉTADIAG© MANUAL
CONNECTING WIN MÉTADIAG©

TRANSMISSION APPLICATION.................................................................................................................................... G3.2
TCE 6 APPLICATION..................................................................................................................................................... G3.2
DASHBOARD APPLICATION ........................................................................................................................................ G3.2
TRANSMISSION APPLICATION
CHOICE OF APPLICATION ........................................................................................................................................... G3.3
OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................................................................... G3.5
PROGRAMMING.......................................................................................................................................................... G3.10
CALIBRATION.............................................................................................................................................................. G3.10
TCE 6 APPLICATION
CHOICE OF APPLICATION ......................................................................................................................................... G3.19
OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................................................................. G3.21
DASHBOARD APPLICATION
CHOICE OF APPLICATION ......................................................................................................................................... G3.23
PARAMETER SETTING............................................................................................................................................... G3.26
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

G3
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Connecting Win Métadiag©
Transmission application
60 05 006 739
– Remove the left cover of the control panel.
– Connect as in the diagram.
586vfm00 Fig. 1
TCE 6 application
– Remove the TCE 6 control unit.
– Connect as in the diagram. 60 05 006 761
586vfm01 Fig. 2
Dashboard application
60 05 006 739
– Remove the left cover of the control panel.
– Connect as in the diagram.
60 05 006 721
60 05
006 72
ARES
CERE
1
CERES
ARES
60 05 006 730
60 05 006 765
586vfm02 Fig. 3
G3.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Choice of application
– Switch on the ignition.
– Run the Win Métadiag© program and select application Nectis (2).
7 8 3 4 5 6
586vfm03 Fig. 4
Nomenclature
1 Choice of language. 4 Help. 7 Internet update shortcut.

2 Choice of type of tractor. 5 Version. 8 Number of last update and date of
3 Keyboard shortcut. 6 Exit. download and installation.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G3.3

4 5 6 7 8
586vfm04 Fig. 5
Nomenclature
1 Overview. 4 Keyboard shortcut. 7 Return to previous mask.

2 Programming. 5 Help. 8 Exit.
3 Calibration. 6 Version.
G3.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Overview
1 2 3
14
4
5
13 6
12
11 10 9 8
586vfm05 Fig. 6
Nomenclature
1 Values stored in the Electro-hydraulic management (EHM) unit correspond to the last calibration.
2 1st line: Software version.
2nd line: Reference (inscribed on the casing).
3rd line: Combination of 1st and 2nd lines (not visible on the casing).
3 Clutch pedal (see details below).
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G3.5

4 "Diagnostic trouble codes" (DTC) (see table below).

5 Information on last calibration. "OK" or fail.
6 Tractor speed.
7 Crawler range light.
8 2-position range lever: I or II, III.
9 Transmission oil temperature.
10 Battery voltage.
11 Unit overvoltage protection indicator light. The light illuminates if a solenoid valve is short-circuited or if the current is too high.
12 Reverser lever (forward, neutral, reverse).
13 Clutchless reverser hydraulic unit (identification of solenoid valves by colour code).
14 Mean current consumed (average value of last 10 readings in the unit over about 2 seconds).
I = ~ 2 A.
Audio warning:
DTC
Problem Solution
Excessive clutch slip: > 30 seconds. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal.
Check adjustment of clutch pedal potentiometer,
0 Yes connections and wiring then calibrate the clutch pedal
using Win Métadiag©.
Ignoring this message may lead to damage to the clutch.
Oil temperature too high: > 110°C. Stop the tractor and wait for the oil temperature to return to
normal.
2 Yes
Ignoring this message may lead to severe damage to the
transmission and hydraulic system.
Temperature sensor signal out of range: Too high. Reduced transmission performance.
3 No
Check temperature sensor, conections and wiring.
Clutch pedal sensor signal out of range: Too low. Adjust and calibrate the clutch pedal potentiometer.
5 Yes
Check connections and wiring.
Clutch pedal sensor signal out of range: Too high. Adjust and calibrate the clutch pedal potentiometer.
6 Yes
Check connections and wiring.
Incorrect comparison between sensor signal and angular Adjust end-of-travel sensor.
7 Yes detector. Adjust and calibrate the clutch pedal potentiometer.
Check sensor connections and wiring.
Front road clutch solenoid valve: Check each possibility.

– Short circuit to ground of the return wire.
8 Yes
– Open circuit in solenoid or wiring.
– Power supply (Pin 11/SO 2) disconnected.
Front field clutch solenoid valve: Check each possibility.

9 Yes
Rear clutch solenoid valve: Check each possibility.

10 Yes
G3.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Audio warning:
DTC
Problem Solution
Solenoid valve coil: Short circuit from supply to earth. Identify the affected clutch.
11 Yes Check if coil wiring is short circuited to ground.
Check power supply wiring.
Front road clutch solenoid valve: Short circuit supply line Check power supply wiring.
12 Yes
to + 12 V.
Front field clutch solenoid valve: Short circuit supply line Check power supply wiring.
13 Yes
to + 12 V.
Rear clutch solenoid valve: Short circuit supply line to Check power supply wiring.
14 Yes
+ 12 V.
Lever failure: Front and rear simultaneously. Check lever operation.

15 Yes
Check if there is a short circuit in the wiring.

16 Yes

17 Yes
Electro-hydraulic management (EHM) voltage critical: Check the tractor charging circuit.
18 Yes
< 10 V. Check unit power supply circuit.
N.B.: These codes are associated with a transmission problem; "DTC" codes concerning calibration appear in the
calibration section.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G3.7

Detail of clutch pedal
5% 15 %
586vfm06
0%
4 Fig. 7
G3.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Nomenclature
Red: Physical equipment limit. 3 Value equal to 5 % and 15 % of the stroke between the lower
Yellow: Limit following calibration. and upper value. These percentages are identical for all
Blue: Engagement tolerance. tractors. These values are determined during the automatic
1 Maximum and minimum values read by the clutch pedal pedal calibration.
potentiometer. 4 Engagement value of the clutch pedal potentiometer. This
High value: 240. value corresponds to the clutch engagement point.
Low value: 20. 5 Dynamic value corresponding to pedal position.
These values are recorded in the Electro-hydraulic 6 Mechanical stop; this lights when pointer (5) is at 0 %.
management (EHM) unit and are identical for all tractors as the
clutch pedal potentiometer is the same.
2 Values recorded during an automatic pedal calibration. These
extreme values are those recorded by the Electro-hydraulic
management (EHM) unit when the pedal if fully pressed and
released.
Value pedal pressed > lower value (20).
Value pedal released < upper value (240).
Adjusting the potentiometer and contactor

On synoptic diagram: • Adjust the end of travel contactor.
• Pedal in engaged position, adjust the potentiometer to – If value 4 is less than 5 % lower the contactor (Fig. 7).
220, 230 (value 5) (Fig. 7). – If value 4 is above de 15 % raise the contactor (Fig. 7).
• Calibrate the pedal (see procedure below). • Calibrate the pedal.
If the calibration is unsuccessful:
If the calibration is unsuccessful, repeat the adjustments
• Open the synoptic diagram. in the same order.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G3.9

Programming
Important: Calibration must be carried out before
programming. Follow the on-screen instructions.
586vfm07 Fig. 8
Calibration
Two calibrations are available: automatic and manual. In all cases operation of the sensor (1) must be monitored.
Drive the tractor and check that the speed (2) changes.
2
586vfm08 Fig. 9
G3.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Choice of automatic or manual mode
586vfm09 Fig. 10
The choice of mode (3) is made using the clutchless reverser lever. Pressing the clutch pedal confirms the selection.
In the manual mode, the operations (4) are active. Use this mode for pedal calibration.
N.B.: The selection menu is yellow; once the menu has been validated, it is green.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G3.11

Operations that can be accessed depending on choice of calibration
Parameter setting XXXXX Facteur vitesse
XXXXX Etalonnage pédale
1
Calibration Automatic
XXXXX
Etalonnage embrayage
Manual Filling time
586vfm10 Fig. 11
1. This operation is not available if manual calibration has been selected.
Stages to be followed to enter the automatic

calibration mode
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Place the reverser lever in neutral.
3. Engage 1st speed.
4. Select the range lever to position III.
5. Press button (1), turn on the ignition and start the
1
tractor (simultaneous operations).
6. Set the engine speed to 1 500 rpm
7. Click on "start calibration".
N.B.: In the calibration mode the diagnostic light
flashes.
586vfm11 Fig. 12
Principle of navigation in the calibration mode

– Choice of menu or values to be changed using the clutchless reverser lever.
– Menu validation using the clutch pedal.
– Modify values displayed in the lower window (DTC + N°).
G3.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Speed factor
Important: The speed factor must be parameterised after programming or a change of tyre. Before calibrating the
pedal or clutch, the speed factor must be parameterised.
1 2 3 4
586vfm12 Fig. 13
Nomenclature
1 Decide whether to enter the tyre 3 Select the maximum speed for which 5 Known value in the Electro-hydraulic
dimensions or circumference. the tractor has been sold. management (EHM) unit to be modified
2 Select the tractor type. 4 Check list resulting from earlier so that it equates to the check list (4).
selections.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G3.13

Pedal calibration
586vfm13 Fig. 14
After replacing the clutch pedal potentiometer or the clutch pedal, calibration must be carried out; this will enable the
characteristics for the clutch pedal/potentiometer assembly to be recorded in the Electro-hydraulic management (EHM)
unit.
Calibration of automatic clutches

Important: Calibration can only be carried out if the programming runs correctly. During the calibration the tractor
will move several metres and this movement may be abrupt.
This procedure must be carried out under the following circumstances:
– Lack of progressiveness.
– Replacement of Electro-hydraulic management (EHM) unit.
– Replacement of solenoid valve.
– Mechanical work on the clutches.
G3.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Calibration of manual clutches

Important: Manual calibration can only be carried out if the automatic calibration has run correctly.
This procedure must be carried out under the following circumstances:
– Acceptance criteria for the tractor have not been achieved.
– The user wants faster or slower reaction from the reverser.
1
586vfm14 Fig. 15
By modifying the fill time for the drive clutches (1) the tractor will behave differently.
Minimum time = 20 ms.
Maximum time = 280 ms.
N.B.: Each clutch can be adjusted.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G3.15

"DTC" diagnostic code during calibration
DTC Designations
20 Front road clutch solenoid valve engaged with insufficient pressure (press the clutch pedal to continue).
21 Front road clutch solenoid valve not engaged (press the clutch pedal to continue).
22 Front road clutch solenoid valve: Fill time too short (press the clutch pedal to continue).
23 Front road clutch solenoid valve: Fill time too long (press the clutch pedal to continue).
24 Front field clutch solenoid valve engaged with insufficient pressure (press the clutch pedal to continue).
25 Front field clutch solenoid valve not engaged (press the clutch pedal to continue).
26 Front field clutch solenoid valve: Fill time too short (press the clutch pedal to continue).
27 Front field clutch solenoid valve: Fill time too long (press the clutch pedal to continue).
28 Engage medium range on the range selector.
30 Disengage "MFWD" (press the clutch pedal to continue).
31 to 59 Adjust speed factor.
60 Brake until the tractor stops.
61 Position the front/rear lever to front.
62 Position the front/rear lever to neutral.
63 Position the front/rear lever to rear.
64 Start pedal calibration (press the clutch pedal to continue or move the front rear pedal to change the menu).
65 Engage high range on the range selector.
66 Engage "MFWD" (press the clutch pedal to continue).
67 Press and fully release the clutch pedal 3 times.
68 Wait until the front road clutch calibration is complete (avoid using the front/rear lever or the clutch pedal).
69 Wait until the front field clutch calibration is complete (avoid using the front/rear lever or the clutch pedal).
70 Wait until the rear clutch calibration is complete (avoid using the front/rear lever or the clutch pedal).
G3.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

DTC Designations
71 Successful calibration procedure (turn off the engine).
72 Calibration procedure complete but one or more errors have occurred (turn off the engine).
73 Clutch pedal angular sensor incorrectly installed (press the clutch pedal to continue).
74 Clutch pedal switch incorrectly installed (press the clutch pedal to continue).
75 Clutch pedal angular sensor and switch signal mismatch (press the clutch pedal to continue).
76 Clutch engaged with inadequate pressure (press the clutch pedal to continue).
77 Clutch not engaged (press the clutch pedal to continue).
78 Fill time too short (press the clutch pedal to continue).
79 Fill time too long (press the clutch pedal to continue).
83 Write problem to flash memory (press the clutch pedal to continue).
84 Start clutch calibration (press the clutch pedal to continue or move the front rear pedal to change the menu).
85 Manual adjustment of fill time (press the clutch pedal to continue).
Manual adjustment of bite point current (press the clutch pedal to continue or move the front rear pedal to change the
86
menu).
87 Calibration of manual clutches (press the clutch pedal to continue or move the front rear pedal to change the menu).
88 Calibration of automatic clutches (press the clutch pedal to continue or move the front rear pedal to change the menu).
89 Transmission oil temperature too low: Requires adjustment (between 60 and 65 °).
90 Oil temperature too high: Requires adjustment (between 60 and 65 °).
91 Release the clutch pedal (press the clutch pedal to continue or move the front rear pedal to change the menu).
Start parameterisation of Electro-hydraulic management (EHM) (press the clutch pedal to continue or move the front
92
rear pedal to change the menu).
Start calibration of Electro-hydraulic management (EHM) (press the clutch pedal to continue or move the front rear
93
pedal to change the menu).
94 Start parameterisation of speed factor (press the clutch pedal to continue).
95 Wait for completion of clutch calibration (avoid using the front/rear lever or the clutch pedal).
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G3.17

DTC Designations
96 Rear clutch solenoid valve engaged with inadequate pressure (press the clutch pedal to continue).
97 Rear clutch solenoid valve not engaged (press the clutch pedal to continue).
98 Rear clutch solenoid valve: Fill time too short (press the clutch pedal to continue).
99 Rear clutch solenoid valve: Fill time too long (press the clutch pedal to continue).
100 to 149 Adjustment front road.
141 to 149 Adjustment pedal offset.
150 to 199 Adjustment front field.
200 to 249 Adjustment rear.
250 Engage 1st gear (press the clutch pedal to continue).
251 Engage 2nd gear (press the clutch pedal to continue).
252 Engage 3rd gear (press the clutch pedal to continue).
253 Engage 4th gear (press the clutch pedal to continue).
254 Automatic pedal calibration (press the clutch pedal to continue or move the front rear pedal to change the menu).
255 Manual pedal calibration (press the clutch pedal to continue or move the front rear pedal to change the menu).
G3.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

TCE 6 application
– Start the engine.
– Run the Win Métadiag© program and select application TCE 6 (2).
7 8 3 4 5 6
586vfm15 Fig. 16
Nomenclature
1 Choice of language. 4 Help. 7 Internet update shortcuts.

2 Choice of linkage type. 5 Version. 8 Number of last update and date of
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G3.19

TCE 6 application
2 3 4 5 6
586vfm16 Fig. 17
Nomenclature
1 Overview. 3 Help. 5 Return to previous mask.

2 Keyboard shortcut. 4 Version. 6 Exit.
G3.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

TCE 6 application
Overview
3 4 5
586vfm17 Fig. 18
Nomenclature
1 Percentage values (knob rotation). 2 Position sensor voltage. 4 Down solenoid valve voltage.
3 Force sensor voltage. 5 Battery voltage.
All operations on the TCE 6 controller are displayed on the synoptic (apart from 6).
Figure 18 shows possible failures.

– Position sensor.
– Load sensor.
– EEPROM.
– Battery voltage too low.
– Battery voltage too high.
– DOWN solenoid valve.
– UP solenoid valve.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G3.21

TCE 6 application
Defect
Component concerned Source of the problem
Position sensor
Open circuit, short circuit or short circuit to ground in the sensor.
Incorrect adjustment.
Load sensor
EEPROM Defective controller.
Battery voltage too low

Load circuit.
Battery voltage too high
DOWN solenoid valve

Open circuit, short circuit or short circuit to ground in the sensor.
UP solenoid valve
Refer to chapter "G2" for the checking, adjustment and self-diagnosis (nature of flashing light on linkage unit).
N.B.: If the defect is eliminated, close the synoptic and reboot this application; check for no further fault.
G3.22 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

– Run the Win Métadiag© program and select application Nectis (2).
1 2
7 8 3 4 5 6
586vfm18 Fig. 19
Nomenclature
1 Choice of language. 4 Help. 7 Internet update shortcuts.

2 Choice of type of tractor. 5 Version. 8 Number of last update and date of
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G3.23

3 4 5 6 7
586vfm19 Fig. 20
Nomenclature
1 Overview. 4 Help. 7 Exit.

2 Parameter setting. 5 Version.
3 Keyboard shortcut. 6 Return to previous mask.
G3.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

586vfm20 Fig. 21
Nomenclature
1 This function enables the testing of:
– The digits "A", "B".
– The buzzer.
– The needles.
– The lamps connected to the microprocessor.
When the self-test is complete and "OK", the screen (A) displays "Good".
N.B.: There is no visual feedback on the synoptic.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G3.25

Parameter setting
2 3
586vfm21 Fig. 22
Parameterisation is required after replacing the instrument panel or a tyre. When fitting a tyre (1) either the type or the
circumference can be entered. Once the various parameters have been selected, click on (2) and enter the parameters.
Displaying the parameters (3) enables a check to be made that the values entered during parameterisation are correct.
G3.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Display sequence on instrument panel
Sequenc
Observations
e
4-wheel drive = lit = 4-wheel drive parameterised.

(A)
Differential light = lit = Differential parameterised.
2 1 3 2* Number of pulses over 100 metres (between 870 and 3 630).
Eco and proportional PTO.

(B)
N = PTO 540 only.
E P*
E = Eco PTO.
P = Proportional PTO.
3.10 Engine rpm ratio.

(C)
1.0 Time (s) between the detection of a fault and the tripping of the buzzer.
105 Temperature (°C) at which the alarm is activated.

(D)
1.1 Software version.
* Examples taken from a tractor.
N.B.: If "error" is displayed on the upper screen on the instrument panel, the connection must be restarted.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB G3.27

Notes
G3.28 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

H1
RAISING THE CAB AND PLATFORM
H2
MANUAL HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING
Chapter H
Nectis207 00 11 302 370 – 12.2005 publication

CONTENTS
H1 – RAISING THE CAB AND PLATFORM
DESCRIPTION OF THE CAB

IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................................................................................... H1.2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.............................................................................................................................................. H1.2
LOCATION OF OPERATIONS....................................................................................................................................... H1.3
SUMMARY OF OPERATIONS....................................................................................................................................... H1.4
REMOVING THE CAB

PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS....................................................................................................................................... H1.5
REMOVAL OPERATIONS.............................................................................................................................................. H1.5
INSTALLING THE SPREADER BAR ........................................................................................................................... H1.12
PARTIAL REMOVAL .................................................................................................................................................... H1.19
REFITTING THE CAB

TORQUE SETTINGS ................................................................................................................................................... H1.20
ADJUSTMENTS ........................................................................................................................................................... H1.20
REMOVING/REFITTING THE ROOF

COMPLETE REMOVAL OF THE ROOF...................................................................................................................... H1.21
DESCRIPTION OF THE PLATFORM

IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................................................................................................... H1.23
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............................................................................................................................................ H1.23
LOCATION OF OPERATIONS..................................................................................................................................... H1.24
SUMMARY OF OPERATIONS..................................................................................................................................... H1.25
REMOVAL OF THE PLATFORM

PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS..................................................................................................................................... H1.26
REMOVAL OPERATIONS............................................................................................................................................ H1.26
INSTALLING THE SPREADER BAR ........................................................................................................................... H1.31
PARTIAL REMOVAL .................................................................................................................................................... H1.37
REFITTING THE PLATFORM

TORQUE SETTINGS ................................................................................................................................................... H1.38
ADJUSTMENTS ........................................................................................................................................................... H1.38
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

H2 – HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING
CHARACTERISTICS
CHARACTERISTICS...................................................................................................................................................... H2.2
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DIAGRAM OF OPERATING PRINCIPLE....................................................................................................................... H2.3
COMPONENT LOCATION ............................................................................................................................................. H2.5
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC ........................................................................................................................................... H2.6
CONTROL PANEL ......................................................................................................................................................... H2.7
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.............................................................................................................................................. H2.8
GAS CHARGING AND DISCHARGING

DRAIN POINTS .............................................................................................................................................................. H2.9
REMOVAL/REFITTING
ENGINE LAYOUT......................................................................................................................................................... H2.10
CAB LAYOUT ............................................................................................................................................................... H2.10
REMOVING THE EXPANSION VALVE ....................................................................................................................... H2.12
REMOVING THE THERMOSTAT ................................................................................................................................ H2.12
REMOVING THE FAN.................................................................................................................................................. H2.13
REMOVING THE HEATING/AIR CONITIONING UNIT................................................................................................ H2.13
REMOVING THE EVAPORATOR AND RADIATOR.................................................................................................... H2.13
REMOVING THE DE-HUMIDIFIER, CONDENSER AND FANS.................................................................................. H2.15
REFITTING................................................................................................................................................................... H2.16
QUANTITY OF OIL TO BE ADDED WHEN REPLACING COMPONENTS................................................................. H2.16

CHECKING AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM PRESSURES ......................................................................................... H2.17
CHECKING THE THERMOSTAT................................................................................................................................. H2.17
DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF SYMPTOMS............................................................................................................................................... H2.18
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

H1
RAISING THE CAB AND PLATFORM
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description of the cab
Identification Cab weight: About 320 kg (depending on equipment fit).

Spreader bar reference nr 77 01 388 907.
For the location of the structure identification plates: Lifting kit reference 77 01 388 913.
– Type series N°.
– Certification N°. Safety measures
– Safety structure identification N°. Refer to the user To raise the cab, always use a hoist in perfect working
manual, chapter "A". order, with a sufficient hook height to enable the cab to be
lifted clear.
Important: A safety structure damaged (distorted) as
– Position the tractor on flat and level ground.
the result of an accident, must never be repaired but
must be replaced. – Chock the wheels.
– Place warnings around the working area.
– Use a certified hoist in perfect working order.
Safety instructions
– Use only approved shackles and slings that are in good
condition.
Recommendations before raising
– Respect safety instructions. Wear protective gloves
Important: Raise the cab only with a spreader bar to and shoes.
avoid any risk of deformation to the lifting points.
Forbidden Use spreader bar only
843vfm02 Fig. 1
H1.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Location of operations
1
24 3
2
15
17 31 9
14 16
30 4 10 11
17
18
22
8
19
6
21
27 28
29
20
13 12
23
26
25
841vfm00 Fig. 2
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.3

Summary of operations
Full cab removal: Operations 1 to 31.
Operation Designation Pages
Disconnect the battery.

1 5
Remove the driver's seat.
2 Remove the rear wheels. 5
3 Disconnect the headlight wiring harness. 6
4 Remove the engine covers. 6

5 Drain the air conditioning system (or re-locate the compressor). 7
6 Clear away the brake fluid reservoir. 7
7 Disconnect the heater unit supply hoses. 7
Disconnect the cables:

8 – To spool valve n° 1 – To the mechanical reverser 8
– To the PTO selector – To the clutch pedal.

9 8
– To the spool valves – To the mechanical doubler control lever.
10 Remove the range, speed and handbrake selectors. 8
11 Disconnect the electrical harnesses from the TCE6. 9
12 Disconnect the lines from the steering unit. 10
13 Disconnect the steering actuator supply lines. 11

14 Disconnect the brake supply hoses. 11
15 Disconnect the accelerator cable. 11
16 Installing the spreader bar. 12

17 Remove the cab mounting studs. 13
18 Disconnect the position and force control actuator cables. 14
Disconnect the neutral contactor, mechanical reverser.

19 14
Disconnect the gear ratio sensor.
20 Clear away the accelerator cable. 15
21 Disconnect the cables for the hydraulic jack and stabiliser spool valves. 15
22 Disconnect the control cable for spool valve n° 2. 15
Move aside the PTO control spool valve unit. Disconnect:

– The handbrake lever
23 16
– The handbrake sensor
– The ground wire.
24 Unplug all electrical harnesses at the front of the cab. 16
25 Unplug the two PTO range selector sensors. 16
26 Unplug the two PTO proportional or standard selector sensors. 17
27 Unplug the main cab fuse connector. 17

28 Unplug the trailer socket and the 25 A power socket. 17
29 Unplug the solenoid valves and the sensors on the hydraulic pack. 18
30 Disconnect the cables from the linkage adjustment knobs. 18
31 Raise the cab. 18
H1.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removing the cab
Important: Carry out this operation on a smooth horizontal and sufficiently firm surface. Check the axle stands are
suitable for the load. 4-wheel-drive tractor: If the rear axle is on stands, do not start the engine (risk of the tractor
moving). If the engine has to be started, the front axle must also be supported on axle stands.
Removal operations
Operation n° 1
– Remove the driver's seat.
– Remove the carpets and door sills.
– Remove the trim at the rear of the cab.
– Remove the battery cover after unscrewing the
4 screws (1).
843vfm00 Fig. 3
Operation n° 2
– Place the tractor on stands.
843vfm01 Fig. 4
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.5

Removing the cab
Operation n° 3
Disconnect the headlight electrical harness (2).
843vfm03 Fig. 5
Operation n° 4
– Remove the engine side covers. 40
– Move the attachment of the strut (3) to raise the engine
cover to its maximum. 3
843vfm04 Fig. 6
– Remove the 2 circlips (4) and then the 2 shafts (5).

– Remove the strut (3).
– Remove the engine cover (40).
843vfm05 Fig. 7
H1.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removing the cab
Operation n° 5
– Drain the refrigerant by connecting the collector unit to 6
connectors (6).
– Disconnect the refrigerant lines (7) from the
compressor.
N.B.: Depending on equipment fit, it may be possible
to omit the draining of the air conditioning system by
moving the compressor to one side.
843vfm06 Fig. 8
Operation n° 6
– Unplug the electrical harness (8). 9
– Move aside the brake fluid reservoir after unscrewing
the 2 screws (9).
843vfm07 Fig. 9
Operation n° 7
Identify and disconnect the water hoses (10) from the
heater unit. Use plugs to avoid draining the cooling circuit
(see chapter "A2").
10
843vfm08 Fig. 10
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.7

Removing the cab
Operation n° 8
– Remove the left cover of the instrument panel.
– Identify and disconnect cable (80) from spool valve
n° 1.
– Identify and disconnect cable (81), PTO selector.
– Identify and disconnect cable (82) from the mechanical
reverser (82) (depending on equipment fit).
– Identify and disconnect the clutch pedal cable (5) 5
80
82
81
872vfm00 Fig. 11
Operation n° 9
– Remove the right cover of the instrument panel.
– Identify and disconnect the spool valve cables.
– Identify and disconnect the mechanical doubler control
cable (84) (depending on equipment fit).
11
843vfm09 Fig. 12
Operation n° 10
– Remove the range and speed levers.
– Remove the handbrake grip.
843vfm10 Fig. 13
H1.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removing the cab
– Unplug the electrical connector (12) from the gear

selector lever (hydraulic doubler).
12
843vfm11 Fig. 14
Operation n° 11
– Remove the lever knobs.
– Remove the 4 attachment screws for the right hand 13
cover (13) located under the right wing.
– Remove the cover.
843vfm12 Fig. 15
– Unplug the electrical harnesses located behind the

right hand cover (13) for those tractors fitted with
a TCE 6 linkage. 13
843vfm13 Fig. 16
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.9

Removing the cab
Operation n° 12
System 1 and 3 hydraulic pumps
– Identify and disconnect the supply, backflow and return
lines (14) from the steering unit. 14
843vfm14 Fig. 17
System 2 hydraulic pumps

– Identify and disconnect the supply lines (78) on the left
hand side of the engine and backflow lines (79) on the
right hand side of the engine from the steering unit.
78
872vfm05 Fig. 18
79
872vfm06 Fig. 19
H1.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removing the cab
Operation n° 13
– Identify and disconnect the supply lines to the steering
actuator (15).
15
843vfm15 Fig. 20
Operation n° 14
– Identify and disconnect the two brake supply hoses
(16).
– Recover the brake fluid after unscrewing the reservoir
cap.
16
843vfm16 Fig. 21
Operation n° 15
– Disconnect the accelerator cable (17).
17
843vfm40 Fig. 22
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.11

Removing the cab
Installing the spreader bar

Important: The load must be lifted vertically. Before
lifting, check the state of the screws, especially the
threads, and check for distortion.
Operation n° 16 20 18
– Use spreader bar reference n° 77 01 388 907 (18) with
lifting kit reference n° 77 01 388 913 (19). A C
– Install the spreader bar (18).
As a safety measure, it is also advisable

to feed a strap inside the cab and attach it
to the lifting hook.
19
– Lock the supports (20) by inserting screws in holes
marked A and C (Fig. 24).
843vfm17 Fig. 23
Note: Before lifting the cab ensure that the
brackets (21) are firmly in contact with the front face
of the cab upright (Fig. 25).
955 1 000
A B C D
(675) (650)
843vfm18 Fig. 24
21
843vfm19 Fig. 25
H1.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removing the cab
– Position the attachment yoke (21) in the

support (22) so that it protrudes 40 mm.
22
21 40 mm
843vfm20 Fig. 26
– Confirm that the brackets (23) are correctly located

against the cab structure.
N.B.: Check that there is no interference with the light
unit located to the right in the cab.
23
843vfm21 Fig. 27
Operation n° 17
– Remove the 2 nuts (24) from the rear cab mounting
studs.
24
843vfm22 Fig. 28
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.13

Removing the cab
– Remove the 2 nuts (25) from the front cab mounting

studs.
Important: In all cases, the cab must be lifted slowly,
constantly checking that nothing remains to connect
the cab and the beam.
25
843vfm23 Fig. 29
Operation n° 18
Disconnect the position and force control operating
cables (85) (depending on equipment fit).
85
843vfm24 Fig. 30
Operation n° 19
– Unplug the neutral contactor (76), mechanical reverser
(depending on equipment fit). 76
– Unplug the gear ratio sensor (77).
77
843vfm25 Fig. 31
H1.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removing the cab
Operation n° 20
Clear away the accelerator cable (29).
29
843vfm26 Fig. 32
Operation n° 21
Identify and disconnect the cables (26) to the hydraulic
jack and stabiliser spool valves (depending on equipment
fit).
26
843vfm27 Fig. 33
Operation n° 22
Disconnect the control cable (27) for spool valve n° 2 at
the rear of the tractor.
27
843vfm28 Fig. 34
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.15

Removing the cab
Operation n° 23
– Remove the 2 screws (70) so as to be able to displace 73 70 72
the PTO clutch control spool valve unit.
– Disconnect the hand brake lever (71).
– Disconnect the hand brake sensor (72).
– Disconnect the earth lead (73).
71
843vfm29 Fig. 35
Operation n° 24
Identify and disconnect all electrical harnesses in the front
of the cab.
843vfm30 Fig. 36
Operation n° 25
Identify and unplug the 2 PTO rpm selector sensors (30)
30
843vfm31 Fig. 37
H1.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removing the cab
Operation n° 26
Identify and unplug the 2 PTO selector sensors (31)
(proportional or standard).
31
843vfm32 Fig. 38
Operation n° 27
Unplug the main cab fuse connector.
843vfm33 Fig. 39
Operation n° 28
– Remove the rear registration plate mount.
– Remove the trailer socket (33).
– Remove the 25 A power socket (34).
33
34
843vfm34 Fig. 40
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.17

Removing the cab
Operation n° 29
(right-hand side)
Unplug the solenoid valves and the sensors on the
hydraulic pack (depending on equipment fit).
843vfm35 Fig. 41
Operation n° 30
Disconnect the two cables (32) from the levers for
adjusting the linkage sensitivity and descent rate by
removing end cap (33) and cotter pin (34) (depending on
equipment fit).
32
34
33
843vfm43 Fig. 42
Operation n° 31
Important: Raising the cab must be done slowly,
checking continuously that nothing remains to
connect the cab and the beam.
– Fully raise the cab.
– Place the cab on blocks at the front and on stands at
the rear.
843vfm36 Fig. 43
H1.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removing the cab
Partial removal
Partial removal is possible by raising the rear of the cab in order to remove the linkage spool valve (mechanical version).
– Carry out operations n° 1 and 2 for cab removal.
– Install the spreader bar (operation n° 16).
– Remove the cab rear studs (operation n° 17).
– Slowly raise the cab (40 mm approximately at the rear).
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.19

Refitting the cab
Before tightening down the cab, make

sure that no hoses or cables are trapped.
Torque settings
24. 20 daN.m.
25. 20 daN.m. 24
Adjustments
For the main adjustments, refer to the relevant chapters
for the components concerned.
843vfm22 Fig. 44
25
843vfm23 Fig. 45
H1.20 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removing/refitting the roof
Complete removal of the roof

Removal
– Recover the refrigerant and drain the cooling system.
– Disconnect the heating and air conditioning pipes
(engine end).
– Remove the 2 screws (35) at the front of the roof.
– Remove the air intake grill at the back of the cab.
– Remove the 2 screws (36) at the back of the roof.
– Remove the trim from inside the cab.
– Disconnect the water drain tubes in the left and right
uprights.
– Disconnect all electrical harnesses that will remain with
the roof on removal.
35
– Move clear the air conditioning and coolant hoses.
843vfm37 Fig. 46
36
843vfm38 Fig. 47
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.21

Removing/refitting the roof
– Remove the roof (135 kg) using spreader bar reference

n° 77 01 388 907 with the addition of chains and hooks at
the ends, attached near the front and rear floodlights.
843vfm39 Fig. 48
Refitting
H1.22 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description of the platform
Identification Weight of the platform: About 150 kg.

Spreader bar reference nr 77 01 388 907.
For the location of the structure identification plates: Lifting kit reference 60 05 006 913.
– Type series N°.
– Certification N°. Safety measures
– Safety structure identification N°. Refer to the user To raise the platform, the hoist must be in full working
manual, chapter "A". order with sufficient height under the hook to clear the
platform completely.
Important: A safety structure damaged (distorted) as
– Position the tractor on flat and level ground.
the result of an accident, must never be repaired but
must be replaced. – Chock the wheels.
– Place warnings around the working area.
– Use a certified hoist in perfect working order.
Safety instructions
– Use only approved shackles and slings that are in good
condition.
Recommendations before raising
– Respect safety instructions. Wear protective gloves
Important: Lift the platform only with a spreader bar to and shoes.
avoid any risk of distorting the lifting points.
Forbidden Use spreader bar only
872vfm01 Fig. 49
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.23

Location of operations
20
2
14
11
6 13 27
3 7 8
26
23
20
14
15
5 18
16
4
17 24
25
12
9 10
19
22
21
841vfm01 Fig. 50
H1.24 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Summary of operations
Complete removal of the platform: Operations 1 to 27.
Operation Designation Pages
Disconnect the battery.

1 26
Remove the driver's seat.
2 Remove the rear wheels. 26
3 Remove the engine side covers. 27
4 Clear away the brake fluid reservoir. 27

5 – To spool valve n° 1 – To the mechanical reverser 27
– To the PTO selector – To the clutch pedal.
6 28
– To the spool valves – To the mechanical doubler control lever.
7 Remove the range, speed and handbrake selectors. 28

8 Disconnect the electrical harnesses from the TCE6. 29
9 Disconnect the lines from the steering unit. 29
10 Disconnect the steering actuator supply lines. 30
11 Disconnect the brake supply hoses. 31
12 Disconnect the accelerator cable. 31
13 Installing the spreader bar. 31
14 Remove the platform studs. 32
15 Disconnect the position and force control actuator cables. 33
Disconnect the neutral contactor, mechanical reverser.

16 33
Disconnect the gear ratio sensor.
17 Disconnect the cables for the hydraulic jack and stabiliser spool valves. 33
18 Disconnect the control cable for spool valve n° 2. 34
Move aside the PTO control spool valve unit. Disconnect:

– The handbrake lever
19 34
– The handbrake sensor
– The ground wire.
20 Disconnect all electrical harnesses in the front and under the wings. 34
21 Unplug the two PTO range selector sensors. 35
22 Unplug the two PTO proportional or standard selector sensors. 35
23 Disconnect the cables from the linkage adjustment knobs. 36
24 Unplug the trailer socket and the 25 A power socket. 36
25 Unplug the solenoid valves and the sensors on the hydraulic pack. 36
26 Remove the reinforcement. 37
27 Raise the platform. 37
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.25

Removal of the platform
Important: Carry out this operation on a smooth horizontal and sufficiently firm surface. Check the axle stands are
suitable for the load. 4-wheel-drive tractor: If the rear axle is on stands, do not start the engine (risk of the tractor
moving). If the engine has to be started, the front axle must also be supported on axle stands.
Removal operations
Operation n° 1
– Remove the driver's seat.
– Remove the battery cover after unscrewing the
6 screws (1).
872vfm02 Fig. 51
Operation n° 2
– Place the tractor on stands.
843vfm01 Fig. 52
H1.26 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Operation n° 3
Remove the engine side covers.
4
N.B.: To remove the engine cover (2), first lower the
roll bar (3) and remove the mount for the
indicators (4).
3
2
872vfm03 Fig. 53
Operation n° 4
– Unplug the electrical harness (8). 9
– Move aside the brake fluid reservoir after unscrewing
the 2 screws (9).
843vfm07 Fig. 54
Operation n° 5
– Remove the left cover of the instrument panel.
– Remove the two tunnel covers.
– Identify and disconnect cable (80) from spool valve
n° 1.
– Identify and disconnect cable (81), PTO selector.
– Identify and disconnect cable (82) from the mechanical
reverser (depending on equipment fit). 5
– Identify and unplug cable (5) from the clutch pedal 80
(depending on equipment fit). 82
81
872vfm00 Fig. 55
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.27

Operation n° 6
– Remove the right cover of the instrument panel.
– Identify and disconnect the cables (83) from the spool
valves.
– Identify and disconnect the mechanical doubler control
cable (84) (depending on equipment fit).
83
84
872vfm04 Fig. 56
Operation n° 7
– Remove the range and speed levers.
– Remove the handbrake grip.
843vfm10 Fig. 57
– Unplug the electrical connector (12) from the gear

selector lever (hydraulic doubler).
12
843vfm11 Fig. 58
H1.28 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Operation n° 8
– Remove the lever knobs.
– Remove the 4 attachment screws for the right hand 13
cover (13) located under the right wing.
– Remove the cover.
843vfm12 Fig. 59
– Unplug the electrical harnesses located behind the

right hand cover (13) for those tractors fitted with
a TCE6 linkage. 13
843vfm13 Fig. 60
Operation n° 9
System 1 and 3 hydraulic pumps
Identify and disconnect the supply, backflow and return
lines (14) from the steering unit. 14
843vfm14 Fig. 61
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.29

System 2 hydraulic pumps

Identify and disconnect the supply lines (78) on the left of
the engine and backflow lines (79) on the right of engine
from the steering unit.
78
872vfm05 Fig. 62
79
872vfm06 Fig. 63
Operation n° 10
Identify and disconnect the supply lines (15) from the
steering actuator.
15
872vfm07 Fig. 64
H1.30 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Operation n° 11
– Identify and disconnect the two brake supply hoses
(16).
– Recover the brake fluid after unscrewing the reservoir
cap.
16
843vfm16 Fig. 65
Operation n° 12
Disconnect the accelerator cable (29) from the
accelerator pedal.
29
843vfm26 Fig. 66
Installing the spreader bar

Important: The load must be lifted vertically. Before 18
lifting, check the state of the screws, especially the
threads, and check for distortion.
90
Operation n° 13
19
– Use spreader bar reference n° 77 01 388 907 (18) with
lifting kit reference n° 60 05 006 913 (19).
– Install the spreader bar (18).
– Lock the supports (90) by inserting screws in holes
marked A and D (Fig. 24).
872vfm08 Fig. 67
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.31

– Attach chains as shown in the diagram, at the rear to

the hand holds (20) and in front to the indicator
mounts (21).
N.B.: The mounts (screws) for the hand holds and the
indicator mounts must be in perfect condition.
21
20
872vfm09 Fig. 68
Operation n° 14
– Remove the 2 nuts (24) from the platform rear studs.
24
843vfm46 Fig. 69
– Remove the door sills and lift the carpets.

– Remove the 2 nuts (25) from the platform front studs.
Important: In all cases, the platform must be lifted
slowly, constantly checking that nothing remains to
connect the platform and the beam.
25
843vfm47 Fig. 70
H1.32 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Operation n° 15
Disconnect the position and force control operating
cables (85) (depending on equipment fit).
85
843vfm24 Fig. 71
Operation n° 16
– Disconnect the neutral contactor (76) from the
mechanical reverser (depending on equipment fit). 76
– Unplug the gear ratio sensor (77).
77
843vfm25 Fig. 72
Operation n° 17
Identify and disconnect the cables (26) to the hydraulic
jack and stabiliser spool valve (depending on equipment
fit).
26
843vfm27 Fig. 73
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.33

Operation n° 18
Disconnect the control cable (27) for spool valve n° 2 at
the rear of the tractor.
27
843vfm42 Fig. 74
Operation n° 19
– Remove the 2 screws (70) so as to be able to displace 73 70 72
the PTO clutch control spool valve unit.
– Disconnect the hand brake lever (71).
– Disconnect the hand brake sensor (72).
– Disconnect the earth lead (73).
71
843vfm29 Fig. 75
Operation n° 20
– Identify and disconnect all electrical harnesses at the
front of the platform.
843vfm48 Fig. 76
H1.34 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

– Disconnect the electrical harnesses under the rear

wings (depending on equipment fit).
843vfm49 Fig. 77
Operation n° 21
Identify and unplug the 2 PTO rpm selector sensors (30)
30
843vfm31 Fig. 78
Operation n° 22
Identify and unplug the 2 PTO selector sensors (31)
(proportional or standard).
31
843vfm32 Fig. 79
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.35

Operation n° 23
Disconnect the two cables (32) from the levers for
adjusting the linkage sensitivity and descent rate by
removing end cap (33) and cotter pin (34) (depending on
equipment fit).
32
34
33
843vfm43 Fig. 80
Operation n° 24
– Remove the rear registration plate mount. 33 34
– Remove the trailer socket (33).
– Remove the 25 A power socket (34).
843vfm44 Fig. 81
Operation n° 25
(right-hand side)
Unplug the solenoid valves and the sensors on the
hydraulic pack (depending on equipment fit).
843vfm35 Fig. 82
H1.36 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Operation n° 26
Remove the brace (60).
60
872vfm10 Fig. 83
Operation n° 27
Important: The platform must be lifted slowly,
constantly checking that nothing remains to connect
the platform and the beam.
– Raise the platform complete.
– Lower the platform onto blocks at the front and stands
at the rear..
872vfm11 Fig. 84
Partial removal
Partial removal is possible by lifting the rear of the
platform to remove the linkage spool valve (mechanical
version).
– Carry out platform removal operations n° 1 and 2.
– Remove the platform rear studs.
– Slowly lift the platform (about 40 mm at the rear) using
a strap.
843vfm50 Fig. 85
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H1.37

Refitting the platform
Before tightening down the platform,

ensure that no hoses or cables are
trapped.
24
Torque settings
24. 8 daN.m.
25. 8 daN.m.
Adjustments
For the main adjustments, refer to the relevant chapters
for the components concerned.
843vfm46 Fig. 86
25
843vfm47 Fig. 87
H1.38 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

H2
HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Characteristics
Heating system Pressure switch

The heating system consists of a heater radiator located This has 2 functions:
in the cab roof, an adjustment selector and a ventilation – Low pressure cut-off: This cuts out the compressor if
unit. the low pressure system pressure drops below 2 bar
System capacity (3-cylinder engine): 10 litres. – High pressure cut-off: It cuts off compressor operation
as soon as the pressure in the high pressure system
System capacity (4-cylinder engine): 13 litres. reaches 25 bar.
Coolant: Expansion valve
ELF GLACEOL RX GF type D This is a preset device which adjusts the fluid inlet rate
Protection temperature: –37°C. according to variations in compressor speed.
Evaporator
Cooling system R134a refrigerant in the liquid state flows through tubes.
System capacity: 800 g ± 5 %. Heat exchange takes place at the fins. The hot air cools
Refrigerant type: R134a (HFC134a). and loses its humidity. The R134a turns to gas and is
Oil: PAG SP 20 (reference n° 60 05 014 466). drawn back in by the compressor.
The air conditioning system consists of the following Mechanical thermostat
components: Trigger threshold:
Compressor – Maximum cold: 1°C
The compressor is delivered with an oil quantity of – Minimum cold: 4°C.
135 cm³.
Condenser
The condenser transfers the heat of the compressed
refrigerant gas into the ambient air. The refrigerant gas
then condenses to a liquid state.
De-humidifier
This component has three roles:
– To act as a refrigerant liquid buffer tank
– To filter the fluid flowing through the system
– To retain the humidity contained in the system.
We recommend replacing the dehumidifier during each
servicing operation.
H2.2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

General description
Diagram of operating principle
22
5 2
23
18 4
26
24 2
25
28
27
27
25
23
31 30
28
17
11 14
13
12
29 27
643vfm07 Fig. 1
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H2.3

General description

1 Cab air filter. 17 Compressor.
2 Thermostat. 18 Evaporator.
3 Heating/air conditioning unit. 19 Heater matrix.
4 Expansion valve. 20 Heater hoses.
5 Fan. 21 Water drain tubes.
6 Heater control. 22 Ambient air.
7 Fan control connector. 23 Low pressure liquid.
8 Control panel. 24 Cold air.
9 Fan selector. 25 Low pressure vapour.
10 Air temperature selector. 26 Condensation water flow.
11 Condenser fan. 27 High pressure liquid.
12 Condenser. 28 High pressure vapour.
13 De-humidifier tank. 29 Outside ambient air.
14 Pressure switch. 30 Pressure connector.
15 Cover plate. 31 Accumulator.
16 Air conditioning hoses.
H2.4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

General description
Component location
10
11
12
13
14
7
9
6
5
4
15
3
2
1
21
20
31
16
17
18
19
643vfm08 Fig. 2
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H2.5

Description and operation
Electrical schematic
90 294a 294b 210

M M M
P41 P42
J41 J42
A B A B
61 51
P14
J14
1 2 3 4 5 6
M3
119
2 1 3
P15
J15
M3
111
Fb 8/20 A
Fb 9/20 A
Fb 7/20 A
Fb 10/5 A
R2 R3 R4 95
J19
P19
+ APC + AVC
605vfm08
605vfm08 Fig. 3
H2.6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Description and operation
Nomenclature
51 Air conditioning selector.
61 Ventilation switch.
90 Fan.
95 Air conditioning compressor clutch.
119 Air conditioning electronic thermostat.
210 Air conditioning system high and low pressure switch.
294a Condenser fan.
294b Condenser fan.
Control panel
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H2.7

Safety instructions
What to do in case of contact with the refrigerant

Maintenance work on the air conditioning – Rinse with clear, cold water for *1 minutes (eyes also).
system must be carried out by an
– Seek medical advice as soon as possible.
authorised person who has received
relevant training. What to do when working on the air conditioning
system
– Wear gloves and goggles.
Welding and brazing on the air
– Work in an extremely clean environment.
conditioning system is prohibited
(ultraviolet rays can penetrate the system – Respect safety instructions.
and degrade the refrigerant). Carry out all – Use the exact quantity of refrigerant when filling the
maintenance work on the system in a well- system.
ventilated room (risk of suffocation).
R134a is the only refrigerant to be used. Do not use
any other.
Start up the gas extraction system in the room. As
refrigerants are colourless and odourless and as their – Use only the special oil recommended for topping up.
density is greater than that of air, never store them in Oil cans must be sealed properly after use.
shafts, pits, air stacks, etc.
H2.8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Gas charging and discharging
Drain points
They are located on the compressor (30) (Fig. 4). 30
The main operations to be performed using an air
conditioning servicing rig are given below. Refer to the air
conditioning servicing rig instructions for further details.
643vfm09 Fig. 4
Gas charging and discharging
Operations Actions Observations
1 Refrigerant recovery.
2 Oil recovery.
3 Tractor maintenance. Replace all removed gaskets.

Recycling carried out at the same time
4 Venting.
5 Sealing test.
6 Oil charging. Add the volume of oil recovered.
7 Refrigerant charging.
Use the leak detector or a lamp if using a tracer.

8 Leak finding.
If a leak is detected, go to 1.
9 Check operation.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H2.9

Removal/refitting
Important: If maintenance operations on the system are to be prolonged (over 15 minutes), plug all system
component orifices to prevent internal condensation and oxidation. This precaution is essential for the de-
humidifier cartridge.
Engine layout
Compressor (Fig. 5)
Nomenclature
41 Intake pipe.
42 Return line.
Cab layout
41
Air filter – Air conditioning (Fig. 2)
Exterior filter (front of the roof) (Fig. 6).
– Remove before cleaning.
– Clean carefully with pulsed air (frequent replacement
recommended).
42
643vfm10 Fig. 5
643vfm11 Fig. 6
H2.10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Removal of roof trim

– Remove the cab roof and place upside down on a 45 8 43
table (refer to chapter "H1").
– Remove the screws (44) around the trim.
– Disconnect the loudspeakers (43).
– Remove the air intake grill (45).
44
643vfm12 Fig. 7
– Remove the screw located behind the heater selector,

withdraw the control panel (8) and then disconnect the
electric cables (Fig. 8). 8
– Remove the trim.
643vfm13 Fig. 8
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H2.11

Removal/refitting
Removal of the expansion valve

The expansion valve (4) can be accessed without
removing the air conditioning unit.
– Remove the centre screw (47). 4
– Remove the clamp (48).
– Remove the air conditioning hoses.
48 47
643vfm14 Fig. 9

– Remove the expansion valve.
49
643vfm15 Fig. 10
Removing the thermostat

– Remove the 2 screws (70) and disconnect the
70
connectors (71) to enable the thermostat (2) to be
removed. 72
– Remove the evaoporator to enable the thermostatic
sensor (72) to be removed (see "Removal of the heating/
air conditioning unit").
2
71
643vfm16 Fig. 11
H2.12 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Removal of the fan

– Remove the mount for the heater cock (52) (Fig. 12).
– Remove the 8 fan attachment screws (51) (the
2 screws on either side of the fan also serve as
attachment for the evaporator).
– Disconnect the electrical supply.
– Withdraw the evaporator sensor.
N.B.: There is no need to remove the air conditioining
unit in order to remove the fan.
51
643vfm17 Fig. 12
Removing the heating/air conitioning

unit
– Remove the mount for the heater cock (52) .
– Remove the 4 screws (53) from the unit and the
2 screws (54) from the fan mount.
– Withdraw the entire unit with the hoses.
53
52
54
643vfm24 Fig. 13
Removing the evaporator and radiator

– Remove the fan .
– Remove the 13 screws (55) around the unit.
– Cut the seal using a knife to enable the 2 parts of the
unit to be separated (Fig. 14).
55
643vfm18 Fig. 14
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H2.13

Removal/refitting
Removal of the fan

– Remove the expansion valve (see "Removal of the
expansion valve").
– Remove the clamp (56).
– Remove the adhesive.
56
643vfm19 Fig. 15
– Withdraw the evaporator (18).

N.B.: The 2 screws on each side of the fan also serve
as attachment for the evaporator.
19
Removal of the radiator
– Remove the heater hoses (20) on each side of the
radiator (19).
– Remove the adhesive.
– Remove the radiator.
18
20
643vfm20 Fig. 16
H2.14 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Removal/refitting
Removing the de-humidifier,

condenser and fans
11
Removal of the fans
– Remove the fans (11) by withdrawing the
4 screws (60).
– Disconnect the electrical cables.
60
643vfm21 Fig. 17
Removal of the de-humidifier

– Remove the screw (61) from the mounting.
– Disconect the pipes (62).
– Disconnect the electrical wires from the pressure
switch (14).
62
– Remove the 2 collars (63) to release the de-humidifier
from its mounting. 61
63 14
643vfm22 Fig. 18
Removal of the condenser
– Remove the fans (11) (see "Removal of fans").
– Remove the 2 condenser attachment screws (64)
located under the fans.
64
643vfm23 Fig. 19
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H2.15

Removal/refitting
– Remove the 4 screws (65) and the 2 screws (66) to

enable the cover plate to be removed.
– Withdraw the condenser.
65
66
643vfm25 Fig. 20
Final steps – For correct operation of the air conditioning system, the
filter, evaporator and condenser must be as clean as
– All O-rings must be changed and lubricated during any
possible.
removal/refitting operation.
– To avoid thermal shocks and to ensure correct
operation of the air conditioning system, suitably lag all Refitting
couplings liable to cause a cooling loss (evaporator,
expansion valve, etc.). Refitting operations are the reverse of those used for
– Check the compressor oil level using the air dismantling.
conditioning servicing rig.
N.B.: When refitting the heating/air conditioning unit,
– Fill the refrigerant system. use a sealant cartridge reference n° 00 11 310 850.
Quantity of oil to be added when replacing components
Maintenance on AC system Quantity of oil to be added
Condenser replacement 25 ml
Evaporator replacement 20 ml
De-humidifier tank replacement 15 ml
Pipe replacement 30 ml
N.B.: Measure the amount of oil recovered during discharging using the air conditioning rig. During charging, add
the same abount of new oil plus the amount lost from the replaced component.
H2.16 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Checking air conditioning system

pressures
Test conditions
The pressure values given for this check are approximate.
+
– Clean air filter.
– Engine running at 2 200 rpm fully loaded (60 kW). V
– Fan at low speed.
– Selector on control panel set to maximum cold. 3
– System filled to 800 g. T
4 6
– Operating time prior to testing: 20 min (the mean
temperature in the cab should be 17 °C).
– No gas bubbles (to be checked on de-humidifier
indicator).
– Ambiant temperature (30 minutes stabilisation): 30°C.
643vfm26 Fig. 21
Record of test results

Low pressure: 0,8 ± 0,2 bar.
High pressure: 13 ± 1 bar.
Pulsed air temperature: 4 ± 2°C (at nozzle outlets).
Checking the thermostat

(Fig.21)
Check the triggering of the compressor and the fans at
terminals 3, 4, 6 (see "Characteristics to define trigger
thresholds").
Nomenclature
V Air conditioning selector button.
T Temperature.
Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB H2.17

Diagnostics
Table of symptoms
Low pressure High pressure Possible causes Remarks
Insufficient fluid quantity. Check for leaks.
– Low and high pressures

balance up very slowly when
Expansion valve jammed in
compressor is stopped.
"fully closed" position.
– Risk of ice: Expansion valve
outlet/evaporator inlet.
§
§
– Temperature difference
between filter inlet and outlet.
Saturated de-humidifier filter.
– Risk of ice at expansion valve
inlet.
Temperature difference
Partial flow restriction in the
upstream and downstream of
system.
the restriction.
The moisture condenses and

Moisture in the system. freezes in the expansion valve
(probably poor venting).
§
OK
Thermostat blocked in open Risk of heavy ice on the entire
position. evaprator.
OK © Air in the system. Probably poor venting.
Stretched or worn belt.

Worn clutch lining.
– Unsealed valves.
©
§
Worn compressor. – Seal between pistons and

liners.
Insufficient voltage supplied to Voltage drop (poor connections,

compressor. etc.).
– Blocked tubes.
Poorly cooled condensor.
– Fan drive.
© © Excessive fluid level.
– High and low pressures

OK
Expansion valve jammed in the balance very quickly when
"fully open" position. compressor is stopped.
– Risk of ice at compressor inlet.
Nomenclature
High
©
Low.
§
H2.18 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

Claas Nectis SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Claas Nectis SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

00 11 302 370 06.

D11 D12 D13

Lubricate Torque (daN.m)

Fixing and sealing products

Corresponding reference Application

Threaded assembly subject to vibration.

Suction lines. High-pressure lines.

Priming lines. Low-pressure/control lines.

Diameter (mm) Hardware class

4,6 6,8 8,8 10,9 12,9

3 0,05 0,08 0,12 0,17 0,2

9,53 8,4 3/8 - 24 2,5 3,5

Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

2 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

00 11 301 120 00 11 308 860

Cylinder compression tester. Front bearing seal extractor.

00 11 308 870 00 11 308 880

00 11 308 890 00 11 308 900

Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB 3

00 11 308 920 00 11 310 950

Top dead centre checking tool. Injection pump hub extractor.

00 11 313 970 00 11 314 010

Bearing cup insertion tool. Bush insertion tool.

00 11 314 020 00 11 314 030

4 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

00 11 314 040 00 11 314 050

Bush insertion tool. Seal insertion tool.

00 11 314 060 00 11 314 070

Seal insertion tool. Wrench for conical pinion nut.

00 11 314 090 00 11 314 100

Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB 5

00 11 314 110 00 11 314 120

Insertion tool for bearing cone. Bush insertion tool.

00 11 314 130 00 11 314 140

Seal insertion tool. Bearing cup insertion tool.

00 11 314 150 00 11 314 160

Bush insertion tool. Seal insertion tool.

6 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

00 11 314 170 00 11 314 190

Bush insertion tool. Insertion tool for cartridge seal.

00 11 314 200 00 11 314 210

Bush insertion tool. Insertion tool for cartridge seal.

00 11 314 220 00 11 314 230

Seal insertion tool. Seal insertion tool.

Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB 7

00 11 314 240 00 11 314 250

Bush insertion tool. Insertion tool for cartridge seal.

00 11 314 940 00 11 314 950

00 11 314 960 00 11 314 970

Clutchless reverser compression washer. Seal insertion sleeve.

8 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

00 11 314 980 00 11 315 000

00 11 315 020 00 11 315 030

00 11 315 040 00 11 315 050

Tool to measure bevel gear clearance. Differential bush insertion tool.

Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB 9

00 11 315 060 00 11 315 070

00 11 315 080 00 11 315 090

00 11 315 100 00 11 315 110

10 Nectis 207 – 12.2005 – GB

00 11 315 120 00 11 315 130

00 11 320 230 60 05 001 948

Installation tool for handbrake mechanism. Brake valve.